4|:

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD ANDBRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

‘vlndex (i)

SECTION 1 - GENERAL

101 Location anfi Extent of Site

102 Extent of Contract

103 Drawings

104 Programme

105 Order of Work

106 Submissions to the Engineer

10? Certificate of Completion

108 Method of Construction

109 Notice of Operations

110 Units of Measurement, Abbreviations and Terminology 1.3

111 National Specifications 1.5

112 other Contractors 1.7

113 Transport of workmen 1.7

114 Temporary Works 1.7

115 Construction Generally 1.7

116 Protection from Water 1.9

Health, Safety and Accidents 1.10

117

118 Preserfi ation and Maintenance — Fences and Gates 1.11

Use of Explosives 1.11

119

120 Protection of Existing Works and Services 1.11

121 Diversion of Services 1.12

Closure of Roads 1.12

122 v
123 Liaison with Government and Police Officials 1.12

124 Provision of Land 1.12

125 Water Supply 1.13

126 Materials and Manfi iactured Articles 1.13

Information from Exploratory Boring and Test Pits 1.14

127

Storage of Materials and Manufactured Articles 1.14

128

Test Certificates 1.14

129

Progress Photographs 1.14

130

_. -. -_ _. _;.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FORROAD AND BRIDGE CQNSTRUCTION
i
Index . . (ii)
b

1.15
131 Signboards

132 Housing Accommodation for the Engineer and his Staff,

_Offices and Laboratories for the Engineer with
Laboratory and Survey Equipment and Furniture 1.15

133 Time for Erection of the Engineer's Staff Houses,

Offices and Laboratories _ 1.15

134 Insurance and Ownership of the Engineer's Staff Houses,

Offices, Laboratories, Furniture and Equipment 1.15

135 .Maintenance of the Engineer's Staff Houses,

Offices, Laboratories, Furniture and Equipment 1.16

Remove} of Camps 1.16

136
Attenéance upon the Resident Engineer and his Staff 1.16
137
138 Provision’ of, Vehicles 1. 17
139 Miscellaneous Accounts I 1.17
' 1.1?
140 Payment of Overtime for Engineer's Junior Staff
1.18
141 Measurement and Payment
1.22

SECTION 2 - MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS

Scope of Section 2.1

201
2.1
202 Testing by the Contractor
2.1
203 Acceptance Standards of Materials
2.1
204 Sieves
2.2
205 Soils and Gravels
’ 2.4
206 Stone, Aggregate, Sand and Filler
' 2.?
207 Cement
2.7
208 Lime

Cement or Lime Treated Materials 2.7

209
2.9
210 Concrete
2.11
211 Bituminous Binders
2.14
212 Bituminous Mixes
2.14
213 Reinforcing Steel _
2.14
214 Prestressing Steel
i 2.15
215 Concrete Eipes and Fittings
2.15
216 Metal Pipes and Arches
2.16
217 Paints for Structures
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FDR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

Index (iii)

'
218 Paint for Road Marking _ 2.16

219 ‘Hot-applied Thermoplastic Material for Road Marking 2.18

220 ‘Reflective Materials on Road Signs 2.18

221 Colours for Road Signs 22.21

222 Waterproof Paper’ 2.21

223 Galvanized Coatings 2.22

224 Trials to Confirm Compliance with Specifications 2.22

225 Construction Control Testing for Earthwork Layers,

Pavement Layers and Backfill to Drainage Works and
Structures 2.24

226 Frequency of Testing 2.25

227 Measurement and Payment 2.29

SECTION 3 ~ SETTING OUT AND TOLERANCES

301 Setting Out 3.1

302 Tolerances 3.2

303 Rectification of Earthwork and Pavement Layers Outside

Permitted Tolerances 3.4

304 Measurement and Payment 3.6

SECTION 4 - SITE CLEARANCE AND TOPSOIL STRIPPING

401 Site Clearance 4.1

402 Removal of Topsoil , 4.2

403 Removal of Structures, Fences and Obstructions 4.2

Protection of Fences, Trees, Hedges, etc. 4.2

404

405 Measurement and Payment 4.3

SECTION 5 ~-EARTHWORKS

Scope of Section 5.1

501

502 General 5:1

503 Classification of Material 5~1

504 Preparation Prior to Forming Embankments 5«E

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND. BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

Index (iv)

505 Construction of Embankments 5.3

506 Swamps -
5,4
507 Rockfill to Sfi amps - 5.4
508 Compaction of Earthwo' 5.5
I
:
509 Mass Haul Diagram 5.6
510 Spoil Material : 5.7
511 Borrow Pits 5.7
512 - Proofrolling
5.7
.513 Trimrng of Slope; 5.8
514 Topsoiling and Grasslnu ' 5.8
515 Side Drains 5.8
516 Treated Materiais 5.9
I
51? Measurement and Payment ' -
5.9
5.14

SECTION 6 - QUARRIES, BORROW FITS, STOCKPILES AND SPOIL AREAS

601 General 6.1

602 Definitions 6.1
A
603 Provision of Land 6.2
‘
fig.
604 Entry upon Land 6.4
605 Safety and ?ublic_Health Requirements
M‘ _ 6.4
606 Access Roads and Traffic Control V 06.5
_K
607 Site Clearance and Removal of Topsoil and ,X_
' A
Overburden - 2 6,5
608 Mixing, Selecting and Stockpiling of MateriaFN E 6.5
609 Material Utilization’
fi in-rmI.|I—p:
610 Measurement and Payment f 6.6

g 6.7
_ng'l-.uI,'.»-J’.;0-I

/’
SECTION "E « T3-?I{C£%.VA'l‘ZOE.\'I am: 31;;-'..::-ms;

I
701 Scope of Section 7,1
702 Classification of Excavation 7.1
703 Excavation of Foundations for Structures _ 7.1
 '
STANDARD SPECIHCATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

Index_ (V)

7.1
704 Excavations to be Kept Dry
Foundations and Abutments Cast against In~situ Material 7.2
705
Surplus Excavated an8 Backfilling Materials 7.2
706
Filling for Structures 7.2
707 Backfilling of Excavations and
-
Protection of Structnres 7.3
708
Excavations for River Training and New watercourses 7.3
709
710 Stone Pitching 7.3
7.4
711 Gabions

Ripvrap 7.5
712

Measurement and Payment 7.6

713
7.10

SECTION 8 -4 CULVERT AND DRAINAGE wears

801 Scope of Section ?8.1

8.1
802 Order of Works

Classification of Excavation 8.2

803
Excavation for Culverts and Drainage Works 8.2
804
Excavation in Hard Material 8.3
805

‘Water in Excavation 8.4

806
8.4
807 Concrete Pipes
Corrugated Metal Pipes and Arches 8.4
808
8.4
809 Bedding ané Laying of Pipe Culverts
Jointing.Cohcrete Pipes 8.6
810
Concrete Beds Surrounds and Haunches 8.7
811
8.8
812 Backfill

813 Half Round Concrete 0hanne1s 8.9

subsoil Drains 8.10
814
8.10
815 Protection Work

Minor Drainage Structures 8.11

816
817 Mitre Drains, Cut~o”f Drains, Side Drains, Culvert
8.11
Cutfall Drains and Earth Drains
8.11
818 Scour Checks

Cleaning and Maintenance 8.13

819
820 Measurement anfi Payment 8.13
is
L.-.-—
3.19
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOFI ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION .
- . -:.4v_, J

Index (v;)

SECTION 9 -- PASSAGE OF TRAFFIC

901 Scope of the Section 9.1

902 Improvements to Existing Roads 9.1
903 Maintenance of Existing Roads 9.2
'
904 Construction of Deviations 9.2
905 Maintenance of Deviations 9.5
I
906 Passage of Traffic through the Works 9.5
907 Signs, Barriers and Lights 9.5
908 Diversion of Access onto New Construction 9.6
909 Assistance to Public . 9.8
910 Access Roads 9.8
911 Contractoris Construction Traffic 9.9
912 Measurement and Payment 9.10

9.13

SECTION 10 -- GRAVEL WEARING COURSE

1001 General 10.1

1002 Classification of Material 10.1
1003 Material Reguirements 10.2
1004 Order of work 10.2
1005 Preparation of Formation 10.3
V
l006_ Setting Out 10.3
1007 Laying and Compacting Gravel Wearing Course 10.3
1008 Proofrolling 10.4
1009 Tolerances 10-4 .Fo.-ulna)- a-w

1010 Maintenance 10.4 '_.’ '3

'--
‘
1011 Measurement and Payment 10.4
-
-I;-7'-7-‘rn|V!‘v.."“ :I ‘-

10.6

V
SECTION 13. - SHOULDERS TO PAVEMENT

1101 Definitions llal

 STANDARD SPECHCATION FOR ROAD /i\i\.!D BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

Index (vii)

Material for Construction of Shoulders 11.1

1102

1103 Construction of Shoulders 11.1

1104 Setting Out and Tolerances 11.1

Surface Treatment of Shoulders 11.1
1105 '
1106 Measurement and Payment 11.2

; SECTION 12 - NATURAL MATERIAL SUBBASE AND BASE

1201 General 12.1

1202 Classification Material 12.1

Material Requirements 12.2

1203

1204 Laying and Comnacting 12.4

1205 Proofrolling 12.5

Setting Out and Tolerances 12.5

1206

Drainage of Subgrade, Subbase and Base layers 12.6

1207
Treated Materials 12.6
1208
12.6
1209 Measurement and Payment
12.7

\SECTION 13 " GRADED CRUSHED STONE SUBBASE AND BASE

130 1 Definitione 13 . 1
13.1
1302 Sources of Material
13.1
1303 Material Requirements

Crushing. Screening and Mixing 13.3

1304
Transporting Graded Crushed stone 13.4
1305
Laying and Compacting Graded Crushed Subbase and Base 13.4
1306
Proofrolling 13.5
1307
1308 Setting out and Tolerances 13.5

Treated Materials 13.5

1309

fleasurement and ?ayment 13.5

1310

E - CEMENT AND LIME TREATED SUBGRADE, SUBBASE AND BASE_

SECTION ii

1401 Scope of Section l4«l

' T4. 1
1402 r? H=reria1s
 STANDARD SPECIHCATION FORIROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

Index (viii)

1403 Material Requirements 14.1

1404 Amount of Stabilizer to be Added 14.2
1405 Mix—in-Place Method of Construction 14.2
1406 Stationery Plant Method of Construction 14.4
-
1407 Compaction and Finishing 14.5
1408 Joints between New and Existing Work 14.5
1409 "Protection and Curing 14.6
1410 Traffic 14.?
14i1_ Tolerances 14.7
1412 Measurement and Payment 14.8

14.9

SECTION'l4A - LEAN CONCRETE

14A/01 Scope of Section l4A.l

14A/02 Source of Materials l4A.l

14A/03 Materials Requirements l4A.l

l4A/O4 Mix Requirements l4A.2
14A/05 Method of Construction l4A.3
14A/G6 Traffic l4A.4
14A/O7 Setting Out and Tolerances l4A.5
14A/D8 Measurement and Payment l4A.S

SECTION l5 "- BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSINGS

1301' Scope of Section 15.1

Part A - General

1501A Scope of Part A 15.2

iS02A Bituminous Binder Specifications 15 2
1503A Bituminous Binder Storage and Handling *5 4
1504A Heating of Bituminous Binder l5~2
1505A Adhesion Agent 15.4
. .
=i‘.-.43:
1506A Construction Limitations l5»4
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

(ix)
Index

15.4
1507A Safety Prebautions
15.4
1508A Measurement and Payment

Part B — Prime Coat and Tack Coat 5

_15. 5
150113 Definitions
15.5
1502B Materials for Prime Coat and Tack Coat
15.5
15033 Preparation of Surface
15.6
15043 Spraying of Prime Coat and Tack Coat
15.7
n
15053 Curing and Blinding of Prime Coat
' 15.7
I_-. . -. _. ._V 15063 Tolerances
15.?
1507B Measurement and Payment

Part C « Surface Dressing

-[ 5 15 . 8
15010 Definitions
. 15.8
1502C Materials for Surface Dressing
15.9
1503C Rate of Application of Binder and Chippings

1504C Crushing, Screening, Washing and Stockpiling 15.9

Chippings
15.10
1505C Precoated Chippings
15.10
1506C Construction Plant for Surface Dressing
I
15.12
15070 Preparation of Surface
15.12
1508C Application of Surface Dressing
15.13
1509C Aftercare and Control of Traffic
I 15.13
15100 Tolerances
15.14
1511C Measurement and Payment 5
.- _ .- ~

Part D M Sanfl Seal

15.15
l50lD Definition fififlfi
15.15
1502D Material for Sand Seal
Aggregate 15.15
15030 Rate of Application of Binder and Fine Efififi
15.16
1S04D Construction
15.16 '5”
15059 Aftercare and Control of Traffic
15.16
1S06D Tolerances
l5~l5
1507D Measurement and Payment
15.17
 4 STANDARD SDECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

Index (x)

Part E — Gravel Seal

l5UlE Definition 15.18

1502E Material for Gravel Seal 15.18

1503E Rate of Application of Binder and Aggregate 15.19

A
1504E Construction 15.19

1505}: Aftercare and Traffic Control 15.19

1506E Tolerances 15.19

15D7E Measurement and Payment 15.19

15.20’
Part F — Emulsion Slurry Seal

1501F Definition 15.21

1502;‘ Materials for siurryvseal 15.21

1503F Preparation of the Slurry Mixture 15.22

1504F Rate of Application of Slurry Mixture 15.22

l505F Construction 15.22

l506F Curing and Control of Traffic 15.23

l5U7F Tolerances 15.23

l50BF Measurement and Payment 15.23

D
15.24

SECTION 16 -* BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES

1601 Scope of Seotion 16.1

Part A - Geheral

1601A Scope of Part A 16.2

1602A Requirements from other Sections 16.2

1603A Construction Plant 16.2

1604A Preparation of Surface 16.3

1605A Design and Working Mixes 16.3

1606A Site Triais to Confirm Compiiance with Specifications 15.4

1607A Mixing of Aggregates and Bitumen 15.6

1608A Transporting the Mixture 16.6

1609A Laying the Mixture l6o6

1610A Compaction l6«5

 STANDARD SPECHCATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION:

olndex (xi)

1611A Finishing, Joints and Edges" 16.7

1612A Sampling and Testing of Bituminous Mixtures 16.8

1613A Quality Control Testing 16.8

1614A Tolerances 16.8

1615A Measurement and Payment 16.9

Part B e Asphalt Concrete For Surfacing

_—-. . . _. .‘I
1601B Definition 16.10
5‘
.
1602B Materials for Asphalt Concrete 16.10
7.. . .
_- 16033 Grading Requirements 16.12

16043 Requirements for Asphalt Concrete 16.12

16053 Mixing and Laying Asphalt Concrete 16.12

16063 Compaction 16.12

16073 Measurement and Payment 16.13

I
.16.14

Part C — Dense Bitumen Macadam for Base

1601C Definition 16.15

1602C Materials Requirements 16.15

1603C Grading Requirements for Dense Bitumen Macadam '16.16

' 16.16
1604C Requirements for Dense Bitumen Macadam
16050 Mixing and Laying Dense Bitumen Macadam 16.17

16060 Compaction 16.17

16070 ‘Sealing of Dense Bitumen Macadam 16.17

1608C Measurement and Payment 16.1?

16.19

Part D ~ Cold Asphalt for Surfacing, Base,

Levelling Course and Patching
l60lD Definition 16.20

1602D Materials for Cold Asphalt 16.20

16030 Grading Requirements for Cold Asphalt 16.2-

l6G4D Requirements for Cold Asphalt 16.21

16058 Mixing and Laying Cold Asphalt 16.21

1606B Compaction 16.22

16070 Measurement and ?ayment l6~23

"! .--' "'1
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRlDGE_CONSTRUCTlON

Index (xii)

SECTION 17 - CONCRETE WORKS

3_:
1701 Scope of Section 17.1 J

1702 Definitions 17.1

1703 Materials for Concrete 17.1
1704 The Design of Concrete Mixes 17.8
1705 Mixing Concrete 17.15
1706 Hand Mixeo Concrete 17.17
1707 Transport of Concrete
17.17
1708 Placing of Concrete 17.17
1709 Compaction of Concrete 17.21
1710 Curing of Concrete 17.21
1711 Protection of Fresh Concrete 17.23
I I
1712 Concreting in Hot Weather 17.24
1713 V Finishes on Unformed Surfaces 17.25
1714 Mortar 17.26
1715 Concrete for Secondary Purposes 17.27
1716 Records of Concrete Placing 17.28
1717 Construction Joints 17.28
1718 Expansion and Contraction Joints 17.29
1719 Waterstops 17.29
1720 Grouting of Pockets and Holes and Underpinning
of Baseplates 17.30
1721 Formwork for Concrete 17.31
1722 _ Construction of Formwork and Falsework 17.31
1723 Preparation of Eormwork 17.32
1724 Removal of Formwork _ 17.33
1725 Surface Finishes 17.34
1726 Tolerances 17.36
1727 Remedial Work to Defective Surfaces 17.37
.1.'45
1728 Reinforcement for Concrete 17.37
1729 Storage of Reinforcement 17.38
1730 Bending Reinforcement 17.38
1731 Fixing Reinforcement 17.38
1732 Precast Concrete f7.40
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

Index (xiii)

vl?33 Formwork for Precast Units 17.408

1734 Reinforcement for Precast Units 17.40

1735 Casting qf Units 17.40

1736 Curing precast t_1nit 17.41

1737 Dimensional tolerances of Precast Units 17.41

1738 Surface Finish of Precast Units 17.41

1739 Handling and Storage of Precast Units 17.41

1740 Testing Precast Units 17.42

1741 Measurement and Payment‘ 17.43

17.47

SECTION 18 - PRES-TRESSED CONCRETE WORKS

1801 Scope of Section 18.1

1802 General 18.1

1803 Ducting 18.1

1804 Anchorages 18.1

1805 Pres-tressing Tendons 18.2

1806 Installation of Prestressing Tendons 18.2
,
1807 Jacks for Prestressing 18.3

1808 Tensioning Operations 18.3

1809 Post-Tensioning 18.3

1810 Pre—tensioning 18.4

1811 Bonding and Grouting 18.4

1812 Camber of Prestressed Precast Beams 1836

1813 Rejection of Prestressed Work 18.6

1814 Transport and Storage of Erestressed Units 18.?

1815 Jointing Precast Units 18.6

1816 Testing Prestressed Work 18.7

1817 Measurement and Payment 18.?

18.8

SECTION 1.9 —' STRUCTURAL STEELWORIC

1901 General 19°}

1902 A_p_p1;;.~,ab.1_ :3~;.;-.m:1a.-rag 19»l

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
Index . (xiv)

1903 Materials - 19.2

1904 V Storage of Materials ' 19.2
0.
1905 Fabrication 19.2
1906 Preparation of Edges and Ends of Plates '19.2
‘
1907 Welding 19.3
0 7
1900 Bolting 19.5
1909 Transportation Handling and Erection 19.7
1910 Surface Preparation of Steelwork 19.7
1911 Painting 19.8
'
1912 Paint Systems 19.9
I
1913 Damaged Surfaces 19.9
1914 Measurement anfi Payment 19.9

19.10

SECTIONS 20 - ROAD FURNITURE

2001 Road Reserve Boundary Posts '

20.1
2002 Fencing and Gates 20.1
2003 Edge Marker Posts 20.1
2004 Permanent Road Signs 20.2
2005 Road Marking ~ 20.3 5
2006 Guardrails 20.4 E
2007 Kerbs 20.6 ggé
I
2008 Kilometre Marker.POsts 20.6
2009 Rumble Strips . 20.6 F0;
2010 Trees ' 20.0 £1;
2011 Measurement and Payment ‘ 20.7 $5?
.20.10 %§_
fip.
SECTION 21 - MISCELLANEOUS BRIDGE WORKS $3

2101 Waterproofing to Structures 21.1 E}

2102 Bridge Bearings 21.1
‘

2103 Movement Joints and Sealants 21.2

;}:_._r_‘.'

'.~....s2

. ,_,_,._ _
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

Index (xv)

Pipe Handrail to Bridges 21.4

2104

Guardxails to Bridges 21.4

2105

2106 Surfacing to Bridges 2l.4_

2107 Weepholes 21.4

Measurement and Payment 21.5

2108
21.6

SECTION 22 - DAYWORKS

General 22.1
2201
22.1
2202 Measurement and Payment
22.2
SECHON l
QENERM.
-

. ._. . .M. —

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL Page l.l

lDl LOCATION AND EXTENT OF SITE

The location of the Site is described in the Special Specification.

The Site of ‘the Works shall be the area within the various road
reserves, quarries, borrow pits, spoil areas, access roads and
deviations, Contractor's installations, storage areas, camp sites,
Engineer's offices, laboratories and accommodation, shown ‘on the
Drawings or established specifically for the Contract with the
‘
approval of the Engineer;

102 "EXTENT OF CONTRACT

The extent of the Contract is defined in the Special Specification.

\

103 DRAWINGS

The Drawings referred’ to in ‘the Conditions- of Contract are those

listed in the Special Specification and such further drawings as
shall be supplied under the Contract.

104 PROGRAMME

In accordance with Clause 14 of the Conditions of Contract Parts I

and II, the Contractor shall submit a fully detailed and time related
programme showing the order of procedure and method in which he
proposes to carry out the Works. The Contractor shall supply
together with his programme an expenditure chart superimposed on it
showing his monthly anticipated expenditure.

If at any time it should appear to the Engineer that the actual

progress of the Works does not conform to the programme referred to
above, the Contractor shall produce, at the request of the Engineer,
a revised programme showing the modifications to the approved
programme necessary to ensure completion of the Works within the time
for completion as defined in Clause 43 of the Conditions of Contract,

105 ORDER OF WORK

The various operations pertaining to the Works shall be carried out

in such a progressive sequence, as will achieve a continuous and
consecutive output of fully completed roadworks inclusive of all
bridge works and culverts within the time limits specified in the
Contract. Generally the Contractor shall start at one end of the
road and progress continuously towards the other without leaving any
isolated section or sections of incomplete road, provided always
that the land upon which the Works are to be constructed has been
acquired in its entirety and the encumbrances and services thereon
removed.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

?
GENERAL _ . Page 1. 2

l06 SUBMISSIONS TO THE ENGINEER

Wherever the Contractor is required to submit to the Engineer

proposals, details, drawings, Calculations, information, literature,
materials, test reports and certificates, the Engineer will consider
each submission and, if appropriate, will reply to the Contractor in
accordance with the relevant provisions of the Conditions of
Contract. Unless a defined _period of time is stated in this
Specification or the Special Specification, each submission shall be
made by dates to be agreed with the Engineer having regard to the
approved programme and the need to give the Engineer adequate time to
consider each submission.
Wfl

Documents submitted, other than drawings and manufacturers‘

literature, shall be A4 in size. All documents shall be in English
and any abbreviations shall be explained. All calculations and
,;:.r:.»":;.'~.:-.C3
technical information shall be in units conforming to the Systems
'
International d'Unites (SI).

All drawings shall be Al in size to the ink border. Notes shall be -F&'56"£

in English. All dimensions shall be in metres or millimetres and all

weights in metric units.
;fl:TU£K%
All drawings shall include the title of the Contract at the bottom of
the drawing followed by the title of the drawing concerned. All
drawings shall have the appropriate scales drawn on them and be
fiv"-\«'4’=3T‘v2u
dated. All amendments to drawings shall be noted and dated.

The approval of the Engineer of any submission shall not relieve the
Contractor from his responsibilities under the Contract. F?/v"-‘3-' 3" ‘§.

107 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION Eli},

The minimum length of road for which a Certificate of Completion will

be issued under Clause 48 of the Conditions of Contract shall be
specified in the Special Specification.

In addition to the above, a Certificate of Completion will not be

issued for a section road unless it can conveniently be opened to the
public without the necessity to construct additional detour roads and
all works within the section are complete with the exception of the
following which may be completed during the Period of Maintenance.
!;_. -—.' -:4.-. r
(a) Surface dressing to accesses and junctions.

(b) Reinstatement of borrow pits and quarries.

(cfi Grouted stone pitching; {except where specified in side drains}

(d) Reinstatement of deviations.

(ej Erection or ilformatory Signs”

,—\ F11 Erection of kilometre marker posts.

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL Page .1 . 3

108 METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer not later than 28 days
from the date of award of the Contract a general description of his
proposed arrangements and methods for the execution of the Works,
including inter alia temporary offices, buildings, access roads,
deviations, Constructional Plant and its intended production output,
working shift arrangements, labour strength, skilled and unskilled
and supervision arrangements, power arrangements, supply of
materials, stone crushing, aggregate production and storage, cement
handling, concrete mixing and handling, methods of excavation,
'
dealing with water, testing methods and facilities.

During the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall also submit
to the Engineer full and detailed particulars of any proposed
amendments to the arrangements and methods submitted in accordance
with the foregoing.

The Engineer's normal working hours shall be defined as 7.00 a.m to

5.00 p.m on weekdays with Saturdays and Sundays set aside for rest.
If the Contractor wishes to execute permanent Works outside these
hours, he shall obtain the written permission of the Engineer at
least one full working day in advance to enable the Engineer to make
provision for supervision of such work.

109 NOTICE OF OPERATIONS

No operation shall be carried out without full and complete notice

having been given to the Engineer by the Contractor sufficiently in
advance of the time of the operation to enable the Engineer to make
such arrangements as he may deem necessary for its inspection and
checking.

The Contractor shall give the Engineer not less than 1 full working
days notice in writing of his intention to set out or give levels for
any part of ‘the Works in order that arrangements may be made for
checking.

110 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT, ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

fa) Units of measurement

Symbols for units of measurement conform to the SI system as set

out in BS 5775 (ISO 31/l.) Examples are given below.

Where reference is made in the documents to imperial units, the

equivalent metric units shall be substituted.

p micron = m x l0"5
mm millimetre
m metre
km kilometre
n mile nautical mile
mm‘ square millimetre
 %

fig

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

I. :
-\\'n‘|
Q
GENERAL Page 1.4-

square metre
square kilometre
hectare
cubic metre
litre
radian
degrees Celsius
kilogram
gram = kg x l0"3
m9 milligram = kg X l0"6
mg/1 milligrams per litre
t tonne = kg x 103
kg/m3 kilogram.per cubic metre
t/m3 tonnes.per cubic metre
N newton
N/m2 newton per square metre

b) Abbreviations

The following abbreviations are used:

ACV Aggregate Crushing Value

AIV Aggregate Impact Value
ALD Average Least Dimension
BA Bitumen Affinity
CBR California Bearing Ratio
CR Crushing Ratio
FI Flakiness Index
LAB Los Angeles Abrasion Value
LL Liquid Limit
Linear Shrinkage
Moisture Content
Maximum Dry Density
Optimum Moisture Content
Plasticity Index
Plastic Limit
Plasticity Modulus (PI x % passing 0.425mm
"
sieve)
Sand Equivalent
_Specifio Gravity
International Standard Units of Measurements
Sodium Sulphate Soundness Test,
loss on 5 cycles
Standard Tar Viscosity
Tensile Strength
Uniformity Coefficient
UCS Unconfined Compressive Strength
VIM Voids in Mix
VMA Voids in Mineral Aggregates
OPC Ordinary Portland Cement
no. Number (units) as in 6 nor
No. Number (order) as in No 6:
w/C Water cement (ratio)
wt Weight
Percent
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL Page ' 1.5

dia _ Diameter
hr Hour
min Minute
sec Second

(c) Terminology

The most important terms related to the cross~section and

pavement are shown in Figure 1-1 and Figure l—2:

111 NATIONAL SPECIFICATIONS

Certain specifications issued by national or other widely recognised

bodies are referred to in this Specification and in the Special
Specification. Such specifications shall be defined and referred to
as National Specifications- as hereunder and shall be the latest
editions of such National Specifications available twenty eight days
prior to the date set for the submission of Tenders.

The Contractor may propose that the materials and workmanship be

defined in accordance with the requirements of other equivalent
National Specifications and the Contractor may execute the -Works in
accordance with such other National Specifications as may be approved
by the Engineer. A copy of the National Specification, together with
its translation into the English language if the National
Specification is in another language, shall be submitted to the
Engineer with any request that it be adopted.

In referring to National Specifications the following abbreviations

are used:«

KS : Kenya Bureau of Standards

Materials Branch MOTC Materials Branch of the Kenya

' Ministry of Transport and
Communications

BS British Standard

'
BSCP or CF British Standard Code of Practice

AASHTO American Association- of State

Highway and Transportation
Officials

ASTM ' American Society of Testing and

{ Materials

ISO International Organisation for

Standardization

The Contractor shall supply and maintain in his office on the Site at
least one complete set of all National Specifications referred to in
this Specification and all other approved Specifications“ This set
shall be made available for use by the Engineer»
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
I
GENERAL - - Pagé l«5

Construction width (varies)

as»: 3:

Existing
ground

‘E2:-.5"

--‘
29142-'

.—. s:
5 3‘ .;
-
3 '3I...
E at I... g 3 U
3 Q “ D1 13 L" o m 0 ”°'
‘—' -—' 13 "' .2: "
-33
3-; E " -U
‘E5 U
:2 -'6‘ 4» W n E “ 3
I
835 E E E B 4: E '5 3 U 5 3
to u. as u no In U~....- in U 0

FIGURE l~l

Ex-J’-L13:

sf

Upper
. - as ho“ I fie r
I?-':'-'.\:4-!'-‘l .’-i

Wearing course-—, —T--—----1 Lowm. -El-—

Binder course -““*—'-'—"'"“" I O’ 0 shoulder
‘*"— . O D O 0 0 E.
Base 0 O O D O 0 Q’ fiL}:;','€:i:.‘-.462:.': ?-. 'v
0 O 0 0 0 0°13 E
. - 3
_ __'_. .
Sub—bu5e ~-"- \
\ .::'.
Formation ,_:‘v,':_z_,f_.' :'.,v:4.-

; ,7 /42 _/ / {/
if
x
45.u bgrczde:

n5

FIGURE IL“-.2
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL Page l.7

ll2 OTHER CONTRACTORS

5

The Contractor is advised that other contractors employed by the

Employer and employees of the Employer may be working in connection
with the Project on and around the Site. '

Pursuant to Clause 31 of the Conditions of Contract the Contractor

shall not interfere in any way with any works, whether the property
of the Employer or of a third party and whether the position of such
works is indicated to the Contractor by the Engineer or not, except
where such interference is specifically described as part of the
Works either in the Contract or by the Engineer's instruction. The
Contractor shall respect any works executed by others and articles
supplied or installed by others and will be held responsible for any
loss or damage thereto if caused by him, his employees or his
sub-contractors.

ll3 TRANSPORT OF WORKMEN

The Contractor shall include in his rates and prices for all
transport of staff and workmen to and from the various parts of and
upon or in connection with the Works and all costs incurred in
securing, recruiting and transporting labour to and from the Site.

ll4 .TEMPORARY WORKS

After the Contract is placed and before work commences the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer drawings showing the general arrangement
of his Temporary Works with diagrams and descriptions showing how he
proposes to execute such Temporary Works and how they fit into his
programme for the Permanent Works, all to be subject to adjustment
and approval by the Engineer. The whole of the Temporary Works and
the plant and appliances used, will be the liability of the
Contractor in regard to their construction, sufficiency, safety,
maintenance and removal on completion of the Contract and approval by
the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his liability.

ll5 CONSTRUCTION GENERALLY ‘

_

The following general requirements shall apply:*

(a) The Contractor shall provide adequate lightifig where work is

being executed at night and shall provide band install any
additional lighting which the Engineer may requifie in order to
gain access to, watch and supervise the Works and carry out any
testing and examination of materials.

{b} Materials available on the Site or materials made available or

supplied by the Emoloyer shall be used solely for the execution
of the Works.

{c} The Contractor shall minimise the pollution of and disturbance

to lands, roads and other places on and around the Site. No
trees or other vegetation shall be removed except to the extent

necessary for the Works“

',,ST/XNDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD ANns’RIoG:sooNsTI=IucTIoI\I
I '
GENERAL ,_ 7 _ Page-_ 1.8
_

(d) The Contractor jshall ensure that access is provided to all

properties adjacent to the Site for the duration of the Contract.

(e) ihe Contractor shall ‘comply ‘with "the incurrent ] Government - _ E

:_ regulations with -regard _to' the transport,I storage and of ,
' ~ ‘‘ ‘”"l‘ use
=» V "
-, explosives and'radioactivef§materials;__H ’E-

(f) The Contractor shall take.all reasonable precautions}—,-

(i) in connection with any rivers, streams, waterways, drains,"

watercourses, lakes and the like" to prevent silting,.
flooding, erosion of beds and banks and pollution of the
water so as- to affect adversely the gualit§ or appearance
thereof or cause injury or death to human," animal "or plant‘
'
I“ " " "
life; '-
g'.j- 'e"'»_'—r'.-:‘-Erea ex;
(ii) in connection with underground water resources (including
percolating water) to prevent any interference with the
supply to or abstraction from such sources and to prevent
pollution of water so as to affect adversely the quality
thereof.

(g) The Contractor shall provide, maintain and remove on completion

of the Works, settling lagoons and other" facilities to minimise.
pollution due to the Contractor's operations including but not‘ f §
limited to -quarrying, aggregate washing, pconcrete mixing and $3"
‘ '
grouting.

(h) If the Contractor provides a radio communications network around :4

‘W
the Site, he shall allow the Engineer reasonable use of the
facilities. Any requirements for the provision of radio _
communications for the sole use of the Engineer are stated in §_
the Special Specification. ii

(i) The Contractor shall -provide, maintain and remove on completion f

of the Works, fencing around the Site hand appropriate security Q
measures on ; access roads, but without prejudice to his
_obligations including maintenance of free access for’ the
Employer, the Engineer, other contractors and any other persons_
entitled to such access. -

(j) In addition to the requirements of Clause 26 of the Conditions

of Contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for acquainting ,; . —., ._.

himself with" and ,observing all current Statute" .Ordinances, ‘

Bye~laws or Regulations_§including those relating to training ,_,_'._

levies and similar taxes. '

:._._._., ;

All buildings erected by the Contractor upon -the- Site and camp
sites, and the layout of the buildings and the sites, shall
comply with Laws of Kenya and all local I Byemlaws in so far as
they are applicable»

(k) The Contractor shall be absolutely and solely responsible for in

the adequacy, safety and security of Temporary Works including
"'
{out not limited to} aii workyards, oilings, staging, dams,
 STANDARD SPEClF!CATlO_N FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTlON
D
GENERAL . Page l.9

cofferdams, trenches, fencing or other works and for the plant

in connection therewith which may be erected or provided for the
carrying out of the Contract and for the execution of the
Works. This provision shall be applicable to all Temporary
Works and constructional Plant whenever provided and erected by
the Contractor and/or his sub-contractors for the purpose of or
in connection with the Works.

Examination by the Engineer of the Contractor's and/or his

sub—contractors' Temporary Works or of the drawings connected
therewith shall not absolve the Contractor from any liability
imposed upon him by the provisions of the Contract.

ll6 PROTECTION FROM WATER

Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall be responsible

for dealing with water, whether from existing drainage systems, water
courses, underground springs, precipitation or any other source or
cause. In discharging and diverting water he shall avoid flooding or
damaging other works or services, causing erosion and/or polluting
water courses.

The Contractor shall keep the whole of the Works free from water and
shall provide all dams, cofferdams, pumping, piling, shoring,
temporary drains, sumps, etc., necessary for this purpose.

Well in advance commencing the permanent

of Works the Contractor
shall at his own expense cut drains and ditches and carry out any
other measures necessary to effectively drain the original ground
and/or shall so programme his Works that the necessity of temporarily
draining the original ground is partially or totally obviated by
working in the dry season.

The Contractor shall at his own expense take all necessary

precautions to prevent damage due to erosion and siltation during
construction. Precautions will include temporary drainage berms,
scour checks, riprap and the like. Spoil material or stockpile
material shall be dumped,_so as not to interfere with streams,
watercourses or any of the drainage works detailed by the Engineer.

On cessation of the works each day the surface of each completed

layer shall be trimmed so that ponding and concentration of surface
run~off does not occur. Should any water accumulate on any part of
the Works either during construction or after construction until the
end of the Period of Maintenance, giving rise to soaking or eroding
conditions, the Engineer may order the Contractor to remove and
replace at the Contractor’s expense any material or Works that has
been so affecteda

Any damage the Works or to adjacent properties resulting from the

to
Contractors failure to take the necessary precautions shall be made
good at the Contractor‘s expense.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL V Page 1 . 10

117 HEALTH, SAFETY AND ACCIDENTS

~

The Contractor shall ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable and

to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the health, safety and welfare
at work of his employees including those of his sub—contractors and
of all other persons on the Site. His responsibilities shall
include:- '

(a) the provision and maintenance of Constructional Plant and

systems of work that are lighted, safe and without risks to
health;

(b) the execution of suitable arrangements for ensuring safety and rg

absence of risks to health in connection with the use, handling,
storage, transport and disposal of articles and substances;

(c) the provision of protective clothing and equipment, first aid

stations with such personnel and equipment as are necessary and i
such information, instruction, training and supervision as are fig
necessary to ensure the health and safety at work of all persons §
employed on the Works all in accordance with the Laws of Kenya; 5
- 2.‘
(d) designation as Safety Officer of one of his senior staff who §
I
shall have specific knowledge of safety regulations, and
experience of safety precautions on similar works and who shall
if
advise on all matters affecting the safety of workmen and on gf
measures to be taken to promote such safety; Rf

(e} the provision and maintenance of access to all places on the gu

Site in a condition that is safe and without risk of injury; ég

(f) the provision of adequate waterborne sanitation, refuse 3%

collection and disposal, complying with the Laws of Kenya and $5
':k.:1’.3
all local Bye—laws and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, for
all houses, offices, workshops, and laboratories erected on the
q
-t camp site or sites; fig?
Ep
Rthe
n u
provision of an adequate number of suitable latrines and
,'qther sanitary arrangements at sites where work is in progress
E
9 the satisfaction of the _Medical Officer in the area and of I._,-.;.-<-:4,-_'.(_;,_
2
i is e
N
.»a..
R;
__

~«.., ,
Engineer;

' .5 ihe execution of appropriate measures in consultation with the

§:§;.'_4"_.’-'; .r_—." 1
é ppropriate Public Health Authority to control within the Site,
hghincluding the camp sites, mosquitoes, flies
(1 and pests including
the application of suitable chemicals to breeding areas;
."'.-?.'-‘:«7r'—‘r. -

j) reporting details of any accident to the Engineer and the Kenya

Police if appropriate as soon is possible after its occurrence.

(k) compliance with The Factories Act (Cap 514) and in particular
the Factories {Building Qperations and works of Engineering
Construction) Rules i984.
',_,_.,_,_, _.
 GENERAL . Page 1.11

118 PRESERVATION AND MAINTENANCE OF FENCES AND GATES

‘i~ The Contractor shall be responsible fbr ensuring the safety of all
persons and.property on‘ the Site and for ensuring that livestock
;_
if cannot stray as a result of his work. When existing fences and gates
i; have to be removed or altered for the proper execution of the Works,
the Contractor shall erect temporary fencing and gates and, if
required, provide watchmen to ensure that livestock cannot stray,
provided always that the fences or gates referred to have not been
the subject of a negotiated agreement for compensation whereby the
owner or tenant has been made responsible ‘for such removal or
alteration.

The Contractor shall discipline his employees to ensure that no fence

or gate, except where these are required to be removed or altered for
the proper execution of the Works, is damaged and that no gates are
left open which may allow livestock to stray.

ll9 USE OF EXPLOSIVES

The Contractor shall only use explosives for blasting in rock at such
times and places and in such manner as the Engineer may approve. Such
.
A. approval shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for
damage to the Works and adjoining or adjacent Structures, roads,
5 places and things, injury, loss, inconvenience and accident to
persons, animals and property consequent on the use of such
if
O
explosives. The Contractor shall be entirely liable for any accident
which shall occur and shall save the Employer harmless and
indemnified from all claims arising therefrom.

l2O PROTECTION OF EXISTING WORKS AND SERVICES

Contractor shall acquaint himself with the position of all

The
existing services such as sewers, surface water drains, cables for
electricity and telephone, telephone and lighting poles, water mains,
; . . .. .
1 .
E and the like_hefore commencing any excavation or other work likely to
affect the existing services.
x

where work is to be carried out in the vicinity of overhead power‘

lines, the Contractor shall ensure that all persons working in such
areas are aware of the relatively large distance that High voltage
electricity can "short" to earth when cranes, or otherilarge masses
of steel, are in the vicinity of power lines. The fContractor’s
attention is drawn to BS 162 which gives safe clearances for the
various voltages.

The Contractor shall be held responsible for injury to existing works

or services, and shall indemnify the Employer against any claims in
this respect {including consequential damages), The Contractor shall
be responsible for the reinstatement of the services so affected.

be
In all cases where such works or services are exposed, they shall
properly shored, hung up or otherwise protected. Special care must
be exercised in filling and compacting the ground under mains,
cables, etc., and to leave uncovered exposed water meters, stopcock
boxes and similar items,
 STAN DARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROADAND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL Page 1.12

Installations adjacent to the Works, shall be kept securely ‘in place

until the work is completed and shall then be made as safe and
permanent as before. we

Notwithstanding the foregoing requirements, and without reducing the

Contractor's responsibility, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer newt-%h
fir
immediately if any existing works or services are exposed, located or
'
damaged.

All costs which may be incurred by the Contractor as a result of ms

programming and co-ordinating work to enable any alterations to the

services to be carried out and the cost of any safety precautions
which shall be deemed necessary due to the proximity of the Works to
the power lines belonging to the Kenya Power and Lighting Co. Ltd.
I
shall be at the Contractor's expense.

l2l DIVERSION OF SERVICES

' with the

The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging in liason
appropriate Authority as soon as the requirement is known for the
moving of or alterations to services such as power and telephone
lines, water mains, sewers and surface water drains which are
affected by the Works. The arrangements for such moving or
alteration shall be subject to the agreement of the Engineer and the
appropriate Authority.

122 CLOSURE OF ROADS

when a road used by the Contractor for transporting labour or

Constructional Plant or for delivery of any material for the Works is
closed under Section 71 of the Traffic Ordinance l962, or amendments
thereto, the Contractor shall obey such closure order and shall
suspend operations or use alternative roads. The fact that the
Contractor is performing work for the Ministry of Transport and
Communications‘will give him no special privileges in this respect.
E
l23 LIAISON WITH GOVERNMENT AND POLICE OFFICIALS :i.'-;-‘:
i,

The Contractor shall consult with officials of the Police and

Government in the area regarding their requirements in the control of :_-'1:-_'u-'a.r 1g

traffic and other matters and shall provide all assistance or

facilities which may be required by such officials in the execution
of their duties.

124 PROVISION OF LAND

The Government shall make available free of charge to the Contractor

l:nd on which the "Works are to be executed or carried out, as
indicated on :.e Erawings or as detailed in the Special
Specificationa Such land shall include the road. reserve, areas
required for deviations, quarries, stockpile and spoil areas, and
borrow pits as defined in this Specification and access roads thereto
but shall exclude land for the Resident Engineer's laboratories,
offices and houses and land required by the Contractor for his own
camps; offices, senses, temporary works or any other purpose,
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL _ Page 1.13

The location of land which shall be provided by the Contractor for

the Resident Engineer's laboratories, offices and houses and their
layout shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.

Where it is necessary for the Employer, in fulfilling his

obligations, to acquire any of the above land gnring thefiggppract,
the Contractor shall determine the ownership of and shall pay on
instruction from the Engineer the cost of the land or rent, and/or
compensation as valued by the Commissioner of Lahds. ’”THe”‘
Cbntractor's dbligations are set out in detail in Clause 603 of this
Specification. Although the Contractor may, in~ the first instance,
provide the money for the purchase of the land, all such land shall
be the property of the Employer.

Where the Contractor chooses to use an alternative source of material

to that Specified, the terms of this Clause do not apply and the
Contractor shall be solely responsible for acquisition of the land
and its disposal after completion of the Works.

Should the Contractor request the purchase of land for any purpose
and this land is subsequently not used, the Contractor shall be
responsible for all costs associated with the compensation, purchase
and disposal of such land.

3.25 WATER SUPPLY

The Contractor shall provide a clean, sufficient and continuous

supply of fresh water, both for construction of the Works and for all
houses, offices, laboratories and.workshops. He shall undertake all
arrangements including pipelines and meters for connecting to local
water mains and the provision of pumps, storage tanks or water
conveyance where necessary, payment for all fees and water charges
and. the Satisfactory removal of all such arrangements and provisions
on completion of the Works.

The water shall be clear of suspended solids and free from any matter
in quantities considered by the Engineer to be deleterious to the
work. Water supplied to all the offices, laboratories and houses
shall be_ wholesome and potable to the satisfaction of the Medical
Officer in the Area.

126 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURED ARTICLES

The Contractor shall before placing any order for materials and
manufactured articles for incorporation in the Works submit to the
Engineer the names of the firms from whom he proposes to obtain such
materials and manufactured articles giving for each firm a
description of the materials and manufactured articles to be
supplied, their origin, the manufacturer’s specification, quality,

weight, strength and any other relevant details. The Contractor

shall deposit with the Engineer samples of such materials and
manufactured articles when requested and where appropriate,
manufacturer's certificates of recent tests carried out on similar
materials and manufactured articlesa
lt p“ *‘
:.7.‘jdf'%
‘
" -, .
J ‘ AN

:““‘= -W--. -\ ~—\ .

7-5“"“'
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL - Page 1.14

The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with copies of all orders
for the supply of materials and manufactured articles required in‘ fig
connection with the Works as the Engineer may require.

l27 INFORMATION FROM EXPLORATORY BORING AND TEST PITS.

%:
The Materials Report, which forms part of the Contract Documents,
contains information on exploratory borings, test pits and other E
investigations which have been made by the Engineer on the site of "I
the Works. The Engineer will be responsible for the suitability of n
the borrow pits provided by him and. shown" on the Drawings. The i
Contractor will be solely vresponsible for any conclusions he may E
reach from the Materials Report at all locations other than the
borrow pits provided by the Engineer.
-‘I

The Engineer reserves the right to adjust foundation levels and other -«'.-‘ "3"’
F3 1 {vi

levels for construction below ground level, in the light of

information that becomes available as general excavation proceeds
upon the site.
see ‘
.

.$he Contractor's attention is drawn to his obligation with regard to

the inspection and examination of the Site as detailed in Clause ll
of the Conditions of Contract. %.

128 STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURED ARTICLES §

All materials and manufactured articles shall be stored on Site in a

manner acceptable to the Engineer and the Contractor shall carefully g
protect from the weather and vermin all work, materials and £5
manufactured articles which may be affected. Ty

l29 TEST CERTIFICATES

fit
When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit to him
Certificates of Test from the suppliers of materials and manufactured 3 i
articles to be used for the Contract. Such Certificates shall §§
certify that the materials and manufactured articles concerned have
been _tested in accordance with the requirements of this Specification
g
and shall give the results of all the tests carried out. The E_
‘Contractor shall provide adequate means of identifying the materials "E"
and manufactured articles delivered to the Site with the ‘pg
corresponding Certificates. §_
is
130 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

36 number colour negatives showing the progress of the Works shall be $3

I
taken every month by the Contractor from positions to be selected by
the Engineer. The Contractor shall supply proof prints from each
negative from which the Engineer shall select negatives from which
the Contractor shall produce 2 sets of progress photographs. Each
set Shall comprise 10 number, 200 X 150 mm colour prints, which
together with all the negatives shall be handed over to the
Engineerl Each proof and photograph shall be marked with the number
of the negative and a statement shall be submitted giving the
location, da 2 when taken and a brief description or title, The
Contractor shall supply one album with each set of photographs,
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL Page 1.15

131 S IIGNBOARDS

The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain signboards to the

layout, colours and dimensions shown on the Drawings.

These signboards shall be erected at sites to be selected by the

Engineer. '

The signboards are to be erected within one month of the date of

commencement of the Contract. The Contractor shall remove the
signboards at the end of the Period of Maintenance.

132 HOUSING ACCOMODATION FOR THE ENGINEER AND HIS STAFF, OFFICES AND
LABORATORIES FOR THE ENGINEER WITH LABORATORY AND SURVEY EQUIPMENT
AND FURNITURE

The Contractor shall if, required by the Special Specification,

provide and maintain houses, offices, laboratories, survey and
laboratory equipment and furniture for the Engineer and his staff
including senior staff, junior staff and technicians.
I
A" description of the number and type of houses, offices,
laboratories, equipment and furniture required is given in the
Special Specification.

133 TIME FOR ERECTION OF THE ENGINEER'S STAFF HOUSES, OFFICES AND
LABORATORIES

All houses, offices and laboratories to be provided under the

Contract shall be handed over to the Engineer in finished and fully
habitable condition not later than sixty days after the Engineer‘s
order to commence work (Clause 41 of the Conditions of Contract).

No construction of the Works will be permitted until the Engineer’s

offices and laboratory have been accepted by the Engineer as finished
and able to function efficiently.

Should the Contractor fail to hand over the houses, offices and
laboratories within the period specified, the Engineer will make such
alternative arrangements as he considers necessary. These
arrangements may include the use of hotels, rented accommodation and
the hire or purchase of caravans, portacabins etc. The Contractor
will be responsible for all costs of such temporary arrangements made
by the Engineer, including that of additional transport .

134 INSURANCE AND OWNERSHIP OF THE ENGINEER'S STAFF HOUSES, OFFICES,

LABORATORIES, FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT

All buildings, furniture and equipment provided by the Contractor

and/or the Employer for the Engineer’s staff houses (senior and
junior), offices and laboratories shall be insured by the Contractor
against any loss or damage by accident, fire or theft for the
duration of the Contract, inciuding the Period of Maintenance.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL _ Page 1 . 16

On completion of _the Contract, the ownership of the office furniture

and laboratory and survey equipment shall revert to the Employer.
Unless otherwise stated the ownership of all houses, offices, and
laboratories shall revert to the Contractor.
_ 3
135 MAINTENANCE OF THE ENGINEER'S STAFF HOUSES, OFFICES, LABORATORIES,
FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT

The Contractor shall keep all buildings, accesses, services and fipg
I
facilities provided by him, for the use of the Engineer and his
staff, in a well maintained, clean and fully habitable condition, 24 I
hours per day until the expiry of the Period of Maintenance.
§_I
t
The Contractor shall also provide constant electricity, water and an
adequate refuse collection service for all houses, offices and
laboratories.
page

The Contractor shall also maintain all furniture and equipment

provided by him and/or the Employer in a reasonable state of repair
and useable condition and shall replace promptly any item which
becomes
I unserviceable or is lost.
3
Wu
l36 REMOVAL OF CAMPS

Unless otherwise instructed, upon completion of the Contract and, Q

after receiving approval in writing from the Engineer, the Contractor gg
%“
shall take down and remove all structures forming part of his own
camp ‘and that of the Engineer, and. shall arrange for the
g
disconnection of the water supply, remove all drains and culverts, fig
backfill trenches, fill in all latrine pits, soakaways and other is
sewage disposal excavations, with the exception of items and .services
which are required to revert to the ownership of the Employer and g
N
shall restore the Site, as far as practicable, to its original
condition and_leave it in a neat and tidy condition.
§U
The Contractor shall carry out similar reinstatement in the event '5.
F
5.1- .
that he relocates his camp and that of the Engineer.

137 ATTENDANCE UPON THE ENGINEER AND HIS STAFF ; E

In the Engineer's offices and laboratories the Contractor shall

provide a continuous supply of soap, towels and toilet paper, coffee,
tea, sugar and milk, and cleaning equipment, and shall keep the
offices and laboratories in a well maintained, clean and habitable
condition. y

The Contractor shall provide all tools, protective clothing, wooden

_pegs, iron pins and pickets, water, cement and aggregate for
concreting and all assistance as may be required by the Engineer and
his staff for setting out, measuring and checking the Works.

1
The Contractor shall provide, pay, including ai l Overtime, and house
such junior staff as are listed in the species 3 pecification.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL Page l.17

The Contractor shall provide adequate security by day and by night

for the Engineer's offices, laboratory, vehicles and houses, and for
the Engineer's staff: This shall include the provision of suitable
gates and fencing and the full—time attendance of permanent watchmen.

138 PROVISION OF VEHICLES

The Contractor shall, if so required in the Special Specification,

supply new vehicles and maintain them for the exclusive use of the
Engineer and his staff, for any purpose whatsoever authorised by the
Engineer.

A description of the number and types of Vehicles to be provided is

given in the Special Specification.

Unless otherwise specified, the vehicles shall be owned by the

Contractor and be licenced and comprehensively insured by the
Contractor for use within Kenya by any licenced driver authorised by
the Engineer together with authorised passengers and the carriage of
goods and samples. The Contractor shall pay all tolls, provide fuel,
oil, maintenance including replacing defective parts, tyres and the
like whenever required, in conformity with the vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations or as may be necessary. The vehicles shall be
fueled, oiled and maintained as aforementioned until released by the
Engineer. The vehicles on being released shall revert to the
Contractor. Each vehicle shall be fitted with a fire extinguisher,
first aid kit, tow hook and rope, tool kit, spare wheel, wheel
wrench, jack and handle and seat belts. all of which fhall be
maintained in working order or replaced by the Contractor as
necessary.

'.The Contractor shall similar replacement for any vehicle

provide a
out of service for more than twenty four hours, and shall replace any
vehicle by a similar new vehicle after it has completed l50,000 km.

The Contractor shall provide, pay including all overtime and night
allowances, and house competent and licensed drivers approved by the
Engineer for each of the vehicles indicated in the Special
Specification. Sufficient drivers shall be available at night and at
weekends whenever required by the Engineer.

l39 MISCELLANEOUS ACCOUNTS

The Contractor may be instructed by the Engineer to purchase and

supply to the Engineer, or pay for miscellaneous items including but
not limited to stationery, stores, equipment, office consumables ,
computer charges and hotel accommodation, The Contractor shall
submit a miscellaneous account including receipts of all such items
purchased or paid for.

PAYMENT OF OVERTIME FOR ENGINEER'S JUNIOR STAFF

The Contractor may be instructed by the Engineer to make payment for

overtime worked by the Engineer's junior staff. The Contractor shall
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FORROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

Em
GENERAL Page l.l8

be reimbursed for such payments in accordance with the relevant items

of Clause 141 of this Specification except when any overtime worked
by the Engineer's junior staff is incurred by the need for the
Engineer to inspect work which, owing to earlier default by the
Contractor, has resulted in such work being performed outside normal
working hours as defined in Clause 108 of this Specification then the
full cost of such overtime shall be at the Contractor's expense.

141 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

No separate measurement and payment shall be made for the cost of

complying with the requirements of Clauses 101 to 120 inclusive,
Clause 122, Clause 123, Clause l25 to Clause 129 inclusive and Clause
13? of this Specification and the Contractor shall be deemed to have
allowed elsewhere in his rates and price for all such costs.

(a) Item : Preliminary Item

Unit : Lump Sum

g_(;'3'P£|%

Measurement and payment of the Preliminary Item shall be made in

accordance with the requirements of Clause 60(1) of the
Conditions of Contract, Part II.

(b) Item : Engineer's senior staff houses

Unit nor of each type la-r.‘_a.:‘-«—.r'4-'.1:;‘

Engineer's senior staff houses shall be measured by the number

instructed to be built. ’;4Jf. '-a-¢;¢_;g.»;r_._

The rate for the Engineer's senior staff houses shall include m

for the cost of providing each house, furniture, equipment,

?I.'*-.r?f"-*: '5T*. mu
water, _electricity and gas in accordance with the Special
Specification and complying with the requirements of Clauses .
117, 124, l25, 132, 133, l34, 135, 136 and l3? of this
Specification. f '*'*"~*-H _m
1.

Payment for the Engineer's senior staff houses shall be made in

instalments in accordance with the following conditions:~

(i) The Contractor will be paid 50% of the amount due when the
buildings are accepted by the Engineer fully furnished and
equipped.

(ii) 30% of the amount due will be paid in equal monthly

instalments from the date the Engineer accepts the
buiidings over the remainder of the Contract Period
excluding the Period of Maintenance. This payment shall be
deemed to cover maintenance of buildings, furniture;
equipment and services and the Engineer may withhold or
reduce any instalments if the Contractor fails in his
maintenance obligations.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL - _ Page 1.19

-wr. -»¢_—,«-_

(iii) 20% of the amount due will be paid when the buildings have
been removed, if required, and the site cleared at the end
of the Period of Maintenance or earlier if the Engineer has
no further requirement for the houses.

(iv) Each instalment will be subject to the deduction of

retention money.

Item : Engineer's junior staff houses

Unit : no. of each type

Engineer's junior staff houses shall be measured by the type and

number instructed to be built.

The rate for the Engineer's junior staff houses shall include
for the cost of providing each house, furniture, equipment,
electricity and water in accordance with the Special
Specification and complying with the requirements of Clauses
117, 124, 125, 132, 133, 134, 135, 136 and 137 of this
Specification.

Payment for the Engineer‘s junior staff houses shall be made in

in accordance with Clause l4l(b) of the
instalments
Specification.

Item : Engineer's office

Unit : no.

Engineer's office shall be measured by the number instructed to

be built.

The rate for the Engineer's office shall include for the cost of
providing the office, electricity, water, telephone charges and
heating in accordance with the Special Specification and
complying with the requirements of Clauses 117, 124, 125, 132,
133, 134, 135, 136 and 137 of this Specification.

Payments for the Engineer's office shall be made -in instalments

in accordance with Clause 141(b) of this Specification.

(e) Item : Engineer‘s laboratory

Unit : no.

Engineer’s laboratory shall be measured by the number instructed

to be built.

The rate for the Engineer's laboratory shall include for the
of providing the laboratory, electricity, water, gas and
cost
heating in accordance with the Special Specification and
complying with the requirements of Clauses 117, 124, 125, 132,
133, 134, 135, 136 and 137 of this Specification.
STANDARD SPECIHCATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL _ _ Page 1.20

Payment for the Engineer's laboratory shall be made in

instalments in accordance with Clause l4l(b} of this
Specification.

(f) Item : Furniture and equipment for the Engineer's office

and laboratory Egg

Unit Prime Cost Sum_

to plus % for Contractor's overheads and profit

Reimbursement for the purchase of furniture and equipment for 3

the Engineer's office ‘and laboratories
basis plus a percentage
Cost shall be
shall be on a Prime
for
Cost
overheads and
the cost of the item ordered, less any discount,
profit. The Prime E}
in Nairobi. The percentage entered for overheads and profit fig
shall be deemed to cover all other costs including transport fig}
from Nairobi to the Engineer's office or laboratory (permanent
or mobile) and maintenance thereof. The Contractor shall be i
required to produce quotations and invoices if so required and fly
shall produce receipts of payments for all goods supplied.

(g) Item : Vehicles for the Engineer '-

E} ‘J

Unit : V. month for each type of vehicle

Provision of vehicles for the Engineer shall be measured by the $5

Vehicle month (V.month) for each month, or part thereof, that
the vehicle is provided for the Engineer. .1
1
3
The rate shall include for the cost of complying with the
requirements of Clause 138 of this Specification.

Additional payment will be made under Clause l4l(h) of this pg

Specification for each kilometre travelled.

(h) Item : Kilometre travelled by vehicles for the Engineer

1.-
Unit : km for each type of vehicle

Payment will be made for each kilometre travelled by the

vehicles for the Engineer.
an.

The rate for each kilometre travelled shall include for the cost .
r;. «:.a.x-. I.

of complying with the requirements of Clause 138 of this

Specification. g

M
(i) Item : Removal and alteration to existing services

Unit ; Prime Cost Sum

as plus % for Contractor's overheads and profit.

Reimbursement for the removal of or alterations to existing

services which are affected by the Works shall be on a Prime
Cost basis_plus a percentage for overheads and profit. This
fiesxewragz
,.. 3 L‘u' 'a“ be deemed to include for all costs incurred in
 GENERAL - Page 1 . 21

liaising with the appropriate bodies and for programming and

co~ordinating work to enable any removal or alteration to the
service to be carried out and complying with the requirements of
Clause 120 and 121 of this Specification.

(j) Item : Land acquisition

Unit : Prime Cost Sum

plus % for Contractor's overheads and profit

Reimbursement for the acquisition of land required for the Works

shall be on a Prime Cost basis plus a percentage for overheads
and profits. This percentage shall be deemed to include for all
costs in providing the information of owner, land registration
numbers, local details, maps and plans, initially providing the
money for the purchase of the land, setting out and complying
with clause 124 of this Specification.

(k) Item : Miscellaneous accounts

Unit : Prime Cost Sum .

CI plus % for Contractor's overheads and profit

The Contractor, on provision of receipts, will be reimbursed on

a Prime Cost basis for miscellaneous accounts plus a percentage
for overheads and profit. This percentage shall be deemed to
include for all costs in providing the items in the
miscellaneous account including purchase, transport to Site and
complying with the requirements of Clause l39 of this
Specification

(1) Item : Payment of overtime for the Engineer’s junior staff

Unit : Prime Cost Sum

- plus % for Contractor’s overheads and profit.

Reimbursement for the payment of the Engineer's junior staff

overtime shall be on a Prime Cost basis plus a percentage for
overheads and profit. This percentage shall ibe deemed to
include for all costs of complying with Clause l4O of this
Specification.

(m) Item : Progress photographs

Unit 2 no. of sets

Progress photographs shall be measured by the number of sets

I-

The rate shall include tor the cost of complying with Clause 130
of this Specification“

«igdagsgg 4;; ii 5 i-'

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL Page 1.22

In) Item : Signboards.

Unit : no.

Signboards shall be measured by the number instructed.

The rate for signboarfis shall include for the cost of complying
with Clause 131 of this Specification.

r.'.r:.

"
"

'*
‘*"‘

.;-—;-.~c.
/1;.
 SECTEON 2
MMERWS RNB TESHNG
--..fl. .;3,.

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION.

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.1

201 SCOPE OF SECTION

This Section covers the tests and methods of testing which are
required for the selection and control of the quality of materials
and for control of workmanship, trials and construction control
testing.

202 TESTING BY THE CONTRACTOR

The Contractor shall provide, use and maintain on the Site throughout
the period of execution of the Works a suitable laboratory and
adequate equipment operated by competent staff for carrying out tests
required for the selection and control of the quality of materials
and for the control of workmanship in accordance with this
Specification. The Contractor shall assume "that tests will be
required on all materials used in the Works and on all finished work.

The Contractor shall carry out all necessary tests and shall report
to theEngineer the results of such tests before submitting materials
and finished work to the Engineer for approval. In appropriate
circumstances, tests may be carried out at the place of manufacture.

203 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS OF MATERIALS

All materials used in or upon the Works shall comply with this
Specification and the Special Specification and shall be acceptable
to the Engineer. Where so specified, the material shall comply with
the national specification named or with an alternative national
specification in accordance with Section 1 of this Specification.

Similarly, where a material has been specified

by manufacturer's
trade name, the product of another manufacturer will be acceptable
provided it is in all respects of equivalent or higher quality and
provided that the Engineer’s approval has been obtained.

Samples of all materials proposed to be used shall be submitted to

the Engineer and shall, where required, be tested prior to the
material_being delivered in bulk upon the Works.

204 SIEVES

ISO sieves shall be used for all tests. The standard sieve series,
based on ISO 565, shall be as follows:

75 - 63 — 50 - 37.5 — 28 - 20 - l4 — l0 — 6.3 ~ 5 - 4
2 W l - 0.6 - 0.5 ~ 0.425 v 0.300 m 0.150 - 0.075 mm

The Engineer may require the use of additional ISO sieves.

In various standard test procedures quoted in this Section, American

or British sieves shall be replaced by the nearest ISO sieves, eg.

l9.G mm shall be replaced by 20 mm

9.5 mm shall be replaced by 10 mm
4.75 mm shall be replaced by 5 mm
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.2

2.36 mm shall be replaced by 2 mm

1.18 mm shall be replaced by 1 mm

205 SOILS AND GRAVELS

Ca) Samples and sampling

Sampling of soils and gravels shall be carried out as specified

or as directed by the Engineer.

Clause 1.5
Samples shall be prepared for testing as indicated in
of BS 1377, except that:

(i) The mass

about 400 D,
( in g) of a sample required for sieve analysis is
D being the maximum particle size (mm).
i
(ii) Samples containing particles larger than 20 mm shall be
vi!-": .=‘r" £’\fl
prepared for compaction and CBR tests as follows:

Sieve an adequate quantity of representative material over

the 50 mm and 20 mm sieve. Weigh the material passing the fi‘3‘é:>1'.'¢‘fi2

50 mm sieve and retained on the 20 mm sieve and replace it

with an equal mass of material passing the 20 mm sieve and
retained on the 5 mm sieve. Take the material for
n?‘r'Y4-7v‘?;H£'l

replacement from the remaining portion of the main sample.

Note: Preparation of gravel samples

The aggregations of particles shall be broken with a wooden

or rubber hammer or pestle.

Care shall be taken that no individual particles are

crushed in the operation.

(13) Standard methods of testing

Tests on soils and gravels shall be performed in accordance with

|,-;g_- u-_, _. -, ‘.'_-3.‘
the standard methods given in Table 2-1.

It is further specified that:

. -:v.« .-«.a-. ._

(i) Sieve analysis (BS 1377 ~ Test 7 (A) — wet sieving) shall
be carried out using ISO sieves, as indicated in Clause
204. 3‘;-'. ‘4.r'.‘—"-.'~

(ii) Compaction test using a 2.5 kg rammer is denoted AASHTO

T99.
(_-'. '.J,ru,«:./:4

Compaction test using a 435 kg rammer is denoted AASHTO

T130.

Wherever in the text of this Specification and the Special

of the MUD {AASHTO T99 OI"
Specification the term ”x%
T180)" is used it shall mean that a standard of compaction
shall be achieved such that the dry density of the
.:'.. ...'.;.
comoacted materiai is x% as he maximum dry L.i‘r2E‘1L:.i.

or T180 compaction SE81: 3

determined from the AASHTO T99
 _
S TA N D %% S lg O W C M @. MN F% . % A D D B W D % . how N Tam
.m% R U $D N

mM M fl A m T%M M 0 wM M M S Page 2.3

.3:
woo mfiwmmm woo mfimmmm
N
wom woo wumw no om
amfi nmcb nofims
$8. 5.”
uo E23 33
awn»
33
.mum>¢mw nmxmnm
fiofimé won $3 non mmma
UOSHME
ozm

£.+. n3 :33 5.33 £33 Manama

. flowumnflfimwuwv
mqHom umumaoaumcom no Zia
mfipflm nm>mwm
mo
nmbwwm
mcHm~w: m>o mcou $3 Qwumaoém ofiflwsopomam SE $3.
m EE gmxmnm
mdmfiaumfi mamfiaum fi mHfi.$. EE mamfl nmumzv musuwaozv
M m
.nmV .3: :3 .2: 4. o m o m
2.3
mmamzmm
H m m w m m n nm m .333 flw>mHm Awbwwm 3
ma mm
52 E:
flwmfi ummm. w mmnmmmwu #3. “Ema umme umme $3. wmwa umwa umma umwa Uofipmz mnammmm wofiaz m mafia: mcunmmmmm wofiwz m $3.
dmoflcmgoms umwa woxywa 8.?
ommmmemmo
I : 1 : I 1 . . . .. . 1 . I . : : : .

OH
mam. mme am? om? mm? @h.m.H_ mmma
wudwwuoum

hhma Ema 2.2. ._K.mH 2.3 nnma 2.3 33 R3 2.2 Ema :3 3.3

uwma mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm oammmm oammmd oemmmm oammma. mm oammmm oammfi. mm oammdm

mqm umqm m
.

mwnmmoaumama mflnmso fiamamn mflfi mcmwwmamu

m mDomo m .am a
mmaowunmm
oflmm
mo ucmuhoo wmmuhou ubmutmou
"arm
pmmpsou ucmuhou
W0 QowuL.5 n.Hum.nQ fimpaam
xmmcw n mzmnmn Cmézms mnfimmm
mamme mfinmumm
wsmpzo %#fl>flH® 3.3
u,.: . £ Hmukmz 3, mg
u_ _3., S mmm%.3.n_E.m
mu.m:&H:m in
pcwfimiswm,
mnflg. 9,3 mg: mmEmno.2.E

§DfiHfl§fiEHfl#flQ ®H5MfiHOE w..:$:,. q. oflmnfi ._»,.fio3mmE. .Hmm:.flq, Uwmfluwmm floflfifi UHKMWMQ Hmwom. mm mufi u.m fi §I.m.uHmQmQ mwsumfl azlmw wam mHdum4.,oEimn3mcMma mfifi oflfi mo wcmm Ema;
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS AND-TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.4

Samples for the AASHTO T99 or T180 compaction tests shall

be taken before compaction of the layer begins unless in
the opinion of the Engineer the compactive effort proposed
or applied by the Contractor is such that the material
characteristics have changed in which case the samples for
the tests shall be taken after all compaction is complete.

(iii) Compaction tests : when the material is susceptible to

crushing during compaction,_ a separate and new sample
shall be used in the determination of each point on the
'
moisture/density curve.

(iv) In Method A of AASHTO T99 and T180, moulds having a

diameter of 102 mm ‘shall normally be used." However,
existing moulds to BS 1377 (diameter 105 mm ~ volume 1
litre) may also be used. The number of blows shall then 4
—_,]I,f :_;.r,c-.3

be increased from 25 to 27, SO as to obtain the same

compactive energy per unit volume. gm
4"- _-:_-_
.
-
e..«3
(V) The dry density of material placed in the Works shall be
determined by the Sand Replacement Method unless the
Engineer elects to use a nuclear method as detailed in
Table 2-1 and Clause 226 of this Specification.

206 STONE, AGGREGATE, SAND AND FILLER

l§_ b:;J.'—':\'J:’v'a'.
a) Sampling and preparation of samples
.

Sampling shall be carried out and the samples prepared in -

,- t,.o'='-L-='r*.‘.r.L;.
:
accordance with BS 8l2.

19) Standard methods of testing -.

W;»2:;' ~'2-.';-'.E’-,'-.

Tests stone, aggregate, sand and filler shall be performed in

on.
accordance with the standard methods given in Table 2-2.

(i) The Average Least Dimension of an aggregate shall be

determined as follows: ..,

By means of a riffler divide out a representative sample of

_,. . .

such a size .as to give at least 200 aggregate particles of

each fraction to be tested. Sieve the sample through a
sieve with an aperture size half the nominal size of the
aggregate to be tested and discard the particles passing
the sieve (the nominal size is the smallest sieve through
which at least 85% of the aggregate will pass),

By means of callipers with platens of at least 5 mm

diameter (or square} measure the smallest dimension of each
particle retained on that sieve accurate to Dal mm and
record the measurement and the number of particles testeda
The average least dimension is then calculated as the sum
of the smallest dimension of the particles divided by the
number of particles measured,
 HA N D Anm cu D: E C W nu nnT w N %w R % A D A mm nu % fink E C 0 «W T. 1% nu flu m
MH W S Ma W Mm W %%S bPage 2.5

.©o£uwE

Hmxwnm
.mmmaqHm

ozm
Hmwnmfi
.
Am:. TmH© awuwmwum m no
wozmm I HmummmHmmm

Ammaomo
amino; mmumou. mv
umxwnm
mmumo
mamwm w m “mm
33
uozumé wuwm 0
u
~mzoam HMUHEMEDME
Eemdv I
OB
5.93 wmumqv
mrdmwcmum
. «NB
.
may mmm woaa mnaa
whdwmoohm 0
£18 mam mam mam Nam mam mam Nam

mAm oHqm m uwmfi mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm ommmmqa oam m 29mm oammmm Qammmm

m mpm o m moau L
. .
m

amma mmnnxmsm _
mwmmwnmwm . HOWQfi
mvcmm
ma wmm
msamb ma
HNIN
uhwuno
umdw
Hmumst
m % m wcwcdom
Mo qofi fi fle m©.m0>
mqmma coam n m
was
xmwc.H mnanmfipu
$3 vwmmmw ucmucou
. mmanoaxo mm..5. P.§ma .
wpmsmadm
pawn
. %u. nm:m.m #CwHm?H§WM
mmammcm

coaumgafihmpm mflofinmm, ahmau m m,.m.3fi m.Tm w>HymHmm ufidm m.. Eum. no: mpmmmummm maamaom néefimuo moq ESHWOW wcmw
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.6

(ii) Test for presence of organic impurities in aggregates.

This test is designed to indicate the presence of organic

impurities in aggregates used for making concrete.

A 350 cc graduated bottle shall be filled to the 120 cc

mark with a sample of the aggregate to be tested and a 3%
solution of sodium hydroxide in water added until the
volume of aggregate. and liquid after shaking gives a total
volume of 200 cc. The -bottle shall be stoppered, shaken
thoroughly and allowed to stand for 24 hours. If, after 24
hours, the colour of the solution is no darker than a pale
brown, the aggregate under test may be deemed satisfactory. %
ga

(iii) Rapid field test for chlorides in aggregates (Quantab Test).

.’5'.4?5‘.3"-:'T-’.*§':‘.=
The purpose of. this test is to provide a quick method of
testing for chlorides at the point of delivery so that
immediate action can be taken to remove any contaminated
load.

Apparatus required:

Plastic buckets.

Spring balance capable of reading to 5 kg with an fig

accuracy of :_l0 g. '3

Plastic drinking cups or similar containers.

_
g
as
Whatman No. 90 filter papers 125 mm diameter.

Quantab chloride. titrators Type ll75 (supplied by

Miles Laboratories Ltd., Stoke -Court, Stoke Poges,
‘Slough, Bucks, England)
$
JV

Method:
Weigh out 2 kg of the aggregate under test into a §
bucket. ii

Add 2 kg of clean chloride free water. 3

Stir once every minute for l5 minutes.

Take a container of the solution from the bucket and

place into it, point downwards a filter paper folded
into a cone.

Insert into the clear liquid within the filter paper a

Quantab titrator strip and leave until the yellow bar
at the top of the strip has turned completely blue.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.7

Read off from the scale on the strip the level reached
f. at which the strip has turned white (to first decimal
gs point).
’

Consult the calibration chart supplied with the test

_‘. . . .’
..
strips and read the percentage NaCl corresponding to
the test strip reading.

Calculation:

If the % Nacl is X, the amount.of Cl ion by weight of

aggregate is given by:

C1 ion = O.6lX %

Note: It is- important to ensure that the control

number on the chart corresponds with the
control number on the bottle of test strips in
use?

207 CEMENT

Ordinary and Rapid Hardening Portland Cementv shall be sampled and

tested in accordance with and shall comply with all the requirements
of Kenya Standard KS 02~2l. The main requirements are summarized in
Table 2~3.

Other types of cement shall comply with the specification named.

208 LIME

Building limes shall be sampled and tested in accordance with and

shall comply with all requirements of BS 890.

Lime for treatment of road materials shall. be Hydrated Calcium Lime

or Quicklime _and, unless otherwise specified, shall comply with the
following requirements: .
Fineness Hydrated lime Quicklime

Residue on 0.2 mm sieve — Maximum 1% 10%

Residue on 0.075 mm sieve — Maximum 10% 50%

Chemical requirements

Free lime content - Minimum 50% 80%

Hydrated lime content - Maximum ~ 5%

209 CEMENT‘ OR LIME TEATED MATERIALS

(a,- :3.-imples and sampling

Samoling of cement or lime treated materials shall -be carried

out as specified or as instructed by the Engineer.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.8

TABLE 2~3

SUMMARY OF THE CHEMICAL AND PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF

KS 02~2l
PORTLAND CEMENT
(ORDINARY AND RAPID-HARDENING)

CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

1. Lime Saturation Factor:

L.S.F.= (CaO) — 0.7 (s03)

2.8 (55.02) + 1.2 (A1203) + 0.65 (FeS03)

The L.S.F. should not be_greater than 1.02 and not less than 0.66. '
'3."«
§‘
ifi
Eh-.2-2'1"
2. Insoluble Residue: The weight of insoluble residue shall not exceed
3%. I
If a pozzolana_is added then the weight of insoluble residue I
1 I
shall not exceed (3 + 0.67P)% where P is the percentage by mass of I

. “.\'.I
n-
w:
pozzolana. I .1‘

3. Magnesium Oxide: The weight of magnesium oxide in the cement shall

not exceed 5%

4. Sulphuric Anhydride: The content of total sulphur in the cement,

expressed as S03, shall not exceed 3.5%.

5. Loss on Ignition: The total loss on ignition at 900° — l000°C shall

not exceed 5%.

6. Pozzolana: Not more than 15% by mass of pozzolana shall be added.

PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
ORDINARY RAPID
HRRDENING
l. SPECIFIC SURFACE
Minimum Specific Surface (I112/kg) 225 325
<r;gI‘.
r: .-"<u'. ‘-gs‘

2. COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
Minimum average compressive strength
of 3 mortar cubes(N/mmg) '
at 3 days 17.5 23.0
at 7 days 26.5 31.0
at 28 days 38.0 46.0

3. SETTING TIMES
Minimum initial setting time (min) 45 45
Maximum final setting time {hours}
10 10

4. SOUNDNESS
Maximum expansion (mm)
Unaerated cement 10 10
Aerated cement ‘
U‘! Li‘)
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCWON

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.9

Samples shall be_ prepared for testing ‘as indicated in Clause

'
1.5.3 of BS 1924, except that:

Samples containing particles larger than 20 mm shall be prepared

for" compaction and CBR tests as indicated in Clause 205 (a)
(ii). (The fraction coarser than 20 mm shall be ' rejected but
replaced by an equal weight of 5/20 mm material).

(b) Standard methods of testing

The tests on cement or lime treated materials shall be performed

— 1 and
in accordance with the standard methods given in Table 2

It is further specified that:

(i) Compaction tests: when cement is used, compaction must

start within one hour and be complete within two hours
after the start of mixing operations.

(ii) Determination of the Unconfined Compression Strength

(UCS): the specimens shall be statically compacted to a
predetermined density.

(iii) Determination‘ of the CBR: the specimens shall be

dynamically compacted with a 4.5 kg rammer, the number of
blows being governed by the relative compaction chosen
— Method 1). If it is required to
{Dynamic Compaction
soak the specimen, the mould shall be immersed in water to
allow free access of water to top and bottom of the
specimen. During soaking, the water level in the mould
and the soaking tank shall be maintained approximately 25
mm above the top of the specimen.

(iv) Curing and soaking temperature: during the curing and

soaking periods, the specimens shall be kept at a
—
temperature of 27°C :‘2°C.

210 CONCRETE

Sampling and testing -on concrete shall be carried out in accordance

with BS l88l:

Part 1 Methods of sampling fresh concrete

Part 2 Methods of testing fresh concrete
Part 3 Methods of making and curing test specimens
Part 4 Methods of testing concrete for strength
Part 5 Methods of testing hardened concrete for other
"ham strength,

It is further specified that the test specimens shall be cured at a

temperature of 2? °C -5.
2°C,

3148.
Water to be used in concrete shall be tested as specified in B5
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR -ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.10

mcflmmmm mnflwmmm

wow mmwmmwm wow mmflmmmm

H
mom wom monmmno om
awn» nmnu Amamflmwumfi
nmamwnmuma CM
mqmHmmamz
nmnv nun» voxuwz
wmwa mmma
I
vwcamnm
you mmma pom mmwa Umcflmum
Dmammma
wonuma
mmaa
£#H3 £#H3 nuws suw3 mmuno Andy
MEHQ COHPmCHEHwU®@
E5HwmE A
uowu wmfiou
Dam oemmmm
ozm N
Dam
mmAmAw;:m>o mm umma

mmmwnmpmzv mamflnmumzg mamwnmumzg mamwumamzv UHEmfl%Q

umwu
wH5fl mHOEV
.Am.m mcamv ESHUGEV
wmma
Q m Q no m
HZWEMU
H fim>mfim Am>mHm mmbwwm nm>wHm m ca Hm ma ma mcwxmomWH ma m mm
OH
EB EE SE EB
umme Uonumz m wonuwz m wozumz m vonumz m Dmma pmma umws #mmB umme #mmB umwe umwa fionumfl auflz

may mme omaa omfia mmma

mqm¢uHqm m 1Rvu.w1a.m.ut
.mHdwwooHm
wmma wmma wmma wmma wmma wmma wmma wmma vmma .
..
9..
umme mm oamw¢m oemmmm oemmmm oammmm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm oa:mm¢ .5_§.. u. . . . ., .J

mmmzamuomm
r.I1_H. uL\. w.L_
Amway
Emma

Flt‘.
\...

mwxmnoflumamu mwnmnofl pmflmn mwnmcofl pmamm

npmzmnum em.U.D

a£zOHBHQ m no
owwmm
.. usmumoo wgmucou ucmwcou
mo
w1m

Aumfifiwg Awmasmm w>HmmwHmEou mcflumwm

AHWEEDH coflmumafia %uHmGmQ
pzmwzou

mDm¢D_ mu mg mo #599900
mum
ucmuaoo
n,mw m.wv
:owumca%HmwmQ ®HflQwHOE mHS#wHOE1%uHwQ®Q mnsymaoztmuam wm m spmwoE1%uflm:Dm mmwumua bw wmcflmco mb uumwwm mwcmowflamo psmamw GEHQ Damfim
 ENANDARDSPBNHCAHONFORROADANDBHDGECKWBTRUCHON

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2311

211 . BITUMINOUS BINDERS

(a) Samples and sampling

Sampling of straight—run and cut-back bitumens shall be carried

out in accordance with AASHTO Method T40 (ASTM D 140).

Sampling of bitumen emulsion shall be carried out in accordance

with BS 434, except that where a delivery is made in drums or
barrels, the number of samples shall be as indicated in AASHTO
Sampling Method T40 para ll.l.

(b) Standard methods of testing

(i) Straight~run bitumen

Tests on straight—run bitumen shall be carried out in

accordance with the following test procedures:

Penetration AASHTO T49 (ASTM D 5)

Softening point (Ring and Ball) AASHTO T53 (ASTM D 2398)
Flash and fire points
(Cleveland open cup) AASHTO T48 (ASTM D 92)
Loss on heating AASHTO T47 (ASTM D 6)
Ductility AASHTO T51 (ASTM D ll3)
Water AASHTO T55 (ASTM D 95)
Thin film oven test AASHTO T179 (ASTM D 1754)
Solubility in organic solvents AASHTO T44 (ASTM D 2042)
Specific gravity AASHTO T228 (ASTM D 70)

(ii) Cut—back bitumen

Tests on cut~back bitumen shall be carried out in

accordance with the following test procedures:

Kinematic viscosity AASHTO T201 (ASTM D 2170)

Flash point (Tag open cup)(RC-MC) AASHTO T79 (ASTM D l3l0)
Flash point (Cleveland open cup)
(SC) AASHTO T48 (ASTM D 92)

Distillation AASHTO T78 (ASTM D 402)

Water AASHTO T55 (ASTM D 95)
Specific gravity AASHTO T228 (ASTM D 3142)
Asphalt residue of 100 pen (SC) (ASTM D 243)
Tests on residue from distillation
Penetration AASHTO T49 (ASTM D 5)
Ductility AASHTO T51 (ASTM D 113)
Solubility AASHTO T44 (ASTM D 2042)
STV viscosity BS 3235

igysmlorz: CONS!) ms» <3

L§BRAF?f“z’
STANDARD-SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.12

(iii) Bitumen emulsion

Tests ‘on bitumen emulsion shall be carried out in

accordance with BS 434 test procedures:

Residue on 0.710 mm sieve

Residue on 0.150 mm sieve
Stability to mixing with coarse aggregate
'
Stability to mixing with cement
Binder content
Engler viscosity
Redwood II viscosity"
Storage stability (short period)
Storage stability (long period)
Particle charge

(c) Requirements eeae

(i) General

Before any bituminous binder is delivered to the Site, the

Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a certificate
from the manufacturer that the material to be supplied
Complies in all respects with the relevant specification.

Any bituminous binder delivered in leaking or deteriorated

containers may be rejected. ewwa 4

(ii) Straight—run bitumen E

_”
Straight~run bitumens shall comply with all the
requirements given in Table 2-5. Q

(iii) Cut-back bitumen

Rapid—curing cut~backs shall comply with all the §
requirements of AASHTO Standard Specification M81 (ASTM D §d
, 2028).

Medium—curing cut—backs shall comply with all the

requirements of AASHTO Standard Specification M 82 (ASTM D
2027), except the cut~back 800/1400 which shall comply with
the following requirements:
";_.-i. -i *;T_-.' .

STV Viscosity at 40°C (lomm orifice) 80-180 seconds

.Distillation (% of total volume). fl
Distillate to 225°C 0 — 2%
Distillate to 315°C 3 -- 11%
Distillate to 360°C 13% maximum
Penetration on residue from
distillation at 360°C
(250°~l00g—5s} 80 M 200 Zfi mlmm
Specific gravity at 15°C 0,92 » lfi04
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.13

I
mw
com
I I
m.o
om mm
hm com ooa
oom\omH_ oma mo.HIo .H

Goa mm
I I m.o
am .mm
mam ooa
ooaxom cm mw mo.HIo .H

on mm
I I m.o
am mm
ZMEDBHM
omm cod
onxom oo mw mo.HImo.H
ZDM

em ow
I I ~.o
mm
emwammaw omm ooa
om
omxow ow mm wo.HIHo.H
mom

em me
I I
om
N.o
om mm
omm
emxom om mm ho.HINo.H

zoHamuHmHum m
H
“gas.
mIm Aflfifiv ncflav fimflav a
no
on an Axmfiv
nwm
mamas
uowmdu mmoa
e~.o.flm
Aaamm
mwmnw wfioomma
ammo EOHM Hmflpficfl
wan owfluoasompump
pm
mo Uomm
mImo HV £
w
nm
maflmv my
omm mswflwwn
conumu
oomm
soflumnw cm um wdmfi wbmauy mo
ca
uzflam pm
%#H?mmm
mmflwmmz flmmImo a.
pqaom
:0

soflumaum m mgwnmumom nmmam mufl afiwonm mmou soflwmu mcm mcaymmfl Uflwflummm mufl a fl awaom
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.14 E E

Slow curing cut—backs shall comply with all the

requirements of AASHTO Standard Specification M 141 (ASTM D
°
2026).

(iv) Bitumen emulsion

Bitumen emulsions shall comply with all the requirements of

BS 434.

2l2 BITUMINOUS MIXES

(a) Samples and sampling

Sampling of bituminous mixtures shall be ‘carried out in

accordance with AASHTO Method T168 (ASTM D 979).
."-if

(b) Standard methods of testing E

Tests on bituminous mixtures shall be carried out in accordance

E EE
with the following test procedures: E

Moisture and volatile distillates AASHTO T110 (ASTM D 1461) E

Quantitative extraction of bitumen AASHTO T164 (ASTM D 2172) g I
Specific gravity of compacted E
mixture AASHTO T166 (ASTM D 1188
and D 2726) p
Recovery of bitumen from solution AASHTO T170 (ASTM D 1856) i
Coating and stripping AASHTO T182 (ASTM D 1664)
Degree of particle coating AASHTO T195 (ASTM D 2489) 3
Coating and stripping i
g
(with adhesion agent) (ASTM D 2727)
'
Maximum specific gravity AASHTO T209 (ASTM D 2041) _
Degree of pavement compaction . AASHTO T230 E
Marshall stability AASHTO T245 (ASTM D 1559) 3
Hubbard~Field stability (ASTM D 1138)
g I
213 REINFORCING STEEL g f

Hot—rolled steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete shall comply —a

with BS 4449

Cold~worked steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete shall comply

with BS 4461

Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete, shall comply with BS

4483

Ix) E..J :32- PRESTRESSING STEEL

2591. Steei
Steel wire for prestressed concrete shall comply with BB
strands for prestressed concrete shall comply with E8 3617 (seven
wire strand) or BS 4757 (nineteenwwire strand)

Hotwroiled and hotmrolled and processed high tensile alloy steel bars
for the prestressing of concrete shall comply with E8 44869
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.15

215 CONCRETE PIPES AND FITTINGS

(a) Concrete pipes shall comply with the "requirements of BS 5911

Parts 1 and 3.

(b) Concrete for concrete pipes shall be Class 39/10 as specified in

Section 17 of this Specification.

(C) The pipes shall have flexible_joints in accordance with BS 5911

——_-3. . Part_l or ogee joints in accordance with BS 5911 Part 3.

.,.
(ti) Reinforcement may be inserted in the pipes to strengthen them
for handling, but the size, spacing and placing of reinforcement
—,—:.» .r_u
shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

(e) All concrete shall be compacted either by spinning or Vibrating.

(f) All concrete pipes shall be cured by keeping them saturated with
water for at least seven days after casting and.protected from
the sun and drying winds for at least fourteen days after
casting. No pipe shall be used in the- work until it is
twenty-one days old. The date of casting shall be painted on
the barrel.

A minimum of 10% (ten per cent) of the pipes shall be tested

from initial batches prepared by the Contractor and thereafter
the frequency of testing shall he decided by the Engineer.

All pipes shall be capable of supporting the works proofloads

set out in Table 2 of BS 5911 Part l for Class M pipes when
tested in accordance with Paragraph 25u4 of BS 5911 Part 1.

A set of six concrete cubes shall he made for each day's

manufacturing of concrete pipes. Where the crushing strength
does not reach the Class 30 requirement, or if pipes appear
sub-standard the Engineer may order the above load tests on a
set of three pipes from the suspect batch.

Concrete pipes for use in subsoil drains shall be one of the

(9')
following;

(i) porous concrete pipes to BS ll§4;

(ii) concrete pipes to BS 59ll Parts l and_3 with a maximum

length of 1.5 m laid with open joints.

216 METAL PIPES AND ARCHES

Corrugated metal pipe culverts shall b’I14 I‘‘‘* L5 accordance with

.-«—. £1: \-_

AASHTO Specification M 36 ~ 82.

Structural plate for pipe, pipemarches and arches shall he in

accordance with AASHTG Specification M 167.
 ' _v

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOFI ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

'i;

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.16

-.'.

217 PAINTS FOR STRUCTURES_

(a) Paint for structural steelwork ‘C

(i) Red lead priming paint

"
2523. The
Lead based priming paints shall comply with B.S.
composition of lead based priming paint shall be one of the
following:
‘

Red lead (Type C) complying ,with BS 2l7~78% to

Type A:
82%. Remainder as specified in BB 2523.

This type of paint should only be selected when

it is intended.to use it within four weeks of
manufacture.

Type B: Red lead (Type C) complying with BS 217 - 60%

min. Remainder as specified in ES 2523
1&1-‘: r.a'.;-:J‘q

complying with BS 217 2 —

Type C: Red lead {Type C)
2 ~
parts; White lead complying with BS 239
parts; Asbestine complying with BS 1795 5 1 _;" '-“-'=‘W'f-
~
part. These three ingredients shall make 77
82%. The remainder as specified in ES 2523.

Type B and C are suitable for storage for a reasonable

period and shall be selected when the paint is not due to

be used within four weeks of manufacture.

(ii) Bituminous aluminium paint

a type approved by
Bituminous aluminium paint shall be of
the Engineer.

(iii) Other paints

All other paints used in the Works shall be subject to

approval by the Engineer.

(b) Paint for road signs

and
Road signs, posts and fittings shall be prepared,
treated
Parts 2,6
painted in accordance with the requirements of BS 873,
and 7.

218 PAINT FOR ROAD MARKING

{a} General requirements

for road surface marking shall he

The paint to be used
for such purposes. lt shall be
specifically manufactured
Spraying equipment
suitable for applying by brush, 10 w pressure
The paint shall be
and high pressure spraying equipment.
I I
etnerwlsa " “difled.
reflectoriaed unless .Ji3C"
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.17

The paint shall be of a type approved by the Engineer, and if

not on the current approved list, samples shall be submitted to
the Engineer at least 6 months prior to its proposed use.

(b)_ Colour

(i) White

‘The colour of white markings shall be BS Colour No. GUESS

of BS 4800.

The pigment used for white materials shall be titanium

dioxide Type A (Anatase) or Type R (Rutile) complying with
—
.BS 1851.

(ii) Yellow

The colour of yellow markings shall be to BS Colour N0.

08E5l of BS 4800.

(c) Drying time

The drying time allowed shall be as specified by the

manufacturer, subject to the touch dry condition being
reached in a maximum of 15 minutes.

(d) Reflectorization

(i) Non—reflectorized

Paint specified to be non—reflectorized shall have minimum

reflective brightness values, as compared to magnesium
for white 80% and for yellow (using a
oxide (MgO) Of,
yellow filter of 580D°A) 65%.

(ii) Internal reflectorization

Internally reflectorized paint shall be specifically

manufactured for this purpose and shall contain ballotini
beads to BS 6088. g The ballotini shall be reasonably
spherical and free {from flaws, and of a size suitable for
this method of reflectorization, subject to a maximum size
of 0.5 mm.

(iii) Surface reflectorization

reflectorization of the paint shall be by

Surface
application of ballotini beads to ES 6088 to the wet paint
film» The ballotini shall be reasonably spherical and
this method or
free from flaws and or a size suitable for
reflectorization, subject to a maximum nominal size of 0.8
mm,.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION.

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.18

219 HOT-APPLIED THERMOPLASTIC MATERIAL FOR ROAD MARKING

an
(a) General requirements

The material for hot—applied thermoplastic "paint" for road

'
marking shall be in accordance with BS 3262: Part l.

The material shall be of a type approved by the Engineer, and if

not on the current approved list, samples shall be submitted to
the Engineer at least 6 months prior to the proposed use.

(b) Colour

(i) White

The colour of white markings shall be BS Colour No 00E55

of BS 4800.

(ii) Yellow

The colour of yellow markings shall be to BS Colour No.

08E5l of BS 4800.

(c) Composition

The thermoplastic material shall consist of light coloured

aggregate, and
pigment extender bound together with resin
plasticized with oil as necessary, in approximately the
'
following proportions:

Aggregate, including ballotini: 60%

Pigment and extender: 20%
Binder: 20% '
.1
§¢'a’;‘ _'_».',€; ii”

The maximum size of the aggregate shall be 2 mm. 5

The softening point of the_binder shall be 45° — 50°C. wr‘r ':r.«. : t_

(d) Reflectorization

Reflectorization shall be by ballotini beads to BS 6088, which

shall make up approximately 20% of the total mix, and shall be
treated as part of the aggregate. The ballotini shall be
9!-_'- ._:__
reasonably spherical and free from flaws and of a size suitable
for this method of reflectorization, subject to a maximum size
of 2 mm.

REFLECTIVE MATERIALS ON ROAD SIGNS

The reflective material, applied to the sign plate, shall give

when
the appearance of a continuous reflecting surface under any angle of
observation, It shall consist of a smooth exterior film with
spherical lenses embedded beneath the surface, and shall have a
protected, precoated adhesive backing which shall be tack=free,
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
'
MATERIALS AND TESTING or MATERIALS Page 2.19

heat—activated. for ‘ mechanical vacuumwheat application. The

combination of various elements shall result in a non-exposed lens
type optical reflecting system. The reflective material shall be
applied as per the instructions from the manufacturer of the
retro—reflective material used.

The reflective material shall comply with the following

specifications:

(a) Reflective brightness

The minimum coefficient of luminous intensity CIL (Coefficient

d‘Intensite Lumineuse) of the reflective sign surface, when
illuminated by CIE Standard Illuminant A (colour temperature. of
3l27°C), shall be as specified in Table 2~6.' The response of
the photoelectric receiver shall be corrected to the colour
'
sensitivity of the average photopic human eye.

The brightness of the reflective material totally wet by rain

shall be not less than 90% of the above values.

(b) Weather resistance

The reflective surface of the sign shall be weather resistant

and shall show no appreciable cracking, blistering, crazing or
dimensional changes after 2 years unprotected outdoor exposure
at 450 upwards inclination to the vertical facing West in
Nairobi or Mombasa in accordance with approved testing
procedures conducted _by Ministry of Transport and
Communications, Materials Branch. After cleaning, the CIL
values of the reflective surface shall then be not less than 80%
of the values given in Table 2~6, and the colours shall still
conform to the specified requirements.

(C) Bonding strength

when reflective surfaces are laminated to the base materials,

the adhesion shall be such that the reflective material shall
resist peeling, scuffing and marring during the normal handling
or shocking ‘off when jabbed with a spatula at ~20°C. It shall
withstand 8 hours_ of soaking in water .at 25°C without any_
noticeable edge lifting or curling.’ The adhesive shall have no
' The adhesive shall
staining effect on the reflective material.
permit the reflective material to adhere securely 48 hours after
application at temperatures between ~20°C and + 93°C.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS AND_TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.20

TABLE 2-6: CIL FOR REFLECTIVE SIGNS

ANGLE OF MINIMUM CIL VALUE 3

' Candelas per hex per m2 I
E
I
DIVERGENCE INCIDENCE WHITE YELLOW RED GREEN BLUE E
$
+ ++

0.2° 5° 70 50 14.5 9.0 4.0 g

30° 30 22 6.0 3.5 1.7
'
40° 12 10 2.7 1.5 0.7 i

03
0.33” 5° 50 35 10.0 7.0 3.0
' 30° 24 10 4.0 3.0 1.0 ‘g
40° 9 6 1.8 1.2 0.4
$6‘
&.

0.5° 5° 30 25 7.5 4.5 2.0 g

30° 15 13 3.0 2.2 0.8 Q
40° 7 5 1.4 1.1 0.3

2° 5° 4 6 1.0 1.0 0.6

30° 2 2.5 0.5 0.4 0.1 ¢
40° 1.5 1.3 0.3 0.2 0.06
%_

+ Divergence-Angle ~ The angle between the line formed by a i;

I
light beam striking the surface and
the line formed by its reflected light.

++ Incidence Angle - ~ The angle between a light beam

striking a surface at a point and the
line perpendicular to the surface at V _
Rik the same point. i,I
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONFOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.21

(d) Flexibility

when bent around a 20 mm diameter mandrel at a temperature of

20°C, the reflective material applied to an aluminium _panel of
0.5 mm thickness shall show no evidence of cracking around the
outside of the bend. After flattening out, the CIL values shall
be not less than those given in Table 2-6.

(e) Impact resistance

When a25 mm diameter steel ball is dropped from 2 metres height

onto the reflective face of the sign specimen at an ambient
temperature of 20°C, the reflective material around the impact
point shall Show no evidence of cracking or peeling off. The
CIL values of the impact area shall be not less than those given
in Table 2~6.

(f) Solvent resistance and cleaning

After immersion of a specimen of reflective sign material for 10

minutes in methyl alcohol, kerosene or turpentine, or for 1
minute in toluol or xylol, the reflective material shall show no
evidence of dissolving, puckering or blistering. The reflective
material shall be capable of withstanding washing with a mixture
of water and mild detergent, turpentine and methanol. The
reflective surface shall be such as to be readily refurbished by
cleaning and clear overcoating in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.

22l COLOURS FOR ROAD SIGNS

Standard colours to be used for signs, posts and fittings shall be as

described in the relevant BS as follows:
' as 381C No. 537
Red
Blue _ BS 4800 No l8 E 53
Yellow BS 381C No. 355
Green for primary route signs BS 4800 No. 14 C 39
Grey for posts, fittings and
backs of signs ES 4800 No. 10 A ll
Cream BS 381C No. 352
White ES 873 Part l w Clause l~3 3 2
Black BS 873 Part l ~ Clause l~3»3

222 WATERPROOF PAPER

Waterproof paper to be used under concrete slabs and foundations

shall comply with BS 1521 for Waterproof Building Paper, Class B, and
shall have fibrous reinforcement.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS AND-TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.22

223 GALVANIZED COATINGS

N

Galvanized coatings on iron and steel shall comply with the following
standards as appropriate:—

Galvanized coatings on corrugated sheets BS 3083 EEI

Galvanized coatings on iron and steel BS 729
Galvanized coatings on steel sheet and strip BS 2989
Galvanized coatings on wire BS 443

224 TRIALS TO CONFIRM COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS

(a) Laboratory trials

Laboratory trials shall be carried out by the Contractor and the g {

Engineer on earthwork and pavement materials which are to be ggg
used in the Works in their natural state to establish a I
relationship between their specified end product requirements §
and properties which can be readily determined in the field for Egg
construction control purposes.

Laboratory trial mixes and site trials for bituminous mixes

shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of
Section 16 of this Specification.

For mixed materials the composition which meets the specified gfiI
requirements and is accepted by the Engineer shall then be used
in the site trials carried out in accordance with Clause 224{b) g
g
pl’
to establish that all specified requirements of the completed
pavement course can be achieved. §@

The laboratory trials on mixed materials shall be undertaken, g

and the Contractor's proposals based thereon submitted to the gg
Engineer, at least two weeks before the Contractor proposes to =
use the mixed material in the site trials in accordance with g
pL? 5.
Clause 224(b). ii:
(b) site trials

Full scale laying and compaction site trials shall .be carried _r,-»r.v .«=.v-_

out by the Contractor on all earthwork and pavement materials

proposed for the Works using the constructional plant and
methods proposed by the Contractor for constructing the Works. r;é.I —r:+‘;:- ~'._

The trials shall be carried out with the agreement, and in the
presence of the Engineer.
_:'~j1'—',~'.-_Jr:g

The trials shall be carried out to enable the Contractor to

demonstrate the suitability of his mixing and compaction
equipment to provide and compact the material to the specified
density and to confirm that the other specified requirements of
the completed earthwork or pavement layer can be achieved.
 .-

—:.1» ;.—_;-X3-;, .

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

.7—\._“.,_.

MATERIALS AND TESTING or MATERIALS Page 2.23

Each trial area shall be at least lO0 metres long and to the
full construction width and shall be laid.to the specified depth
for the material. ‘It may form part of the Works provided it
complies with this Specification. Any areas which do not comply
with this Specification shall be removed and a new trial shall
be laid.

The Contractor shall allow in his programme for conducting site

trials and for carrying out the appropriate tests on them. The
trial on each pavement layer shall be undertaken at least 21
days ahead of the Contractor proposing to commence
' full scale
work on that layer.

The Contractor shall compact each section of trial over the

range of compactive effort the Contractor is proposing and if
appropriate, the following data shall be recorded for each level
of compactive effort at each site trial:—

(i) The composition and.grading of the material before the site

trial.

(ii) The composition and grading of the material including the

cement, lime or bitumen content.

(iii) The moisture content at the time of compaction and the

optimum moisture content for the specified compaction.

(iv) The type, size, tyre pressures, frequency of vibration and

the number of passes of the compaction equipment.

(V) The maximum dry density or target density as appropriate

measured on a sample before and at intervals through the
site trials.

(vi) Theadensity achieved.

(vii) The compacted thickness of the layer.

(viii) any other relevant information as directed by the Engineer.

At least eight sets of tests shall be made by the Contractor and

100 metres of trial for each level of
the Engineer on each
compactive effort and provided all eight sets of results over
by the Contractor meet
the range of compactive effort proposed
the specified requirements for the material the site trial shall
be deemed successful. The above data recorded in the trial
shall become the agreed basis on which the particular material
shall be provided and processed to achieve the specified
requirements.

If, during the execution of the Works, the construction control

the requirements for a material are not
tests indicate that
being consistently achieved, then work on that layer shall stop
until the cause is investigated by the Contractor. Such
investigation may include further laboratory and site trials on
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION. .
3.
MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.24
iii;

the material to determine a revised set of data as above which,

when agreed, shall be the basis on which all subsequent material i
will be provided and. processed to achieve the specified 5
requirements.
%
Agreement by the Engineer to a set of data recorded in a site trial
shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to comply with $3‘
a
the requirements of this Specification and the Special Specification.

225 CONSTRUCTION CONTROL TESTING FOR EARTHWORK LAYERS, PAVEMENT LAYERS, Eg

AND BACKFILL TO DRAINAGE WORKS AND STRUCTURES

All earthwork and pavement layers and backfill to drainage works and 9-,:-.
.:

structures will be subject to construction control testing by the

Engineer, and the Contractor must allow for any disturbance or delays
to the sequence of his operations occasioned by such control testing. "'-‘
_?C‘:-'
,a_'a_—,+_-'e7='¥r2

The Contractor shall request, in writing, the Engineer's approval for

each layer of each section of earthworks and pavement construction
and backfill to drainage works and structures. Such requests shall
be made only when the Contractor is fully satisfied that the section
of the ‘work concerned is in the condition required by this
Q
Specification. Such requests shall be accompanied by the test §§=
results required by Clause 202 of this Specification.
- F
The Engineer shall thereupon without undue delay inspect the section gy
for any visible wet spots, laminations, heaving material (visible 7~‘JI'.7i.‘-

during compaction or on proofrolling), segregation, and for the

uniformity of the mixing and compaction. Providing the visual E
aspects are satisfactory the Engineer shall test the section of the in.
works submitted and inform the Contractor in writing of the results
of the tests at the same time accepting or rejecting the section or
layer concerned.

Work on layers shall in no circumstances commence until the preceding ..-(

$3‘
layer has been approved and_accepted by the Engineer in writing. The 5}
a..
Contractor is wholly responsible for protecting and maintaining the gv

condition of the work which has been submitted for approval. b

Should any layer be left unprotected for" more than 24 hours ,4'r:v-:4"-:3:-1
subsequent to approval the Contractor shall request reapproval of the
layer and the layer will again be subject to proofrolling,
construction control testing, and tolerance checks in accordance with
:'—’.~‘: —:'—'.-2'-1.2 ;'
this Specification.

Notwithstanding the Engineer's approval of a layer, the Contractor : ,«‘2

shall be responsible for making good any subsequent damage due to a.

traffic, ingress waterof or any other reason and should any damage -
occur ihe layer will again be subject to oroofrolling, construction
control testing and tolerance checks in accordance with this
Specification.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.25

226 FREQUENCY OF TESTING

If a nuclear method is used for determining the wet density, tests

will be done at least at the same frequency required when using the
sand replacement method_ but at each nuclear densometer test location
the average of three readings taken at positions rotated by 900 will
be used. A check/comparison test using the sand replacement method
will be carried out at a 10 test interval.

Initial calibration of the nuclear density testing equipment will be

done by carrying out at least fifty tests in-parallel with the sand
replacement method for each different material encountered. The
check tests will be used to update the initial calibration of the
nuclear density testing equipment.

(i) Original ground

The AASHTO T99 MDD and OMC shall be determined for each new
material encountered, and at intervals of at least once per
1000 m2 of each layer of compacted ground but at a maximum
interval of 50 m along the alignment.

(ii) Bulk earthworks

The AASHTO T99 MDD and OMC shall be determined for each new
material encountered, and at intervals of at least once per
'l50 m3 of compacted material placed. The field dry density
shall be determined at least once per 150 m3 of compacted
material placed or at least three tests per section, whichever
is the more frequent.

(iii) Upper 300mm of earthworks

The AASHTO T99 MDD and OMC shall be determined for each new
material encountered, and at intervals of at least once per
500 m2 of each layer of compacted subgrade .

The field dry density shall be determined at least once per

250 m2 of each layer of compacted subgrade but with a minimum
of three tests per section.

The soaked CERT of material in the upper 300 mm of earthworks

shall be determined at least once per 500 m2 of each layer.

(iv) Backfill/fill to culverts and structures (including excavated

surface to receive culvert or structure)

The AASHTO T99 MDD and OMC shall be determined for each new
material encountered.

The field dry density shall be determined at least twice per

10 m3 of material placed and compacted but with a minimum of
two tests per sectiona
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS.AND_TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2.26

(v) Gravel wearing course

The AASHTO T180 MDD and OMC shall be determined for each new
material encountered and at intervals of at least once per 400
m2 of each layer of compacted material.

The field dry density shall be determined at least once per

200 m2 of "each layer of compacted material but with a minimum
of three tests per section.

The soaked CBR and Plasticity Index of material used for

gravel wearing course shall be determined on opening up each
new source of material and at least once per 150 m3 of
compacted material ‘taken from that source. The grading of the
material shall be determined at least once per 300 m3 of
compacted material.

(vi) Natural materials in subbase and base

The AASHTO T180 MDD and OMC shall be determined for each new
source of subbase or base course material used and at
intervals of at least once per 400 m2 of each layer of
compacted subbase or base course laid.

The field dry density shall be determined at least once per

200 m2 of each layer of compacted subbase or base but with a flame
minimum of three tests per section.

subbase an
The soaked CBR and Plasticity Index of gravel used for
a’«5.'3."?r5'7
or base shall be determined on opening up each new source of
gravel and at least once per 75 m3 of compacted gravel taken
from that source»
seam
The ACV and LAA of a gravel used for base and subbase shall be
determined on opening up each new source of gravel and
whenever the Engineer considers that its quality may have
altered. The grading and Plasticity Modulus shall be
determined at least as often as the CBR.

(vii) Crushed stone subbase and base

The MDD (Vibrating Hammer Method) and the Specific Gravity of

the graded crushed stone shall be determined at least once per g
400 m2 of each layer of compacted subbase or base course laid.

The field dry density shall be determined at least once per

200 mg of each layer of compacted subbase or base but with a
minimum of three tests per section.

The LAA, ACV, SSS and CR shall be determined on opening up and

crushing material from each new source for subbase or base and
whenever the Engineer considers that the material has altered.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONS-T_RUCTIOi\I

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2»27

The grading, .PI and F1 of crushed material for subbase or base

shall be determined at least once per 500 m3 of material
prodficed.

(viii) Cement or lime treated materials in subgrade, subbase and base

The AASHTO T99 MDD and OMC shall be determined for each new
treated material used for subgrade and at intervals of at
least once per 400 m2 of each layer of compacted subgrade.

The AASHTO T180 MDD and OMC shall be determined for each new
treated material used for subbase or base and at intervals of
at least once per 400 m2 of each layer of compacted treated
subbase or base layer.

The field dry density shall be determined at least once per

200_ m2 of each layer of compacted treated subgrade, subbase or
base course, but with a minimum of three tests per section.

The following properties shall be determined on opening up of

each new source, and when in the opinion of the Engineer the
nature of the material has changed, and once per 300 m3 of
subbase or base laid and compacted:—

Grading
Atterberg Limits
CBR or UCS as indicated in the Special Specification.

(ix) Bituminous surface treatments and surface dressing

(a) Aggregates, sand, gravel

The properties listed below, as appropriate to the type

of surface treatment specified, shall be determined on
opening up of each new source and when the Engineer
considers that the properties may have altered:—

FI
AAA
ACV
SSS
PI
Sand Equivalent
ALD

The properties listed below, as appropriate to the type

of surface treatment specified, shall be determined twice
daily when surfacing dressing or slurry seal work is in
progresszm

Fl
Grading
Angularity
Cleanliness
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS AND TESTING or MATERIALS Page 2.28

PI_
’
Deleterious Matter .
Spread Rate (Tray Test)
Sand Equivalent

(1)) Binder

Compliance with Clause 211 of this Specification shall be

determined at least once per 20,000 litres delivered to

Binder spray rate shall be determined once per section

sprayed. The rate of application of slurry seal shall be V"
fif
determined once per load of slurry applied.

(x) Bituminous mixes $6

(a) Aggregates

The aggregate properties listed below, as appropriate to @$

the type of mix specified, shall be determined on opening
up of each "new source of aggregate, and whenever the
Engineer considers that the aggregate properties may have %?“”
altered:—
5
Grading fig
'. -.\‘.*
LAA

ACV
sss
Fl $5‘
CR
Sand Equivalent
Uniformity Coefficient
Atterberg Limits
Soluble Salts and Deleterious Matter
E E
Real and apparent Specific Gravity and Absorption in gfli
the mixed aggregate MT
Voids *
g
. i
The grading of cold feed mixed aggregates shall ‘be is
determined at least once per day during mixing.

(b) Mineral filler $9

The grading and bulk density in toluene shall be
determined once per 100 tonnes of filler used, and when
v.—;+.-;—';:.-_,:;-
the source of filler is changed.

r""\ G \-.2
Bituminous mixture {from the mixing plant) 5

The properties of the bituminous mixture, as appropriate

to the type of mix specified shall be determined every 4
hours or part thereof of mixing time on samples taken
from the mixing plant:w
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOFI ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS Page 2529

Bitumen Content
Grading
Marshall Stability
Flow
Voids
Absorbed Water

(d) Bituminous mixture (on cores from the compacted layer)

The properties of the bituminous mixture, as appropriate

to the type of mix specified, shall be determined at
least once for every 1000 m2 of mix laid from core
samples cut from the compacted layer:—

Bitumen Content
Grading
Density
Voids

227 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

No separate measurement and payment will be made for testing of

materials, trials and construction control testing and the Contractor
shall be deemed to have allowed in his rates and.prices for the cost
of complying with the requirements of Section 2 of this Specification.
 SECTSON 3
SETTING 0%}? AND TOLERANCES
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

SETTING OUT AND TOLERANCES Page 3.1

301 SETTING OUT

(a) General

The Engineer
will provide sufficient basic survey information to
enable the Contractor to set out the Works and the Contractor
shall be responsible for setting out all necessary reference
points and for the maintenance thereof.

The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the accuracy in line,

level .and dimension of the basic survey and setting out details
provided and should the Contractor discover any error in the
information provided by the Engineer, he should at once notifyv
the Engineer. If the information is confirmed to be in error
the Engineer will issue‘ amended drawings or instructions
regarding the correction of the error.

Prior to commencing construction, the Contractor shall establish

the road reserve boundary posts in accordance with Clause 2001
of this Specification or if no boundary posts are instructed
then the Contractor shall establish reference points to define
the road reserve at 100 m intervals on both sides.

The Contractor shall establish temporary benchmarks along the

road at intervals not exceeding 200 m and shall provide the
Engineer with a schedule of their levels and locations.

The Contractor shall not remove, damage, alter or destroy in any

way plot beacons or survey beacons of the Survey of Kenya.
Should the Contractor consider that any. beacon will be
interfered with by the Works he shall notify the Engineer who,
if he considers necessary, will make arrangements for the
removal and replacement of the beacon.

If the. Contractor_ removes or disturbs a: beacon without

permission of the Engineer, he shall be liable for the full cost
of its replacement and a fine under the Survey Ordinance, l95l,
or any subsequent amendment.

(b) Detailed setting out

In addition to the requirements of Clause 30l{a)§ the Contractor

shall set out the line and level of the Works at intervals of
not more that 25 m or such lesser intervals as are required to
construct the Works to the tolerances specified in Clause 302 of
this Specification. Reference pegs and batter rails clearly and
indelibly marked with all the relevant information shall be
provided clear of the road and at right angles to it from which
the centreline, level and batter slope can be directly
established at any time. These shall be maintained by the
Contractor for as long as they are needed to check the work”
 ig-'
R
if
.‘.‘
Q‘

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

SETTING OUT AND TOLERANCES Page 3.2

After completion- of the setting out and site clearance the

Contractor shall take ground cross sections at intervals of 25 m
along the road centreline and along the centreline of all
culverts and structures. These shall be plotted to a natural
scale of 1:100 on a stable transparent material and a copy of
the plot submitted to the Engineer for agreement. If the
Contractor fails to take requisite levels, levels determined by
the Engineer shall be taken as correct.

The Contractor shall programme for a period of 30 days between

submitting the ground cross—sections and being issued with final
road, culvert and structure levels. A minimum 5 km section of
road shall be submitted but where the Contractor submits
cross—sections for more than 10 km of road within the same 30
day period the initial 30 day period shall be extended by 30
days forwyeach additional 10 kms or part thereof . Final road,
culvert or structure levels will be determined by the Engineer
and may be different from the levels shown on the Drawings.

On receipt of the final road levels the Contractor shall mark up

the-details on the transparencies and the original and one print
of the cross—sections shall be provided free of charge by the é
Contractor for the Engineer.

On completion of the earthworks but before starting formation or

pavement layers the Contractor shall establish steel pins at a
constant offset to the edges of the carriageway shoulders. The
offset may however vary between sections in cut and those in
fill. The steel pins will be clearly and indelibly marked -with
all the relevant information necessary to directly establish the
centreline and level at any point across the carriageway by
using either boning rods or a string line.

The interval between pins shall not be more than 1295 m and the
pins shall be maintained by the Contractor for as long as they
are needed by the Engineer to check the work»

1..
302 TOLERANCES

(a) Horizontal alignments ‘

,-.'_.-7_’A".-

Horizontal alignments shall be determined from the centreline

of the pavement surface as shown on or calculated _from the
5, .-_4",»_.",a’.=-‘e,
Drawings. The centreline of the pavement surface as
constructed, and all other parallel alignments, shall be correct
within a tolerance of i_l3 mm therefrom. »;;_-9

{h} Thickness of pavement layers

The average thickness of any pavement layer measured at five

points in any length of 100 m shall not be less than l00% nor
more than l2U% of the thickness specified or Ordered by the
Engineer. In addition the thickness of any pavement layer
measured at any point shall not be less than 98% nor more than
"“
_.. .~'. .4‘ "'3
1 tho
./.1... ... " th‘ckness specified or ordered by the Engineer,
 ,
STANDARD SPEC!FiCAT!QN FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION‘
“—- .-4.v;-.

SETTING OUT AND TOLERANCES Page 3.3

(c) Surface levels of pavement layers and formation

The level measured at any point on the‘ surface of a pavement

layer or the formation level shall not deviate from the
corresponding level calculated from the Drawings by more than
~ 1.
the tolerances shown in Table 3

For Checking compliance with Table 3 w 1 measurements of surface

Engineer at
levels will be taken at points_to be selected by the
l2.5m centres longitudinally and at 2 m centres transversely.
At junctions, the grid point spacings shall be determined by the
Engineer.

(<3) surface regularity

The surface regularity of pavement layers and the formation

shall be tested at points decided by the Engineer with a rigid,
steel straightedge 3 m long placed parallel to or at right
angles to the centreline of the road. The maximum allowable
deviation of the surface below the straightedge shall be as
given in Table 3 ~ 1.

shall
In addition the longitudinal slope or transverse crossfall
the
not deviate from that shown on the Drawings by more than
- 1.
tolerances shown in Table 3

(e) Shoulders

thickness, level and

Shoulders shall be constructed to the same
surface regularity requirements as for the adjacent pavement
layers.

Table 3—l

LAYER LEVEL ST RAI GI-IT SLOPE OR

__ EDGE CROSSFALL
mm mm %

Bituminous Wearing Course il0 6 :_0.25

Bituminous Binder Course :}0 6 :_0;25

Base filo 6 i 0.25

:l5 l0 :_D.5U
Subbase

j}5 15 :_Dob0
Gravel Wearing Course

+ 0 20 + 0950
Eermation
~50
 STANDARD SPEC|FiCATIO.N FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

SETTING OUT AND TOLERANCES Page 3.4

(f) Cutting and embankment slopes 2

In the final trimmed slope of cuttings a tolerance of + 0.25 Eg

will be permitted, i.e. if a slope of l in 2 is specified, the -
acceptable slope shall be not steeper than 1 in 2 or slacker
than 1 in 2.25. W
Ef

In the final trimmed slopes of embankments, a tolerance of +0.25

will be permitted, i.e. if the specified slope is l in 2, the
acceptable slope shall be not steeper than 1 in 2 or slacker
than 1 in 2.25. ' '

A
(g) Width of cuttings and embankments
V

The tolerance permitted in the width of the bottom of cuttings

shall be 200 mm between the centreline of the road and the toe fig
of the cutting slope.

The width of embankments measured as the horizontal distance

from the centreline of the road to the top of the embankment
shall not be less than that shown on the Drawings or more than
g
that shown on the Drawings plus 0.25 m.
@f
(h) Depth of side drains

The depth of side drains measured as the vertical height

difference from the centreline of the finished pavement and the
invert of the side drain shall not be less than that shown on
the Drawings nor more than that shown on the Drawings plus _
0.15 m. *R

(i) Construction control testing E

‘.1-
‘.¢:‘- .

Unless otherwise directed values given in this Specification are

minimum Values and the workmanship will only be considered as p
satisfactory if all tests, taken at the frequency specified in gp
% Section 2 of this Specification are at least equal to that ‘M_
specified in the relevant section. §.§

303 RECTIFICATION OF EARTHWORKS AND PAVEMENT LAYERS OUTSIDE PERMITTED E

TOLERANCES

Where any tolerances in Clause 302 are exceeded, the Contractor shall $3
determine the full extent of the area which is out of tolerance and
shall make good the surface of the pavement course, earthworks or
formation in the manner described below,

(a) Earthworks

Where a cutting slope is steeper, and an embankment slope is

slacker, than the specified slope then the slope shall be
trimmed to the specified slope» Where a cutting slope in
slacker, and an embankment slope is steeper, than the specified
slope then the slope s ll be benched and fill material placed
and compacted and the slope sh "
.\H1 Lvs
I
trimmed all in accordance
with the requirements of Section 5 of this Specification.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

SETTING OUT AND TOLERANCES Page 3.5

Where ‘the a cutting is less than, and the width of an

width of
embankment more than, the specified width then the cutting or
embankment shall be trimmed to the specified width. Where the
width of a cutting is more than, and the width of an embankment
is less than, the specified width then the embankment or cutting
_ shall be benched and fill material placed and compacted and the
slopes shall be trimmed all in accordance with the requirements
of Section 5 of this Specification.

Where the depth of a side drain is less than specified the

that
side drain shall be trimmed to the specified depth. Where the
depth of a side drain is more than specified the side drain
shall be backfilled with fill material compacted to a dry
density of at least 95% MDD (AASHTO T99) up to the specified
depth.

Where the results of the construction control tests are less

than that specified the full depth of the layer shall be
reworked to specification. The area treated shall he the whole
section submitted for approval or, following a retest, a length
of. at least 50 m both sides of each test and retest failure or
such area to be determined by the Engineer as necessary to
obtain compliance with this Specification.

(b) The 300 mm layer below formation level

Where the levels or widths are out of tolerance then the full
depth of the layer shall be reworked to specification. The area
treated shall be at least l2,5m long and 3 m wide or such area
to be determined by the Engineer as necessary to obtain
compliance with this Specification.

Where the results of the Construction control tests are less

than that specified. the full depth of the layer shall be
reworked to specification. The area treated shall be the whole
section submitted for approval or following a retest a length of
at least 50 m both sides of each test and retest, failure.

(C) Base and subbase

Where these consist of unbound (i.e. natural or graded stone)

material the full depth of the material shall be removed from
the pavement and replaced to specification. The area treated
shall be at least 30 m long and 3 m wide or such area to the
determined by the Engineer as necessary to obtain compliance
with this Specification,

Where the courses

lean concrete the full deoth of the lever shall be removed from
the pavement and replaced to specification. The area treated
shall be at least 5 m long and the full width of the paving laid
in one operation, If areas are corrected within 7 days of
laying, no construction traffic or compaction plant shall use
the surrounding satisfactory areasq

...- .I» .' <

'
.-__
fa’?-
mm: :.“.::.~ -W,l p,5;‘g SLaI‘ ‘J,~
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FORROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

'
SETTING OUT AND TOLERANCES Page 3-6

For bituminous 'bases the full depth of layer shall be removed

and replaced with fresh material laid and compacted to
specification. Any area so treated shall be at least 5 m long
and the full width of the paving laid in one operation.

Where the results of the construction control tests for any of

the base or subbase materials are less than that specified the
full depth of the layer shall be removed and replaced to
specification. The area treated shall be the whole section
submitted for approval or, following a retest, a length of at
least 50m both sides of each test and retest failure or such
area to be determined by the Engineer as necessary to obtain
compliance with the Specification.

(d) Wearing course

These shall have the "full depth of the layer removed and
replaced with fresh material laid and compacted to
specification. The area rectified shall be the full width of
the paving laid in one operation and at least l5 m long.

Where the results of the construction control tests for the

wearing course are less than that specified the full depth of
the layer shall be removed and replaced to specification. The
area treated shall be the whole section submitted for approval
or, following a retest, a length of at least 50m both sides of
each test and retest failure or such area to be determined by
the Engineer as necessary to obtain compliance with this
Specification.

304 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his general rates

and prices for_the cost of complying with the requirements of Clauses
301, 302 and 303 of this Specification. 4.5‘
ft
3,! A
.3; -
_« A
ii
Notwithstanding the provisions of Clauses 302 and 303 of this
Specification, measurefi ent and. payment for earthworks and pavement
-'1.
works. shall be made on the basis of the net cross—section ordered by
the Engineer and no additional payment shall be made in respect of
variation within or without the specified tolerances.
 SECTIGN 4
SEE CHARANCE MJD TWSOSL STMPPWG
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

SITE CLEARANCE AND TOPSOIL STRIPPING Page 4.1

401 SITE CLEARANCE

(a) General

Site clearance is defined as the clearing, grubbing, removal and

disposal of all vegetation, grass, debris, bushes, scrub, dense
bush, trees, hedges, undergrowth, stumps, roots, shrubs plants
and the backfilling of holes left by the removal of stumps and
roots.

The width and.length over which site clearance is to be carried

out shall be as shown on the Drawings or instructed by the
Engineer.

Site clearance "over the area of quarries, borrow pits,

stockpiles, spoil road junctions, ditches and drains and
tips,
other areas shall be carried out where shown on the Drawings or
instructed by the Engineer.

T1’: .
\."'»a The Engineer may give instructions that specific trees, stumps
gfgor _objects shall not be removed during the site clearance

\.
Rgferation.
I Efi learing, except trees
(3-4

fwflere the Engineer instructs that site clearance is required,

2tje entire area shall be cleared and all materials thus cleared
shall become the property of the Employer. Unless otherwise
bhstructed, perishable
vegetation materials shall be
and
% ,disposed of by burning. Where material or debris cannot he
~ ,/
,__,.zf
Iburnt, it shall be carted to spoil areas, which spoil areas
shall be provided in accordance with requirement of Section 6 of
this Specification.

If the Contractor clears the Site in advance of the main Works

such that grass and other vegetation re-grows prior to the main
Works commencing at any particular location then any additional,
or‘ repeating of, site clearance required shall be at the
Contractor’s expense.

(C) Removal of trees

Trees outside the construction width but within the road reserve _
having a trunk girth of more than 450mm at a point 600mm above
the ground shall not be cut down without the prior approval of
the Engineer.

Where the Engineer instructs that site clearance is required,

trees not designated to remain shall be uprooted or out down as
near to ground level as possible, and shall be either burnt, or,
where the Engineer instructs that they shall be saved, the trunk
and branches shall be cut into convenient lengths and stacked
neatly off the line of the road and shall become the property of
the Employer and shall be preserved and protected by the
Contractor until removed by the Employer or until the expiry
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION. .
% .«;£a:.‘

SITE CLEARANCE AND TOPSOIL STRIPPING Page 4.2

of the Period of Maintenance. The remainder of the trees .shall

I
be disposed of by burning.

Stumps and tree roots shall be grubbed up and burnt. All holes 3
left by remoVal_of stumps and roots shall be backfilled with
approved material compacted to 95% MDD (AASHTO T99) up to the %i
~
Vexisting ground level or up to the formation level if the area
is in cut.

402 REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL

Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer the Egg

1
Contractor shall remove topsoil. The depth of the topsoil shall be
as directed by the Engineer but shall not exceed 200 nm. At any
cross-section the depth instructed may vary and such variation may g,
'~‘ 1':

occur both along the road and across the cross~section. as

Where directed by the Engineer the Contractor shall, prior to removal

of topsoil, excavate trial holes of a depth sufficient to enable the *1
Engineer to measure the depth of topsoil. Where topsoil is found to
depths greater than 200 mm. that portion below 200 mm shall, if
required by the Engineer, be treated as fill or spoil in accordance %-
with the requirements of Section 5 of this Specification. :

Topsoil shall be stripped, loaded, transported and deposited in E

stockpile areas, which stockpiles areas shall be provided in E
accordance with the requirements of Section 6 of this Specification.

Should the Contractor strip to depths greater than those instructed

by the Engineer then the Contractor shall replace the material with
fill material at the Contractor's expense.
fl

403 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES, FENCES AND OBSTRUCTIONS

When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall demolish wholly

or in part, remove and dispose of all buildings, foundations,
structures, fences and any other obstructions which have not been
designated to remain.
;.—.-.;:'. ;

._. , :.
The Contractor shall carefully take down such buildings, structures,
fences etc. and the components shall be dismantled, cleaned and
stacked in separate heaps. All materials which, in the opinion of g
the Engineer, are not fit for rewuse shall be removed from the Site mh
to spoil areas provided in accordance with the requirements of
Section 6 of this Specification, All materials which are re—usable
shall remain the property of the Employer and shall be preserved and
‘protected by the Contractor until removed by the Employer or until
the expiry of the Period cf Maintenance

404 PROTECTION OF FENCES, TREES, HEDGES ETC“:

All existing paths, fences, walls, hedges, trees, shrubs, lawns and
other features which the Engineer instructs shall not be removed or
otherwise dealt with, shall be protected from damage, and any damage
which occurs due is :3‘ Contractor's failure to take adequate
precautions shall be repaired at the Contractorls expenseq
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

SITE CLEARANCE AND TOPSOIL STRIPPING Page 48 3

405 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

(a) Itemq Site clearance

Unit : ha

Site clearance shall _be measured by the hectare calculated

as the plan area instructed by the Engineer to be cleared.

The rate for site clearance shall include for the cost of
complying with the requirements of Clauses 401 and 404 of
this Specification.

(b) Item : Removal of topsoil

Unit : m3

Removal of topsoil shall be measured by the cubic metre

calculated as the product of the plan area measured from
cross—sections taken prior to site clearance and the
vertical depth of topsoil instructed.to be removed.

The rate for removal of topsoil shall include for the cost
of all hauls as necessary and. compliance with the
requirements of Clauses 402 and 404 of this Specification.

(C) Item Allow for the removal of structures and

obstructions

Unit Provisional Sum

Payment will be made on a daywork basis where the Engineer

orders the removal of structures and obstructions.
 SECTEON 5
EARN-{WORKS
" 4-‘ .3’-_é."—'\§.}‘-u'vuze1

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BFHDGE "CONSTRUCTION

I
EARTHWORKS _ Page 5.1

50,1 SCOPE OF SECTION

This Section covers all excavation of cuttings, which for the

purposes of this Section includes side drains and benches, the
placing and compaction of hard and soft material for fill in
embankments, ground compaction, .the formation of the Subgrade,
excavation and rockfill to swamps and topsoiling and grassing.

502 GENERAL

All earthworks shall be constructed_as shown on- the Drawings or as

directed by the Engineer to the specified slopes, levels, depths,
widths, tolerances and heights. Should any earthworks not be
constructed to the slope, level, depth, width, tolerance or height
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer the Contractor
shall make good the area affected at the Contractor's expense.

The Contractor shall excavate cuttings and place fill in embankments

in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Suitable excavated materialsswill be used to form embankments, excess
or unsuitable materials being disposed of to spoil areas. Where the
mass haul diagram in accordance with Clause 509 of this Specification
indicates that the quantity of material required for embankments
exceeds that available from cuttings, the Contractor will be
instructed by the Engineer to widen cuttings and/or to open borrow
pits.

At all times the Contractor shall ensure that earthworks are not
damaged by weather or traffic. In the event of such damage occurring
the Engineer may withdraw approval from the affected Works until the
Contractor has carried out repairs to restore the Works to their
original condition. The expenses of all such repairs and any
additional testing will be borne by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall provide adequate supervision to ensure that only

suitable materials are incorporated in embankments. If any
unsuitable material is included it shall be removed and replaced with
suitable material at the Contractor's expense.

All trimming of ‘cuttings, embankments, side drains, and shoulders to

the specified slopes and_ shapes shall be carried out -concurrently
with the earthworks that are being carried out at that particular
site and level.

503 CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIAL

There shall be two classifications of material, that is "hard

material" and "soft material" which shall be defined as follows:~

(a) Hard material

Hard material shall be material which cannot be ripped to an

average depth of rip greater than 300mm by a track type crawler
tractor complying with the following:
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

EARTHWORKS _ _ _ Page 5.2

(i) in good _order complete with all equipment and accessories

as supplied;
.

(ii) rated 300 BHP flywheel power or over; ''

(iii) with an operating weight of not less than 37.2 tonnes;
£ift"’“‘
(iv) equipped with a hydraulically operated single tine ripper
compatible with the tractor used; and

(V) operated by a qualified operator in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations and to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. ’{'.':g':)””-
-5'

Where it is impractical to prove hard material by the above

method then the quantity of hard material, if any, shall be
determined by the Engineer.

Where excavation contains individual boulders of hard material

greater than 0.3 m3 each in volume then such boulders shall be
classified as hard material.

Hard material shall not be placed within 600 mm of the formation

level in embankments and shall be removed to a depth of 300 mm
or as otherwise instructed by the Engineer below formation level
in cuttings.
ry'.: u-:;r' ‘»«": .x‘4

(b) Soft Material

Soft material shall be all materials other than hard material.

Soft material shall include waterlogged and swampy material
except within swamps covered by Clause 506 of this Specification. g

504 PREPARATION PRIOR TO FORMING EMBANKMENTS

The Contractor shall excavate benches in natural ground having a side

slope greater than 1 in 5 or as instructed by the Engineer. The r‘—'~*-'1.:'v.‘: .;1‘».'-3

existing slopes, after the removal of“ topsoil shall be benched in

accordance with the Drawings prior to the construction of
embankmentsu The material which is excavated to form benches shall
either be taken to spoil or if suitable used as fill. The actual
bench widths will be. shown on the Drawings or instructed by the 4;,

Engineer.
:; ,n,-:.'_-_-

The existing ground under embankments, and bench surfaces where

appropriate, shall be compacted over the full width of construction
to 95% MDD .(AASHTO T99) to a depth of 150 mm. The existing ground
moisture content shall be adjusted prior to compaction by either
uniformly mixing in water or drying out the material such that at the
time of compaction the moisture content shall be within the range 75
W 105% of the Optimum Moisture Content (AASHTO T99); '
 STANDARD SPECIFTCATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

EARTHWORKS _ Page 5.3

Whenever the existing ground is unsuitable in quality for receiving

fill, the Contractor shall excavate to the depth instructed by the
Engineer, remove the material to a spoil area and replace it with
suitable material.

S05 CONSTRUCTION OF EMBANKMENTS

. Material obtained from cuttings shall be used to construct

embankments. Material from borrow pits shall be used only where the
Contractor has demonstrated and the Engineer agreed that there is an
inadequate quantity of suitable material obtainable from cuttings.

The Contractor may, to suit his method of working, take suitable fill
material obtained from cuttings to spoil provided he substitutes an
equivalent quantity of suitable fill" material from a borrow pit or
other source. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
acquisition of land for the spoil and borrow areas required in these
circumstances and any additional costs due to the substitution over
and above the cost of taking the material from cuttings or benches to
fill shall be at the Contractor's expense.

Soft material for use in the 300 mm below formation level in both
embankments and cuttings shall not contain particles larger than 25
mm. In addition the material shall have a CBR of not less than 8%
measured after a 4~day soak on a laboratory mix compacted to a dry
density of 100% MDD (AASHTO T99), a swell of less than 1% and a
Plasticity Index of less than 50%. In~situ material in the 300 mm
below formation level in cutting that does not meet these
requirements shall either be spoiled or if suitable placed in the
embankment and replaced with material from cuttings or borrow pits
that does meet the requirements for soft material for use in the 300
mm below formation level.

Where materials of differing quality are available for placing in

embankments the Engineer may instruct that certain materials should
be excluded from the upper 300mm of fill and he may instruct that
certain materials should be set apart, or obtained from borrow pits,
for use in these upper layers. He may also instruct that part or all
of these upper layers be stabilised using either cement or lime in
accordance with Section 14 of this Specification. The extent of
stabilisation will be _detailed in the Special Specification or shown
on the Drawings.

The Contractor shall ensure that earthworks proceeds towards

completion in an orderly and continuous manner. The Contractor shall
submit a written request for approval of any layer at least l8
working hours before he intends to cover a completed layer, Fill
material for subsequent layers shall be placed immediately approval
of the previous layer has been given to ensure retention of moisture.

Should any layer be left unprotected for more than 24 hours

subsequent to approval, the Contractor shall request re—approval of
such layerg
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

EARTHWORKS Page 5.4

Soft material as fill _shall be deposited in layers not exceeding

150mm compacted depth unless, as a result of site compaction trials,
-the Contractor has satisfied the Engineer that his compaction plant
is capable of consistently achieving the specified densities at a
greater depth; in no case shall this depth exceed 250 mm. Each layer
shall extend over the full width of the embankment and shall be
compacted in accordance with Clause 508.

Hard material used for fill shall be of maximum dimension 250 mm, and
be deposited in horizontal layers not exceeding 400 mm loose depth
and shall extend over the full width of the embankment except for any
specified external cover to slopes. The material shall be spread and
levelled by a crawler tractor weighing not less than 15 tonnes. Each
layer shall -consist of reasonably well graded rock and shall be
blinded with smaller rock fragments and gravel so as to fill as many
of the voids as possible before the next layer is placed. The top
600 mm of the subgrade shall be formed using soft material.

In forming embankments, the Contractor shall make due allowance in

height and width for consolidation, settlement and shrinkage. Any
consolidation, settlement, bulking, punching of material into the
underlying" layer, or shrinkage during the construction of embankments
shall be rectified by the Contractor by providing, placing and
compacting approved fill material to reinstate each layer to the
instructed level and_width and shall be at the Contractor's expense. .-,\
x.‘..
ii
3‘, .
‘L

During the construction of embankments the Contractor shall control

'|_ \

and direct constructional traffic uniformly over the full width.

Fill material shall not be stockpiled on embankments without the
express permission of the Engineer J/323.15:-‘T-"~'{*’.3T!

When constructing _embankments up to bridges and up to and over

culverts, the Contractor shall raise the embankment equally on each
side of such structures and shall unless otherwise instructed by the
Engineer carryout this work concurrently with the filling to the
structure. The embankment compaction plant shall be used as close to
the Structure as is feasible without damaging the structure. Any
damage to the structure will he made good at the Contractor's expense.

S06 SWA_MPS

Areas that are to be classified as swamps will be identified and the

treatment thereof specified in the Special Specification. All areas
other than those so specified shall be considered as normal
earthworks and the Contractor's rates shall include for all the
requirements of Clause llé of this Specification»

U1 {CD -..J ROCKFILL TO SWAMPS

Where specified in the Special Specification or instructed by the

Engineer the Contractor shall place rockfill to swamps. The rockfill
shall he obtained from a rock quarry and shall be loaded, transported
from a rock quarry, placed in uniform layers rolled and trafficked
until it is fully embedded over the whole area instructede The
rockfill shall he of maximum dimension 250 mm, reasonably well graded
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FORROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

EARTHWORKS Page 5.5

and with not more than 5% finer than 10 mm. The layer thickness and
number of layers shall be as instructed by the Engineer who may vary
the requirement during the rockfill operation. Each layer shall be
blinded with smaller rock fragments so as to fill as many of the
voids as possible before the next layer is placed. Before additional
layers are placed or before normal earthworks resume’ the Contractor
shall proofroll each layer in accordance with Clause 512 of this
Specification.

Where instructed by the Engineer the Contractor shall place a filter

fabric ('Terram' or similar approved) under or around the rockfill.
When placing the rockfill onto or in the filter fabric the Contractor
shall ensure that the filter fabric is not punctured or damaged in
any way. Where the filter fabric is placed around the rockfill the
final layer of rockfill shall be blinded with gravel so as to present
a smooth surface to receive the filter fabric. The filter fabric
shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Where instructed by the Engineer the Contractor shall first excavate

unsuitable material and then place and embed rockfill on and into the
underlying material, or on a filter fabric if specified by the
Engineer.

508 COMPACTION OF EARTHWORKS

The moisture content of fill material, except the 300 mm below

formation, shall be adjusted immediately prior to compaction by
either uniformly mixing in water or drying out the material such that
the moisture content during compaction is between 75% and 105% of the
. .-. .

Optimum Moisture Content (AASHTO T99). The 300 mm below formation in

both embankments and cuttings shall be adjusted by either uniformly
mixing in water or drying out the material such that the moisture
content during compaction is between 75% and 100% of the Optimum
Moisture Content (AASHTO T99). The moisture content shall be kept
within these‘ limits until compaction is complete except where
otherwise instructed by the Engineer.

Each layer of material shall be compacted at a moisture content

within the above limits to a dry density equal to at least the
percentage of the Maximum Dry Density (MDD) specified belowzw

(i) All fill material‘ in embankments, except the 300 mm below

formation: 95% MDD (AASHTO T99)

(ii) The 300 mm below formation in embankments: 100% MDD (AASHTO T99)

(iii) The mm below formation in cuttings under the carriageway and

300
shoulders 100% MUD (AASHTO T99).

Compaction under and in embankments, and on the 300 mm below

formation in cuttings, shall be completed to the procedures proposed
by the Contractor in accordance with Clause 224 of this
Specification; The 300 mm below formation in both fill areas and in
cuttings shall be completed in two 150 mm compacted layers.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

‘
EARTHWORKS . Page 5.6

Each layer of hard material used as fill in embankments shall be §

systematically compacted by at least 8 passes of a towed vibrating Li
roller weighing not less than 5 tonnes dead weight or a grid roller a
weighing not less than 13 tonnes dead weight or other approved
plant. During compaction the surface of the layer shall be watered 5
as necessary to facilitate the filling of the voids with the blinding a
material.

In accordance with Section 2 of this Specification the Contractor

shall submit to the Engineer his proposals for the compaction of each
main type of material to be used in the embankments, including those
in relation to the types of plant, the range of passes and the loose
depth of layer. The Contractor shall carry out site compaction
trials; by any necessary laboratory investigations using
lupplemented_
the procedure proposed by the Contractor for earthworks and shall
satisfy the Engineer that all the specified requirements regarding
compaction will be achieved. Site compaction trials with the main
types of material likely to be encountered shall be completed before
the permanent Works with corresponding materials commences.

The Contractor shall provide all water necessary for compaction. The
water to be used shall be clean and fresh, free from all impurities
and shall be obtained from a source approved by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall if required by the Engineer arrange for the analysis
of water to demonstrate compliance with this Specification.

ggsratza
The Contractor shall provide all plant necessary for conveying and
distributing water. Water shall be evenly sprinkled on the surface
of the fill material by machines of a type approved by the Engineer,
and capable of distributing water at a known, predetermined and f'.§f;?r7z":?-‘v“’»4-'4-*3.

constant rate.

509 MASS HAUL DIAGRAM

The mass haul diagram which is included in the Drawings is a guide

only and must be considered as such by the Contractor. The final ——‘.*J,'1‘-,5.I'Js7,|
I
measurement and quantities will be determined from the actual ground
cross sections_ and final road levels and the mass haul diagram
adjusted accordingly.
3,".-J-'4'-r'. —'d:,
_=,>;-

In the event of any realignment being instructed a revised mass haul

diagram will be prepared for that realignment and agreed between the
Contractor and the Engineer. ‘
fi.‘5_t'$I-T‘.-’.'-'-'-<

In the event that the Contractor elects to spoil suitable fill

material from cuttings and substitute material from borrow pits, the
r,—'._-j:_-1»;:_:‘,.
mass haul diagram will not be amended and the quantities and
distances determined from the adjusted mass haul diagram as referred
to in the first paragraph of this clause shall apply,

Where unsuitable material is encountered in cuttings it shall be

replaced if required by suitable material from borrow pits or widened
cuttings» The mass haul diagram will be adjusted to take account of I-|;;,:' .
the change»
 _,,.». .'u-. .
‘

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGECONSTRUACTION

EARTHWORKS Page 5.7

The" mass diagram will be drawn ‘in fill‘ on the basis that lm3
haul
of material obtained from cuttings will on being compacted into the
embankments produce O.8m3 of fill unless~otherwise specified in the
Special Specification. No allowance will be made for variations in
materials, wastage, or consolidation etc. as referred to in Clause
505 of this Specification.

510 SPOIL MATERIAL

Spoil material shall be.material which, being obtained from cuttings,

is surplus to that required for fill and/or unsuitable material from
cuttings which the Engineer has instructed to be excluded from use as
fill in embankments, and/or unsuitable material from beneath
embankments or below formation level in cuttings which the Engineer
has instructed to be spoiled.

Spoil material shall be deposited in spoil areas located by the

Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer and the Contractor
shall give the Engineer at least 24 hours notice of his intention to
commence spoiling operations at a particular location.

511 BORROW pm
Fill material which is required in addition to that provided by the
excavation, or widening of cuttings shall be obtained from borrow
pits which shall be located by the Engineer.

Should the Contractor locate alternative borrow pits then he shall

obtain the Engineer's approval to such borrow pits. In such
instances no additional payments will be made for such borrow pits
over and above such payment as would have been made for borrow pits
located by the Engineer.

The Engineer may direct that materials be selected in borrow pits

which may include double ‘handling, stockpiling and excavation in
particular areas of a borrow pit.

The Contractor shall construct all accesses, clear and remove all ant
hills, ants‘ nests, vegetatidn,, boulders and unsuitable or oversize
material. The Contractor shall provide adequate supervision in every
borrow pit to ensure that suitable material is not contaminated with
unsuitable material. Unsuitable material shall be spoiled in
accordance with Clause 510 of this Specification.

Borrow pits shall be excavated to regular widths and shapes and shall
be cleaned up on completion so that the sides are neatly trimmed and
the bottoms levelled and drained away from the Works all in
accordance with the provisions of Section 5 of this Specification.

U} I in.) PRGOFFOLLING

All subgrade and layers,

embankment cuttings, benches and original
ground shall be proofrolled with a loaded scraper or truck with a
minimum axle load of 8 tonnes. Proofrolling shall be satisfiactorily

._ .-<;. _,. -
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

EARTHWORKS _ Page 5.8

completed before the layer is submitted to the Engineer for approval

. and shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer. All such
proofrolling shall be at the Contractor's expense.

513 TRIMMING OF SLOPES

The slopes of cuttings and embankments shall be trimmed by hand or by

approved mechanical means to uniform batters as shown on the Drawings
or as instructed by the Engineer. Such trimming shall be completed
before the commencement of subbase construction.

Any rock or boulder appearing in the face of a cutting or embankment

shall be trimmed back to within the tolerance specified and in ‘
§§
addition any such -rock or boulder which is unstable shall be
completely removed _and the resulting void filled with suitable E E
material compacted to the approval of the Engineer. '”

514 TOPSOILING AND GRASSING

Where specified or instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall

provide protection to embankment slopes, cut faces, side drains,
shoulders, guiding dams and spoil or borrow areas by one of the
following means:~

(a) Grassing
g
“
(b) Topsoiling and grassing

i§$$“R* Where grassing is required the Contractor shall plant sprigs of gp=
Q? pp roved indigenous ‘runner’ type grass at 150 mm centres. “The 5”
Contractor shall care for and water the grass until it is firmly
§~bd
K 3* established.
r~ “-H-_ ____, 5!
P‘? Ex‘; CG
g g Efi g flfi e topsoiling is required prior to grassing the minimum compacted
m Q fifitgkness of topsoil shall be 50 mm and the quality of the topsoil g
€j_J gas 1 be to the approval of the Engineer. Light compaction shall be $3
:r;£ out to the approval of the Engineer. "”
h
cifried'
T?! ,t
r¢$€;§ngJ:?§E3REm.,n z’e Contractor shall ensure that neither his watering nor rainfall or §
/09.m;FVN¥jp¥rainfall runoff from adjacent areas washes out the topsoil or grass K
V““*”' and any damage before ,the grass is firmly established shall be
rectified at the Contractor’s expense. g
"H
g;-"J.

515 SIDE DRAINS

Side drains are considered as cuttings in accordance with Clause 501
of this Section of this Specification and the excavation thereof is
classified as earthworks. The Engineer may during the course of the
Works instruct amendments to the dimensions, slopes and depths of
side -rains and providing such amendments are instructed before the
completion of earthworks in the section side drains will continue to
be considered as cuttings and the excavation thereof classified as
earthworks. Where the side drain detail is amended after completion
of earthworks in the section, then such additional excavation shall
be classifiied as excavation of oatchwater drains in accordance with
Section 8 of this Specifi icationo
»_.~«.

- —. -

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

EARTHWORKS Page 5, 9

516 TREATED MATERIALS

Lime or cement treatment if required by the Special Specification or

Drawings shall be carried out on subgrade materials that comply with
the requirements of Section 5 and shall be treated in accordance with
Section 14 of this Specification.

517 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Unless specified otherwise, the method of computation of volumes will

be that of average end areas and centreline distances between
cross—sections taken at 25m intervals. In irregular ground or tight
curvature the Engineer may direct that ground cross-sections are
taken at closer intervals.

Earthwork fill shall be measured by the cubic metre of compacted

material measured in the completed embankment. No separate
measurement or payment shall be made for excavating material to form
embankmentsy

Where the mass haul diagram indicates that fill material is required
in addition to that provided by the excavation, including widening of
cuttings, and the Engineer instructs the opening of a borrow pit,
separate measurement and payment shall be made for:—

(i) Site clearance of the borrow area and access _road per hectare
in accordance with Section 4 of this Specification.

(ii) Removal of topsoil (if instructed by the Engineer to be

stockpiled separately) from the borrow area per cubic metre in
'
accordance with Section 4 of this Specification.

(iii) The construction of access road, per km, in accordance with"

'
Section 9 of this Specification.

(iv) Removal to topsoil and/or overburden, as "Spoil", from the

borrow area per cubic metre in accordance with Section 5 of

V;
this Specification.

Excavation to spoil of unsuitable material (as defined in Clause 510

of this Specification) shall- be measured as the volume of“ the
excavation formed. Measurement of spoil of surplus material shall be
measured by the volume of ‘cut’ taken from the mass lhaul diagram
prepared in accordance with Clause 509 of this Specification.“

Material shall be classified as either hard or soft in accordance

with Clause 503 of this Specification.

(a) Item Fill in soft material

Unit 2 m3

The rate for fill in soft material shall include for the cost
of excavating the material either from cutting, bench or borrow
pit, loading, transporting a free haul of 1.0 km and depositing
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

EARTHWORKS Page 5 . l 0

the material in an embankment or other area requiring fill,

trimming, shaping and compacting, and complying with the
requirements of Clauses 502, 504, 505, 508, 509, 511, 512 and
I
513 of this Specification.

(b) Item : Fill in hard material

Unit : m3

The rate for fill in hard material shall include for the cost
of excavating the material from cutting,_loading, transporting
a free haul of 1.0 km and depositing the material in an I
embankment or other area requiring fill, breaking down the
material, production of rock fragments, trimming, shaping and
compacting, blinding, and complying with the requirements of
Clauses 502, 504, 505, 508, 509, 512 and 513. fig?

(c) Item : Spoil in soft material 3

Unit : m3

The rate for spoil in soft material shall include for the cost
of excavating the material, loading, transporting a free haul of
l.0 km and depositing the material in a spoil area, providing
trimming, shaping and topsoiling spoil areas in accordance with
'%jSection 6 of this Specification, and complying with the g»;
;”requirements of Clauses 502, 504, 510, 511 and 513 of this is
Specification.

(d) Item : Spoil in hard material Q;

Unit : m3

The rate for spoil in hard material shall include for the cost %“
of excavating the material, loading, transporting a free haul of
1.0 km and depositing material in spoil‘ areas, providing
trimming, shaping and topsoiling spoil areas in accordance with
Section 6 of this Specification, and complying with the
requirements of Clauses 502, 504, 509, 510, 513 of this
Specification;
r.-2;.-4.;'-r:1-":5

(e) Item : Overhaul

Unit : m3km 2aI:-'2= ':-.

Overhaul shall be measured by the unit m3km calculated as the

product of ‘Overhaul Earthworks‘ in cubic metres and ‘Overhaul -'.‘ -'. _-".‘-T»-'. “:'-_
-

Distance’ in kilometres all as shown on Figure 5-1,

The distance between the centres of volume of cut and fill shall
be measured along the centreline of the new roada Should the
Contractor elect to haul by a different route no additional
measurement or payment will be made.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

EARTE-IWORKS Page 5.11

TOKU1
ggg E g
3 (Mean Free Houllstance)
E

9
‘U

U
E
v E
3
30 W2
,
..... .....jE_.
, . _ . _ .-_ ._ N
3».

3 ._____Y_1__ ‘{Z...._._...:... 0
*6 I , .
3 , g , Balance Line
E
5 +«——"—+I \
Distance Kilometres

FIGURE 5-l

Diagram showing method of computation of

freehaul and overhaul on typical mass haul section

NOTES:~

1) A & B are centres of volume of Free Haul Earthworksa

2) C & D are centres of volume of Overhaul Earthworks.

3) M N is limit of Free Haul.

4) Free Haul Earthworks = V

:3 Overhaul Earthworks = V1

6) Overhaul Distance = CD w 1.0

?) Overhaul = V1 (CD J laO}m3km

STANDARD SPECTFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

EARTHWORKS Page 5.12

Cut and fill volumes for ramps, slip roads, junctions, road
approaches, and connections on either side of the road shall be_
considered as concentrated at the centreline of the road.

The distance between the centres of volume of borrow" pits and

fills and for out to spoil material shall be measured along the
shortest route determined by the Engineer as feasible and
satisfactory. If the Contractor chooses to haul earthworks
material over some other longer route, computations for
measurement shallfnevertheless be based on the distance measured
along the shortest route designated.by the Engineer.

The mean "Free Haul Distance" for all materials to which "'
'4%&

"Overhaul" shall apply shall be one kilometre.

«
"Overhaul" shall be calculated on the basis of a Mass Haul -:.
Diagram approved by the Engineer. Any change in the earthworks :E.* '.«5='. 'f‘.-'-.'-
material utilization shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.

The rate shall include for the cost of haulage in excess of Mthe %-{;-.-:.a:a
free haul and the maintenance of the haul road.

(f) Item : Compaction of existing ground 3:951.-r.e

_;

Unit m3

The volume of existing ground compacted shall be calculated as p',.-'_:¢: v:.-'q

the product of the plan area and the vertical compacted
thickness specified.
,:;a'.«‘:.’‘r«-"~36-.
The rates for compaction of existing ground shall include for
scarifying, supplying and mixing in water or drying the
material, levelling and compacting and complying with the '
‘
requirements of Clauses 502, 504, 508, and 512 of this
pj.';&_";-', ’:£<'.‘—'+<,.;«gr.-7-

Specification.

Item :» Compaction of the 300mm below formation level in -

._

‘;_E:‘I.-' ’-‘—'.Z~I7_F,_aV 3'

cutting to 100% MDD (AASHTO T99) »

Unit : m3
v

The rate for compaction of the 300 mm below formation level in

cutting shall include for compacting underlying material as
necessary to achieve the specified compaction in the 300 mm ‘r?"r’-E"-T-‘.-' ‘:4

below formation level, compacting that 300 mm of subgrade in two

150 mm layers including the removal of the upper 150 mm to allow
the compaction of the lower 150 mm, scarifying, supplying and '-." '.‘K-' ‘F.-'_

mixing in water or drying the material, levelling and compacting

an complying with Clauses 502, 503, 504, 508, 510, 511, 5l2 and
5l3 of this Specification.
-=.4.r,¢-.5;-‘

STANDARD SPECIFICATIQN FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

In
EARTHWORKS Page 5.13

(h) Item : Extra over (a) for compaction of top 300mm to

100% MDD(AASHTO T99)

Unit : m3

The rate for extra over Clause 5l7(a) ‘Fill in soft material"
for compaction of the 300 mm below formation level in
embankments to 100% MDD (AASHTO T99) shall include for
compacting underlying material as necessary to achieve the
specified Compaction in the 300 mm below formation level,
compacting that 300 mm of subgrade in ‘two 150 mm layers,
scarifying, supplying and mixing in water or drying out the
material, levelling and compacting and complying with Clauses
502, 503, 504, 505, 508, 511, 512 and 513 of this Specification.

(i) Item : Excavation in swamps

Unit : m3

The rate for excavation in swamps shall include for the cost of
excavating the material, loading, transporting and depositing
the material on a spoil area, trimming shaping and topsoiling of
spoil areas in accordance with Section 6 of this Specification,
all additional excavation required to achieve the instructed
area and depth, excavating underwater, a free haul of 1.0km and
complying with the requirements of Clauses 506 and 507 of this
Specification. Overhaul will be measured in accordance with
Clause 5l7(e) of this Specification.

(j) Item : Rockfill

Unit : tonne

Rockfill\shall be measured by the number of tonnes instructed to

be placed.

The rate for rockfill shall include for the cost of providing
the material, all hauls as necessary and complying with the
requirements of Clause 507 of this Specification.

Item : Filter fabric under, over or around rockfill

Unit : m2 of each weight of fabric specified

The filter fabric placed under, over or around rockfill shall be

measured as the net area of filter fabric instructed.

The rate for filter fabric shall included for the cost "of the
preparation of the surface to receive the filter fabric, the
provision, transport, storing and laying the fabric in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, all laps and/or
stitching and for complying with Clauses S06 and 507 of this
Specificationa
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD‘ AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

EARTHWORKS Page 5.14

(1) Item : Topsoiling

Unit : m2 for each situation

Topsoiling shall be measured by the square metre calculated as

the net area, measured on the slope, instructed by the Engineer
for each different situation i.e. side drain , embankment, etc.

The rate for topsoiling shall include for the cost of providing
the topsoil, all hauls as necessary and complying with the
requirements of Clause 514 of this Specification.

(In) Item : Grassing

Unit : m2 for each situation

Grassing shall be measured by the square metre calculated as the

net area, measured on the slope, instructed by the Engineer for
each different situation i.e. side drains, embankments, etc.

The rate for grassing shall include for the cost of providing
and establishing the grass sprigs and complying with the
requirements of Clause 514 of this Specification.

;*‘.;f:.+”1.‘+:‘-.1-"49;

9.’:—‘*".’-l‘-rt.’-7:
 SECHGN 5
QUARREEES , BORROW ms,
smcxmg mm smn AREAS
. - . _ _ ‘w_‘ _‘

STANDARD SPECEFICATION FOR ROAD-AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

QUARRIES, BORROW FITS, STOCKPILES AND SPOIL AREAS Page 6.1

601 GENERAL

Unless stated otherwise in the Special Specification, it is the

responsibility of the Contractor to select the sources of aggregate
for concrete and lean concrete, stone for bases and subbases,
bituminous mix bases, binder courses and wearing courses, chippings
for surface dressings and rockfill for swamps. Such sources shall be‘
designated as quarries and are defined in Clause 602 (a). Such
potential quarry sites as‘ may have been identified prior to
commencement of the Contract and were available for inspection at the '
time of Tender will also be the responsibility of the Contractor
should he elect to use them.

The sources of natural materials such as fill material for the

construction of embankments, and gravel for subbase, base, surfacing
and shoulders shall be designated as borrow pits and are defined in
Clause 602 (b). Certain borrow pits have been identified prior to
commencement of the Contract and the Engineer will instruct the
Contractor as to which of these are to be utilised for the extraction
of natural materials, to be used in the Works.

Provisions are included in subsequent clauses of this Section of the

Specification for additional borrow pits to be identified and located
by the Contractor during the Contract. Stockpile and spoil areas
shall be located by the Contractor subject to the approval of the
Engineer.

602 DEFINITIONS

(a) Quarry

A quarry is an open surface working from which stone is removed

by drilling and blasting for use in the Works.

(b) Borrow pit

A borrow‘ pit is a site from which material, other than stone, is

removed for use in the Works. \,

A borrow pit may have been selected by the Engineer and be

available for at the time of Tender or alternatively
inspection
it may be one proposed by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer during the Contract.

(C) stockpile area

A stockpile area is an area where material such as topsoil, fill

material, gravel or aggregate is stockpiled prior to use in the
Works.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

QUARRIES, BORROW PITS, STOCKPILE AND SPOIL AREAS Page 6.2

(d) Spoil area

A spoil area is a lsite upon which surplus or unsuitable

materials arising out of the Works are dumped. Surplus or
unsuitable material shall not be dumped within the road reserve
without the approval of Engineer.

603 PROVISION OF LAND

The Employer shall make available free of charge to the Contractor

and be responsible for acquisition of all land required for quarries,
borrow pits, spoil and stockpile areas and for access thereto in
accordance with Section 1 of this Specification.

The location and size of quarries, borrow pits, spoil and stockpile
{.11
5

areas proposed by the Contractor shall be subject to the approval of -*

\‘I.

$.‘e.~‘1.~‘
the Engineer. The Engineer's approval may be withheld for any of the
following reasons:—

If the quarry, borrow pit, spoil or stockpile area, or access into

them, in the opinion of the Engineer:

(a) is less than 3 km from the next quarry, borrow pit, spoil or
stockpile area;

(b) will have a detrimental effect on the environment;

(c) will incur relatively high land acquisition costs or would be

Very difficult to acquire;

(d) is in or near an urban centre;

fiwill
£§ifi%Q} require an access road which is excessively long;
I.)
I.
Q:-\\" HE
“A
'65:} (f) hasgexcessively thick layers of overburden;
’ «EC-D f\‘
;: covets too large an area;
----.I ,§gg‘ ~...
»._, 3 ,3‘ (E?

3|?‘- '."-.r3;-s’;
E Q

W‘ g_£fi) ‘is an excessive distance from the location the material is to be

. x
gfiéd or removed from; or
3;
m e .»;‘_,",-v‘
at hand.
,%}yVAfl fljhd a source of suitable material is closer
a>a__.~fi

The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in writing not later than 90
days after the Engineer’s order to commence work (Clause 41 of the
Contract} or all quarries, borrow pits, spoil and
Conditions of
stockpile areas that the Contractor will require for the whole of the
Works and the Contractor shall_programme for a period of 90 days from
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BORROW q FITS, STOCKPILE AND SPOIL AREAS Page 6.3

QUARRIES,

««««« ._ the date of the Contractor's written notice to the date when the
Engineer makes the quarries, borrow pits, spoil and stockpile areas
available to the Contractor. Prior to the submission of written
notice the Contractor shall set out each quarry, borrow pit, spoil
and stockpile area with concrete" beacons clearly identifying the
areas required for working areas, stockpile areas, blasting safety
zones and access routes. The Contractor's written notice shall
include the following for each ' quarry,I borrow pit, stockpile and
spoil area:—

(1) A plan at 1:500 scale in ink on a stable transparent material

giving details of:

(i) plot boundaries;

(ii) owners’ names and addresses, and if appropriate ID numbers;
(iii) the District, Location, Registration Section and Number for
'
each plot;
(iv) local details such as buildings, fences, graves, types and
areas of cultivation and services, all agreed with the land
owners; and
(V) areas to be used for working areas, stockpile areas,
blasting safety zones etc.

(2) Cadastral maps covering the areas to be acquired.

(3) Details of the proposed access road route.

Where Contractor uses a quarry or borrow pit identified or instructed

by the Engineer he shall obtain the Engineer's approval of the areas
required for the quarry or borrow pit and of the siting of the access
roads into the quarry or borrow pit. The Engineer may require the
Contractor to modify his requirements for any of the reasons outlined
j-11(13): (C): (d): (9): or (g)»

Where borrow‘ pits, available for inspection at the time of Tender,

are instructed by the Engineer the Contractor shall satisfy himself
as to the quality and quantity of material available before providing
the information required in this Clause. Should such investigations
reveal that there is insufficient suitable material for the use for
which the borrow pit was intended, the Contractor shall immediately
inform the Engineer in "writing and the Engineer shall either direct
that the borrow pit is extended or that a new borrow pit shall be
used.

The Contractor shall be responsible for any delays in ‘the land

acquisition which occur due to any of the above information being
incorrect and the 90 day period for land acquisition shall be
extended by the period of any such delay.

fihen 1 quarry, borrow pit, spoil or stockpile area has insufficient

suitable material or area for the use for which it was intended the
Contractor shall propose in writing that either an existing quarry,
 3,;

STANDARD SPEDIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

QUARRIES, soanow FITS, STOCKPILE AND SPOIL AREAS asfi fipmey m

Page 6.4

borrow pit, spoil or stockpile area be extended or that a new quarry,

bqrrow pit, spoil or stockpile area shall be used. E
The approval and §
acquisition of such new or extended quarries, borrow
pits, spoil or §§
stockpile areas shall be in accordance with all the above
provisions
of this Clause 603 for the acquisition of the original
quarries,
borrow pits, spoil or stockpile areas.

The Contractor's obligations with regard to quarries

etc. as set out
above shall also apply to land required in accordance with Clause
124
of this Specification.
.r:a:. ’,.,

604 ENTRY UPON LAND

The Contractor shall, before entering upon any land provided by the
'4.’-_-_'.:£".’r;

Employer, satisfy himself that legal rights of entry have been

obtained.

Where it is necessary to agree levels for the calculation of

quantities, the Contractor shall not enter the area 5
until such levels L;
have been agreed and the Engineer's approval obtained.
fix
605 SAFETY AND PUBLIC HEALTH REQUIREMENTS
g
The Contractor shall comply with the Bye~laws of the Local Authority
regarding public health and safety. in respect of the operation of
quarries, borrow pits, stockpile or spoil areas, and in the absence
of, er in addition to such Byemlaws, shall comply with the _
following 4*
conditions:—

(a) All areas being worked shall be drained and kept drained.
Where
a quarry or borrow pit has been excavated so that it
will not
drain naturally, it shall be kept pumped dry while being used. 3

(b) The Contractor shall confine his operations solely to the areas
provided and shall demarcate the boundary of the area and erect
temporary or permanent fencing as instructed by the Engineer.

(c) Where the height of any face exceeds l metre, the Contractor «
shall provide, erect and maintain at his own expense stockproof
fencing and gates to prevent unauthorised access to the top of
the working race.

(d) On completion of work all faces shall be neatly trimmed to

a .',;:.=;.‘_':n‘:_.':;
slope flatter than l in 4. Where this is impracticable or where
the working face is to be left exposed, the edge shall be
permanently fenced, as instructed by the Engineer, and _
measurement and payment for such fencing shall be in accordance 35
with the requirements of Se.tio

(e) On completion of work temporary fences and all temporary

structures shall be demolished and removed, all latrine pits
filled in and drained and the site topsoiled and left neat and
tidy.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

QUARRIES, BORROW_PITS, STOCKPILE AND SPOIL AREAS Page 6.5

606 ACCESS ROADS AND TRAFFIC CONTROL

The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Section 9 of this

. Specification with regard to the construction and maintenance of
}° access roads to quarries, borrow pits, spoil and stockpile areas and
with regard to traffic operations thereon.

607 SITE CLEARANCE AND REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL AND OVERBURDEN

Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall

-, clear the sites of all quarries, borrow pits, stockpile and spoil
i} areas in accordance with Section 4 of this Specification, but
measurement and payment will be in accordance with this Section of
this Specification.

All existing fences, trees, hedges and other features which the
Engineer instructs shall not be removed or otherwise dealt with shall
be protected in accordance with the requirements of Section 4 of this
} Specification.

Unless .otherwise directed by the Engineer the Contractor shall remove

topsoil and/or overburden from quarries, borrow pits, spoil and
stockpile areas. The Engineer shall direct whether topsoil shall be
stripped and stockpiled separately or shall be excavated and spoiled
together with the overburden. If suitable the Engineer may direct
that overburden be used in the Works.

On completion of work in any quarry, borrow pit, spoil or stockpile‘

_.
ii area the overburden and/or topsoil which has not been used in the
i‘ Works shall be pushed back, spread and landscaped over the area of
the quarry, borrow pit, spoil or stockpile area. Where topsoil has
been stockpiled separately it shall’ be pushed back and spread over
the quarry, borrow pit, spoil or stockpile area after landscaping
unless the fingineer has instructed that it be used for topsoiling in
accordance with Section 5 of this Specification.

608 MIXING, SELECTING AND STOCKPILING OF MATERIALS

\-

Before a borrow. pit is: opened, the Engineer will instruct the
Contractor as to the type of material to be excavated and the areas
'
and depths to be workedr

The Contractor may be required to mix the selected materials by

bulldozing into stockpilesiand/or by face loading by shovel. The
stockpiles‘ shall be formed at least six weeks before intended use for
materials which are to be treated and at least three weeks before
intended use for materialslwhich are not to be treated.

The Contractor shall ensure that oversize material, clay, humus or

other inferior material encountered in the workings is separated from
the materials proposed for use in the Works and such inferior
material shall be removed to spoil.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
V?‘
~‘.

gmw
QUARRIES, BORROW PITS, STOCKPILE AND SPOIL AREAS Page 6.6

in
'~./.r.‘
..‘
I.-1

A separate_ stockpile shall. be used for each type and grading of

material.
,

when removing material from stockpiles, none of the underlying

material shall be mixed with it, and generally at least the bottom
100 mm layer shall be left behind.
§E
Should any stockpiles prove surplus to requirements
the Contractor _%
shall spread the material over the area of the quarry
or borrow pit
unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. '

609 MATERIAL UTILIZATION

p

Where the Contractor uses a borrow pit, instructed by the Engineer

for use in earthworks or under ‘Method B’ of Section
10, ll and 12 of
this Specification, for the construction of access roads, deviations, pg
detours, haul roads, camps, temporary works or for any other works
not part of the permanent Works then the cost of
site clearance,
topsoil and overburden removal and access roads ,
to such borrow pits
shall be borne by the Contractor in the proportion
that the volume of
material removed for the Contractor's ‘purposes and not part of the
permanent Works bears to the total volume of
material removed from 5
the borrow pit. ' , . .-
‘I . ,_._.

Where a borrow pit instructed by the Engineer for use in earthworks

or under ‘Method B’ of Sections 10, ll or 12 of this
Specification is
used ‘to construct works for which there are different methods of P?f—‘—"=“”'“ "
measurement and payment then the quantity of site clearance, topsoil
and overburden removal and access roads to such borrow pits shall be
divided between each method of measurement in the proportion
that the
volume of material removed.for each purpose bears
to the total volume
of material removed from the borrow pit.

Where a borrow pit instructed by the Engineer under ‘Method A‘ of

Sections 10," ll, or l2 of this Specification is used to construct
several works for which there 5
at
are different methods of measurement In. .'
and payment then the site clearance, topsoil and overburden removal 9},

and access roads shall all be measured and paid for “in accordance
with ‘Method A’ of Sections l0, ll, or 12 of this
Specification. :<':'v.
1':
»-:1

All materials from borrow pits instructed by the Engineer shall only
be used for permanent Works shown on the Drawings or instructed by
the Engineer and any other use shall be subject to the Engineer's
approval. K9“?-‘.}V“—'.".7v'2'w'."-'

510 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Reimbursement for land acquisition shall be made in
' accordance with
ViSlDfl S of Section 1 of this Specification.
~9-. ._.-0.

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

QUARRIES, BORROW FITS, STOCKPILE AND SPOIL AREAS Page 6.7

No separate measurement and payment will be made in respect of this

Section 6 of this Specification. The Contractor shall be deemed to
have allowed elsewhere in his rates and prices for the cost of
complying with all the requirement of this Section 6, including all
site clearance, overburden and topsoil removal, access roads to
quarries, borrow pits, spoil areas and stockpile areas and
reinstatement including landscaping and spreading topsoil.

Where the Engineer has instructed that overburden or topsoil is used

in the Works measurement and payment will be in accordance with the
relevant Sections of this Specification.
 SECTEON 7
EXCAVANBN AND FELLENG FGR STRUCTURES"
 '-an.
.3.
«'
._, . m.\u.

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

EXCAVATION AND FILLING FOR STRUCTURES Page 7.1

I
_

701 SCOPE OF SECTION

This section covers all excavation and filling operations to bridges}

box culverts, retaining walls and other major structures.

702 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION

(a) Hard material is material .which can be excavated only after

blasting with explosives or barring and wedging or the use of a
mechanical breaker fitted with a rock point in good condition
and operated correctly. Boulders of more than O.20m3 occuring
in soft material shall be classified as hard material.

(b) Soft material is all material other than hard material.

703 EXCAVATION OF FOUNDATIONS FOR STRUCTURES

The excavation of foundations for structures and any associated

drainage works shall be kept to the minimum. The sides of the
excavation shall be kept vertical and shall be properly timbered or
sheet piled, shored and strutted as necessary to prevent subsidence
or slipping of the surrounding soil.

All excavated surfaces, in material other than hard material, on

which foundations for structures are to be placed shall be compacted
to 95% MDD (AASHTO T99) immediately before foundations are
constructed.

Excavated surfaces in hard material shall be further excavated to

achieve a minimum thickness of 50mm of blinding concrete.

Where a combination of hard and soft materials exist in the excavated

surfaces then, dependant on the proportions of existing materials,
the Contractor will either, remove a minimum of 300 mm of soft
material below underside of foundation and replace it with lean
concrete to the top of blinding level or remove a minimum of 300mm of
hard material below the underside of blinding concrete and replace it
with soft material compacted to 95% MDD (AASHTO T99).

The Engineer's approval of any excavation shall be obtained prior to

'
any construction thereon,

704 EXCAVATIONS TO BE KEPT DRY

All excavations shall be kept dry and the Contractor shall take all
necessary measures to maintain excavations free from water;

Where required by the Engineer, the sumps from which pumps operate
shall be constructed outside the area of the foundation base;
Excessive pumping from the excavation which is liable to cause
settlement, disturbance, or washing out of fines from the adjacent
ground will not be permitted.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
W?“
EXCAVATION AND FILLING FOR STRUCTURES Page 7C2

Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the foundation has become soft
and additional excavation is required due solely to the Contractor's
method of working, the resulting backfill shall be with approved
material or concrete as instructed by the Engineer. All such
backfill shall be at the Contractor's expense.

705 FOUNDATIONS AND ABUTMENTS CAST AGAINST IN~SITU MATERIAL

Where shown on the Drawings or‘ instructed by the Engineer that a

foundation and/or abutment shall be cast against the in—situ
material, the excavations shall be neatly excavated to the shape
required. should any over—excavation occur the space between the
foundation and/or abutment and the inwsitu material shall be
backfilled with Class l5/20 concrete or with the same grade of
concrete as the foundation and/or abutment and shall be placed in
advance of the concrete for the foundation and/or abutment. All such
_backfill shall be at the Contractor's expense.

706 SURPLUS EXCAVATED AND BACKFILLING MATERIALS

Surplus_excavated material shall be taken to spoil areas or may be

used in adjacent earthworks if suitable.

The Engineer's approval must be obtained to the Contractor's proposed

material for backfilling and filling behind and around a structure.

707 BACKFILLING OF EXCAVATIONS AND FILLING FOR STRUCTURES

No filling ground a structure or backfill in a trench or excavation

shall commence, neither shall a structure be loaded, without the
approval of the Engineer.

The sequence of filling and backfilling behind and around a structure

and the maximum difference in height at any time between fill levels
shall as directed by the Engineer.

approved fii fi
All filling and backfilling shall be with selected materials
by the Engineer, brought up in horizontal layers not exceeding 150 mm
compacted thickness. Each layer shall be thoroughly mixed, watered
or dried as necessary, and compacted to a minimum dry density of 95% ,w‘2—'-“,‘.;a':-"—".«‘-I v‘:g

MDD (AASHTO T99)“

Timbering and sheeting left in for the purpose of supporting the

If,-A-“.n,$."'.$,-'."'v‘.¢"-'1
excavation shall be eased up l50 mm at a time in step with the
backfill layer. Where instructed by the Engineer, timbering or
sheeting shall be left in place,
I-'~-.3-'2’-‘.4”’,3~

Where instructed, or shown on the F1{LI .5£1 }_a DJ H .

frl i--- 3...; ‘1.

material and/or gorous filter material a engineer 9D4 ii? 5...a

be placed. A sliding form or other approved me used
during backfilling such that the porous filter, is brought up and
compacted at least l5Q mm ahead of the selected granular fill
material and that the selects‘ granular .ill is brought up and
$5

comyacted at least l5fl mm ahead of the adjacent earthworks fill. The

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

EXCAVATION AND FILLING FOR STRUCTURES Page 7.3

interface between selected granular material to this Section of the

Specification and the adjacent earthworks to Section ,5 of this
Specification shall be as shown on the Drawings or as instructed by
the Engineer. Where selected granular fill material is not
instructed the Contractor shall backfill the excavation behind and
around the structure and up to ground level using the excavated
material. Above ground level the Contractor shall use the same
material as that being used for the adjacent embankment.

708 PROTECTION OF STRUCTURES

The Contractor shall furnish, construct and maintain all necessary

cofferdams, cribs, channels, flumes and other diversion and
protection works and shall furnish, install, maintain and operate all
necessary pumping and other equipment for the exclusion or removal of
water from various parts of the Works.

Drawings for cofferdams and other proposed temporary installations

shall be submitted to the Engineer before commencement of the work.
The Contractor shall avoid any measures in the proposed installations
which will cause flooding or endanger the safety of persons or
property upstream or downstream of the site.

All such structures shall be removed on completion of the works

unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.

709 EXCAVATIONS FOR RIVER TRAINING AND NEW WATERCOURSES

Excavations carried out in the diversion, enlargement, deepening or

straightening of streams and rivers or in the formation of new
watercourses shall be performed as shown on the Drawings or as
instructed by the Engineer, and may include site clearance, trimming
of slopes, grading of beds and disposal of the excavated materials.

Where water courses have to be diverted, the original channels shall

be cleared of all vegetable growth and soft deposits and carefully
filled in with approved materials, deposited and compacted as
instructed by the Engineer.

710 STONE PITCHING

Where shown on the" Drawings or directed by the Engineer the

Contractor shall excavate for, trim to line and level, provide and
lay stone pitching.

Stone pitching shall be formed of hard stone, roughly _dressed

square. The least dimension of any stone shall not be less than 200
mm, and the volume not less than 0.01 m3. No rounded boulders shall
be used.

The stones shall be set on edge and securely bedded with the largest
dimensions at right angles to the flow of water, fitted closely
together so as to leave only a minimum of voids between the stones
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
EXCAVATION AND FILLING FOR STRUCTURES
Page 7.4

which shall be filled in I

with suitably shaped and tightly wedged
spalls. The top of the pitching shall be finished
E
adjacent material.
flush with the
”‘ y

Where grout is specified, a 1:4 cement : sand mortar shall be rammed

into the wetted interstices and.smoothed
off flush with the pitched
face.

711 GABIONS

Where shown on the Drawings or directed "by the Engineer the

Contractor shall excavate for, trim
to line and level, provide and
erect gabions including providing selected rock, crushed if aa
.—.:vr—:-
necessary, packed and compacted inside
the gabions.
T
Gabions shall include gabion mattresses
and gabion boxes
hf
and for the dfi
purposes of construction and method of measurement and payment no
distinction shall be made'between them. §
qi
Gabions shall be "Maccaferri" boxes .*
and/or "Reno" mattresses both
with diaphragms at 1 metre centres, or similar approved.
The maximum
mesh size shall be 100 mm X l20 mm \
for boxes and 60 mm x 80 mm for
mattresses. The wire used for the construction
of gabions shall a
unless otherwise instructed by the
Engineer comply with the
requirements of Table 7 ~ 1. _
gw
TABLE 7 -— 1 7'

_
Diameter (mm) . ,
Galvanising (g/m ) Z -

Mesh Box 3.4 275

Mattress 2.7 260

%$
Binder Box 2.2
t 240
Mattress 2.2 240
g

Selvedge Box 3.9 290

Mattress 3.4 275

All wire shall be to as 1052 having a tensile strength of not less

than 40kg/mm2

Galvanizing shall comply with the requirements

of BS 443.
Gabions shall be constructed to the shapes
and dimensions as shown on
the Drawings or given in the Special
Specification or as directed by
the Engineer. Gabions, as constructed shall be within
a tolerance of
+ 5% on the height or width instructed and + % on the length
instructed. 5*
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD ANDBRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

EXCAVATION AND FILLING FOR STRUCTURES Page 7.5

The alignment of the gabion shall be correct within a tolerance of

'l00m of the instructed alignment and the level of any course of
gabion shall be correct to within a tolerance of 50mm of the
In addition adjacent gabions shall not Vary by
instructed level.
more than 25mm in line and/or level from each other.

The surface upon which gabions are to be laid shall be compacted to a

minimum dry density of 95% MDD (AASHTO T99) and trimmed to the
specified level or shape.

Joints in gabions shall be stitched together with 600mm minimum

lengths of binder wire, with at least one stitch per 50mm, and each
end of the wire shall be fixed with at least two turns.upon itself.

Adjacent gabions shall be stitched together with binder wire along

all touching edges.

Gabion boxes shall be laid with broken bond throughout to avoid

continuous joints both horizontally and vertically. Pre—tensioning
of gabions shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

Gabions shall be handpacked with broken rock of 150 mm minimum

dimension and 300mm maximum dimension. The sides shall be packed
first in the form of a wall, using the largest pieces, with the
majority placed as headers with broken joints to present a neat
outside face. The interior of the gabion shall be hand packed with
smaller pieces and the top layers shall be finished off with larger
The whole interior and top layers shall be packed tight and
pieces.
hammered into place.

Where instructed by the Contractor shall place filter

the Engineer
fabric (‘Terram' or similar approved) behind gabion faces in Contact

with existing or backfilled ground. The Contractor shall ensure that

filter fabric is not damaged during the construction or
the
backfilling around the gabion works and any damaged or torn fabric
shall be replaced at the expense. The filter fabric‘
Contractor's
shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
and the filter fabric shall not beuleft exposed to sunlight for more
than 3 weeks.

At theback face and ends of completed gabion work or where shown on

be
the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer the existing soil shall
backfilled, thoroughly compacted against the sides of the gabions and
finished flush with the top surface of the gabion.

On completion of gabion construction the exposed joints shall be

to
painted with a thick bitumen to the approval of the Engineer
discourage vandalism.

\,_| i...J RIP—RAP

of well shaped hard dense durable

Stone :3: fl§“Eap shall consist
rOCkJ At least SO per cent of the pieces shall have a volume greater
‘ per cent shall have a volume of less
that 0 03m3 and n t more than
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

EXCAVATION AND FILLlNG FDR STRUCTURES Page 7.6

than 0.0lm3. Where‘ instructed by the Engineer or shown on the

Drawings the stones shall be laid with close joints from the bottom
of the slope of embankment, or existing gound upward, the larger of
the stones being laid at the bottom. The surface shall be hand
packed, carefully bedded land tightly wedged with suitable spalls to
form an even surface. Alternatively the Engineer may direct that the
stones are dumped from above and that the riperap is roughly dressed
to the dimensions shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.

713 MEASUREMNT AND PAYMENT

(a) Item : Excavate for structures in soft material

Unit m3

Excavate for structures in soft material shall be measured by

the cubic metre, calculated as the product of the net plan area
of the foundation to be excavated and the average depth of the
excavation. No allowance will be made for working space. The
average depth shall be calculated as the difference between the
original ground level as agreed between the Engineer and the
Contractor or the formation level, whichever is the lower, and
the required level.

The rate for excavate for structures in soft material shal l

include for the cost of excavation to any depth, compaction at
the foundation level of the excavation, backfilling with th e
excavated material or removing the excavated material to spoi l
if it is unsuitable or surplus to requirements, and complying
with the requirements of Clauses 702, 703, 704, 705, 706, 70 7
and 708 sf this Specification.

(b) Item : River training in soft material

Unit : m3

River training in soft material shall be measured by the cubic

metre, calculated as the product of the average end areas
measured at ‘intervals of not greater than l0m along the
centreline 'of the area to be excavated and the length of the
excavation“ The end areas shall be calculated from existing c'\

t
ground levels or existing river or stream profiles taken prior n \
,\‘z. '
3:1‘.
to commencement of excavation and the cross~section shown on the
Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.

The r L1: rt" e for river training in soft material shall include fo I‘ :14;-‘.-‘:'a: ":=—.

the cost 9 r"n excavation ‘to anar depth and to any bed width f

disposal { \_J .' :1

.: .e excavated material to spo i l and compliance with
the requirements of Clauses 702, 704, 708 and 709 of thi S
Specification.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

EXCAVATION AND FILLING FOR STRUCTURES Page _7.7

(0) Item : Backfill to existing channels in soft material

Unit : °m3

Backfill in soft material to existing channels shall be measured

in accordance with Clause 7l3 (b) of this Specification.

The rate for backfill in. soft material to existing channels

shall include for excavating the material to be used for
backfill, clearing vegetation from the channel, transporting,
depositing and compacting the material in the existing channel
all hauls as necessary and complying with Clause 709 of this
Specification.

(C1) Item : Extra over (a) and (b) for excavation in hard
material

Unit : m3

Hard material encountered in any excavation covered by Clause

713 (a) and (b) of this Specification shall be measured by the
cubic metre, calculated as the product of the average end areas
measured at intervals agreed with the Engineer along the
centreline of the excavation and the length over which hard
material is encountered. The end areas shall be calculated from
levels taken on top of the hard material prior to excavation and
levels taken after excavation of the hard material or to the
levels instructed whichever is the higher.

The rate for extra over Clause 7l3(a) and (b) for excavation in
hard material shall include for the cost of excavation to any
depth and compliance with the requirements of Clauses 702, 703,
704, 705, 706, 707, 708 and 709 of this Specification.

Item : Porous filter material

Unit : m3

Porous filter material shall measured by the

be Cubic metre,
calculated as the plan area instructed to be backfilled with
porous filter material and the average depth of porous filter
material instructed to be placed,

The rate for porous filter material shall include for the cost
of providing the material, backfilling at any depth, all hauls
as necessary and complying with the requirements of Clause 707
of this Specification,

——~. 1')
Y‘ Item : Selected granular
‘we?

Unit : m3

Selected granular fill material shall be measured by the cubic

metre, Calculated as the plan area instructed to be backfilled
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
@-

V l.
\“.
': '3.-.a

EXCAVATION AND FILLING FOR STRUCTURES Page 7.8

with selected granular fill material and the average depth of

selected granular fill material instructed.

The rate for selected granular fill material shall include for
the cost of providing the material, backfilling at any depth,
all hauls as necessary and complying with Clauses 702, 703, 704,
705, 706, 707 and 708 of this Specification.

(g) Item : Stone pitching

Unit : m2

Stone pitching shall be measured by the square metre calculated

as the net area, measured on the slope, instructed by the
Engineer.

The rate for stone pitching shall include for the cost of
excavating, trimming to line and level, providing and laying the
stone and of complying with the requirements of Clause 710 of
this specification.

(h) Itcan Extra over (g) for grout

Unit : m2

Grouting of the stone pitching covered by Clause 713 (g) of this

Specification shall be measured by the square metre of stone
pitching instructed by the Engineer to he grouted.

The extra over rate for grouting of stone pitching shall include
for providing the sand, cement, mortar, wetting of the stone to
be grouted, ramming the grout into the interstices and
smoothing off flush with the pitched face and complying with
Clause 7l0 of this Specification.

(i) Item : Excavate for gabions in soft material

Unit m3

Excavate for‘ gabions in soft material shall be measured by the

cubic metre, calculated as the product of the net plan area of
the gabion to be excavated and the average depth of the
excavation. No allowance will be made for working space. The
average depth shall be calculated as the difference between the
original ground level as agreed between the Engineer and the
Contractor or the formation level or drain profile which ever is
the lower, and the required level.

The rate : orexcavate for gahions in soft material shall include

'
for the cost of excavation to any depth, compaction of the
surfaces_to receive the gabions, backfilling with the excavated
material ‘or removing the excavated material to spoil if surpl ‘L15
to requirements, and complying with the requirements of Clauses
T02, 703, 704, 706, 707, 708 and 711 of this Specificationq
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

EXCAVATION AND FILLING FOR STRUCTURES Page 7.9

Item Extra over (i) for excavation in hard material

Unit : m3

Hard material encountered in any excavation covered by Clause

713 (i) of this Specification shall be measured by the cubic
metre, calculated as the product of the average end areas
measured at intervals _agreed with the Engineer along the
centreline of the excavation and the length over which the hard
material is encountered. The end areas shall be calculated from
levels taken on top of the hard material prior to excavation and
levels taken, after excavation of the hard material or to the
levels instructed whichever is the higher.

The rate for extra over Clause 713 (i) of this Specification for
excavation in hard material shall be extra over that for
excavating in soft material and shall include for of the cost
excavation to any depth and compliance with the requirements of
Clauses 702, 703, 704, 706, 707, 708 and 711 of this
Specification.

(K) Iten Gabion mesh

~._ , :.~._ .

Unit : m2

Gabion mesh shall be measured by the square metre calculated as

the net area of material required to construct the gabions,
including diaphragms.

The rate for gabion mesh shall include for the cost of providing
and fixing the mesh and the cost of complying with requirements
of Clause 711 of this Specification.

Item Rockfill to gabions

Unit : m3

Rockfill to gabions shall be measured by the cubic, metre

calculated as.the volume of the gabions instructed to be placed.

The rate for rockfill to gabions shall include for the cost of
providing, hauling and placing the rock and the cost of
complying with the requirements of Clause 711 of thififi
Specificationo AQQ”

. :I:« Li,
,;;j_\:;.'/I
_. . §‘¥§”".:/“-4,’»'W
Lg’

figs NW;
STANDARD SPEQFICATION FORRDAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTIION

EXCAVATION AND FILLING FOR STRUCTURES Page 7.10

(m) Item Filter fabric under and/or behind gabions

Unit m2 of each weight of fabric specified

The filter fabric placed under and/or behind gabions shall

be measured as the net area of filter fabric instructed.

The rate for filter fabric_ shall include for the cost of
the preparation of the surface to receive the filter
fabric, the provision, transport, storing and laying the
fabric in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,
all laps and/or stitching and for complying with the
requirements of Clause 711 of this Specification.

(n) Item : Dumped rip—rap 1.11

fl
M.
E '
fir‘-T
Unit : m3

Rip—rap Shall be measured by the cubic metre calculated

from the dimensions given on the Drawings or instructed’ by gfififi

the Engineer.

The rate for- dumped rip~rap shall include for the cost of gee
providing, dumping and roughly dressing the rip—rap and
complying with the requirements of Clause 712 of this
Specification.
%fl %@

(0) Item Close jointed rip—rap

Unit : m3

Close jointed rip~rap shall be measured as the volume of

close jointed rip—rap instructed to be placed.

The rate for close jointed rip—rap shall include for the
cost of providing, dumping and close jointing the rip-rap
and complying with the requirements of Clause 712 of this
Specification.

§j'-f:i;'.n".“.'-".".
 SECTQON 8
SULVERT ANS DRAINAGE WORKS
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND ‘BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CULVERT AND. DRAINAGE IWORKS Page 8.1

801 ’SCOPE OF SECTION

This section covers the folloWing:—

(a) The provision and installation of circular concrete pipe

culverts, nestable and multiplate corrugated metal pipe culverts
and arches and half round Channels.

(b) The construction of minor structures including culvert inlet and

outlet structures, scour checks, ‘catchpits, cascades and the

(c) The construction of drainage protection works including rip-rap,

stone pitching and gabions.

(d) The excavation and/or fill and all work associated with the
construction of:~

— trenches to receive culverts

— inlets drains
- . outfall drains
~ mitre drains
~ cut—off drains
- subsoil drains
— catchwater drains
- minor structures
— scour checks
- erosion protection works
- guiding dams.

Side drains are covered in Section 5 of this Specification.

Concrete box culverts are covered in Sections 7 andi 17 of this

Specification.

802 ORDER OF WORKS

(a) The Drawings give a guide only to the location and size of each
culvert. Precise details of length, skew and invert. levels will
be issued to the Contractor from time to time as construction
proceeds. The Contractor should allow in his programme a period
of 30 days between submission of cross~sections in accordance
with Section 3 of this Specification and. the issue of precise
culvert details.

(b) All culverts and drainage works shall be carefully programmed

and the Contractor shall normally allow in his programme
(submitted under Clause 14 of the Conditions of Contract) for
the completion of all pipe culverts and drainage works prior to
the construction of embankments over or beside them.

(C) Where Contractor considers that drainage conditions are

the ‘uchcpt
that it is not necessary to construct a pipe culvert
 ‘

STANDARD SPECIFJCATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

17.:
CULVERT AND DRAINAGE WORKS Page 8.2

the embankment, the Engineer may consent to its installation

after construction of the embankment on the following
conditions:

(i) that the Contractor will be responsible for any damage or

delays to the culvert or to the embankment earthworks;
and

(ii) that the construction of the culvert shall follow

immediately upon the substantial completion of the
embankment earthworksr

(d) Where culverts are to be constructed under a road formation in

cutting, excavation and backfill shall be carried out after the
bulk earthworks are complete but before the processing
of the
300mm layer below formation level in cuttings. The Engineer may
consent to the excavation for these culverts being carried
out
before the earthworks are completed but payment for the
excavation of the trench will only be made for the volume
excavated below formation level.

803 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION

All excavation for culverts and drainage works shall be classified as

follows:—

(a) Hard material is material which can be excavated only after

blasting with explosives or barring and wedging or
the use of a
mechanical breaker fitted with a rock point in good
condition
and operated correctly. Boulders of more than 0.20 m3 occurring
in soft material shall be classified as hard material.

(b) Soft material is all material other than hard material.

804 EXCAVATION FOR CULVERTS AND DRAINAGE WORKS

The Contractor _shall carry out all excavations for culverts and
drainage works to the lines, levels, inclinations, and dimensions
shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.

Should excavations be effected to a greater depth or width

than is
necessary, then the Contractor shall at his own expense backfill the
excess excavation with approved materials, compacted to the .density
of the adjacent ground, to the correct levels and dimensions all to
the approval of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall carefully set aside the various suitable

materials encountered so that they may be reused for backfilling. If
excavated materials are unsuitable the Contractor may spoil the
material only after approval by the Engineer.

All excavations shall be kept clean and free from water, and‘ the
Contractor shall dig diversion channels, erect cofferdams or
otherwise dewwater the excavation.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CULVERT AND DRAINAGE WORKS Page 8.3

Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the surface of the excavation

has become soft or unsuitable due to the Contractor's method of
working, the Contractor shall at his own expense remove and replace
the unsuitable material with nonwstructural concrete as specified in
Section 17 of this Specification or other approved material as
instructed by the Engineer.

The final excavated surface .in soft material on which culverts or

structures are to be constructed shall be compacted to a dry density
of at least 95% MDD (AASHTO T99) to a_depth of 150 mm. All particles
larger than 20 mm shall be removed.prior to compaction.

For culverts. which are to be constructed approximately on the

existing ground after the .removal of topsoil, the Contractor shall
level the existing ground by excavating and/or filling in layers. He
shall then compact the ground for 150 mm below invert or underside of
bedding material to a dry density of 95% MDD (AASHTO T99) such that
the foundation for the culvert or bedding is true to grade and of
uniform density over the whole length of the culvert.

The Engineer's approval to the final excavated surface shall be

obtained prior to the installation of culverts or the construction of
structures.

The sides of pits, other

trenches and
excavations shall, where
required, be adequately timbered and supported, and all such
excavations shall be of sufficient size to enable the pipes and
concrete to be laid accurately, and proper refilling and compaction
to be carried out.

Where instructed by the Engineer, shoring and supporting timber shall

he left in trenches or other excavations.

Where ground_ conditions are such that a satisfactory foundation

cannot be achieved the Contractor shall, if instructed by the
Engineer, remove the unsuitable material either until a suitable
material is encountered or to the depth and width instructed by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall backfill the resultant excavation
with approved material to a dry density of 95% MDD (AASHTO T99).
Approved material may include rockfill as specified in Clause 50? of
this Specification and/or selected backfill' material in accordance
Clause 8l2 of this Specification.

805 EXCAVATION IN HARD MATERIAL

(a) For concrete pipe culverts

where hard material is encountered in trenches for concrete pipe

culverts, it shall be excavated so that no hard material
protrudes within 50 mm of the underside of the pipe barrel. A
regulating layer of nonmstructural concrete of minimum thickness
50 mm shall be placed and compacted on the excavated hard
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION.

CULVERT AND DRAINAGE WORKS Page 8.4

material surface, the top of which shall be at the level of the

underside of the pipe barrel. The maximum thickness of
regulating layer shall be 150 mm. Where both soft and hard
material are encountered in the trench either the soft material
shall be removed to a depth of 300 mm or to such depth as
instructed by the Engineer, or if directed by the Engineer the
hard material shall be removed to a depth of 300 mm or to such
depth as instructed by Engineer and backfilled to 95% MDD
(AASHTO T99) with similar material to that in the remainder of
the trench invert.

(b) For metal pipe culverts

Where hard material is encountered in trenches for corrugated

metal pipe culverts, it shall be excavated to-a depth of 150 mm $5:24 §
below the invert level of the culvert and replaced with 150 mm ii?
of sand or other approved material to provide a firm but
flexible bed for the culvert. Where both soft and hard material
are encountered in the trench the hard material shall be removed
to a depth of 300mm or to such depth as instructed by the
Engineer and backfilled to 95% MDD (AASHTO T99) with similar
material to that in the remainder of the trench invert.

(c) For minor structures

In accordance with the relevant sections of Clause 703 of this

Specification.

806 WATER ZN EXCAVATION

The Contractor shall at his own expense make good any damage caused
by prolonged and/or excessive pumping and shall» take all precautions
necessary for the safety of adjoining structures and buildings by
'
shoring or otherwise, during the time that excavations are open.

807 CONCRETE PIPES

L

Concrete pipes shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with

Section 2 of this Specification.

808 CORRUGATED METAL PIPES AND ARCHES _':'»_-3»

_3-'.u‘/Er?"
Corrugated metal pipes and arches shall comply with Section 2 of this
Ispecification. '
d
809 BEDDING AND LAYING OF ?IPE CULVERTS K

Pipe culverts shall ncrmallv he bedded directly on inwsitu soft

material. Where the inmsitu material is unsuitable the invert shall
be excavated and backfilled as specified in Clause 804 and Clause
805 of this Specification"
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CULVERT AND. DRAINAGE WORKS Page 8.5

(a) Bedding and laying of concrete pipe culverts on in—situ or

imported soft material or imported granular material.

The bottom of the excavation shall be compacted to 95% MDD

(AASHTO T99) and shaped to the lower part of the pipe such that
the barrel of the culvert rests on it over a width of at least
one third of its diameter, and throughout the length of barrel.

Voids shall be formed under the joints and sockets so that

adequate space is provided under the pipe to form the joint.
When the joint has been formed the void shall be packed hard
with bedding material. The underside of the barrel shall be
packed hard with selected fill material with a maximum particle
size of 20 mm, at a suitable moisture content, and rammed solid.

(b) Bedding and laying of concrete pipes on a concrete bed

Where pipes are laid on a concrete bed the pipes shall be bedded
on 1:3 cement:sand mortar at least 50 mm thick, 150 mm wide and
extending the full length of the barrel.

After the joints have been formed, concrete Class 15/20 shall be
packed hard under the barrel and sockets of the culvert and
extending upwards on each side of the pipe to the height shown
on the Drawings.

(c) Bedding and laying of metal culverts

All pipes shall be laid, bedded and jointed in accordance with

the manufacturer's recommendations.

Where shown on the Drawings the excavation shall be trimmed to

the contour of the base of the culvert and a bed of -fine
granular material not less than 75 mm thick shall be placed,
compacted and shaped to enable the culvert to be bedded.

Unless otherwise directed, all pipes shall be painted prior to

“assembly both inside and out with one coat of purpose made
bituminous paint, approved by the Engineer. During assembly
both areas of pipe sections in contact shall be painted with a
second coat of purpose made bituminous paint immediately prior
to fixing.

After assembly all pipes shall be painted over the exposed area
outside with a further coat of purpose made bituminous paint,
and all pipes of 1.2 m diameter and over shall also be painted
internally,

Pipe laying shall be started at the inlet end with the separate
sections firmly jointed together and with outside laps of
circumferential joints pointing upstreame with the permission
of the Engineer pipes may be assembled out of the trench and
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONFOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CULVERT AND DRAINAGE WORKS Page 8.6

lowered in, in_ which case particular care shall be taken to

ensure the barrels are properly bedded along the whole length.
Outside laps of longitudinal joints shall point downwards.

Multiple installations shall be laid with centrelines parallel.

Unless otherwise instructed or shown on the Drawings, the clear
distance between barrels of adjacent pipes shall be at least
equal to one half the diameter of the pipes.

Where instructed by the Engineer the gradeline shall be cambered

to allow for future settlement. -

810 JOINTING CONCRETE PIPES

Ca) Rigid joints

~«.~,-,.
When laying rigid jointed concrete pipes with integral sockets,
before entering a pipe spigot into its socket, both spigot and
socket shall be clean and free from mud, oil,_grease or other
deleterious matter. A gasket of tarred hemp yarn, cut to length
so _that it forms a butt joint at the crown of the pipe, shall be
wrapped round the spigot which shall then be fully entered into
1

the socket and the gasket caulked up hard into the joint. The he
"Kn

joint shall then be filled completely with a plastic mortar

composed of one part of cement to two parts of sand and finished
off with a fillet at an angle of 45°.

Rigid jointed sleeves used to join two spigots shall be jointed

in the same manner as integral sockets.

If the Drawings require ogee jointed pipes to be laid with a

mortar joint, the joint shall be made at the time of laying.
Mortar as described above shall be applied to the lower
semi—circumference of the socket and to the upper
semi~circumference of the spigot and the pipe shall be drawn
hard into the socket. The outside of the joint shall be pointed
up with a fillet of 1:2 Cement:sand mortar, 75 mm wide and 25 mm
thick, all the way round and central over the joint.

All pipes shall be saturated with water before jointing and

shall be scraped, cleaned inside and the joint flushed up with
1:2 cement: sand mortar.

All joints shall be protected from the wind, sun and rain by a
covering approved by the Engineer, and shall be kept constantly
damp for a period of at least three days.

The pipes shall not be disturbed in any way for at least 48

'1
. . ._ ‘.__. ‘
.-'-‘s ‘«\"' Bf jO._1.I1L,,L_"'1(j'.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION. FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CULVERT AND. DRAINAGE WORKS Page 8.7

—. (b) Flexible joints

Flexible joints between concrete pipes having integral sockets

may be formed by a shaped rubber gasket fitted within the socket
or by a rubber ring of circular cross section (O~ring) placed on
the pipe spigot. The type of flexible joint to be used shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.

Before any joint is made all parts of the joint shall be clean
and free from mud, oil, grease or other deleterious matter.

Fixed gaskets shall be lubricated strictly in accordance with

the manufacturer's recommendations. O-ring gaskets shall not be
lubricated. Components of flexible“ joints from different
manufacturers shall not be used together.

The spigot of the pipe to be laid shall be entered into the

socket of the previous pipe with the two pipes in line, and a
firm steady pressure exerted on the end of the pipe being laid.
If necessary a jack anchored round the collar of the previous
pipe shall be used to pull in pipes. The spigot shall be pulled
hard into the socket and then eased back the distance
recommended by the manufacturer to provide flexibility in the
joint.

After jointing, the position of O~rings shall be tested with a

feeler to ensure that they are correctly positioned. If any
ring shows a significant departure from.a line following a pipe
circumference, the joint shall be broken and remade using a new
ring.

Where plain ended pipes are connected by a sleeve incorporating

flexible joints, the joints shall be made as described for pipes
with integral sockets. The joint between the first pipe and the
sleeve shall be completed before the second pipe is inserted
' '
into the sleeve.

The annular space inside, the socket of each pipe or sleeve but
outside the gasket shall be filled with puddled clay, uncaulked
yarn or other suitable material approved by the Engineer to
prevent the entry of stones. -

(C) Pipe ends

Unless otherwise specified pipe ends shall be left square.

CONCRETE BEDS, SURROUNDS AND HAUNCHES

The floor of the trench shall be thoroughly cleaned. trimmed and

compacted before any bed, surround or haunch is placed and shall be
subject to approval by the Engineer before concreting is commenced.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CULVERT AND DRAINAGE WORKS Page 8.8

All concrete for beds, surrounds and haunches shall be Class l5/20
° complying with Section 17 of this Specification formed to the
dimensions shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.

Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, 150 mm of concrete Ki

surround‘ shall be provided to concrete pipes in the following Q
circumstances:

(a) concrete pipes up to and including 600 mm diameter with less

than 0.60 m cover or more than 3.0 m of cover;

(b) concrete pipes over 600 mm diameter and not exceeding 900 mm
diameter with less than 1.0 m of cover or more than 3.0 m of
' '
cover; and

(C) concrete pipes over 900 mm diameter, at any depth. 9%

812 BACKFILL

Backfill for concrete and metal pipes and minor drainage structures
shall be obtained from the material excavated in forming the
excavation and in the event of there being insufficient excavated
material or the culvert is laid close to or above existing ground
then selected backfill shall be obtained from borrow pits. All
backfill whether from excavated material or borrow pits shall have a
CBR of at least 5 measured after 4 day soak on laboratory mix
ggme
compacted to 95% MDD (AASHTO T99), a Plasticity Index of less than
35%, a maximum.particle size of 20 mm and shall be compacted to a dry
density of 95% MDD (AASHTO T99).

For pipe culverts which have been placed and where no concrete haunch
or surround is called for, selected fill material, consisting of the
1".
,.«-u_r,—.-a .
finest available from the excavation shall be placed in layers not .-I. - r.

exceeding l50_mm loose thickness and water shall be uniformly mixed

in or the material dried out, such that the moisture content at the
‘time of compaction shall be between 75% and 105% of the Optimum
hfihfl
Moisture Content (AASHTO T99) and thoroughly compacted along the
remainder of the underside of the barrel of the pipe and in the joint”
holes. Similar selected material shall then be laid in layers, not
exceeding 150. mm loose thickness, mixed, dried or watered as g;r_."e':<. ',:‘r.{4_

necessary and compacted, and brought up uniformly on both sides of

the pipe up to a height of not less than 300 mm over the crown. T:-Le.

§i;':,-”.- ‘.'«.' —."'

The remainder of the trench shall then he backfilled with the best
selected material available, placed in layers not exceeding 150 mm
loose thickness, mixed, watered or dried_as necessary, and compacted.
.-"='Z—'r‘_=.'_v‘.'~‘,-’_=2

All backfilling material shall be 0 ompacted to a minimum dry tensity

\
of 95% of MDD —' I J
(AASHTO T99

Timbering and sheeting left in for the purposes of supporting the

excavation shall he eased up lfio mm at a time in step with the
backfill layer and compaction of the backfiill shall be achieved under
and behind such timber and sheeting.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCT_ION

CULVERT AND DRAINAGE wonrs Page 8.9

For pipe culverts which have been constructed close to, above or
where the culvert protrudes above the existing ground the backfilling
under the flanks and alongside and over the culverts shall be placed
A” and compacted in layers not exceeding l50 mm after compaction to a
gél density of at least the density required for the material in
gii . adjoining layers of fill. The width of backfilling along the flanks
I
of the culvert shall be at least (2+l.5h)metres from each side of the
culvert (Where 'h' is the height from the underside of the layer
I
E} being gompacted to the crown of the pipe in metres). All existing
I ground under this backfill shall be compacted to 95% MDD (AASHTO T99)
to a depth of l50 mm.

= M ¥- The material used for filling alongside the culvert above existing
ground shall be the same material as will be used for the adjacent
fill and no additional payment will be made other than that provided
for the fill in Section 5 of this Specification.

Backfilling shall be carried out simultaneously and equally on both

sides of the culvert to avoid unequal lateral forces.

In all _cases there shall be cover of at least 600 mm over the crown
of the culvert before construction equipment is driven over it unless
I other protective measures approved by the Engineer have been provided.

g Where instructed by the Engineer that the acidity of the material

2 the Contractor shall 'a§d.
' 2 used for bdpkfilling shall_be%neutralised,
. 5%_ of» ling byfiiwe g§t;iwor%}such other Q entity asathe Engineer mgy
minfi truct, to Cthe S ill pdaterialu throughout Ithe width and .depth
instructed by the Enginder. The lime shall be evenly spread over the
surface of each layefi§of"fill material and” shall ‘be mixed in‘ withg
rakes and thellmdisture =content adjusted as necessary before it is
é ' compacted.
:_

l?'diafieter and
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CULVERT AND DRAINAGE WORKS Page 8.10

After the channel is laid selected fill material Shall be placed,

watered if necessary, and compacted against the sides of the channel
for the remainder of the height so that the channel is rigidly
held
in position before the next length is laid. Joints shall be
made by’
placing a thick covering of 1:3 cement mortar on the joint face of
the section already installed before driving the next channel section
hard up against it. The ‘
excess. mortar squeezed out of the joint
shall be neatly trowelled off to_a smooth invert.

All channel ends shall be soaked with water for one hour before
jointing and all joints shall be protected from" the wind, sun and
rain by a covering acceptable to the Engineer and shall be kept
constantly damp for a period of at least 3 days after
forming.

814 SUBSOIL DRAINS

A subsoil drain includes any type of drain designed

to collect
groundwater whether this is rising from below or percolating
from the
surface and may or may not include a pipe. It may also include
impermeable membranes above or below the pipe or permeable filter
membranes all as detailed on the Drawings, or instructed by the
Engineer during the course of the Works. Instructions for subsoil
drains in cuttings will not generally be given until
the bulk
earthworks are complete within that particular cutting and
subsoil
drains that are instructed shall be completed before
the work on the
adjacent 300 mm layer below formation commences.
I

Trenches for subsoil drains shall be not less than 0.5 m wide or the
outside diameter of the pipe plus 0.3m whichever is the greater.
Concrete pipes shall comply with Section 2 of this Specification and
shall be laid with joints open by l0 mm.

The filling in subsoil drains shall be clean hard

crushed rock or
gravel, and, in soils where fines are not liable to
migrate, the
grading shall be in accordance with BS 882 for 37.5 mm maximum size
graded aggregate or as otherwise instructed by the Engineer.

Where more than one size of stone is required in a trench, the

different sizes shall be kept separate by temporary metal or plywood
baffles which shall be removed when the filling is
complete, or by
other suitable means acceptable to the Engineer.

Where permeable filter membranes are instructed they shall be

'Terram' or similar approved material. Transverse joints shall be
lapped by at least 0.5m with the upstream material laid on top.
Longitudinal joints shall be stitched togethera ‘Terram’ or similar
approved material shall not be left exposed to sunlight tor more than
3 weeks, and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructionsq
;

C0 i.._| UT '9 eoercrron WORK

Where shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer the
Contractor shall provide and_plaoe protection works.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATEONFOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CULVERT AND DRAINAGE WORKS Page 8.11

Protection work in .connection with drainage channels, culvert inlets

and outlets and river training will consist generally of stone
pitching, gabions or rip-rap in “accordance .with Section 7 of this
Specification.

816 MINOR DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

Minor drainage structures shall include culvert inlet and outlet

structures, catchpits, cascades, spillways and the like. Typical R
details are shown on the Drawings but working details will be issued
by the Engineer from time to time during the Contract.

Concrete for minor drainage structures shall be Class 20/20 in

accordance with Section 17 of this Specification unless otherwise

shown on the Drawings. The surface finish shall be UFl for unformed
surfaces and Class Fl for formed surfaces.

Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings concrete shall be

reinforced in the back and front faces of all walls and the top and
bottom of all slabs with 10 mm diameter high yield deformed bars
placed .at 200 mm centres both horizontally and vertically to form a
mesh. The reinforcement shall be fixed in accordance with, and shall
comply with, the requirements of Section 17 of this Specification.

817 MITRE CUT-OFF DRAINS,

DRAINS, CATCHWATER DRAINS, SIDE DRAINS, CULVERT

OUTFALL DRAINS AND EARTH DAMS

Mitre drains, cut—off drains, catchwater drains, culvert outfall

at the locations and to the
drains and earth dams shall be formed
lines and levels shown on the Drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer.

where shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer the

Contractor shall construct earth dams in side drains, cnt~off drains,
catchwater drains, mitre and outfall drains to prevent the flow
overshooting the drainage works or to direct flows into culvert
inlets. similar earth structures may also be used as erosion checks.

Earth "dams shall be formed in selected fill material compacted to a

minimum dry density of 95% MDD (AASHTO T99). Where stone pitching
and/or gabions are instructed they shall be in accordance bwith
Section 7 of this Specification. Where topsoiling and grassing is
instructed it shall be in accordance with Section 5 of this
Specification.

818 SCOUR CHECKS

The Contractor shall excavate in the invert of side drains, cutwoff

catchwater drains, outfall drains and mitre drains for scour
drains,
checks to be located as shown on the Drawings or directed by the
Engineer. The width and depth of the scour check will be determined
by the drain and scour check dimensions and shall be as directed by
the Engineer.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CULVERT AND_DRAINAGE WORKS Page 8.12

Concrete for scour checks shall be Class 20/20 which shall comply
with the requirements of Section 17 of this Specification or if shown
‘
on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer scour checks shall be ..
zr§£.ri,mmmm.; ,
gabions in accordance with Section 7 of this Specification. Formwork
shall be provided and placed for all concrete required above the '
existing drain profile_ and shall comply with the requirements of
Section 17 of this Specification. Unless otherwise specified or
b’£‘r3”J-‘.-’
Mm.Ei2§9wmmmmM~
shown on the Drawings concrete for scour checks shall be reinforced
in the back and front faces with 10 mm diameter high yield deformed 4':

bars placed at 200 mm centres both horizontally and vertically to . \%

‘.5

form a mesh. The reinforcement shall be fixed- in ‘accordance with,

and shall comply with, the requirements of Section 17 of this
Specification.

Where the overflow section of a scour check is above the invert level
of the drain the void upstream of the scour check shall be backfilled
to the level of the overflow section. The upper 50 mm of the
backfill shall be topsoil and shall be planted with grass and such
topsoiling and grassing shall comply with the requirements of Section
5 of this Specification. '

819 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE

The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the existing and

new drainage system during construction of culverts and all other
drainage works such that water is passed along" and across the Works
without damage to the Works and all cofferdams, diversions, pumping, 5?:-7.‘Ir'-I 'E"4'3I':

temporary drainage works or other works necessary shall be provided

and maintained at the Contractor's expense. Any damage to the Works
caused by the Contractor's failure to make adequate provision for
drainage of the Works shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.

Before any drainage channel, culvert or other drainage structure is

brought into use, the Contractor shall ensure that such channel or
structure is 'free from all silt and extraneous material and the -

removal and disposal of all such material shall be at the ‘.121;

Contractor's expense. ' ,-'5.-=-‘-3:;

Notwithstanding Clause 48 oft the 7Conditions of Contract, the

Contractor shall be responsible_3'for maintaining all drainage
structures, culverts, channels and drains free of silt and extraneous
material_at his own expense until "the" issue of the Maintenance
Certificate in accordance with" Clause i62‘ of .the Conditions of ;:_.<:.»_'

Contract and any damage to the’ Works caused by his failure to

!g. ‘.;'.'.,-

maintain the drainage system shall vbe repaired at the Contractor's

expense.
.- .,«I3*.z,-. '-,.
_¢_-.

SIT/JXNDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CULVERT AND DRAINAGE WORKS Page 8.13

820 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

(a) Item : Excavate for culverts and subsoil drains in soft

material

Unit : m3

Excavation for culverts and subsoil drains shall be measured by

I
the cubic metre, calculated as the product_of width of the the
excavation and the sectional area of the excavation measured
along its length and these shall be determined from (1) and (2)
belOw:-

(1) Width of excavations

(i) The width of excavation, W, to install a culvert shall

be determined from.the following formula:

W = nD + (n~l)C + A

Where:

n = the number of culverts

D = the external diameter of the pipe in metres
which, in the case of corrugated metal pipes,
shall be measured to the outside edge of the
corrugations.
C = 0.l5 m for concrete pipes surrounded in concrete
C = 0.30 m for concrete pipes not surrounded in
concrete
- .
C = 0.5 D for corrugated metal pipes
A = 0.3 m for concrete pipes surrounded in concrete
A = 0.6 m for concrete pipes of 600 mm nominal
diameter or less not surrounded in
'
concrete
A = 0.9 m for concrete pipes of 750 mm nominal
diameter or greater not surrounded in
concrete. t
A 1! 0.9 m for corrugated metal pipes.

(ii) The width of trenches for subsoil drains shall be as

shown on the Drawings or as instructed or measured by
the Engineer, whichever is the lesser.

(2) Sectional area of excavations

The sectional area of the excavation, measured in square

metres, shall be calculated as the product of the average
depth of the excavation and the length of subsoil drain or
culvert which is to be constructed. The average depth
shall be measured from the instructed final profile and the
average depth as calculated from the following:~
 -STANDARD SPECIHCATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
g
at
CULVERT AND DRAINAGE WORKS . Page 8.14

(i) Where ‘a trench excavation is carried out in and

through a previously constructed road embankment, the
depth of the trench shall be measured from the
underside of the pipe or the concrete surround, haunch
or bed, to formation level, or to a point one metre %
.
above the top of the pipe culvert, whichever is the Eat

lesser.

(ii) Where a trench excavation is carried out ahead of road

embankment construction, the depth of the trench shall
be measured from ground level existing at the time of
excavation to the underside of the pipe or the
Concrete surround, haunch or bed.
em

(iii) Where a trench excavation required under a road .

is .._
cutting, its depth shall be measured from formation ,.

level to the underside of the pipe or concrete

surround, haunch or bed.
WW
(iv) The depths of excavation measured in (2) (i) to (2)
(iii) above, refer to excavation in soft material;
where the excavation is in hard material the underside
of the excavation shall be in accordance with Clause ;_gm::a
805 of this Specification.
d
%
Where a satisfactory invert cannot be achieved the depth he
and width of the excavation shall be in accordance with
Clause 804 of this Specification. g

The rate for excavation of culverts and subsoil drains in

soft material shall include for the cost of excavation to
@
any depth, compaction of the invert of the excavation, %
backfilling with the excavated material or removing the at
excavated material to spoil if it is unsuitable or 'surplus
to requirements, and complying with the requirements of
Clauses 802, 803, 804, 806, 809, 812, 814 and _8l9 of this mafi a,
V Specification. ~

(b) Item : Excavate for minor drainage structures §

Unit : m3

Excavation for minor drainage structures shall be measured by

the cubic metre, calculated as the product of the “plan area of
the minor drainage structure and the average depth of the t
excavationi The average depth of the excavation shall be 5
measured from the instructed final profile irrespective of
whether the Contractor has completed earthworks or not prior to
the excavation of the minor drainage structure, to the invert
level on the underside of the concrete apron or bed»
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CULVERT AND DRAINAGE WORKS Page 8.15

The rate for excavation for minor drainage structures in soft

material shall include for the cost of excavation to any depth,
compaction of the invert of the excavation, backfilling with the
excavated material or removing the excavated material to spoil
if it is unsuitable or surplus to requirements, and complying
with the requirements of Clauses 802, 803, 804, 806, 812, 816
and 819 of this Specification.

(c) Item : Excavate for inlet, outfall, mitre and catchwater

drains in soft material

Unit : m3

Excavation for inlet, outfall, mitre and catchwater drains shall

be measured by the cubic metre, calculated as the product of the
average end areas measured at intervals of not greater than 10 m
along the centreline of the drain and the length of the drain.
The end areas shall be calculated from existing ground levels or
existing drain profiles taken prior to _commencement of
excavation and the cross-section and longitudinal profile of the
drain as shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.

The rate for excavation for inlet, outfall, mitre and catchwater
drains shall include for the cost of excavation to any depth,
excavation for bed widths not greater than 2.5 m wide, disposal
of the excavated material to spoil and compliance with the
requirements of Clauses 802, 803, 804, 806, 817 and 819 of this
Specification. Where the instructed bed width for an inlet,
outfall, mitre or catchwater drain is greater than 2.5 m then
the excavation shall be measured and paid for under Clause 820
(d) : Channel excavation in soft material.

(d) Item : Channel excavation in soft material

Unit : in3
When the instructed bed width for an inlet, outfall, mitre or
catchwater drain is greater than 2.5 m it shall be classified as
channel excavation which shall be measured by the cubic metre
calculated as for Clause 820 (c) of this Specification.

The rate for channel excavation in soft material shall include

for the cost of excavation to any depth, disposal of the
excavated material to spoil and compliance with the requirements
of Clauses 802, 803, 804, 806, 817 and 819 of this Specification.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CULVERT AND DRAINAGE womcs Page 8.16

(e) Item : Excavate‘for cut-off drains in soft material

_ %
Unit : m3
?
Excavation for cut-off drains shall be measured by the cubic
metre, calculated as the product of the average Qg
end areas
measured at intervals of -not greater than 10
m along the
centreline of the drain and the length of the drain. g
The end }
areas shall be calculated from existing ground levels or
existing drain profiles taken prior to commencement of
excavation and the cross-section and longitudinal
profile of the
drain as shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
$3’
The rate for excavation for cut—off drains in
soft material
shall include for the cost of excavation to any -5
depth, forming
and compacting the berm on the lower side of the drain g:
and for as
‘-5.

compliance with the requirements of Clauses 802,

803, 804, 806,
817 and 819 of this Specification.

(f) Item : Extra over (a) to (e) for excavation in hard

material.

Unit : m3

Hard material encountered in any excavation covered by Clause

820 (a) to (e) shall be measured by the cubic metre, I
calculated es
as the product of the average end areas measured at intervals
agreed with the Engineer along the centreline of the excavation
and the length over which hard material is encountered. 4!;

The end gg
Ir’;

areas shall be calculated from levels taken on

top of the hard
material prior to excavation and levels taken after excavation
of the hard material. g
fifi
The rate _for extra over Clause 820 fa) to (e) for excavation in
hard material shall be extra over for excavating in soft
material and shall include for the cost of excavation to any
depth and compliance with the requirements of
Clauses 802, 803,
804, y
805, 806, 817 and 819 of this Specification.

(g) Item : Selected backfill material

Unit : m3

Selected backfill material shall be measured by the

cubic metre,
calculated as the product of the average end area (excluding any
pipe or concrete HE
surround) and the length of selected backfill §;
material instructed to be placed.

The rate for selected bacxfill material shall include for the
cost of providing the material, backfilling at any depth, all
hauls as necessary and complying with the requirements of
Clauses 809, 812 and 814 of this Specification.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CULVERT AND-DRAINAGE WORKS Page 8.17

Item : Crushed rock backfill in subsoil drains

in

Unit : m3

Crushed rock backfill in subsoil drains shall be measured by the

cubic metre, calculated as the product of the average end area
and the length of the subsoil drain. The end area shall be
calculated as the product of the depth of crushed rock backfill
instructed and. the _width of the excavation calculated in
accordance with Clause 820 (a) of this Specification less the
end area of the pipes.

The rate for crushed rock backfill shall include for the cost of
providing the material, backfilling at any depth, all hauls as
necessary and complying with the requirements of Clause 814 of
this Specification.

(i) Item : Rockfill below culverts

Unit : m3

Rockfill below culverts shall be measured by the cubic metre

calculated as the plan area and average depth of rockfill
instructed.

The rate for rockfill below culverts shall include for the cost
of providing and placing the material, all hauls as necessary
and complying with the requirements of Clauses 507 and 804 of
this Specification. The filter fabric will be measured and paid
for separately.

(j) Item : Provide, lay and joint pipes

Unit : m of each type, diameter and gauge

Provide, lay and joint pipes shall be measured? by_ the metre
calculated as the instructed length measured along the
centreline of the culvert or subsoil drain. 3

The rate for provide, lay and joint pipes shall idclude for the
cost of providing. the pipes and complying with the requirements
of Clause 80?, 808, 809, 810, 814 and 819 of this Specification.

Item : Concrete Class 15/20 to beds, surrounds add

haunches

Unit : m3

Concrete Class 15/26 to beds, surrounds and haunches shall be

measured by the cubic metre calculated as the product of the end

area and the instructed length of bed, surround or haunch. The
end area shall be as shown on the Drawings or directed by the
Engineer and shall exclude the area of the pipe.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CULVERT AND DRAINAGE WORKS Page 8.18

The rate for concrete Class 15/20 to beds, surrounds and

haunches shall include for the cost of providing and placing the
concrete and complying with the requirements of Clauses, 805,
809, 811, and 819 of this Specification.

(l) Item : Concrete Class 20/20 to minor drainage structures

Unit : m3

Concrete Class 20/20 to minor drainage structures shall be

measured by the cubic metre calculated from the dimensions given
on the_Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.

The rate for concrete Class 20/20 to minor drainage structures

shall include for the cost of providing and placing the Q
fl
’=‘\-'
concrete, reinforcement and shuttering and complying with the "9.
H * “-2
-_ Ix‘:
requirements of Clauses 816 and 819 of this Specification.

(m) Item : Earth dams

Unit : m3

Earth dams shall be measured by the cubic metre calculated from

the dimensions shown on~the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.

The rate for earth dams shall include for the cost of providing
_c‘_j.: «':.=J:<$.s
the fill material, placing and compacting, all hauls as
necessary and complying with the requirements of Clause 817 of
this Specification.
:,§97»‘;-:. a'.: ~:9-,
(n) Item V: Concrete scour checks

Unit : m3
Scour checks shall be measured by the cubic metre calculated
from the dimensions of the scour check shown on the Drawings or
directed by the Engineer.

The rate for _scour checks shall include for the cost of
providing and placing the concrete, reinforcement and shuttering
and complying with the requirements of Clause 818 of this
Specification.

Measurement and payment for gabion scour checks will be made in

accordance with Section 7 of this Specification.

(o) Item Filter fabric to rockfill and subsoil drains

I

Unit ; mg of each weight of fabric s.ecified.

The filter fabric placed under, around or over rockfill and

suhsoii drains shali be measured as the net area of i'n ilter
fabric instructed.
STANDARD SPECIF|CATlON FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CULVERT AND DRAINAGE WORKS Page 8.19

The rate for filter fabric shall include for the preparation of
the surface to- receive the filter fabric, the provision,
transport, storing and laying the fabric in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, all laps and/or stitching and
complying with the requirements or Clauses 804 land 814 of this
Specification. -

(p) Item Lime to backfill

PROVISIONAL

Unit tonne

Lime to backfill shall be measured by the tonne calculated as

the product of the rate of addition instructed and the volume
instructed to be treated with lime.

The rate for lime to backfill shall include for the cost of
providing, transporting, spreading and mixing the lime at the
rate of spread instructed by the Engineer and for complying with
the requirements of Clause 812 of this Specification.

(q) Item Half round concrete channels

Unit : m

Provide and lay half round concrete channels shall be measured

by the metre calculated as the instructed length measured along
the centreline of the channel.

The rate for half round concrete channels shall include for the
cost of excavation in any material, preparation of the bed,
providing and laying the half round concrete channel,
backfilling with selected material and complying with the
requirements of Clauses 802, 804, 806 812, 813 and 819 of this
Specification.
 SECHON 9
PASSAGE G? TRAFFE
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FORROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
«us.- _-g.-N

PASSAGE OF TRAFFIC Page'9.l

901 SCOPE OF THE SECTION

(a) Where public traffic using an existing road is affected by"

construction of the new road and, where shown on the Drawings or
instructed by the Engineer to do so, the Contractor shall carry
out one or more of the following:~

(i) Effect improvements to_and maintain existing roads.

(ii) Construct and maintain deviations.

(iii) Pass traffic through or over the Works.

(b) Thea Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary signs,

barriers, lights etc. along deviations and existing roads
adjacent to the Works in order to ensure the safe passage of
traffic during the Contract.

(C) The Contractor shall provide adequate notice of the

implementation of deviations etc. and shall ensure efficient and
safe passage of traffic at all times.

(d) The Contractor shall be required to provide and maintain all

access and haul roads to ensure access to all parts of the Site
for his plant, labour and materials.

(e) The Contractor shall be required to protect the Works and

adjacent public roads from the effects of his own construction
traffic.

902 IMPROVEMENTS TO EXISTING ROADS

Where shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer the

Contractor shall carry out improvements to any existing roads
’
adjacent to or affected by the Works including:—

(a) Site clearance and removal of topsoil from the shoulders and
Verges, ‘

{b} Scarifying, re—shaping, widening and watering and compacting the

top l50mm of the_ existing road to 95% MDD (AASHTO T99)
compaction.

(c) Laying gravel wearing course.

(d) Cutting, reushaping and deepening where necessary, side drains

and mitre drains, including clearing and maintaining existing
protection works,

(e) Clearing and maintaining culverts and cutting or deepening

outfall drains,
 .. STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

PASSAGE OF TRAFFIC Page 9.2

(f) Clearing and maintaining existing watercourses and protection

works. *

(g) Repair of potholes in bitumen roads.

(h) Re—sealing of bitumen roads.

(i) Providing erecting and maintaining temporary traffic signs,

barriers lights etc.

The extent of improvements required will be detailed in the Special

Specification.

903 MAINTENANCE or EXISTING ROADS

The Contractor shall maintain the existing roads scheduled in the %

Special Specification from the commencement of the Contract until the
adjacent section of new road or deviation where applicable is opened
to public traffic.

The road shall be maintained to the same standard as existed at the

commencement of the Contract or to the standard following improvement
under Clause 902 of this Specification. Maintenance shall include %
watering, full width grading and dragging as necessary, keeping clear
watercourses and culverts, cutting grass, minor repairs to culverts §
and bridges and assistance to traffic. In the case of bitumen roads, g
potholes and. edge failures shall be repaired with cold asphalt mixed
and laid in accordance with Part D of Section 16 of this 3
Specification. §

Major repairs to culverts and bridges, flood damage, resealing and J

regravelling may be instructed in which case separate payment will he §
made. g.

904 CONSTRUCTION or DEVIATIONS

(a) general

Where shown -on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer the

Contractor shall construct and maintain deviations.

The length of a deviation shall be the shortest practicable ;'.2;: ;_-;—'.

route having regard to gradient and obstructions and the ::.a-

detailed alignment shall be agreed between the Engineer and the

Contractor.

The Contractor shall give at least one months notice in writing

of his intention to commence construction of any deviation along
any section of the Works and such notice shall include details
of locations of any deviation, cross-overs, onemway traffic
operations, restricted widths, culverts, drainage, drifts,
bridges, gradients in excess or ?,O%, earthworks, signs, _ _
lights, and "methods of operation . g_§
barriers, lights, traffic
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

PASSAGE OF —TRAFFIC Page 9.3

of the entire system. Upon approval of such notice in writing

from the- Engineer the Contractor shall become responsible for
the passage of traffic including maintenance of the deviation
and the project road in that section.

Should the Contractor propose, and the Engineer approve, that a

deviation be located other than as shown on the Drawings then
the Contractor shall be. responsible for all land acquisition,
payment for land acquisition, negotiation with landowners and
appropriate Authorities, diversion of services including
telephone lines, power lines, water pipes etc, all at the
Contractor's expense, and the construction, operation and
maintenance of the deviation in accordance with this
Specification.

Where telephone poles, power poles or other services are Outside

but close to the edge of a deviation the Contractor will be
responsible for protection of such poles or services and for
negotiation with the relevant Authority or owner with respect to
the type of protection and the method of removing or replacing
stay wires, propping of poles etc.

Where services cross the deviation the Contractor shall protect

such services and shall negotiate with the relevant Authority or
owner as to the method of protection and shall comply with all
the requirements of such Authorities or owners. Where services
are required to be moved, diversion of such services shall be in
accordance with Clause l2l of this Specification.

Land required for deviations shall be‘ acquired in accordance

with Clause l24 of this Specification except where the
Contractor has proposed and alternative route for the deviation.

(b) Geometry_

Deviation shall be constructed to the cross—section shown on the

Drawings.
‘u

Single—lane traffic operation shall not be permitted unless in

the opinion of the Engineer, it is impracticable to provide a
two—lane deviation. A singlewlane carriageway shall not be less
than 4.0m wide with traffic control and passing bays provided at
approximately 250 metre intervals.

The gradient of any deviation shall not exceed 7%, except with
the approval of the Engineer, and any change of gradient shall
be formed to a smooth vertical curve with a length of not less
than 50 m. Where gradients in excess of 7.0% are encountered on
any deviation the Contractor shall ensure the safe and
convenient passage of traffic and if necessary shall seal the
deviation with a double seal surface dressing or other approved
seal and shall maintain such seal whilst the deviation is in use.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

PASSAGE or TRAFFIC * Page 9.4

'

(c) Construction

Site clearance and earthworks shall be carried out in accordance fififl

with Sections 4 and 5 of this Specification except in respect of
measurement and payment which shall be in accordance with Clause
912 of this Specification. y‘r'f?%
,4

Gravel wearing course shall be constructed in accordance with

Section 10 of this. Specification. The thickness of gravel
s. \
wearing course shall be as shown on the Drawings or instructed-
by the Engineer. '

(d) Drainage and drifts

Temporary ditches, culverts, drifts and bridges of adequate size

and strength shall be constructed for the deviation where
necessary.

The length of a drift shall be such that there is less than

,-r-.-.2»-‘.9-gag
150mm of water over it, except in flood.

The edge of a drift shall be defined with posts or other markers %3

acceptable to the Engineer and a gauge installed to indicate the g“
maximum depth of water over the road. The minimum width of
drift shall be 3.5m.
Existing bridges shall be checked by the Contractor and if found
inadequate to pass the traffic, and at other locations where a
drift would not be practicable, the Contractor shall construct
temporary bridges of adequate size and strength to pass the
traffic.

(e) Reinstatement of deviation

Prior to. the commencement of construction of any deviation or g;

the use of land provided for the deviations the Contractor shall i;
supply one 125 mm by 175 mm colour print of each of a series of
photographs taken at a maximum of 500 m intervals along‘ the line a
of the deviation and the Contractor shall not commence
construction of any deviation until the prints have been agreed
with the Engineer as being a true record of the condition of the
T
land prior to construction including land usage, fences: i
existing roads and tracks, drainage and any other features. a;

The Contractor shall reinstate the deviation to a condition 3 3

similar to the condition prevailing prior to the commencement of
construction of the deviation. The colour prints provided by
the Contractor may be used by the Engineer to confirm that the
reinstatement is satisfactory, Where the deviation is on
private land the Contractor may obtain a written statement,
signed by the landowners, requesting that the deviation be left
unreinstated in lieu of reinstating the deviationa Where the
deviation is within the road reserve or on other land owned by
 .

_.-r, ~.4y~.—.

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

PASSAGE OF TRAFFIC
Page 9.5

.of Kenya the Contractor shall reinstate the

the Government
deviation to a condition similar to the condition prevailing
prior to the commencement of construction of the deviation.

905 MAINTENANCE OF DEVIATIONS

Clause
The Contractor shall maintain the deviations constructed under
time of
904 of this Specification to. the standard existing at the
opening to traffic, from the date of opening until the adjacent
section of new road is opened to public traffic.

Maintenance shall include watering, full width grading and dragging

keeping clear watercourses and culverts, cutting grass,
as necessary,
repairs to culverts drifts and bridges, and rendering
minor
assistance to public traffic.

906 PASSAGE OF TRAFFIC THROUGH THE WORKS

Where shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer that

traffic is to be passed through or across the Works the Contractor
lengths, so as to
shall so order his work in half widths or in short
pass traffic over or across his work.
-—v.m _.;- _.-
being passed
The frequency and duration of delays to traffic while
and shall not
through or across the Works, shall be kept to a minimum
exceed 30 minutes without the prior agreement of the Engineer and
Any method of working, which
should normally be less than 5 minutes.
requires a road closure in excess of 30 minutes shall require 48
the Engineer, who may
hours prior notice to, and the agreement of,
refuse to allow such closure in default of due notice or may require
rescheduling of the closure.

through the Works,

The Contractor shall ensure, when passing traffic
protected with
that all excavations and other hazards are properly
barriers and are illuminated at night.

907 SIGNS, BARRIERS AND LIGHTS

erect and &maintain temporary signs,

The Contractor shall provide,
barriers, lights, traffic lights etc. along existing roads scheduled
Specification and along deviations constructed in
in the Special
accordance with Clause 904 of this Specification.

and siting of these signs etc. shall be in

The number, type
Specification, or as directed
accordance with the Drawings and this
by the Engineera

The construction of all warning signs, prohibitory signs, mandatory

comply with
signs and priority signs used for temporary signing shall
of the latest edition of the "Manual for Traffic
the requirements
Signs in Kenya", Part II“

and confirmatory signs may

Direction signs, advance direction signs
be manufactured as fixed short life signs.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

PASSAGE OF TRAFFIC Page 9.6 g

Sign plates for fixed'short life signs shall be manufactured from

hardboard plywood or chipboard or other material that is approved by
the Engineer. The sign shall be constructed so as not to deteriorate
during the estimated time the sign will be in use, and shall be to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. The face of the sign shall be In
sealed with a wood filler, or otherwise treated to provide a fifi
satisfactory appearance. The sign shall be supported on one or more
posts made of wood. The support shall be strong enough to withstand
the loading that is estimated will be placed on the sign. The fixing
of fixed short life signs may be achieved by nailing, screwing or
glueing the sign plate to its supports, to the "satisfaction of the
Engineer.
gg
Where one—way traffic operation is necessary the Contractor shall
provide, maintain and operate traffic lights. The use of "Stop" and s_
"Go" boards provided, maintained and operated by the Contractor shall $3
be permitted between 0630 hours and 1830 hours in lieu of traffic
3
lights. Traffic lights shall be used at all other hours. The use of
5;
flags in lieu of either "Stop" and "Go" boards or traffic lights will
not be permitted.

Where the distance between the edge of a road or deviation and the
permanent Works is less than 10 m, continuous fences and barriers
shall be erected. Such fences and barriers shall be painted red and
white in alternate sections. Where pedestrians must use the line of §
ithe road or deviation for access, similar fences and barriers shall Efi
Qbe provided to separate pedestrians and traffic.
\
Barriers, other hazards and entrances to detours and deviations and
one4yay operations shall be illuminated thoughout the night by red
lamps or amber flashing lights provided by the Contractor and
sfipgbrted at a height of between 0.7m and 1.35m above the road, and
mgr tained burning bright. gyms
W .
‘T jaddition to the ‘signs detailed on the Drawings the Contractor
If all provide, erect ‘and maintain on deviations and existing roads
"he temporary traffic signs detailed in Table 9~l whose reference
B
numbers refer to the "Manual for Traffic Signs in Kenya" Part II.

DIVERSION OF ACCESS ON TO NEW CONSTRUCTION I-_c;~.' : '. .-,.~'-".1.

Where as a result of the Works, an existing public or private road is §

to be permanently closed, or diverted, or temporarily diverted or in
re~opened to traffic, the Contractor shall give the Engineer at least
one month’s notice of his requirements or intentions. Depending on g _
‘the length of road and amount of work involved, the Engineer may §':
negotiate with the appropriate Authority or owner regarding the Z”
method, order and times of carrying out the work and issue
instructions to the Cnntractor accordingly. Where the amount of work
involved is small, the Engineer may instruct the Contractor to make
his own arrangements. In all cases, the Contractor shall obtain the
Engineerls instructions and no road shall be interfered with in any
way until the appropriate Authority's or owner's consent to the work
has been obtained,
 1'-.-F.‘

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

.“**n
PASSAGE OF TRAFFIC Page 9.7

"; TABLE 9~l TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SIGNS

i_I Reference Description Location

“T W1/W2 Sharp bend ahead -100 m each side of all bends having a
radius of less than 160 m.

W3/W4 Sharp bends ahead l00m each side of all series of bends
having radii of less than 160 m.

W5/W6 Steep hill ahead 100 m each side of all gradients

exceeding 7.0%.

W7 Road narrows ahead 100 m each side of locations where

the deviation reduces from normal
5 width to restricted width.

Wl3A _ .Severe dip ahead 100 m each side of hazard.

{T
I Wl38B River-bed crossing 100 m each side of all drifts.

W22 Roadworks ahead 100 m each side of roadworks.

W23 Traffic lights ahead 200 m each side of lights.

W25 Two—way traffic 100 m before and at 250 m intervals

ahead within the two~way section.

W26 Hazard ahead 100 m each side of hazard.

W27 Road junction ahead 100 m before all junctions where

traffic is required to yield or stop.

W36 Dangerous change in At dangerous locations.

, direction of road

W38 Hazard denarcation At hazards.

I
R1/R2 Stop/Give Way At junctions where traffic is
required to yield or stop.

M3 Turn at next junction As required.

A6 "Deviation Ahead" As required.

, _ A6 "Heavy Plant Turning" As required. §

A4 200 m As required.

A4 100 m As required.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

PASSAGE OF ‘TRAFFIC Page 9.8

909 ASSISTANCE TO PUBLIC‘

The Contractor shall render such assistance to the public as shall be

necessary to allow safe and convenient passage of traffic at all
times.

910 ACCESS ROADS

(a) Access to the Site

'
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and
maintaining at his own expense access to all parts of the Site
for his plant, labour and materials and local public traffic
where no alternative access is available. Where there is no
deviation or existing road.providing access to or along the new
alignment, the Contractor must construct and maintain his own
access and haul roads as required, all at his own expense. All
such accesses shall be available for the use of the Employer.

(b) Public highways

Where the Contractor proposes to use an existing public highway

as an access to a borrow area, or as a haulage road for the
construction of any work under the Contract, such as is likely
to cause a subsequent claim for "extraordinary traffic", the
Contractor shall give the Engineer at least one month's notice
of his intention to use such a road. The Engineer may call for
a joint inspection of the road by the appropriate Highway 53’ ‘I

Authority, the Contractor and the Engineer, to agree upon a Hg

$1:
statement of the actual condition of the road prior to use by
the Contractor and to determine the extent of any remedial work
required.

Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the existing highway is

inadequate to withstand the volume and weight of the
Contractor's traffic, the Engineer may instruct the Contractor: ,3*_rJ.'A~_, .j,~)_,'_;._'n_,.-‘#1

I.

_(i) to improve the road:

,4;~ ';."-a'.1j»';3
(ii) to construct a temporary road in lieu; or‘

(iii) to use an alternative route.

5,-7,-;:_-.=: _-r=,_

(C) Private roads

Where the Contractor proposes to use a private road as an access

road t o the Works, a quarrv or a borrow cit it shall be entirelv
his responsibility to comply with any conditions laifl down by
the owner, and the Employer will be in no way responsible for
any claim arising from such arrangementsa
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

PASSAGE OF TRAFFIC Page 999

(d) New roads

Access roads to stockpile and spoil areas, quarries and borrow

pits shall be constructed on the line agreed or instructed by
the Engineer. The access road shall follow the shortest
practicablef route between the stockpile or spoil area, quarry or
borrow pit and the nearest point to it on the new alignment.
The access road shall .be drained with ditches and culverts of
adequate size and strength and existing watercourses shall be
maintained in proper working order.
.
The siting of the junction of an access road with the existing
V P73”fifififi
:/“mj road shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the
Contractor shall comply _with the Engineer's instructions,
particularly regarding clearance of obstructions to provide
adequate sight lines, temporary drainage or culverts and the
provision of signs and traffic control.

(e) Reinstatement..

The.Contractor shall be required to reinstate all ‘access roads

in accordance with Clause 904 (e) of this Specification.

(f) Administration

The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for all

administrative and financial arrangements for the construction
of access roads and for all costs arising out of them, such as
negotiations with the owner and occupier for the use of the
land, and paying rent andfor compensationa

911 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC

(a) Use of new road or road under construction

The Contractor will not be permitted to use completed sections

of the road or deviation or any completed pavement or surfacing
layer for hauling earthworks, -pavement or other materials with
earthwork plant or vehicles having axle loads exceeding the
legal limit. Furthermore, the use of completed sections of the
road or completed pavement layers will be restricted if, in the
opinion of the Engineer, damage to structures, subgrade, the
formation, pavement or surfacing could ensue.

Any damage to the completed formation or to a completed pavement

layer caused by any of the Contractor's vehicles, whether with
legal axle loading or otherwise, shall be repaired as instructed
by the Engineer and at the Contractor‘s expense,

In addition the Contractor will not be permitted to operate

vehicles having axle loads exceeding the legal limit on any
public road in Kenya»
 STAN'DARD-SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD N\JD BRIDGECONSTRUCTION

PASSAGE OF TRAFFIC Page 9.10

The_ Contractor shall allow the Engineer to carry out check axle
weighings on his Vehicles and shall observe any instructions
given by the Engineer with regard to reduced loadings should
this prove necessary.

(b) Use of deviations and existing road

If, in the opinion of the Engineer, additional work is required

on deviations and existing roads, solely as a result of the
requirements or effects of the Contractor's construction
traffic, the cost of all such additional work shall be borne by
the Contractor.

912 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

m Item : Improve existing road

Unit : km

Improve existing road shall be measured by the kilometre to the

nearest 0.1 km along the centreline of the existing road.
Measurement and payment will only be made for lengths of road
over which improvements have been carried out in accordance with
the Engineer's instructions.

The rate for improve existing road shall include for the cost of
complying with all the requirements of Clause 902 of this
Specification with the exception of gravel wearing course which
shall be measured and paid for separately.

(b) Item : Construct deviation

Unit : km

Construct deviation shall be measured to the nearest 0.1 km

along the centreline of the deviation. Measurement and payment
will only be made for lengths of deviation instructed by the
w
Engineer and constructed to his approval.

The rate for construct deviation shall include for the cost of
complying with all the requirements of Clause 904 of this
Specification with the exception of gravel wearing course which
shall be measured and paid for separately.

(C) Item 2 Provide signs and barriers

Unit_ 2 km

Provide signs and barriers shall be measured to the nearest 0.1

km along the centreline of the project road as defined in the
Special Specification.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION "FOR? TWOAD‘ AND =BRlDG'E* CONSTRUCTION

_PASSAGE OF TRAFFIC Page 9.11

Measurement and ‘payment will only be made when the Contractor

has submitted, and the Engineer approved, his proposals for the
passage of traffic in accordance with Clause 904 of this
Specification and when the Contractor has installed the
necessary signs and barriers etc. along deviations and existing
roads, all to the Engineer's satisfaction.

.The rate for provide signs and barriers shall include for the
cost of complying with the requirements of Clause 907 of this
Specification.

(d) Item 2 Maintain the passage of traffic

Unit : Lump Sum

Maintenance of deviations and existing roads, maintenance of

signs, barriers, lights, traffic lights, stop—go boards, etc.,
the passing of traffic through or across the Works and
compliance with _ all the provisions of Section 9 of this
Specification for which no separate payment is expressly stated
shall be paid for by the Lump Sum stated in the Special
Specification.

Payment of the Lump Sum will be by equal monthly instalments

over the period of the Contract excluding the Period of
Maintenance.

The conditions attached to the payment of the instalments are:~

(i) That the total sum of instalments paid shall not exceed the
'
Lump Sum.

(ii) If, in any month, the Engineer is not satisfied that the
Contractor has fully complied with all the provisions of
Section 9 of this Specification, he shall withhold the
whole of the instalment due and if the Contractor fails to
comply with the Engineer's instructions within 14 days of
the ‘instalment becoming due the Contractor shall forfeit
such instalment.

The Engineer, having given 14 days notice to the Contractor

and in the event of the Contractor's subsequent default,
may deduct from any payments ‘due to the Contractor, in
addition to withholding any instalments due, all reasonable
expenses incurred by the Employer, including the costs of
employing another Contractor to carry out the works
instructed, necessitated by the failure of the Contractor
to comply properly with the provisions included in Section
9 of this Specification,

\'i\__J_'._.'.}‘,,§“_‘f{»j|'\._J! H \..I -. < - -

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

PASSAGE OF TRAFFIC Page 9.12

(iii) That the instalment will be subject to the deduction of

retention money.

The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed elsewhere in his

rates and prices for any difference between the Lump Sum stated
and the actual cost of maintaining the passage of traffic.

(e) Item Gravel wearing course

Unit : m3

Where the Engineer instructs gravel wearing course to be laid on

existing roads or deviations, measurement and payment shall be
in accordance with Clause l0ll(a) of Section 10 of this
Specification.

(f) Item : Overhaul of gravel wearing course

finit 00 m3 km

Overhaul of gravel wearing course shall be measured and paid for

in accordance with Clause l0ll(b) of Section 10 of this
Specification.

(9) Item : Access roads

Unit OI km

Access roads shall be measured by the kilometre to the nearest

0.1 km, from the boundary of the borrow pit along the oentreline
of the access road to the edge of the new road reserve or to the
edge of the ’carriageway when it connects to an existing road.
Only access roads on an alignment approved by the Engineer will
be measured.

Only» access roads to earthwork borrow pits and borrow pits

measured in accordance with ‘method B’ of Sections 10 and 12 of
‘
this Specification shall be measured and paid for.

Where_ the Contractor uses an existing public or private road as

an access road to an earthwork borrow pit or a borrow pit
measured in accordance with ‘method B’ of Section 10 and l2 of
this Specification, measurement and payment shall be made as
though the Contractor had constructed a new access road.

The rate for access roads shall include for the cost of site
clearance, topsoil strip, earthworks, drainage, gravel wearing
r
course, maintenance ‘K reinstatement and for complying with the
. , .: ‘ 1. ‘ =-1. _. . ..z ‘: . .'
. .2. -
requilemen~s or elanse are or unis DP3’lt;C5tiuHu
. ,. *.... . .. ,-.;: —~v' .
I .. ~-1'1.-\

‘.32’L';. -I:.‘’éL1' ¥i:'l"LZ'§l?-'."I

'A
H
 STANDARD SPECEHCATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
[
mssaee 0;»? TRAFFIC Page 9.13

(h) Item : Reinstatement of deviations

5.

Unit : Lump Sum

Reinstatement of deviations shall be paid for by the Lump Sum

stated in the Special Specification.

Payment of the Lump Sum shall be made when all the-deviations

along the entire project road have been reinstated in accordance
with the requirements of Clause 904 of this Specification.

The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed elsewhere in his

u...
rates and prices for any difference between the Lump Sum stated
and the actual cost of reinstating deviations.
 SECTION 10
GMVEL WEARING COURSE
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GRAVE]; WEARING COURSE Page 10.1

1001 GENERAL

(a) Definitions

The term "gravel" used throughout this Section means any

material used as a wearing course, and shall include lateritic
gravel, quartzitic gravel, calcareous gravel, decomposed rock,
soft stone, coral rag, clayey sands and crushed rock.

A "gravel wearing course" means a top surfacing course

constructed from one or a combination of these materials and may
be a course placed on the formation of a new road where no
pavement and final bituminous surface is included in the
Contract, or placed on the formation of a service road,
'
deuiation or access road.

(b) Sources of material

Material for‘ gravel wearing course may be obtained from any of

the following sources:—

ii) Borrow pits

(ii) Spoil areas
(iii) Excavation in cuttings, widened if necessary.

In all cases the Engineer will instruct the Contractor as to the

source of material to be used and the location in which it is to
be placed.

(c) Inspection of site

Where a source of material is available for inspection during

the Tender Period the Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the
nature and amount of work involved particularly in respect of
the volume of overburden, the quality and hardness of material,
the degree of selection necessary, the method of extraction, and
access to the source.

(d) Borrow pits and spoil areas

The Contractor shall comply with all the requirements of Section

6 of this Specification in respect of borrow pits and spoil
EHTEES .

1002 CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIAL

Gravel wearing course material shall be material which can be

extracted from a borrow area or a road cutting by ripping to a depth
of 300 mm with a single tine hydraulic ripper acceptable to the
Engineer drawn by a track type crawler tractor in good order complete
with all equipment and accessories as supplied and rated at 300 BHP
flywheel power or over with an operating weight of not less than 3792
tonne and being operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations»
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD-AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GRAVEL WEARING_COURSE Page 10. 2

The material may require the use of either a grid or sheepsfoot

roller with more than 8000 kg mass per metre width of roll to break
it down and/or screening to achieve the specified grading.

1003 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

The grading of the gravel after placing and compaction shall be a

smooth curve within and approximately parallel to the following
‘
envelope:-

Sieve % by weight passing

(mm)

Class 1 Class 2

37.5 V - 100
28 100 85 ~ 100
20 95 ~ 100 85 — 100
14 80 — 100 65 — 100
10 65 — 100 55 — 100
5 45 — 85 35 ~ 92
2 30 — 68 23 ~ 77
l 25 - 56 l8 - 62
0.425 18 — 44 14 - 50
0.075 12 ~ 32 10 — 40

The material shall have a minimum CBR of 20 at 95% MDD (AASHTO T180)
and 4 days soak.

The plasticity requirements and the class of material shall be

specified in the Special Specification.

1004 ORDER OF WORK

£-

Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall

commence laying wearing course starting as_close as possible to the
Source and shall work away from it so that the maximum amount of
compaction is given to the wearing course by the Contractor's
vehicles» The Contractor shall route his vehicles to give even wear
and compaction over the whole width of the wearing course.

Where black cotton, or other high—swelling material, is used in the

upper subgrade layers, the Contractor shall place wearing course
material upon this section immediately after Compaction of formation
level,
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 10.3

_
3% shall be cleaned of all foreign matter, and any
The formation
potholes, loose material, ruts, corrugations, depressions and other
defects which have appeared due to improper drainage, traffic or any
other cause shall be corrected, and, if considered necessary by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall scarify, water, grade and recompact
the subgrade to line and level all at his own expense. The Engineer
may require the formation to be proofrolled by a loaded truck,
scraper or other approved means prior to dumping of the wearing
course material. The cost of all such proofrolling shall be at the
Contractor's expense.

1006 SETTING OUT_

The gravel wearing course shall be set out in accordance with Section
3 of this Specification.

1007 LAYING AND COMPACTING GRAVEL WEARING COURSE

The gravel wearing course material shall be deposited in such

quantity and spread in a uniform layer across the full width
required, so that the final compacted thickness is nowhere less than
shown upon the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer. Every
reasonable effort shall be made to prevent segregation during the
loading, hauling, dumping, spreading, mixing, trimming and compacting
operations.

The compacted thickness of any layer laid, processed and compacted at

one time shall not exceed 225 mm and where a greater compacted.
thickness is required, the material shall be laid and processed in
two or more layers. The minimum layer thickness shall be l0O mm.

The material shall be broken down in the pavement to the grading

specified in‘ Clause 1003 of this Specification. Any oversize
material which cannot be broken down to the required size shall be
removed and disposed of by the Contractor.

The material shall_be scarified and the moisture content Iadjusted by

either uniformly mixing in water or drying out_the material such that
the moisture content during compaction is between 80% and 105% of the
Optimum Moisture Content (AASHTO T180). It shall be graded and
trimmed to final line and level. Light compaction may be applied
before the final trim is carried out but once 25% of the compactive
effort has been applied no further trimming or correction of surface
irregularities will be allowed.

The final tr?‘ i"l he in out and the Contractor shall ensure that
material from the Lm
1 is neither deposited in low areas nor spread
across the section but graded clear of the works.
 STANDARD'SPEClFICAT|QN FOR ROADAND iBIi=<IDGECONSTF{UCTION
GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 10.4

Following the final trim the material shall be compacted to a dry

density of at least 95% MDD (AASHTO Tl80).' During the grading,
trimming and compaction of the material the Contractor shall ensure
that the surface and/or the material does not dry out by applying fog
sprays of water or other approved means sufficient to maintain the
surface and/or imaterial within "the specified limits of moisture
content.

1008 PROOFROLLING

The Contractor shall proofroll the completed_ layers in accordance

with Clause 1205 of this Specification.

1009 TOLERANCES

The gravel wearing course shall be constructed to the tolerances

specified in Section 3 of this Specification.

1010 MAINTENANCE

The wearing surface shall be maintained by the Contractor in its

finished condition and shall be watered, graded, dragged, reshaped,
or recompacted as necessary, until the Certificate of Completion is
issued, or until the Engineer instructs that the road shall be opened
to public traffic, whichever is the sooner.

1011 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

(a) Item Gravel wearing course

Unit : m3 of each type in each method of measurement.

Gravel wearing course shall be measured by the cubic metre

placed and compacted upon the road calculated as the product of
the compacted sectional area specified to be laid and.the length
instructed.

Separate items are included in the Bills of Quantities to cover

the following circumstances:—

(i) The source of material is available for inspection by the

Contractor at'the time of tendering - Method A.

(ii) The source of material is not available for inspection by

the Contractor at the time of tendering — Method B.

The rates for gravel wearing Course provided in accordance with

Method A shall include for the cost of the followingzm

{i) Opening up the borrow area, site clearance, removal of

topsoil and overburden, fencing, drainage, and landscaping
and topsoiling on completion and leaving neat and tidy;
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR-ROAD AND BRIDGE‘ CONSTRUCTION

GRAVEL WEARING COURSE . Page l0»5

(ii) Constructing and maintaining access roads, Complying with

conditions of access, traffic control, safety and public
health requirements, fencing, drainage and making good on
completion and leaving neat and tidy.

(iii) Excavation and selection pf material, removing and spoiling

of oversize material, Screening, stockpiling, providing and
mixing water, or drying out the material, mixing,
processing, spreading, and compaction.

(iv) Spreading, providing and admixing of fines if necessary,

rolling, brooming, making good defective areas and
maintenance of the surface.

(v) Loading; hauling a free haul of 1.5km measured from the

centre of volume of the source of material and dumping the
material.

(vi) Complying with the requirements of Section 2, 6 and 10 of

this Specification.

The rates for gravel wearing course provided in accordance with

Method B shall include for the cost of complying with all the
provisions for Method A described above except the following
which shall be measured and paid for separately:-

’ (i) Site clearance of the borrow area per hectare in accordance

with Section 4 of this Specification.

(ii) Removal of topsoil (if instructed by the Engineer to be

stockpiled_ separately) from the borrow area per m3 in
accordance with Section 4 of this Specification.

(iii) Length of access road, per km, in accordance with Section 9

of this Specification.
[W
(iv) Removai_of top soil and/or overburden , as "Spoil", from
the; borrow .area per cubic metre in accordance with Section
'
5 of thisWSpecification-f_

Cb) item g'Hové£h5uii

Unit : .
The unit of overhaul will be the m3 km. The overhaul quantity
shall be measured as the product of the overhaul length and the
quantity _of_ material overhauled measured in accordance with
Clause lOll(a) of this Specificationa

The rates for providing and laying gravel wearing course shaii
include for theof a free haul of 1.5km measured from the
cost
centre of volume of the source of the material.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 10.6

The overhaul length shall be the length from a point 1.5km from
the centre of volume of the source of material to the centre of
volume of the total overhauled material. It shall be measured
to the nearest 0.1 km along the shortest practicable route from
the source of the material to the nearest point on the new
alignment and then along_ the new alignment to the centre of
volume of the cverhauleé material.

The rate shall include for the cost of haulage in excess of the
free haul and and the maintenance of all haul roads."
 SECTION 11
SHSULBERS W PAIJWEM
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
-u

'
SHOULDERS TO PAVEMENT Page 11.1

1101 DEFINITIONS

The term "shoulder" means that part of the road construction above
formation level, between the edge of the pavement and the side ditch
or embankment slopes. It is illustrated in Fig 1-2 in Section 1 of
this "Specification and is divided into "upper shoulder" and "lower
shoulder".

1102 MATERIAL FOR CONSTRUCTION OF sHoUL1:~ERs

of shoulders shall -be as shown on the

Material for construction
Drawings or instructed by the Engineer. It may consist of:~

(a) Gravel wearing course or natural material in accordance with

'
Sections 10 and 12 of this Specification.

stone in accordance with Section l3 of this

(b) Graded crushed
Specification.

(C) Cement or lime treated material or lean concrete in accordance

with Section 14 and 14A of this Specification.

mix in accordance with Section 16 of this

(d) A ‘bituminous '
Specification.

(e) A combination of (a) to (d) above.

llO3 CONSTRUCTION OF SHOULDERS

/1 .

Shoulders shall be construed concurrently with, or subsequent to,

Shoulders shall not be
construction of the adjacent pavement layers.
constructed ahead of adjacent pavement layers and the Contractor
at no time
shall ensure that the method of construction is such that
prevented from draining off any of the pavement layers. The
is water
method of laying and compacting shoulder material and the compaction
requirements will be in accordance with the relevant sections of
Clauses 1204 and 1205 of this Specification.

1104 -SETTING our-' ans Tdnsnancss

given in
Shoulders shall be set out and constructed to the tolerances
Section 3 of this Specification.

1105 SURFACE TREATMENT or SHOULDERS

Surface treatment of shoulders shall be as shown on the Drawings or

instructed by the Engineera

shall be in accordance with Section i U}

Bituminous surface treatments
of this Specification.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROADAND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

SHOULDERS TO PAVEMENT Page 11.2

Where topsoil and grassing is shown on the Drawings or instructed by

. the Engineer, 50 mm of humus or topsoil shall be spread on the
completed shoulder and lightly rolled. sprigs of approved indigenous
‘runner’ type grass as directed shall be planted and kept watered
until growth is established. Topsoiling and grassing shall be in
accordance with the requirements of Clause 514 of this Specification.

1106 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Where shoulders are constructed in the same material as the adjacent

pavement layers no separate items will be included in the Bill of
Quantities for shoulder construction and the measurement and payment
will be in accordance with the relevant Clauses in Sections 10, 12,
13, 14 and 16 of this Specification.

Where shoulder construction differs from that of adjacent pavement

layers the method of measurement and payment will be in accordance
with the relevant clauses relating to the type of material shown on
the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer for shoulder construction
but itemised in this Section ll of this Specification. The rate for
shoulder construction shall include for the costs of complying with
Clauses ll0l, 1102, ll03 and llD4 of this Specification.

5:
}, ‘;-
3
r
Y .
 SECTEON 12

NMU RM MATERML SUB-BESE AND BASE

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

NATURAL MATERIAL SUBBASE AND BASE Page 12.1

1201 GENERAL’

(a) Definitions

The term "natural material" includes lateritic gravel,

quartzitic gravel, calcareous gravel, soft stone, coral rag,
conglomerate, sand or clayey sand or a combination of any of
these materials. A natural material is also referred to as
"gravel".

(b) Sources of materials

Natural material for subbase and base may be obtained from any
of the following sources:—

(i) Borrow pits

(ii) Spoil areas
(iii) Excavation in cuttings, widened if necessary..

In all cases the Engineer will instruct the Contractor as to the

source of material to be used and the location in which it is to
be placed.

(c) Inspection of site

Where a source of material is available for inspection during

the Tender Period the Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the
nature and amount of work involved particularly in respect of
the volume of overburden, the quality and hardness of material,
the degree of selection necessary, the method of extraction, and
access to the source.

(d) Borrow pits

The Contractor shall comply with all the requirements of Section

6 of this.Specifioation in respect of borrow pits.

1202.. cLAss11«"1cAt1'Ioi§é ._o§' MiTE_RIAL

Natural material Wshallv be’ material which can" be extracted from a
borrow area or a road cutting by ripping to a depth of 300 mm with a
single tine hydraulic ripper acceptable to the Engineer drawn by a
track type crawler tractor in good order complete with all equipment
and accessories “as supplied and rated at 300 BHP flywheel power and
over with an operating weight of not less than 37,2 tonne and being
operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

The material may require the use of either a grid or sheepsfoot

roller with more than 8000 kg mass per metre width of roll to great
it down and/or screening to achieve the specified gradinga
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

NATURAL MATERIAL SUBBASE AND BASE Page 12.2

1203 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) Subbase

The grading and material requirements after placing and

compaction shall conform to the following requirements:~

Gravels:

* maximum size max 63mm

— Plasticity Index max 15%

Sands, silty and clayey sands:

— % passing 2mm sieve max 95%

— % passing 0.075 mm sieve min 10 ~ max 30%
- Plasticity Index min 5 — max 12%

All materials

— Uniformity Coefficient min 5%

— Plasticity Modulus max 250%
“ CBR at 95% MDD (AASHTO T180)
and 4 day soak min 30%

(b) Base

The grading of the material after placing and compaction shall

be a smooth Curve within and approximately parallel to the
following envelope:-

Sieve Size Percentage by weight

passing

I
50 100
37.5 95 — 100
28 80 - 100
20 60 ~ 100
10 35 ~ 90
5 20 — 75
2 12 ~ 50
1 l0 - 40
0,425 7 — 33
0,075 4 ~ 20
-STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

NATURAL MATERIAL SUBBASE AND BASE Page 12.3

The material requirements after placing and compaction shall

comply with the following limits:~

— Los Angeles Abrasion max 50%

~ Aggregate Crushing Valueg max 35%
— Plasticity Index g max 15%
— Plasticity Modulus max 250%
- CBR at 95% MDD (AASHTO T180)
A
and 4 day soak min 80%

(C) Natural material for cement or lime improved subbase

The =materia1 to be treated shall conform to the following

requirement:—

Gravels:

- maximum size 10 — 50mm

— % passing 0;U75mm sieve max 40%

Sands, silty and clayey sands:

— maximum size 0.5 ~ 10mm

~ % passing 0.07Smm sieve max 50%

All materials:

~ Plasticity Index max 30%

— Plasticity Modulus max 2500
~ Organic matter max 2%

Additional requirements for lime treated.materials:

- % passing 0.425mm sieve min 15%

~ Plasticity Index min 10%

Afterftreétment»the‘material shall have a CBR of at .least 60%

measu Xaftsrfl :?; day*fcureM and 7 day soak‘ on; the site mix
compacted to aE9least”j95% ’MDD (AASHTO T180) land‘ the treated
material .shall "have a Plasticity Index between 5 and 12% and a
Plasticity Modulus less than 250.

(d) Natural§material‘for cement or lime improved base

The materials to be treated shall conform to the following

requirements:e

Gravels:

~ maximum size 10 ~ 50mm

~ % passing 0»075mm sieve 5 m 35%
 STANDARD SPECIFIC/XT'|O_'N FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

NATURAL MATERIAL SUBBASE AND BASE .0 Page l2.4

Sands, silty and clayey sands:

— maximum size
1 ~ 10mm
~ % passing 0.075mm sieve
max 40%
— Uniformity Coefficient
min 5

All materials:

— Plasticity Index
_ max 25%
~ Plasticity Modulus
max 2000
— Organic matter max l%
~ CBR at 95% MDD (AASHTO T180)
and 4 day soak min 20%

Additional requirements for lime treated materials:

— % passing 0.425mm sieve min 15%

~ Plasticity Index
, min 10%

After treatment the material shall have a CBR of at least 160%

measured after 7 day cure and 7 day soak on the site mix
compacted to at least 95% MDD (AASHTO T180) and the treated
material shall have a Plasticity Index less than 6% and a
Plasticity Modulus less than 250.

'e) Natural materials for cement stabilized base

The material to be treated shall conform to the following

requirements.

Gravels and coarse clayey sands:

~ maximum size 2 — 40mm

~ % passing 0.075mm sieve
max 35%
w Uniformity Coefficient E
min 10 E
— Plasticity Index max 25% Ey
— Plasticity Modulus
h
_ Mix—in~place method max 1500
Stationary plant method max 700
H CBR at 95% MDD (AASHTO T180)
and 4 day soak _ min 30%

After treatment the material shall have a UCS of at least 1800

kN/m2 measured after 7 day cure and 7 day soak on the site mix
2
compacted at 95% MDD (AASHTO T180) and the treated material
shall have a Flasticity Index of less than 6% and a Plasticity §
$.§
Modulus of Less than 350.
Ԥ

3.204 LAYING AND COMPACTING '

The material shall be deposited in such quantity and spread in a

uniform layer across the full width required, so that the final
compacted thickness is nowhere less than shown on the Drawings or

it

—.~
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD ZANDBRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

NATURAL MATERIAL SUBBASE AND BASE Page 12.5

instructed by the Engineer. Every reasonable effort shall be made to

prevent segregation after mixing and during the dumping spreading,
trimming and Compacting operations.

The compacted thickness of any layer laid, processed and compacted at

one time shall not exceed 225 mm and where a greater compacted
thickness is required, the material shall be laid and processed in
two or more layers. The minimum layer thickness shall be lD0 mm.

The material shall be broken down to the grading specified in Clause

1203. Any oversize material which cannot be‘ broken down to the
§§
§§ required size shall be removed and disposed of.
N“
The material ‘shall be scarified and the moisture content adjusted by
either uniformly mixing in water or drying out the material such that
the moisture content during compaction is between 80% and 105% of the
Optimum.Moisture Content (AASHTO T180). It shall be graded and
trimmed to final line and level. Light compaction may be applied
before the final trim is carried out but once 25% of the compactive
effort has been applied no further trimming or correction of surface
irregularities will be allowed.
fifl
it -
5i~.>?4‘- 1
ti The final trim shall be in cut and the Contractor shall ensure that
material from the trim is neither deposited in low areas nor spread
across the section but graded clear of the works. Following the
final trim the material shall be compacted to a dry density of at
least '95% MDD (AASHTO T180). During the grading, trimming and
compaction of the material the Contractor shall ensure that the
surface and/or the material does not dry out by applying fog sprays
of water or other approved means sufficient to maintain the surface
and/or material within the specified limits of moisture content.

On completion of compaction, the surface shall be well closed, free

from movement_under compaction plant and free from compaction planes,
ridges, cracks, loose or segregated material. If the surface fails
to meet the requirements of this Specification the Contractor shall
take the action set out in the appropriate part of Section 3 of this
Specification or such other action as the Engineer may instruct or
‘
agree.

l205 PROOFROLLING

Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the Cdntractor shall

proofroll the completed layer with a steel three; wheeled roller
applying a load of not less than 5 tonnes per metre widfi h of roll and
the layer shall be free from visible movement under dhe proofroller;
Approval of the layer will only be given after the satisfactory
completion of the proofrolling and any remedial measures will be at
the Contractor's expense.

1206 SETTING OUT AND TOLERANCES

The layer shall be set out and constructed to the appropriate

tolerances specified in Section 3 of this Specification“
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROADIV AND BRIIDGEECONSTRUCWON

NATURAL MATERIAL SUBBASE AND BASE Page 12.5

._-;.:v'-in2:1;-.: ;3g;-', ;3p-.;3«-

1207 DRAINAGE OF SUBGRADE, SUBBASE AND BASE LAYERS

. _.r _-y.
Q

-. v-
The subgrade, subbase and base shall be kept continuously drained and
--
any damage caused by water accumulating on or running off the surface
-—<-
-
shall be made good at the Contractor's expense. In particular, the
drainage requirements of Section 1 and Section 11 of this
Specification shall apply.

Should water accumulate on any part of the subgrade, subbase or base,

the Contractor shall remove and dispose of any material which becomes
saturated, or cannot then be compacted to the required density, and
shall replace it to specification, all at his own expense.

1208 TREATED MATERIALS

Lime or cement treatment, if required by the Special Specification or

Drawings, shall be carried out in accordance with Section 14 of this
Specification.

1209 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

(a) Itefi : Natural material for subbase or base

Unit : m3 of each type in each method of measurement

Natural material for subbase or base shall be measured by the

cubic metre placed and compacted.upon the road calculated as the
product of the compacted sectional area specified to be laid and
the length instructed.

Separate items are included in the Bills of Quantities to cover

the following circumstances:—

(i) The source of material is available for inspection by the

Contractor at the time of tendering — Method A.

(ii) The source of material is not available for inspection by

the Contractor at the time of tendering ~ Method B.

The rates for natural material for subbase or__base provided in

accordance with Method A shall include for the cost of the
following:~

(i) Opening up the borrow area, site clearance, removal of

topsoil and overburden, fencing, drainage, landscaping and
'
topsoiling on completion and leaving neat and tidy.

{ii} Constructing and maintaining access r oads, complying with

“
conditions of access, traffic contr=3 1, safety aid public
drainage and making good on fiww.
Q,
health requirements, fencing,
completion and leaving neat and tidy.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

NATURAL MATERIAL SUBBASE AND BASE Page 12.?

(iii) Excavation and selection of material, removing and spoiling

of oversize material, screening, stockpiling, providing and
mixing water or drying out the material, mixing,
processing, spreading, and compacting.

(iv) Spreading, providing and admixing of fines if necessary,

rolling, making good defective areas and maintenance of the
'
surface.

(V) Loading, hauling a freehaul of 1.5km measured from the

centre of volume of the source of material and dumping the
material.‘

(vi) Complying with the requirements of Section 2, 6 and l2 of

this Specification.

The rates for natural material for subbase and base provided in
accordance with Method B shall include for the cost of complying
with all the provisions for Method A described above except the
following which shall be measured.and paid for separately:—

(i) Site clearance of the borrow area per hectare in accordance

with Section 4 of this Specification.

(ii) Removal of topsoil (if instructed by the Engineer to be

stockpiled separately) from the borrow area per m3 in
accordance with Section 4 of this Specification.

(iii) Length of access road, per km, in accordance with Section 9

of this Specification.

(iv) Removal of topsoil and/or overburden, as "Spoil", from the

borrow area per cubic metre in accordance with Section 5 of
this Specification.

(b)_ Item : Overhaul

Unit :— m3 km

The unit of overhaul will he the m3km. The overhaul quantity

shall be measured as the product of the overhaul length and the
quantity of material overhauled measured in accordance with
Clause l209(a) of this Specification.

The overhaul length shall he the length from a point 1.5km from
the centre of volume of the source of material to the centre of
volume of the total overhauled material. It shall be measured
to the nearest D.l km along the shortest practicable route from
the source of the material to the nearest point on the new
alignment and then along the new alignment to the centre of
volume of the overhauled material.

The rate shall include for the cost of haulage in excess of the
free haul and the maintenance of all iaul roads.
 .

J. :. .

. . .: $
 SECHON 13

QRQDED ERUSHED SWNE 3UB%RSE MD BASE

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

GRADED CRUSI-IED STONE SUBBASE AND BASE Page 13.1

1301 DEFINITIONS

"Graded crushed stone" shall mean crushed stone with a smooth grading
curve which is within a specified envelope. The stone class shall be
specified in the Special Specification.

The nominal size of graded crushed stone shall be referred to by the

denomination O/D as defined by the grading in Clause 1303 (c) below.

The class and nominal size of the graded crushed stone to be provided
will be specified in the Special Specification.

1302 SOURCES OF MATERIAL

The Contractor shall be responsible for locating and developing

suitable sources of material for graded crushed stone. Such sources
shall be termed quarries and the opening up of quarries and the
construction and maintenance of access roads shall be carried out in
accordance with Section 6 of this Specification.

1303 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

The material shall comply with the following requirementszw

(a) It shall consist of crushed stone, free from clay, organic or

other deleterious matter.

(b) It shall comply with the following physical requirements:—

(i) Stone Classes A, B and C.

Base Subbase

Stone-‘IClass“,_'-_.:.‘_-_..A_ B’ __ C » A B C

' 50
LAA Max._ 30 40 45 40 . 45
' '
ACV"".I'91‘ax';I"=I"- 25- 30 3.2 30 ' 32 35
sss Ma. 12 1:2 12 20 20 20
F1 --flax; _- 25 30 30 35 35 35
ca Min, 100 so so 30 39 -~

I I
STANDARD SPEC-IF-lGATlO_N FDR ROAD AND B RI DGE CONSTRUCTION

GRADED CRUSHED STONE SUBBASE AND BASE Page 13.2

(ii) Stone Class D

Base

CBR at 95% MDD (AASHTO T180) and 4 days soak min 80%
'
Los Angeles Abrasion max 50%
Aggregate Crushing Value max 35%
Plasticity Index max 15%

Subbase

The plasticity of the material will be specified in the Special

Specification.

CBR at 95% MDD (AASHTO T180) and 4 days soak min 30%

(C) It shall comply with the following gradings:

(i) Stone Classes A, B and C.

The _grading of the material, after processing," placing and

'compaction in the pavement shall be a smooth curve within, and
approximately parallel to, one of the following envelopes. The
class and nominal size shall be specified in the Special
Specification:

Sieve Size Percentage by weight passing

(mm)
KR Subbase
\ Base

0/30 0/40 0/40 0/60

f
— ~ ” ~ 100
X 75
63 - - ~ 95 ~ 100
50 — l00 l00 85 » 100
37n5 lG0 90 - l00 90 w 100 75 ~ 95
28 90 ~ 100 75 - 95 75 ~ 95 « 60 H 87
20 65 ~ 95 60 — 90 60 - 90 50 w 80
10 40 — 70 40 — 75 35 - 75 30 ~ 67
693 30 — 55 30 - 63 25 — 63 23 « 58
2 20 ~ 40 20 — 45 15 — 45 13 ~ _4O
f 15 ~ 32 8 - 35 7 « 32
5 1
E ‘L'}.,.;§2:3 3.0 »— 2:; ;;~: « 3:. 4 M 23 :4 « 20 i
4 M 10 5 ~ 15 0 ~ 12 O * LU
0,075
‘r.-5‘.

Cleanliness and plasticity: Material passing the 09425 mm sieve

shall be nonwplastica
 _STA§\! DARE} SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CQNSTF?UCTiOI\!

GRADED CRUSHED STONE SUBBASE AND BASE ?age l3u3

(ii) Stone Class D

Base

Sieve % by weight _'_f 7' 'Hfie 4,

‘ ~ --
(mm) passing

50 100
37.5 90 — 100
28 80 w 100
.20 60 ~ 100
10 35 ~ 90
5 _ 20 — V75
2 12 M 50
l 10 w 40
0.425 7 — 33
0.075 4 — 20

Subbase

Maximum particle size to be 2/3 layer thickness or 80 mm

whichever is the lesser
Uniformity Coefficient min 5

(d) The grading and physical requirements of the material for use in
treated material in accordance with Section 14 of this
Specification shall be specified in the Special Specificaticna

1304 ceuseme, SCREENING AND m:<:N'c

Unless otherwise instructed, cxushing Shall be carried out in at

least two stages,

The crushing, screening and prcpertioning cf materials? and their

eubseqeent mixing shall be carriefl cut using such ‘methods and
machines as shall be acceptable to the Engineero To avoid
segregation; graded crushed stone shall be moistened "when being
handled enfi ehall'not be steckpilefi in heaps higher than 5 me

$heul& the Contractor wieh te afld material from another source in

order te achieve the specified grading, the following conditiene
shall apgKy:w

(i) The Centreetcr shall be reegcnsible far all costs associated

with cne grcvieion and mixing in of the material, including land
awquisitlcn,

,i ‘he iei shell H age eemeiet sf Qfl ei flfi e guexte

er . approvefl 3 durable particles and shall be
E ee frem crganie materials, eiaye enfi other deleterious
 STAi\JDARD sPEcn=iCATioN FoiRjisoAoAixJosr-moss CONSTRUCTION
GRADED >CRUSHED STONE SUBBASE AND BASE Page 13.4

(iii) Only material passing the 6.3mm sieve may be addede The
5 ’
percentage to be added shall be agreed with the Engineer and in
any case shall not exceed-15% by weight of the mixture.

(iv) The minimum crushing ratios specified in Clause 1303 bof this
Specification shall be maintained.

1305 TRANSPDRTING GRADED CRUSHED-_ STONE

Graded crushed stone shall be transported damp and in such a way that
' ‘
no segregation occurs. fg

1306 I LAYING AND COMPACTING GRADED CRUSHED SUBBASE AND BASE

The Contractor shall take appropriate measures to prevent segregation

during dumping and spreading operations»

The graded crushed stone shall be laid by plant capable of

distributing the graded crushed stone in a layer of uniform thickness
and without segregation.

The compacted thickness of any layer laid, processed and compacted at

one time shall not exceed 200 mm, and where a greater thickness is
required, the graded crushed stone shall he laid in two or more
layers.

The compacted thickness of any base layer shall not be less than 3
times the .maximum size of the graded crushed stone and the compacted
thickness of any suhbase layer shall not be less than .2 ‘times the
maximum size of the graded crushed stone»

As Soon as possible after laying, compaction shall be carried out,

The moisture content shall be adjusted as necessary and, during
compaction, care shall be taken to maintain the moisture content
evenly at the required value» Unless otherwise instructed by the
Engineer, the moisture content at the time of compaction shall be
between 80 and 100% of the Optimum Moisture Content as determined by
the vibrating hammer method in B5 1377 « Test 14» The appropriate
fl
W
sections of Clause 1204 of this Snecification shall apglyl

All rolling shall be longitudinal and shall commence at the outer

edges of the pavement and progress towards the centre, except that on
superelevated curves, rolling shall yrogress from the lower to the
higher edge; where laying is carried out in lanes care must be taken
to prevent water entraymenta

The dry densities to he achieved as a nercenta e of -the Maximum Dry

density {M96} determiasd by the Vibrating hammer method in 35 13??
Test is shall be:

Base: average dry density not less than 98% MDE with no
result less than 96% M034
 ST.~'M\JD53\RD SP‘ECHi7-"IC/-\TiOf\J FOR ROADVAND BRlD?GE__CQ4fg\ISTF%UCT|(:)_N

GRADED CRUSHED STONE SUBBRSE AND BASE

Subbase: average dry density not less than 96%V MDD_ with no
result less than 94% MDD. - '~
n__x_d_,i,_..a»»-_ :. ._ .

In addition to the above, the dry densities ‘to be achievefi'as a

percentage of the specific gravity of the stone shall be: ‘if

Base: average dry density not less than 85% ofg the ‘specific
gravity with no. result less than 82% of the Specific
' -
gravity (Oven a dry value). * --

Subbase: average dry density not less than B2%- orj the‘ specific
gravity with no result less than 80% of the specific
gravity (Oven ~ dry value). '" 7

On completion of the compaction the surface shall be- well -closed,

mechanically stable, free from visible movement under compaction
plant and free from compaction planes, ridges, cracks, loose or
segregated materiala If the surface fails to meet the requirements
of this Specification, the Contractor shall take the'action set out
in the appropriate part of Section 3 of this Specification or such
other action as the Engineer may instruct or agree.

1307 PROOFROLLING

The Contractor shall proofroll completed layers in accordance with

Clause l°B5 of this Specificationa

1308 SETTING OUT AND TOLERANCES

Graded crushea stone subbase and base shall be set out and
constructed to the tolerances given in Section 3 of this
Specification,

l309 TREATED MATERIALS

Lime or cement treatment, if required by the Special Specification or

Drawings, shall be carried out in accordance with Section 14 of this
Specification" \_

MEA S U REIVIENT AN "D P Al'MENT

{-}
£4; It.m
[J
/_ : Graded crushed stone for base or subbase

Unit 3 m3 of each nominal size of each class

Graded crushed stone shall be measured by the cubic metre for

each of the nominal sizes in each class of material calculated
as the product of the compacted sectional area instructefi to be
laia and the length iastractect

The rate for graded crushed stone shall include for the cost or
‘
‘razing and compacting the W
requirements of Sections i;
.3 6 anfi is of this
%®ié
 ST/—\I\ID,!3\FiD SPECIFICATION FOP? ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTIQi\.|

CEMENT AND LIME TREATED MATERIAL Page 1491

1401 SCOPE OF SECTION

This‘section deals with the addition and mixing in of cement or lime,

hereinafter described as the "stabilizer", to the upper layers of
earthworks as described in Section 5, natural materials as described
in Section 12, and crushed materials as described in Section l3, of
'
this Specification.

Following the addition and mixing in of the stabilizer the material

is referred to as "treated material". Treated material may either be
lime on cement improved material, or cement stabilized material.

This section also deals with the compaction and curing of the treated
material.

Treated materials may be used in the upper earthworks layers,

shoulder layers, subbase layer or base layer»

1402 SOURCES OF MATERIALS

In accordance with Sections 5, l2 and 13 of this Specificationa

1403 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

{a} Natural materials

In accordance with Sections 5, l2 and 13 of this Specifications

{b) Cement and lime

(i) Cement

Unless otherwise specified cement shall be ordinary

Portland cement complying with the requirements of Section
2 of this Specificationi

(ii) Lime

Lime shall be hydrated calcium lime or quioklime and shall

comply with the requirements of Section 2 of this
Specificationa

(iii) Storage and handling

The requirements of Section 17 of this Sgecification shall

ayply to cement“

finder saver and or:oteoted from

iame ee_venJe
N“e damaged or
months shall
 sTANoAsD SPECJF-‘5CAT!ON FOR ROAD ANDBRIDGECONSTRUCTJON

CEMNT AND LIME TREATED MATERIAL Page 1432

not be used, and shall be replaced at the Contractor's

expense. Operators and labour shall be‘ provided with
protective clothing, masks and goggles.

1404 AMOUNT OF STABILIZER TO BE ADDED

The amount of cement or lime to he added shall be~ determined _by ‘the
Engineer following laboratory .trials, and site trials carried
out by
the Contractor in accordance with Section
E of this Specification.
1405 'M:1::x«-IN-PLACE METHOD or CONSTRUCTION

The mixwinmplace method may be used for the addition and mixing
in of
stabilizer. “

(a) Mixing equipment

The equipment for pulverizing the material and mixing in the

stabilizer shall be purpose W built equipment, capable of
pulverizing the materials and mixing in the stabilizer to the
full depth of the loose layer necessary to give the specified
thickness of compacted material mixed and compacted in
accordance with this section of this Specification.

The equipment may be either single or multipass machines and

shall only be acceptable if, during the site trials carried out
in accordance with Section 2 of this Specification, it can
produce material to the specified requirementsw

If singleepass equipment is used for plastic soils, the degree

of pulverization as determined in accordance with Test 17 of BS
1924 shall be not less than 80 percent.

The mixers shall be equipped with a device for controlling the

depth of processing and mixing blades shall be maintained or
reset periodically so that the correct depth of mixing is
obtained at all times»
E-

Mixing by grader will not be permitted;

/'4-. O '-\-. .:I‘ Preparation of the layer

Before the stabilizer is applied, the material to be treated

shall be spread and broken down and oversize material removed so
that the maximum size of the particles is not more than
specifieda If multiwpass processing is employed, the
shall first be pulverised to the required tilth by succ:
assess; fiii “ial snail then be shaped true to
and 3rnss=-cc_. an‘, if required, lightr_ :
loose thickness shall be such as to give the spec’
1 compaction Les been carried out»
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
CEMENT AND LIME TREATED MATERIAL Page l4.3

The moisture content of the layer before the addition of the

stabilizer shall be adjusted to within the range of 70% to 85%
of the Optimum Moisture Content (AASHTO T180).

(C) Spreading the stabilizer

After the layer to be treated has. been prepared to the

satisfaction of the Engineer, the stablizer shall be uniformly
spread over the width to be worked at the specified rate. If a
spreader is used to spread the stabilizer ahead of the mixer, it
shall be fitted with a device to ensure a uniform and
controllable rate of spread both transversely and longitudinally.

Only sufficient stabilizer for immediate use shall be spread

ahead of the mixing operation and any which, in the opinion of
the Engineer, becomes defective, shall be replaced at the
Contractor's expense.

Only equipment actually used in the spreading or mixing

operation shall be allowed to pass over the stabilizer, when so
spread, before it has been mixed into the material to be treated.

(d) Mixing and watering

Immediately after the stabilizer has been spread, it shall be

thoroughly and.intimately mixed into the material for the full
depth of the layer. Mixing shall continue until the resulting
mixture forms a fine and homogeneous tilth. The mixing machine
shall be set so that it cuts at least 100 mm into the edge of
any adjoining lane processed previously so as to ensure that all
the material forming the layer has been properly processed.

Care shall be taken both during this and. during subsequent

watering operations that the underlying layer is not disturbed
and that no material from the underlying layer or shoulders is
mixed with that being processed.

If watering is necessary to bring the mixtureé to the required

moisture content, then this shall be done after spreading and
mixing in the‘stabilizer, Water shall be added§in a uniform and
controllable manner and, where necessary, in successive
increments. Each increment shall be mixed in as a separate
mixing operation. Care shall be taken to avoid a concentration
of water at any point or a flow of water over the surface.

Any part of the mixture which becomes toe wet after the
stabilizer has been added and before the mixture is compacted
will be rejected and any such part shall be allowed to dry out
until its moisture content is satisfactory and shall be
retreated with fresh stabilizer and iinished off in accordance
with this Clause.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CEMENT AND LIME TREATED MATERIAL Page 14.4

Throughout the process of mixing in the stabilizer and -water, a

uniform thickness of the mixture shall be maintained and, if
necessary, the mixture shall be graded to maintain the correct
uncompacted thickness and shape. Any part of the mixture that
becomes segregated shall be removed and replaced.

1406 STATIONARY PLANT METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION

(a) Mixing Equipment

Stationary mixing plant shall be of the power driven paddle or

pan type and may be of the batch or continuous type.

If" batch mixers are used, ‘the appropriate measured amounts of

material and stabilizer shall first be placed in the mixer,
water being then added as necessary to bring the moisture
content of the resulting mixture within the range determined in
the laboratory and site trials. Special care shall be taken
with batch type paddle mixers to ensure that the stabilizer is _,.;g

spread.uniformly_in the loading skip so that it is fed evenly

along the mixing trough and that with both paddle and pan mixers
the stabilizer is proportioned accurately by a separate weighing
. .~_.':
or proportioning device from that used for the material being
stabilised. Mixing shall be continued until the mixture has the
required uniformity and for not less than 1 minute unless a
shorter minimum period is permitted by the Engineer after ':.:.)n

satisfactory trials.

If continuous mixing is used, the paddles, baffles and rate of

fi§I\a'_I'.‘.~‘;‘.$’.'r)
feed of materials shall be adjusted to give uniformly mixed
material.

If a spray is used for distributing water into the mixer, it 7'v':?£!fl

shall be adjusted to give uniformity in moisture content

throughout the mix.
§ '_§¢.-‘.i'F."'.:;«_' Ff;1

(b) Transporting

Mixed material shall be transported to the road in suitable

_{: .;'.e: '.-.‘:.1
vehicles. Material.that becomes segregated or is affected by
weather shall be_ removed and replaced at the Contractor's
expense.

(c) Laying
.
W
The mixed material shall be spread by means of a mechanical ;.:_:.-;:_;_=:;
payer to the required width and such thickness that the
tolerance requirements as specijied in Section 3 of this
Specification are obtained aster final compaction. Segregation
shall be avoided and the layer shall be free from pockets of
coarse or fine material.
!"“ ."-_—n.a4-

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CEMENT AND LIME TREATED MATERIAL Page 14.5

1407 COMPACTION AND FINISHING

For cement treated materials final compaction and finishing shall be

completed within 2 hours after the cement-comes into Contact with the
material to be treated.

For. lime treated materials, final compaction and finishing shall be

completed within 4 hours after the lime comes into Contact with the
material to be treated.

(a) Thickness limitations

The compacted thickness of any treated layer laid, processed and

compacted at one time shall not exceed 180 mm. Where a greater
thickness is required, the material shall be laid in two or more
layers.

The compacted thickness of any base layer shall not be less than
3 times the maximum particle size of the material and the
compacted thickness of any subbase layer shall not be less than
twice the maximum particle size of the material.

(b) Compaction requirements

The minimum all lime and cement treated materials

density for
shall be 95% MDD (AASHTO Tl80)o The moisture content at the
time of compaction shall be between 95% and 105% of Optimum
Moisture Content (AASHTO T180).

(c) Finishing

The surface finish after compaction of any treated layer shall

be free from ridges, compaction planes, laminations, loose and
segregated material and other surface irregularities and shall
be to line and level and within the tolerances specified in
Section 3 of this Specification. If the surface’ fails to meet
the requirements of this Specification the Contractor shall take
the action set out in the appropriate part of Section 3 of this
Specification or such other action as the Engineer may instruct
or agree.

i408 JOINTS BETWEEN NEW AND EXISTING WORK

The forming of construction joints and the protection of previously

treated or other work shall be carried out so as to produce a
uniformly compacted and homogeneous layer free from ridges or other
irregularities»

Full width worring, without longitudinal joints, will generally be

requiredo Haliewidth working may be instructed by the Engineer to
pass traffic. when forming longitudinal joints, with the
mixmin~place method at least 100 mm of the first laid half—width
layer shall be retreated and mixed in with the second half-width
layer,
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CEMENT AND LIME TREATED MATERIAL Page 14.6

When forming transverse joints, with the mix~in—place method, at

least 1.0 m length of the previously laid treated work shall be
incorporated into the new treated layer and the Engineer may instruct
that the percentage of stabilizer be increased at these places.

When forming longitudinal or transverse joints with the stationary

plant method of construction, previous work shall be cut back to
expose fully treated and compacted material.

1409 PROTECTION AND CURING

Treated layers shall be kept continuously damp by lightly spraying

with water, from completion of compaction until» one of the curing
;
systems specified below is placed. a
§ E
layers shall be protected, within 4 hours of completion of §*
Treated
compaction in the case of cement treated material and 8 hours in the I
case of lime treated material, by one of the following methods:—
aw
(i) Completely covering the layer with clear or light coloured
approved polythene sheeting of minimum thickness 0.1mm. The
sheeting shall be laid to cover the whole of the surface of the
layer. At joints the sheeting shall be lapped by at least 500mm
and any damaged sheeting shall be replaced at the Contractor's
expense. § g
E?

The sheeting shall be securely held in contact with the layer by 5

an approved method. g g

(ii) Completely covering the treated material with a layer of damp

uncompacted gravel or soil material of minimum thickness 100mm.
This material, which may be that forming the next layer, shall
be kept continuously damp.

(iii) Spraying the layer with A3 anionic emulsion at a rate of 1.5

1/m2 to be applied in accordance with Parts A and B of Section
15» of this Specification. This method shall not be permitted
where the following layer is to be a bituminous mix in
accordance with Section 16 of this Specification. r'J-:7:-3"-:«‘:r‘2_&

otherwise instructed by the Engineer, no prime will be

Unless
(iii) is adopted and the contractor shall
required where method
comply with the requirements of Parts A and B of Section 15 of this
Specification. I»?
'-i‘-u

and the application of

Plant used for dumping and spreading material,
(g:.’_Jr".'

water or emulsion shall ce approved by the Engineer and shall have

individual axle loads not exceeding 2 tonnes,

Immediately prior to placing protection methods (i) or (iii) the

surface of the treated layer shall he made thoroughly damp by lightly
spraying with water.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTFu’UCTION

CEMENT AND LIME TREATED MATERIAL Page l4.7

The curing system shall be kept in place and intact for a minimum of
7 days after completion of compaction although small areas may be
temporarily removed for the purposes of carrying out control testing‘
but only for the minimum amount of time required for the testing.

1410 TRAFFIC

Traffic or equipment, other than that actually engaged in the various

treatment or protection processes, shall not run over the layer being
processed or compacted.

On completion of curing no traffic or equipment shall be allowed on

the treated layer with the exception of that required for
proofrolling, priming or construction of the subsequent layer.

1411 TOLERANCES

(a) Geometric tolerances

The treated upper earthworks, subbase and base shall be

constructed within the tolerances specified in Section 3 of this
Specification.

(b) Amount of stabilizer

(i) Mix—in~place method of construction.

The average amount of stabilizer, measured before mixing,

over a length of 100 m, shall not be less than the amount
ordered.

The average amount of stabilizer in the treated material,

measured at five points over a length of 100 m, shall not
be less than the amount ordered.

The amount of stabilizer, measured after mixing, shall at

no point be less than 70% or more than 130% of the amount
ordered. ‘

(ii) Stationary plant method of construction

The average amount of stablizer in the treated material

measured at five points over a length of 100 m, shall not
be less than the amount ordered.

The amount of stabilizer measured after mixing shall at no

point be less than 90% or more than llO% of the amount
ordered.

{iii} Determination of stabilizer content

The cement content in mixed materials shall be determined

according to Test l4 of BS 1924 or to AASHTO T2ll~65 (1982).
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

‘
CEMENT AND LIME TREATED MATERIAL Page 14.9

(c) Item : Curing treated material

Unit : m2

Curing treated material shall be measured by the square metre of

the layer cured calculated as the product of the specified width
of treated layer and the length cured.

The rate for curing shall include for the cost of_ watering,
{R provision placing and maintenance of the curing system, and for
:A complying with the requirements of Clause 1409 and Parts A and B
of Section 15 of this Specification.
 SECTION 14A
LEAN CONCRETE
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

LEAN CONCRETE Page l4A.l

14A/01 SCOPE OF SECTION

This section deals with the addition and mixing in of cement to

graded aggregate, and the transporting, laying and compaction of the
mix, hereinafter referred to as "lean concrete" for base or subbase.

14A/02 SOURCE OF MATERIALS

The Contractor shall be responsible for locating and developing

suitable sources of material for lean concrete. Such sources shall
be termed quarries and the opening up ,of quarries and the
carried out in
construction and maintenance of access roads shall be
accordance with Section 6 of this Specification.

14A/ 0 3 MATERIALS REQUI REMENTS

(i) Aggregates

(a) Grading

Sieve Size % passing

(mm) (by weight)
.

.m_ .N,._ , “ 37.5 100

‘ 28 90 — 100
20 65 ~ 95
I 10 40 ~ 70
30 — 55
-,. v_.‘_.m., . ,
5
2 l8 ~ 40
1 13 ~ 32
0.425 10 ~ 24
0.075 0 - 6

(b) Combined aggregate

Sodium Sulphate Soundness Max 12% I

Fines (passing 0.425mm) shall be non-plastic
Sand—equivalent Min 30%
Organic matter Max 0.3% (by weight)

(C) Aggregate retained on a 2mm sieve

CR : Min 80%
F1 : Max 25%
LAA : Max 35%
ACV : Max 28%
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

’
LEAN CONCRETE Page l4A.2

'
(ii) Cement
%
(a) Cement

Unless otherwise specified cement shall be ordinary

gfiem
Portland cement complying with Section 2 of this
Specification.

(b) Storage and handling gm

The requirements of Section 17 of thisl Specification shall

apply to the storage and handling of cement.

(c) Water shall comply with Section 17 of this Specification.

3792'‘:3?’:
14A/04 MIX REQUIREMENTS hi

(i) Proportions

The ratio of Cement to aggregate by weight (including any

absorbed moisture but excluding ‘free water in the aggregate)
shall be such as to produce average crushing strengths to the
requirements of this Section.

The amount of cement to be added shall be determined by the §g

Engineer following laboratory trials, and site trials carried 53
out by the Contractor in accordance with Section 2 of this
Specification. §\§

The water content of the mixed concrete shall be such as to 3

ensure that the specified degree of compaction can be achieved E
Q
under all normal working conditions.
%%;
Crushing strength

fihe essential strength requirement for the material is that the

average 28~day strengths of groups of three cubes shall be such
fihat not more than one such average strength “in any consecutive
five such averages is less than l0 N/mm2. If, however, the E;
i.
jbverall average of any consecutive. five groups of three cubes
'(i.e. fifteen cube strengths) falls below 12 N/mmg at 28 days,
or if the average range of five consecutive groups exceeds
fig-"_:'; r;-. ’—‘.*.
EON/mm2 the Engineer may require the use of different materials,
mix proportions, plant or methods notwithstanding any approval
which may have been previously given to such materials, mix
proportions, plant or methods. -jJ{1,~¥'.’,-'.r_-”_r"- 1

The initial rate of tee rt" ing shall comply with the requirements _
of Section 17 of th'sF-4 Scecification until the Engineer is = f
"
satisfied that the specified material is being consistently
produced»
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

LEAN CONCRETE Page l4A.3

Further, in order to ensure a high probability that at an early stage

the above requirements will be met, the average 7-day strengths of
groups of three gubes shall be not less than 7 N/mmz and if more than
one of the 7~day average strengths of groups of three cubes in any
consecutive five such averages fall below 9 N/mm2 the cement content
shall be increased to such a value as may be approved by the Engineer
and. the making of cubes shall be continued at the same rate as at the
start of the work until the results show that a satisfactory materialv
is being consistently produced.

14A/05 METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION

(i) Site trials

The Contractor shall carry out site trials in accordance with

Section 2 of this Specification at least one month before he
intends commencing full scale construction of any lean concrete
layer. Should_the trial show that the specified strength and
compaction requirements cannot be achieved the Contractor shall
amend the mix proportions or the laying and compaction
techniques in order to achieve the required result.

(ii) Mixing, transporting and laying

Lean concrete shall be mixed, transported and laid in accordance

with Section 14 of this Specification (stationary plant method
of construction).

(iii) Compaction

Immediately after laying, the mix shall be compacted by

vibratory and smooth wheel rollers to 96% of the target dry
density. Compaction shall be completed within 2 hours of the
cement being added to the aggregates at the batching plant.

The target dry density shall be determined daily as fol1ows:~

From.three separate batches of the mix, two l50mm' test cubes

‘shall be prepared in accordance with BS 1881 except that the
cubes shall be compacted to refusal in three layers using a
hammer as described in BS 1377, Test 14, but with a
vibrating
square flat plate head with an area of between l0,000 and
l5,O0Omm2. As soon as the cubes can be handled without damage,
density and moisture content shall be determined in
their
accordance with BS 1881. The average dry density of the six
cubes shall be the target dry density.

The density of the compacted base shall be determined for each

500m‘ laid. The Contractor shall provide a gortable coring rig
capable of cutting acceptable cores of minimum diameter 150mm
STANDARD SPECIFICAWON FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

LEAN CONCRETE Page 14A. 4

and to a depth of at least 250mm. The density and moisture

content of each core shall be measured in accordance with BS
1881.

Following the determination of the density each core shall be

crushed and the minimum equivalent cube strength shall be 7
N/mmz at 7 days calculated in accordance with BS 1881.

The compacted thickness shall not exceed 250mm.

(iv) Finishing

The surface finish after compaction shall be free from ridges,

‘compaction planes, laminations, loose and segregated material
and other surface irregularities and shall be to line and level
and within the tolerances specified in Section 3 of this
Specification. If the surface fails to meet the requirements of
this Specification the Contractor shall take the action set out
in the appropriate part of Section 3 of this Specification or
such other action as the Engineer may instruct or agree.

(V) Joints

At the end of each day's work the lean concrete shall be

compacted against a securely fixed vertical temporary stop—end
and if compaction is being done with a vibratory roller this sees
shall be used transversely close to the stop-end. In addition,
the material in the corners adjacent to the stop—end shall be
compacted by means of a small power~operated compactor. when
is removed any poorly compacted material adjacent ewes
the stop—end
to it shall be removed and a
l : l cementzsand grout shall be applied to the exposed face to
a thickness of 5 — 10mm before proceeding with the laying of “rm”
further adjoining lean concrete. Such fresh lean concrete shall
be thoroughly compacted against the joint and where a vibratory
roller is I employed this shall be used transversely close to the
joint again using the small power—operated Compactor in the
corners of the new worka None of the compacting equipment shall
"be allowed _to bear directly on the hardened or partially
-
hardened lean concrete previously laid. fr'3»l"‘-' !Jf:é":'3.‘%.

Where the full width of the layer cannot be placed by one pass
of the paver, work shall be arranged so that at longitudinal
joints a free edge of spread material is not exposed for more
than one hour after mixing before placing the adjacent layer.
‘Where a free edge is exposed for more than one hour after
L“-15.-'1- ’.">.-' "}.'\
mixing, it shall he cut back to expose fully compacted material
before Laying the adjacent layer.

(vi) curing

Curing and the period of curing shall be in accordance with the 2:-
-

Special Specification. .;,':‘.j-','.’,-5.

 SZFANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE ‘CONSTRUCTION

LEAN CONCRETE Page l4A.5

14/A/O6 TRAFFIC

Traffic or equipment, other than that actually engaged in the

various treatment processes, shall not run over the layer being
processed or compacted.

No traffic or equipment will be allowed on a treated layer

earlier than that period specified in the Special Specification
after completion of compaction, and subsequently only that
traffic necessary for construction of the next layer will be
'
permitted on the treated layer.

14A/07 SETTING OUT AND TOLERANCES

out‘ and constructed to

Lean concrete base and subbase shall be set
the tolerances given in Section 3 of this Specification.

14A/D8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

(a) Item Lean concrete for base or subbase

Unit m3

Lean concrete shall be paid by the cubic metre calculated as the

be laid and the length
compacted sectional area instructed to
instructed.

for
The rate for lean concrete for base or subbase shall include
the cost of providing mixing hauling spreading and compacting
the material and complying with the requirements of Section 14A
of this Specification.

No overhaul will be paid.

Item ‘Curing lean concrete

Unit as specified in the Special Specification

measure shall be as specified in the

The unit and method of
Special Specification.

The rate shall linclude for complying with Section 14A of this
Specification and with the Special Specification.

.<u-4o. t;n.4as;._n
 SECTION 15
BHUMSNOEES SURFACE TREATMENTS
AND SURFACE DRESSWGS
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.1

1501 SCOPE OF SECTION

This Section covers the application of different bituminous binders

and aggre gates to any kind of road surface and is divided into the
following parts:

PART A I General
I
PART B Prime Coat and Tack Coat

PART C ' Surface Dressing

PART D Sand Seal

PART E Gravel Seal

PART E Emulsion Slurry Seal

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
R
BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.2

—PART A.- GENERAL

l50lA
1

SCOPE OF PART A
i
Part A comprises all the general requirements for bituminous binder
and aggregate common to Parts B to F inclusive.

1502A BITUMINOUS BINDER SPECIFICATIONS.

All bituminous binders shall comply with the relevant requirements

-
set out in Section 2 of this Specification.

1503A BITUMINOUS BINDER STORAGE AND HANDLING

When carried in bulk containers, records of binder temperature and

time in a manner acceptable to the Engineer shall be kept. Any J;§e.-a-.;=.-:3:

bituminous binder not conforming to the requirements of Clause 1504A

may be rejected by the Engineer as unsuitable for use in the Works.

The bitumen storage area and heating station shall be kept neat and
tidy. The storage area shall be cleared of vegetation and the drums
stacked on their sides and only in small quantities with gaps between
each stack to reduce fire risk.
I
Bitumen distributors and boilers shall be kept clean, at all times.
when changing the grade of bitumen and at the end of each day's work, '.-‘_7';‘'’ ' ‘'’“'
all boilers and distributors shall be thoroughly cleaned out with a
solvent. The flushings from boilers .and distributors shall. not be
poured. over the area indiscriminately, but shall be led by drainage
channels to disposal pits, care being taken that flushings do not
find their way into stormwater ditches or streams.
.51’-I:"_&9E1".';‘:
All boilers, pre—heating pits, tools, and plant shall be kept V

scrupulously clean.

filling the bitumen distributor from the boilers or ‘ bulk

When ,3-a«2=.é," ;'»“.« r“.«‘.»a

containers, the bitumen shall be passed through a filter of fine wire

gauze.

channels -,»:-'.2r-. '-.r-.a':,

On completion of the Works, the disposal pits and drainage
shall be filled in, topsoiled and the site left clean and tidy.

.
l504A HEATING or BITUMINOUS BINDER

During storage the temperature of the bituminous binder shall be kept

as low as possible, consistent with reasonable pumpability. },E

The bituminous binder shall be heated in boilers or bulk storage

containers, equipped with adequate pumps and accurate thermometers.
No b heated in a boiler when the thermometer is broken
giimge
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

Page 15.3
BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING

VT The minimum pumping‘ temperatures, the range of spraying temperatures

grade
and the maximum heating temperatures of cut—backs, penetration ‘
1 bitumens and emulsions are given in the following table:—

T Temperatures (°C)*
Binder
N“
it
Minimum Spraying Maximum

Pumping Slotwjets Atomising jets Heating

,‘

" 25 55 ~ 65 ~ 70
RC 70
m_
" 100 — 115 — 120
RC 800 60
-i”. “ 80 l25 w l35 ~ 135
RC 3000

Cut~back MC 30 10 35 ~ 45 50 - 60- 65
" MC 70 25 55 — 65 70 — 85 85
fi_ “ 80 — 90 90 — 110 110
MC 250 45
" MC 800 60 lO0 ~ 115 120 ~ 135 135
" MC 3000 80 125 — 135 135 — 150 150
" 800/1400
T"
" (France) 90 l35 - l45 145 ~ 160 160

Bitumen 400/500 95 140 ~ 150 160 — 170 170

" 280/320 100 150 ~ 160 160 ~ 170 170
" 180/200 lOS 155 — 165 160 — 170 170
“ 80/100 115 160 — 170 160 — 170 170

Emulsion Kl—70 15 75 — 85 75 —h 85 _ 95
" . — — - 95
**Kl-60

the
* These spraying temperatures are for guidance only, since
optimum spraying temperature ' depends on the
temperature/viscosity relationship of the bitumen.

*5 The minimum pumping and spraying temperatures for Kl~60 shall be

in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

the viscosity for spraying shall be 70 to 100

For slot~jets
centistokes and for etomizing jets 35 to 60 centistokeso
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE. CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.4

No penetration grade’ bitumen, cut-back bitumen, or emulsion shall be

heated above the maximum temperature given above and any that is
overheated shall be removed from the Site and disposed of by the
Contractor.

The rates of application of binder specified or instructed by the

Engineer refer to volumes of binder corrected to l5.6°C using the
Standard Petroleum Measurement Table (ASTM D 1250).

1505A ADHESION AGENT

Where required the adhesion agent shall be of an approved type and

shall be used .in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
as instructed by the Engineer.

1506A CONSTRUCTION LIMITATIONS

No bituminous construction work will be permitted in adverse weather

conditions (rain, wind etc.,) or whenever so instructed by the
Engineer.

Bituminous material, except for bitumen emulsions and certain types

of prime coat if instructed by the Engineer, shall not be applied on
a damp surface.

1507A SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The Contractor shall take every precaution to avoid fire or health

hazards. He shall always ensure that:

(a) bitumen is heated only to the temperature required for the

particular application;

(b) hot bitumen never comes in contact with water; -.“"\:

e
.§-'i’:~.‘_-
* .7.
protective clothing and gloves are used when in
(c) suitable fa'.'.~?

~ handling hot bitumen; and

,‘
,1:

(d) dust is reduced to a minimum. _;.- '_.":. x2:-;

Great care is required when using rapid—curing cutmback, because of

the highly flammable nature of the solvent.

1508A MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

No separate measurement and payment shall be made for complying with

the requirements of Clauses l50lA to l5G?A inclusive of this
specification and the Contractor shall be deemed to have all,wed in
his rates in Parts 8 to F inclusive of Section l5 of this
Specification for the costs of complying with the requirements of
Part A of Section 15 of this Specification.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.5

'
PART B‘- PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT

15013 DEFINITIONS

A prime coat means an application of low viscosity bituminous binder

to an absorbent non-bituminous surface. If the prime coat is to be
trafficked, it shall be covered with blinding material.

A tack coat shall mean a light application of bituminous binder to a

bituminous or concrete surface.

1502B MATERIALS FOR PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT

For prime coat, the binder shall be a medium—curing cut~back .MC30 or

MC70 unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.

For tack coat, the binder shall be a penetration grade bitumen

applied hot immediately prior to laying the bituminous mixture layer
or alternatively a rapid curing cut-back or medium curing cut—back
applied at sufficient time before laying the bituminous mixture to
allow the evaporation of the cutter (solvent); or a quick-breaking
emulsion or slow~setting emulsion diluted with water, applied a
sufficient time before laying the bituminous mixture to allow the
emulsion to break and the water to evaporate and run off.

Blinding material if required shall consist of fine aggregate, or

sand, or crusher dust and shall contain not more than 15 per cent
retained on a 6.3 mm sieve. The blinding material if required by the
Engineer will be specified in the Special Specification.

1503B PREPARATION OF SURFACE

The surface to be sprayed shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping

with mechanical brooms and/or washing or other approved means. All
laitance of soil or binder material, loose and foreign material shall
be removed.

All loose material shall be swept clear of the layer to expose the
full width of the layer.

The surface to be sprayed shall be checked for line, camber and

level, and the surface corrected, made good as necessary and approved
by the Engineer before any bituminous spray is applied. The
‘ or otherwise, of the surface will be given
Engineer's approval,
immediately prior to the Contractor's intention to start spraying.

Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, immediately prior etc the

application of prime coat, the surface of the layer shall be lightly
apkayed with water to give complete coverage of the layer, but in no
case saturated.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION m
I~‘.I.
‘I

fifi.
BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.6

In order to bring the surface to be primed to the condition required,

water shall be applied in small increments by a distributor. Any gg;_».:»:'<.v;'“" ‘
water on the surface after spraying shall be allowed to drain away
before the prime coat is applied. h
§
1504B SPRAYING OF PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT §§

As soon as possible after the surface to be sprayed has been prepared :

as specified. in Clause 15033 and approved by the Engineer, the prime E
or tack coat shall be sprayed on to it at the specified rate. ;
Spraying "shall be carried out not later than 12 hours after the E
surface has been prepared. - pg
The quantity of binder used shall give complete coverage of the
surface with a slight trace of run-off in places. Should the mi
specified rate of spray appear to be incorrect, the Contractor shall 5
immediately stop spraying, inform the Engineer and amend the spray
rate as instructed by the latter.

‘The edge of the area shall be marked out with a line of string or
wire pegged down at intervals not exceeding 15 m on straights or 7.5 _
m on curves.
fig
Bitumen shall be sprayed from a pressure distributor and no
handspraying shall be permitted except in small areas, or to make
good a defective area caused by a blocked nozzle. 53

The nozzles shall be arranged to give a uniform spray and shall be §

tested prior to spraying by discharging on to suitable material (such E:
as building paper, metal sheets, etc.,) or into purpose made"
troughs. Testing shall not take place on the road, and any bitumen ,
spilt on the ground shall be cleaned off.
%_
If during spraying, a nozzle becomes blocked or develops a defect,
the spraying shall be immediately stopped, any area incompletely §_
sprayed shall be made good with a handspray , and the machine is
repaired before further spraying is Commenced.
t
i
I-l

When commencing and‘stopping spraying, sheets of building paper or ,.

'.§4._ .
metal at least 2 m wide shall be spread across the full width to be
sprayed to give a clean sharp edge.

The metal sheets used for stopping and starting work shall be cleaned “R
after each run and the troughs used for testing shall be cleaned at
the end of each day’s works

During spraying all kerbs, road furniture, culvert headwalls, tree

holes and the like'ahich are liable to be disfigured by splashing of
bitumen shall be protected, and any such feature which is
accidentally marred by bitumen shall be cleaned off with a suitable
solvent or made gooda
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOFI ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.7

1505B CURING AND BLINDING OF PRIME COAT

If, after the application of the prime coat, the bituminous material
fails to penetrate within the time specified or if the road must be
used by traffic, blinding material shall be spread. in the amount
required to absorb any excess bituminous material and to protect the
'
J
primed surface.
. ., -'
'

Blinding material shall be spread from trucks in such a manner that

. _. .- »;.-
no wheel will travel on uncovered bituminous material.
V‘ -

Unless the Engineer permits otherwise, all loose material on-the

-— «.—_ —.-,«_ sprayed surface, including any blinding material, shall be removed
' before any further layer of the pavement is laid.
.

—- v—_. v.—~<
l506B TOLERANCES

The rate of application of bituminous binder across the width of each

spray run shall not vary by more than i 10% of the rate ordered and
the average rate of binder for each single run of the spray truck
shall be at least equal to the rate ordered. Tray tests should be
taken at least once a day during priming operation to check
calculations based on dipping of spray trucks.

3.50713 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

(a) Item Prime coat or tack.coat

Unit : 1 (litre) of each type of bituminous binder

Prime coat or tack coat shall be measured by the litre of each

type of bituminous binder calculated as the product of the area
in square metres instructed to be sprayed and. the instructed
rate of application in litres/square metre, corrected to l5.6°C.

The rate for prime coat or tack coat shall include for the cost
of providing, hauling and spraying the prime or tack coat at the
instructed application rate, blinding and complying with the
requirements of Clauses 15028, 1503B, 15043, 1505B and 1506B of
this Specification.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
E
ifi‘.‘\‘.‘

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.8

. w
as

PART‘ c -— SURFACE DRESSING

1501C DEFINITIONS
e.--.5

A single surface dressing means an application of bituminous binder

to any kind of road surface followed immediately by a single layer of “A
uniform sized chippings.

A multiple surface dressing neans two or more Surface dressings &g

placed one on the other.

1502:: MATERIALS FOR SURFACE DRESSING

Q‘;
(a) ‘Binder

The binder will generally be a suitable cationic quick—breaking -

rJ’Z<'«’».:

emulsion such as Kl-60 or Kl~70, a medium-curing cut—back MC

3000 or a penetration/cut back mixture blended to the approval
of the Engineer. The type of binder will be specified in the
‘gf'.G?.?‘J'£3’fl
Special Specification.
'
(b) Chippings E
%
(i) Hardness, soundness, shape and cleanliness
Q

The chippings shall consist of crushed stone, cubical in $5

shape and free from visible stone dust and harmful material
such as clay, salt, organic matter or other deleterious g
substances. The percentage _passing the 0.075 sieve shall E
not exceed 0.5% by weight.

The chippings shall comply with the following requirements,

for the appropriate class as specified in the Special
Specification.

I -.

ughipping Class 1 2 3 4 §

ACV Max . 16 20 23 26
SSS Max . 12 12 12 12
Fl Max . 20 20 25 25

(ii) Angularity

The minimum size of the stone to be crushed to produce the _

“
chippings shall be at least 4 times the maximum size of the
chippings.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING. Page 15.9

(iii) Grading

Sieve Percentage by weight passing

Size Nominal Sizes

(mm) 14/20 10/14 6/10 3/6

28 - — —
_ l00 _
20 85~l0O 100 ~ ~
14 0-30 85~l00 100 —
10 0-7. 0-30 85-100 100
6.3 ~ 0- 7 0-30 85-100
5 — — 0-10 w
3 — — ~ 0-30
2 0-2 0-2 0~2 0-10
0.5 ~ ~ — 0 2

l503C RATE OF APPLICATION OF BINDER AND CHIPPINGS

The rate of spray of binder and the size and rate of spread of
chippings shall be as specified in the Special Specification or as
instructed by the Engineer.

Tray tests shall be carried out at least once per day during surface
dressing operations to check spray and spread rates calculated from
spray truck dippings and chip—spreader coverage, and more frequently
when a number of short lengths are being surface dressed. Spray
truck dippings shall be taken for each length sprayed and
chip—spreader coverage shall be checked each day chipping operations
'
are in progress.

1504C CRUSHING, SCREENING, WASHING AND STOCKPILING CHIPPINGS

The construction plant provided and the'methods of operating it shall

be such as will produce chippings which meet the specified
requirements of Clause 1502C(b)a This may require washing the
chippings to meet the cleanliness requirements.

The Contractor shall comply with Section 6 of this Specification when

stockpiling chippingsa If required the stockpile area shall be
surfaced with 100 mm thickness of gravel or other material,
acceptable to the Engineer. Any contaminated chippinqs shall nryt be
used in the Works. After use the stockpile area shall be cleared,
topsoiled and left neat and tidy.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.10

1505C PRECOATED CHIPPINGS

§

The bituminous binder used for precoated chippings shall be a medium

curing cut—back MC30 or a semi-stable or stable emulsion such as
anionic A2 or A3 or cationic K2 or K3 unless otherwise instructed by
the Engineer. The amount of bituminous binder used to precoat
chippings shall be specified in the Special Specification or shall be
as instructed by the Engineer.

Precoating shall be carried out in a mixing machine acceptable to the

'
Engineer. '
.3
A
. ls‘.
The precoated chippings shall not be tacky and liable to
agglomerate. The chippings precoated with cut—back or emulsion shall
be stockpiled for the lapse of time required by the solvents or water
to evaporate. fifififi

The precoated chippings shall be kept free of contamination by dust

or other deleterious matter.

1506C CONSTRUCTION PLANT FOR SURFACE DRESSING

(a) Bitumen distributors

Bitumen distributors shall be truck mounted and shall have

sufficient power to maintain uniform speeds for the proper
application of the binder. The truck shall be equipped with an
accurate tachometer showing the driver the speed in metres per
minute. The truck shall be fitted with a gauge bar and chain or
any other acceptable device clearly visible to the driver to
enable him to follow the required edge. The distributor tank
shall have a capacity of at least 4,000 litres and shall be
fitted with a device for indicating the quantity in the tank at
any time. It shall be equipped with heaters capable of
maintaining temperatures up to 200°C and be fitted with an
accurate thermometer.

The circulation system shall permit pumping around the tank and
around the spray bar without actually spraying. Spray bars
:'-.?J'.-:=_»':,_;~
shall be available for spraying in widths varying from 0.5 m to
4 m and shall be adjustable transversely so that the operator
can follow the required edge independently. The spray nozzles
shall be arranged to give a uniform spray and the shut—off shall
be quick~acting with an antidrip device. The pressure in the
spray bar shall be sufficient to give a good distribution and
spraying of the binder.

Distributors shall be capable of applying bituminous binder

within the limits of + 10% of the specified rate or application
over any portion of the surface.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.11

Distributors shall be checked and_calibrated before starting any

work or when required by the Engineer. This shall include the
calibration of all the metering devices and checkingI the
uniformity of the transverse distribution of spray.

All distributors shall be furnished with a "rate of

spray/machine speed" chart.

Chip—spreaders

Mechanical chip-spreaders shall be capable of spreading the

chippings uniformly over variable widths, from 0.5 to 3.5 m, at
the rates specified.

The number and output of chip-spreaders shall be sufficient to

ensure that chippings are spread imediately after the
bituminous binder has been applied.

Chip-spreaders shall be checked and calibrated before starting

any work or when required by the Engineer.

(62) Rollers

The main rolling shall be carried out with self-propelled

pneumatic tyred rollers, having a wheel~load of more than 2
tonnes. The tyres shall be smooth and their pressure shall be
more than 0.4 N/mmz.

Steel~wheeled rollers shall not be used until all excess

chippings have been removed and insufficiently chipped areas
have been chipped over and then only in tandem with pneumatic
tyred rollers or where approved by the Engineer. Only
steel—wheeled rollers weighing less than 8 tonnes (total weight)
will be accepted.

The number and output of rollers shall be sufficient to ensure

that rolling does not lag behind spreading. Two pneumatic tyred
rollers shall be used for each chipwspreader.

(d) Miscellaneous equipment

Sufficient trucks ‘and. loading machinery shall be employed to

ensure an adequate, prompt and continuous supply of chippings.

Rubber tyred mechanical rotary brooms towed by or mounted on

rubber tyred vehicles shall be provided.

All labour working with or on bitumen shall oe provided with

fl
_protective clothing and :ootwear.
L
__3g£c5“
. _.,..
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.12

1507c PREPARATION or SURFACE

Immediately before spraying, all loose material and foreign matter éh
shall be removed by thorough brushing with mechanical brooms and/or
washing or other -acceptable methods. All hardened mud or other
foreign matter shall be loosened by scraping before sweeping. The fig
debris shall be deposited well clear of the surface to be sprayed.

Any defect of the surface shall be made good as instructed by the

Engineer and no binder shall be sprayed until the surface has been
approved by the Engineer. The Engineer's approval or otherwise of I
the surface will be given immediately prior to the Contractor's if
intention to start spraying. E?

1508C APPLICATION OF SURFACE DRESSING

As soon as possible after the surface has been prepared and. approved,
the binder shall be uniformly sprayed at the specified rate. 2 E
Spraying shall not be carried out later than 12 hours after the :§I
i
surface has been prepared.

The spraying width shall normally be one lane width so that fiui
construction traffic may run over the other lane.

Immediately after the binder has been sprayed, clean dry chippings 3
shall be uniformly applied at the specified rate by the use of as El;
R
many mechanical chip—spreaders as necessary to match the rate of
spraying. The elapsed time between the spraying of binder and the
spreading of chippings shall in no case exceed one minute.

Should it become apparent that the supply of chippings is about to

fail, the binder spraying shall be immediately stopped and shall not
resume until an adequate supply of chippings is assured.

The "correct rate of spread. is generally assessed visually, as 53‘

R‘
.‘g\_.
providing complete coverage, with the film of binder still visible 3.3‘ .-
.*,I. .-
£3’:
between the chippings. Should the coverage appear to be incorrect,
the Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer, who will amend
the rate of spread accordingly. Any excess of chippings shall be p
removed by hand and any insufficiently chipped area shall be chipped A
over by hand, so that adequate coverage is obtained. Brooming of the
:.';
material to effect redistribution of chippings will not be permitted.
aF'f’:‘:I“:L'-Y‘.

Rolling shall begin immediately after the chippings have been spread
and, in no case, later than two minutes after the application of
binder.
_4¢_-_-,'.r.j-. ‘-,;I

Rolling shall continue anti all chippings are firmly embedded into
the binder and until all excess chippings have been removed or
insufficiently chipped areas have been chipped over» The number of
passes shall be agreed with the Engineer. Usually, each point shall
receive at least 6 passes of the pneumatic tyred roller»
 STANDARD SPECIHCATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.13

Excessive rolling, resulting in the crushing of chippings, shall be

avoided.

The roller speed shall not exceed 8 km/h, unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer.

Additional rolling on a previously completed section shall be given

later in the heat of the day by_ pneumatic tyred rollers in tandem
with steel three wheeled rollers unless otherwise instructed by the
Engineer.

l5U9C AFTERCARE AND CONTROL OF TRAFFIC

The road shall not be opened to traffic until the binder has attained
sufficient viscosity to prevent the stones being whipped off.

The Contractor shall erect temporary restriction signs, barriers and

removable bumps or any other device, as instructed by the Engineer,
to prevent Vehicles travelling too fast over the newly laid surface
dressing. Vehicle speed shall be restricted to a maximum of 30 km/h,
until there is sufficient adhesion to ensure that the chippings will
not be dislodged by faster vehicles.

After traffic has been permitted to run on the surface dressing for a
period of at least two weeks and when instructed by the Engineer, all
loose chippings shall be swept. and taken away. Windrows of loose
ohippings shall not be allowed to accumulate at the sides of the road.

1510C TOLERANCES

The final average overall width of the surface dressing measured at

six equidistant points over a length of 100 m shall be at least equal
to the width specified or instructed. At no point shall the distance
between the centreline of the road and the edge of the surface
dressing be narrower than that instructed by more than 13 mm.

The rate of application of binder across the lane width shall not
vary by more than +10% of the rate ordered and for each; length of
lane sprayed in Ta single pass the average rate of binderéapplication
shall be not less than the rate ordered. 5

The average rate of application of chippings along and éacross the

lane width for each single pass of the chip~spreader shall not vary
by more than i}0% of_the rate ordered. 2
 STANDARD SPECIHCATIQN FOR ROAD -AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.14

l5llC MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

(a) Item : Seal coat

Unit : 1 (litre) for each type of bituminous binder for each

seal coat.

Seal coats shall be measured by‘ the litre, for each type of
bituminous binder for each seal coat, calculated as the product
of the area in square metres instructed to be sprayed and the
instructed rate of application in litres/square metre, corrected
to 15.6°c.

The rate‘ for the seal coat shall include for the cost of
preparation of the surface to receive the binders, providing,
hauling and spraying the bituminous binder at the instructed
application rate and complying with the requirements of Parts A
and C of Section 15 of this Specification.

(b) Item : Chippings

Unit : m3 of each nominal size for each class

Chippings shall be measured by the cubic metre of each nominal

size for each class calculated as the product of the area in
square metres instructed to be covered and the reciprocal of the ,a_‘: .-_'- .~'.*.r:r.-W.
instructed rate of application in square metres/cubic metre or
the actual rate of application in square metres/cubic metre
:+’»=_=,
whichever calculation gives the lower volume.
_§_?.7:r£.'v.

The rate for chippings shall include for the cost of providing,
hauling spreading and rolling the chippings at any instructed
application rate, all hauls as necessary and complying with
Parts A and C of Section 15 of this Specification.

(0) Item ?recoated chippings ;.=»-7:5.:r. : L

Unit as specified in the Special Specification

A The method of measurement for preccated chippings shall be as

specified in the Special Specification.

The rate for precoated chippings shall include for the cost of
complying with Parts A and C of Section 15 of this Specification
and with the relevant sections of the Special Specification.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE-DRESSING Page 15.15

'
PART D " SAND SEAL

l50lD DEFINITION

A sand seal means an application of bituminous binder covered with

aggregate as specified below.

l502D MATERIAL FOR SAND SEAL

(a) Binder

The binder shall be a mediumwcuring cut—back MCBOO or MC3000 or

Kl-60 cationic emulsion unless otherwise instructed by the
I '
Engineer.

(b) Aggregate «

The aggregate shall consist of sand, or fine screenings, f res

from organic matter, clay and other deleterious material. The
fines (passing a 0.425 mm sieve) shall be non~plastic. The S and
Equivalent shall exceed 40.

The grading shall be as follows:

Sieve % by weight
(mm) passing

6.3 100
5 95 ~ 100
4 90 — 100
2 . 50 — 95
l 20 W 80
0.6 l0 w 50
0.425 3 H 25
0,3 0 — 15 t
0.150 0 ~ 8
0 075 0 ~ 5

l503D RATE OF APPLICATION OF BINDER.AND FINE AGGREGATE

The rate of spray of binder and the rate of spread of the f ine
aggregate shall be as specified in the Special Specification or as
instructed by the Engineera

During the sand sealing operation tray tests to determine spray and
spread rate shall be carried out at least once per daya
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.16

l504D CONSTRUCTION

The surface to be covered_shall be prepared in accordance with Clause

1507C.

The binder shall be uniformly sprayed at the specified rate. The

fine aggregate shall be uniformly spread and rolled, all in
accordance with Clause 15080, except that the fine aggregate shall be
spread in excess of that required to cover the binder.

l505D AFTERCARE AND CONTROL OF TRAFFIC

The road_shall be opened to traffic when instructed by the Engineer.

Traffic speed shall be restricted as per Clause 1509C for as long as

the Engineer may require.

Any whipped—off aggregate shall be broomed back onto the road, as

many times as are necessary for it to adhere fully to the binder.

l506D TOLERANCES

Sand seal shall be constructed. within the same width tolerance as

given in Clause 1510C for surface dressing. q
1-:

The rate of application of binder and aggregate across the lane width $5
shall not vary by more than +10% of the rate ordereda The average
rate of application of binder forwa single pass of the spray truck
shall be not less than the rate ordered. The average rate of
application of sand for a single pass of the spreader shall not vary
by more than_:lO% of the rate ordered.

l507D MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

.\

it
(a) Item : Seal coat rs‘.
'~‘v.‘
.\

» Unit : 1 (litre) for each type of bituminous binder

:-.‘r‘-E
Seal coats shall be measured by the litre for each type of ‘,-1
11 _

bituminous binder calculated as the product of the area in

square metres instructed to be sprayed and the instructed rate
of application in litres/square metre corrected to 15.600.

The rate for the seal coat shall include for the cost of
preparation of the surface to receive the binder, providing,
hauling and spraying the bituminous binder at the instructed
application rate and complying with the requirements of Parts A
and D of Section 15 of this Specification.
STANDARD SPECNFICATION FORROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND DURFACE DRESSING Page l5.l7

(b) Item : Aggregate

Unit : m3

Aggregate shall be measured by the cubic metre calculated as the

product of the area in square metres instructed to be covered
and the reciprocal of the instructed rate of application in
square metres/cubic metre or the actual rate of application in
square metres/cubic metre whichever calculation gives the lower
volume.

The rate for aggregate shall include for the cost of providing,
hauling spreading and rolling the aggregate at any instructed
application rate, brooming aback whipped-off aggregate, and
complying with Parts A and D of Section 15 of this Specification.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page l5.l8

PART E H GRAVEL SEAL

l50lE DEFINITION

A gravel seal means an application of bituminous binder covered with

graded granular material.

l502E MATERIAL FOR GRAVEL SEAL

(a) Binder

The binder shall be a medium curing cut-back MCSOO or MC3000

unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.

(b) Aggregate

(i) Source of material

The Contractor shall be "responsible for locating suitable

sources of material for the gravel seal. Notwithstanding
Clause 602 of this Specification such sources whether or
not requiring drilling and blasting for the extraction of
the material shall be termed as quarries and ‘shall be
provided in accordance with Section 6 of this Specification.

(ii) Material

The cover aggregate shall consist of graded gravel or

graded crushed stone or a mixture of these and shall be
free from organic matter, clay and other deleterious
material. Its hardness shall_be as follows:

Los Ahgeles Abrasion 40% maximum

Aggregate Crushing Value: 30% maximum

The cover aggregate shall have a grading within and ES;

approximately parallel to the following envelope:~

-.' «.-r.
,-.-

E
Sieve % by weight
passing
F£:‘v','_-Of"-‘I- 112.
.
Q,
-

{U C) ft‘ 0 G

65-95 «
’;f‘;“: rv:*_'_‘.‘-V‘

i...J‘|—l 45~95
La.) KO .5»-soil
5»-55
I-’ omso

5»-40
6 D-- Ix.) U7 3 w 30
C5'C3?'-‘2\.)«L‘:-O\CD~ C.) *-~.1 U1 0 = l0
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONIFOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.19

(C) Adhesion agent

The adhesion agent specified in the Special Specification or as

instructed by the Engineer shall be added to the bituminous
binder.

l5U3E RATE OF APPLICATION OF BINDER AND AGGREGATE

The rate of spray of binder and the rate of spread of aggregate shall
be as specified in the Special Specification or as instructed by the
Engineer.

l504E CONSTRUCTION

The surface to be covered shall be prepared in accordance with Clause

1507C.

The binder shall be uniformly "sprayed and the aggregate shall be

uniformly spread_and rolled in accordance with Clause 1508C.

l505E AFTERCARE AND TRAFFIC CONTROL

The road shall be opened to traffic when so instructed by the

Engineer. The traffic speed shall be restricted as per Clause 1509C
for as long as the Engineer may require»
\

l506E TOLERANCES

"Gravel seal shall be constructed within the width tolerance given in

Clause 15106.

The rate of application of binder and aggregate across the lane width
shall not vary by more than +10% of the rate ordered. The average
rate of application of binder for a single pass of the spray truck
shall be not less than the rate ordered. The average rate of
application of aggregate for a single pass of the spreader shall not
vary by more than :_l0% of the rate ordered.

During gravel sealing operations tray tests to determine spray and

spread rates shall be carried out at least once per day.

l507E MEASUREMENT END PAYMNT

(a) Item : Seal coat

Unit : 1 (litre) for each type of bituminous binder

:3£3‘ (1)seal coat shall be meas L73‘-ed

M by the litre for each type of
1”
U‘ F" ‘Luminous binder
I calculated as the product of the area in
U) quare metres instructed to be sprayed and the instructed rate
of application in litres/square metre corrected to l5a6°C.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.20

The rate for the seal coat shall include for the cost of
preparation of the surface to receive the binder, providing,
hauling and spraying the bituminous binder at any instructed
application rate and complying with the requirements
‘ of Parts A
and E of Section 15 of this Specification.

(b) Item : Aggregate

Unit : m3

Aggregate shall be measured by the cubic metre calculated as the

product of the area‘ in square metres instructed to be covered
and the reciprocal of the instructed rate of application in
square metres/cubic metre or the actual rate of application in
square metres/cubic metre whichever calculation gives the lower
volume. The rate for aggregate shall include for the cost of fig;
providing, hauling, spreading and rolling the aggregate at any
instructed application rate, and complying with Parts A and E of
Section 15 of this Specification. go

_5E£‘»'x"r-7.21.731

"- -rw-. . -.

.‘3j}'t3:r_.'_-'1‘
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page l5.2l

PART F - EMULSION SLURRY SEAL

l50lF DEFINITION

An emulsion slurry seal means a mixture of bitumen emulsion, fine

aggregate, cement or lime and water prepared in a mixer and then
spread on the road surface.

l502F MATERIALS FOR SLURRY SEAL

(a) Emulsion

The emulsion shall be either an anionic emulsion A4 (slow

setting or rapid~setting) or a slow~acting cationic emulsion K3
unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.

(b) Aggregate

The aggregate shall be free of organic matter, clay, silt or

other deleterious matter. It shall have a Sand Equivalent of at
least 40.

The grading curve shall be within one of the following

envelopes, as specified in the Special Specification:~

Sieve Percentage by weight passing

Size Type I Type II Type III

(mm) (Fine) (Normal) (Coarse)

10 — ~ l00
6.3 ~ 100 80«95
5 — 90-100 70-90
42 100 60-87 40-65
1 60-85 40~67 25~4S
0.425 30-48 22-38 15-28
0.3 25-42 18-30 12-25
0.150 15-30 10-20 7-18
0.075 l0~20 5—l5 5—l5

(C) Cement/Lime

Cement and lime shall oomplv with the requirements of Section 2

of this Speoificationo
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
-'r.:'-:

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.22

l503F PREPARATION OF THE SLURRY MIXTURE

The proportion by weight of dry aggregate of bitumen emulsion and ép

cement or lime shall be specified in the Special Specification.
These shall be termed the nominal proportions of bitumen emulsion and
cement or lime.

Water shall be added in sufficient quantity to obtain the correct i

slurry consistency as directed by the Engineer. EEI

The slurry mixture shall be prepared in a slurry mixer acceptable to

the Engineer. The mixer shall be charged with materials in the
proportions specified.

The mixing cycle shall be sufficient to produce a uniform.coating of

the aggregate and a uniform consistency of" the slurry. It shall :-*Tt='*‘=*-i "
IE3’
continue until the slurry mixture is discharged into the spreader box E
or onto the road surface. The entire batch shall be discarded if
there is evidence that the emulsion has broken. The slurry, ready
%i
for application, shall be a smooth, free flowing mixture throughout.

150413 RATE OF APPLICATION or swear MIXTURE

The rate of application of the slurry mixture shall be as specified
in the Special Specification or as instructed by the Engineer. g

Tray tests shall be carried out at least once per day during slurry
seal operations. Q

l505F CONSTRUCTION

Where a slurry seal is to be applied to a surface dressing the

surface dressing shall be trafficked for a period of least two weeks as
prior to the application of the slurry.

The surface to be covered shall he prepared in accordance with Clause

1507C.
\.

The slurry mixture shall be evenly spread at the specified rate by a ,§f
slurry machine, except in restricted areas where hand spreading may
be permitted.

The surface immediately ahead of the spreader shall be slightly

dampened, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer. Unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer, slurry seal shall be rolled with p
smooth tyred pneumatic rollers acceptable to the Engineer. Rolling fig
shall commence as soon as the slurry has set sufficiently to ensure
that no rutting or pick~up will occur. The number of passes shall be
as agreed "with the Engineer but usually each spot shall receive at
least 5 passes of the pneumatic tyred roller, gm

‘Ihe finished slurry shall be of uniform surface texture and colour

throughout the work; The finished surface shall be free from g_
blowwholes and irregularities”
_. -. y._

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.23

l5fl6F CURING AND CONTROL OF'TRAFFIC

All traffic shall be kept off the slurry seal tntil it has oured_ to a
firm condition that will prevent pick—up of the mixture. Where two
applications of slurry are required, the initial treatment shall be
cured thoroughly prior to placing the succeeding application.

l507F TOLERANCES

Slurry seal shall be constructed within the same width tolerances

given in Clause 1510C.

across the width of a lane

The rate of application of slurry seal
sealed in a single pass shall not vary by more than +10% of the rate
ordered, and the average rate of application along the length of a
single pass shall be not less than the rate ordered.

l508F MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

(a) Item Slurry seal

Unit : m3 of dry aggregate for each different mixture

specified in the Special Specification

seal shall be measured by the cubic metre of dry

Slurry
aggregate for each different mixture Calculated as the product
of the area in square metres instructed to be covered and the
of the instructed rate of application in square
reciprocal
metres/cubic metre of dry aggregate or the actual rate of
application in square metres/cubic metre of, dry aggregate
whichever calculation gives the lower volume.

rate for slurry seal shall include for the cost of

The
of the surface, providing bitumen emulsion and
preparation
providing
cement or lime at the nominal proportions specified,
water as required, all haulage, mixing, laying and rolling and
complying with the requirements of Part A and F of Section 15 of
this Specification and with the relevant Clauses of the Special
Specification.

(b) Item Variation_in emulsion content

Unit : 1 (litre) of each different emulsion

Measurement of the variation in emulsion content shall be per

litre of emulsion more than or less than the nominal proportion
quantity
specified and the amount calculated by extending the
the total value
and the rate shall be added to or deducted from
of work certified“
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS AND SURFACE DRESSING Page 15.24

(C) Item : Variation in cement or lime content

Unit : tonne of each type

Measurement of the variation in cement or lime content shall be

per tonne of cement or lime more or less than the nominal a
%§§
proportion specified and the amount calculated by extending the
quantity and the rate shall be added to or deducted from the
total value of work certified.

Jfififl

flfifl

.) .-
J '1‘ 5
:
_ I._
. =‘.‘=‘

Di
A‘

_f$;"'—7.*.‘

.
.3,
in
.\.
-_., . -':

R;

i«'=?' .-‘L-’J~’r-'=r'u
 SECHON 16

BETUMINDUS MEX BASES, BWDER COURSES

KND WEARENG CGURSES
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES Page 16.1

1601 SCOPE OF SECTION

This section covers different types of bituminous mixes for Base and
Surfacing (Wearing and Binder Courses) and is divided into the
following Parts:—

PART A General

PART B Asphalt Concrete for Surfacing

PART C Dense Bitumen Macadam for Base

PART D Cold. Asphalt for Surfacing, Base,

Levelling courses and Patching
 STANDARDSPECIFICATION.FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

Page 16.2
BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES

PART A - GENERAL

l60lA SCOPE OF PART A

Part A comprises all the general requirements for bituminous mixes

which apply to Parts B to D inclusive.

1602A REQUIREMENTS FROM OTHER SECTIONS _

B to D of §§§
The following Sections of this Specification apply to Parts
.‘l
this Section and shall be read in conjunction therewith:~

Section 2 Materials and Testing of Materials ‘E5161: .-1

5-: »:.,

Section 3 Setting Out and Tolerances

Section 6 Quarries, Borrow Pits, stockpile and Spoil Areas

Section 15 Bituminous Surface Treatments and Surface Dressing

—:
'-9-£1?’:.
1603A CONSTRUCTION PLANT

(a) General vfig‘.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in accordance with

1 of this Specification, full details of the
Section
he
construction plant he proposes to use and the procedures
proposes to adopt for carrying out the permanent Works.

have access at all times to construction §5

The Engineer shall
plant for the purposes of inspection. The Contractor shall
calibration checks in the presence of the
carry out regular
Engineer and shall correct forthwith any faults which are found.

All construction plant used in the mixing, laying and compacting

t
of bituinous mixes shall he of adequate rated capacity, in good
$
and shall be acceptable to the Engineer. :3.
‘5

working condition, 1.‘

-‘c
u
Obsolete or wornwout plant will not be allowed on the work»

{b) Mixing plant

g'; 9'. ",v".',«'-.
with
Bituminous materials shall be mixed in a plant complying
ASTM Designation D995 and shall be located on the Site unless
otherwise agreed by the Engineer. It shall be equipped with at g-.j',«‘.'gi.~1':_,—‘.'_

least three bins for the storage of heated aggregates and a

All bins shall be covered to prevent
separate bin for f 'llerm '1

the ingress of mo a s t ur e .

The plant may be either the batchwmix type or the continuouswmix

the composition of the
type and shall be capable of regulating
mixture to within the tolerances specified in Clause l6l4A of
this Specification.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

Page 16.3
BITUMINOUS MIX BASES; BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES

The bitumen tank shall be capable of maintaining its contents at

the specified temperature within a tolerance of plus or minus
5°C and shall be equipped. with an thermostat to prevent the
temperature rising above 180°C and a fixed thermometer easily
read from outside the tank. Any bitumen which has been heated
above 180°C or has suffered carbonisation from prolonged heating
'
shall be removed from the plant and disposed of.

(c) Laying plant

Bituminous materials shall be laid by a self propelled spreader

finisher equipped with a hopper, delivery augers and a heated
adjustable vibrating screed. It shall be capable of laying
segregation, dragging, burning or
bituminous materials with no
other defects and within the specified level and surface
Delivery angers shall terminate not more
regularity tolerances.
than 200mm from the edge plates.

(d) Compaction plant

The Contractor shall provide sufficient rollers of adequate size

and weight to achieve the specified compaction.‘ Prior to
commencing the laying of bituminous mixes in the permanent Works
with
the Contractor shall carry out site trials in accordance
of
Section 2 of this Specification to demonstrate the adequacy
his plant and to determine the optimum method of use and
sequence of operation of the rollers.

1604A PREPARATION OF SURFACE

mix in the pavement, the

Immediately before placing the bituminous
existing surface shall be cleaned of all loose material and foreign
brooms or by other approved methods. The
matter with mechanical
debris shall be deposited well clear of the surface to be covered.

Any defect of the surface shall be made good and no bituminous mix
shall be laid until the surface has been approved by the Engineer.

If instructed by _the Engineer a tack coat shall be applied‘ in

accordance with Section 15 of this Specification. If the Engineer
considers a tack coat is required prior to laying the bituminous mix
of the bituminous mix, due solely to the
or between layers
shall be at the
Contractors method of working, then such tack coat
Contractor’s—expense.

1605A DESIGN AND WORKING MIXES

At least two months prior to commencing work using a bituminous mix,

shell, having demonstrated that he can produce
the Contractor
aggregates meeting the grading requirements of the Specification,
submit samples of each constituent of the mix to the Engineero
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND NEARING COURSES Page 16.4

The Engineer will .then carry out laboratory tests in order to decide
upon the proportions of each constituent of the initial design mix or
mixes to be used for site trials to be carried out in accordance with
Clause 1606A of this Specification.

Should the Engineer conclude from the site trials that the mix
proportions or aggregate gradings are to be changed, the Contractor
shall submit further samples of the constituents and. carry out
further site trials all as directed by the Engineer.

The Engineer may instruct the alteration of the composition of the

minus 75 micron fraction of the aggregates by the addition or
substitution of mineral filler. The Engineer may also instruct the
alteration of all or part of the minus 6.3mm fraction of the
aggregates by the addition or substitution of a natural sand.

The Contractor shall make the necessary adjustments to his plant to

enable the revised mix to be produced.

Following laboratory and site trials the Engineer will determine the
proportions of the working mix and the Contractor shall maintain this
composition within the tolerances given in Clause 1614A.
ar'.fé.'J.-"'1'/fig

Should any changes occur in the nature or source of the constituent

materials, the Contractor shall advise the Engineer accordingly. The
procedure set out above shall be followed in establishing the new mix 9;:-1.2;-:.=-.:n
design.

1606A SITE TRIALS

.'; v:,-'r7«:.-"£4;

Full scale laying and compaction site trials shall be carried out by
the Contractor on all asphalt pavement materials proposed for the 522'-.'~.';_
.
Works using the construction plant and methods proposed by the
Contractor for constructing the Works. The trials shall be carried
out with the agreement, and in the presence of the Engineer, at a
location approved by the Engineer. £"‘.“,'-.:2”-.'", i>".*'.‘

The trials shalll be carried out to enable the Contractor to

demonstrate the _suitability of his mixing and compaction equipment to
provide and compact the material to the specified voids content and
to confirm that the other specified requirements of the completed
asphalt pavement layer can be achieved.

Each trial area shall be at least 100 metres long and to the full
construction width and depth for the material. It may form part of
the Works provided it complies with this Specification. Any areas
which do not comply with this Specification shall be removed.

The Contractor shall allow in his programme for conducting site

trials and for carrying out the appropriate tests on theme The trial
on any pavement layer shall be undertaken at least 21 days ahead of
the Contractor proposing to commence full scale work on that layer.
 STANDARD SPEClFiCATiON- FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

Page 16.5
BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES

of
The Contractor shall compact each.section of trial over the range
data
compactive effort the Contractor is proposing and the following
site
shall be recorded for each level of compactive effort at each
trial:~

(i) The composition and grading of the material including the

bitumen content and type and grade of bitumen used.

(ii) The moisture content of aggregate in the asphalt plant hot bins.

prior
(iii) The temperature of the bitumen and aggregate immediately
to entering the mixer, the temperature of the mix on discharge
of
from the, mixer and the temperature of the mix on commencement
laying, on commencement of compaction and on completion of
The temperature of the mixture is to be measured in
compaction.
accordance with BS 598, Part 3, Appendix A.

(iv) The type, size, mass, width of roll, number of wheels, wheel
of
load, tyre pressures, frequency of vibration and the number
passes of the compaction equipment, as appropriate for the type
...
Of.roller.

mix together
" ‘"’J-t7. ‘ (V) The target voids and other target properties of the
with the results of the laboratory tests on the mix.

(iv) The density and voids achieved.

(V) The compacted thickness of the layer.

(vi) Any other relevant information as directed by the Engineer.

At least eight sets of tests shall be made by the Contractor and the
trial for each level of compactive
Engineer on each 100 metres of
and provided all eight sets of results over the range of
effort
compactive effort proposed by the Contractor meet the specified
be deemed
requirements for the material then the site trial shall
successful. The above data recorded in the trial shall become the
and
agreed basis on which the particular material, shall be provided
processed to achieve the specified requirements.

tests
If, during the execution of the Works, the construction control
requirements for a_ material are not being
indicate that the
consistently achieved, then work on that layer shall stop until the
cause is investigated by the Contractor. Such" investigation may
material to
include further laboratory and/or site trials on the
when agreed, shall he
determine a revised set of data as above which,
the h aais on which all subsequent material will be provided and
"U recess
-275 d to achieve the specified requirements,

in a site trial
Agreement by the Engineer to a set of data recorded
with
shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to comply
Specification.
the requirements of this Specification and the Special
fii$fihRifi;2s;%sJLflQih1;,v;, I ~:':{_.;~.* E
i i €31“:
hwl%J$xFޤ\,{
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES Page 16.6

1607A MIXING OF AGGREGATES AND BITUMEN

The bitumen shall be heated so that it can be distributed uniformly

and care shall be taken not to overheat it. The temperature shall
never exceed 170°C for 80/100 or 60/70 bitumen.
:fi>.'E.-.‘%

The aggregates shall be dried and heated so that they are mixed at
the following temperatures:
iflfifi
125 — 165°C when 80/100 bitumen is used
130 — 170°C when 60/70 bitumen is used.

The dried aggregates shall be combined in the mixer in the amount of

each fraction instructed by‘ the Engineer and the bitumen shall then
be introduced into the mixer in the amount specified. The materials
shall then be mixed until a complete and uniform coating of the seam
aggregate is obtained.

The mixing time shall be the shortest required to obtain a uniform

mix and thorough coating. The wet mixing time shall be determined by
the Contractor and agreed by the Engineer for each plant and for each
type of aggregate used. It shall normally not exceed 60 seconds.

1608A TRANSPORTING THE MIXTURE

The bituminous mix shall be kept free of contamination and if

CT"
segregation during transportation. Each load shall be covered with
canvas or similar covering to protect it from the weather and dust. 5
Q
in =
1609A LAYING TI-IE MIXTURE

Immediately after the surface has been prepared and approved, the
mixture shall be spread to line and level by the laying plant without &_
segregation and dragging.
: .:.’;s*.
The mixture shall be placed in widths of one traffic lane at a time, '7:
unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer. The compacted thickness of
any _layer shall be at least 2.5 times the maximum size of the 1;-_,a;'P
aggregate for wearing course and at least 2 times for binder course. g
é
The minimum thickness shall be 25mm.

only on areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make the 3

use of mechanical laying impracticable, may the mixture be spread and =§_
compacted by hand.

- § §
1610A COMPACTION

Immediatel after the bituminous mixture has been spread, it shall be

thoroughly and uniformly compacted by rolling.

The layer shall be rolled when the mixture is in such a condition

that rolling does not cause undue displacement or shoving.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES Page l6.7

The number, weight and type of rollers furnished shall be sufficient

to obtain ‘the required compaction while the mixture is in a workable
condition. The sequence of rolling operations shall be as agreed
with the Engineer and proved during site trials.

Initial rolling with a steel tandem or threeewheeled roller shall

follow the laying plant as closely as possible. The rollers shall be
operated with the drive roll nearest the laying plant, at a slow and
uniform speed (not exceeding 5km/h).

Rolling shall normally commence from the outer edge and proceed
longitudinally parallel to the centreline, each trip overlapping one
half of the roller width. On superelevated curves, rolling shall
begin at the low side and progress to the high side. Where laying is
carried out in lanes care must be taken to prevent water entrapment.

Intermediate rolling with a pneumatic tyred or vibratory roller shall

follow immediately. Final rolling with a steel wheeled roller shall
be used to eliminate marks from previous rolling.

To prevent adhesion of the mixture to the rollers, the wheels shall

be kept lightly moistened with water.

In areas too small for the roller, a vibrating plate compactor or a

hand tamper shall be used to achieve the specified compaction.

1611A FINISHING, JOINTS AND EDGES

Any mixture that becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt or foreign
matter or is in any way defective, shall be removed and replaced with
fresh hot mixture, which shall be compacted to conform with the
surrounding area.

Spreading of the mixture shall be as continuous as possible.

Transverse joints shall be formed by cutting neatly in a straight
line across the previous run to expose the full depth of the
course. The vertical face so formed shall be painted lightly with
hot 80/100 penetration grade bitumen just before the» additional
mixture is placed against it.

Longitudinal joints shall be rolled directly behind the paving

operation. The first lane shall be placed true to line and level and
have an approximately vertical face. The mixture placed in the
abutting lane shall then be tightly crowded against the face of the
previously placed lane. The paver shall be positioned to spread
material overlapping the joint face by 20 ~ 30 mm. Before rolling,
the excess mixture shall be raked off and discarded.

when the abutting lane is not placed in the same day, or the joint is
destroyed by traffic, the edge of the lane shall be cut back as
necessary, trimmed to line and painted lightly with hot 80/100
penetration grade bitumen just before the abutting lane is placed.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD "AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES Page 16.8

Any fresh mixture spread accidentally on the existing work at a joint

shall be carefully removed by brooming it back on to uncompacted
work, so as to avoid formation of irregularities at the joint. The
finish at joints shall comply with the surface requirements and shall
present the same uniformity of finish, texture and density as other
sections of the work.

The edges of the course Ashall be rolled concurrently with or

immediately after the longitudinal joint. In rolling the edges,
roller wheels shall extend 50 to l00mm beyond the edge.

1612A SAMPLING AND TESTING OF BITUMINOUS MIXTURES

The sampling of bituminous mixtures‘ shall be carried ‘out in

accordance with AASHTO T168 (ASTM Designation D979).

l6l3A QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

During mixing and laying of bituminous mixtures, control tests on the_

constituents and on the mixed material shall be carried out in
accordance with Clause 1612A and Section 2 of this Specification.

If the ‘results of any tests show that any of the constituent

materials fail to comply with this Specification, the Contractor
shall carry out whatever changes may be necessary to the materials or
the source of supply to ensure compliance.

If the results of more than one test in ten on the_mixed material

show that the material fails to comply with this Specification,
laying shall forthwith cease until the reason for the failure has
been found and corrected. The Contractor shall remove any faulty
material laid and replace it with material complying with this
Specification all at his own expense.

1614A TOLERANCES

Surfacing courses and base shall be constructed within the geometric

tolerances specified in Section 3 of this Specification.

The Contractor shall maintain the composition of the mixture as

determined from the laboratory and site trials within the following
tolerances, per single test:—

Bitumen Content: + 0.3% (by total weight of total mix)

Passing 10mm sieve and

larger sieves: + 5%
A
(by total weight of dry aggregate
including mineral filler)

Passing sieves between

10mm and 1.0mm sieves: f+
4% (by total weight of dry aggregate
including mineral filler)
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES Page 16.9

Passing sieves between _

l.qmm and 0.075mm sieve: :_3% (by total weight of dry aggregate
including mineral filler)

Passing 0.D75mm sieve: 3: -2% (by total weight of dry aggregate

including mineral filler)

The average amount of bitumen_in any length of any layer, calculated

as the product of the bitumen contents obtained from single tests and
the weight of mixture represented by each test, shall not be less
than the amount ordered.

The average amount of bitumen for each day's production calculated

from the checked weights of mixes shall not be less than the amount
ordered.

The final average overall width of the upper surface of a bituminous

mix layer measured at six equidistant points over a length of 100m
shall be at least equal to the width specified. At no point shall
the distance between the centreline _ of the road and the edge of the
upper surface of a bituminous mix layer be narrower than that
specified by more than l3mm.

1615A MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

No separate measurement and payment shall be made forcomplying with

the requirements of Clauses 1601A to 1614A inclusive and the
Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his rates in Parts B, C
and D of Section 16 of this Specification for the costs of complying
with the requirements of Part A of Section l6 of this Specification.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION. rn \ :

a‘i Q
I‘;-.

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES Page 16.10

PART B ASPHALT CONCRETE FOR SURFACING

1601B DEFINITION

Asphalt concrete means a thoroughly controlled, hot-mixed, hot~laid,

plant mixture of well graded dried aggregate and penetration grade :
bitumen, which, when compacted, forms a dense material.

A distinction is drawn between asphalt concrete Type I (High

Stability) and asphalt concrete Type II (Flexible). The asphalt
concrete type will be specified in the Special Specification.
'"
1602B MATERIALS FOR ASPHALT CONCRETE __ __
(a) Penetration grade bitumen Q;

Bitumen shall be 80/100 penetration grade. For asphalt concrete a

laid at altitudes in excess of 2,500 metres bitumen 180/200 %$.
O
penetration grade shall be used.

(b) Aggregate Q '

fia
Coarse aggregate (retained on a 6.3mm sieve) shall consist of
crushed stone free from clay, silt, organic matter and other §"
deleterious substances. The aggregate class will be specified $3
in the Special Specification and it shall comply with the
following requirements:— a
Q

Coarse Aggregate (retained on a 6.3 mm sieve) éi

§£

Aggregate Class a b c g‘

LAA Max 30 35 40 g
ACV - Max 25 28 30
Max 12 12 12 -
sss
FI Max 20 20 25 I

‘For asphalt concrete Type I, the coarse aggregate shall be

entirely crushed. For asphalt concrete Type II, the Crushing
Ratio of the coarse aggregate shall be as specified in the
Special Specification or as instructed by the Engineer, but
shall in no case be less than 60%;

Fine aggregate (passing a 6.3 mm sieve) shall be free from clay,

silt, organic and other deleterious matter and shall be
nonwplastic, Unless otherwise specified in the Special
Specification it shall consist of entirely crushed rock produced
 STANDARD SPECIFICATTON FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES Page 16.11

from stone having a Los Angeles Abrasion of not more than 40.
The Sand Equivalent of the fine aggregate shall be not less than
40, and the SSS not more than 12.

(C) Mineral filler

Mineral filler shall consist of finely ground particles of

limestone, hydrated lime, Ordinary Portland. cement or other
non-plastic mineral matter I as specified in the Special
Specification. It shall be thoroughly dry and free from lumps;
At least 75% (by weight) shall pass 0.075mm sieve and 100%
shall pass a 0.425mm sieve. It shall have a bulk density in
toluene measured in accordance with BS 812 of between 0.5 and
0.9 g/ml.

TABLE l6B"l

GRADING REQUIREMENTS FOR ASPHALT CONCRETE

Percentage by weight passing

Sieve Type I Type I1

Size Wearing Course Binder Course Wearing Course

(mm) 0/14 0/10 0/6 0/20 0/14 0/10 0/14 0/10

28 - ~ — 100 - - - —

20 100 - - 90-100 100 - 100 -

14 90-100 100 - 75-95 90-100 100 90-100 100

10 70-90 90-100 100 60-82 70-90 90-100» 70-95 90-100

613 55-75 60-82 90-100 47-68 52-75 60-82 .55-85 62-90

4 45-63 47-67 75-95 37-57 40-60 45-65 46-75 50-80

2 33-48 33-50 50-70 25-43 30-45 30-47 35-60 35-65

1 23-38 23-38 33-50 18-32 20-35 20-30 25-45 25-50

0a42S 14-25 20-33 11-22 12-24 12-9d 14-32 14-33

£14-35
0.300 £12-22 12-22 16-28 9-1? 10-20 10-20 11-27 11-27

05150 9-16 9-16 10-20 5-12 6-14 6-14 6-17 6-17

Oa0?5 5-10 3-10 6-12 3-? 4-8 4-8 3-8 3-8

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES Page 16.12

l603B GRADING REQUIREMENTS

The grading of the mixture of coarse and fine aggregate shall be

within and approximately parallel to one‘ of the grading envelopes
given in Table l6B~l, as specified in the Special Specification.

16043 REQUIREMENTS FOR.ASPHALT CONCRETE

The mixture shall comply with the requirements given in Table l6B—2
as specified in the Special Specification. '

The proportion, by weight of total mixture, of bitumen shall be

stated- in the Special Specification. This shall be termed the
nominal binder content. The binder content of the working mix will
be instructed by the Engineer following laboratory and site trials.

TABLE 16B-2
REQUIREMENTS FOR ASPHALT CONCRETE

.
.
_
Asphalt Concrete Type I Type I Type II
(wearing Course) (Binder Course) (Wearing Course)

. L5.. . .
_

Marshall Stability Min 9 000 Min 7 000 4 000 - 9 000

50 blows (N)
Flow Value (mm) 2 ~ 4 2 — 4 3 ~ 5 .';-W. -.

Voids in total
mix I%) 3 - 5 3 — 7 3 ~ 5

:-—-.‘—. -_—.

16053 MIXING AND LAYING ASPHALT CONCRETE

Ida

4:1!
The temperature of the bitumen when mixed with the aggregate shall be 97].’?

between 120°C and 140°C when 80/100 or 180/200 bitumen is used.

%
"
;r¢'I:‘
The minimum temperature of the mixture at the commencement of
compaction shall be I25°C when 80/100 or 180/200 bitumen is used.
The minimum temperature at completion of compaction shall be 80°C
when 80/100 or 180/200 bitumen is used.

The minimum thickness of the compacted layer shall be 25mm when 0/10
and smaller aggregate is used and 50mm when 0/20 aggregate is used,

16065 COMPACTION

Rolling shall be continued until the voids measured in the completed

layer are within the appropriate ranges tabulated in Table l6B«2
above.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD ;’4\ND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION -'

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES A Page 16.13

16078 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

(a) Item _: Asphalt concrete

Unit : m3 of each type, binder and nominal size for each

layer

Asphalt concrete shall be measured by the cubic metre compacted

on the road calculated as the product of the length instructed
to be laid and the compacted cross—sectional, area shown on the
Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.

The rate for asphalt concrete shall include for the cost of
providing, transporting, laying and compacting the mix with the
nominal binder content and complying with the requirements of
Parts A and B of Section 16 of this Specification.

(b) Item Variation in binder content

Unit l(litre)

Measurement of variation of binder content shall be by the litre

calculated as the product of the difference, corrected to
l5.6°C, between the nominal binder content and the binder
content instructed by the Engineer, and the weight of compacted
mix to which the variation applies, calculated from the volume
determined in accordance with Clause 1607B (a) of this
Specification.

Adjustment of compensation to the Contractor shall be as

follows:~

(i) as a payment to the Contractor where the binder content

is increased above the nominal rate specified, but only
where such increase has been instructed in writing by the
Engineer.

(ii) as a refund to the Employer where the binder content is

reduced below the nominal rate specified. The binder
content may only be reduced if the Engineer so instructs.

(C) Item Mineral filler

Unit tonne of each type

The rate per cubic metre for asphalt concrete shall include for
providing any mineral filler necessary to achieve the specified
gradingsa

The Engineer may require the addition or substitution of mineral_

filler to modify a grading curve which already meets the
specified requirements and in this case measurement and payment
shall be made for the mineral filler so added or substituted.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES Page 16.14

Measurement shall be by the tonne of mineral filler added or

substituted at the Engineer's instruction.

The rate for additional or substituted mineral filler shall

include for the cost of the following:—

(i) Provision, haulage and storage of mineral filler.

(ii) Batching and mixing of mineral filler.

(iii) Removal from the graded aggregates of part or all of the

minus 75 micron fraction if required by the Engineer.

(d) Item : Sand

‘$1
3*“

Unit : tonne from each source ‘.:"5“-7—'."«

The rate per cubic metre for asphalt concrete shall include for
providing aggregates to the specified gradings.
;s';:‘;~7=': -‘xi-'34 _‘,.__r

The. Engineer may instruct the alteration of all or part of the

minus 6.3mm fraction by the addition or substitution of natural
sand in which case measurement and payment shall be made for -"F“."~L..»_,‘JzFZi~7=:’w7?P7a

sand so added or substituted.

--4:

Measurement shall be by the tonne of sand added or substituted _r,t.:_.

at the Engineer‘s instructions.

The rate for sand shall include for the cost of the following:~

(i) Provision, haulage and storage of sand.

(ii) Batching and mixing of sand.

(iii) Removal from the graded aggregates of part or all of the

minus 6.3mm fraction if required by the Engineer.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES Page_l6.l5

PART C DENSE BITUMEN MACADAM FOR BASE

1601C DEFINITION

Dense bitumen macadam means a hot~mixed, hot—laid plant mixture of

well graded aggregate and penetration grade bitumen.

1602C MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) Penetration grade bitumen

Bitumen shall be either 60/70 or 80/100 penetration grade, as

specified in the Special Specification or as instructed by the
Engineer.

(13) Aggregate

Coarse aggregate (retained on a 6.3 mm sieve) shall consist of

crushed stone produced from rock or boulders, the minimum size
of which are at least 4 times the maximum size of the final
crushed stone. The coarse aggregate shall be free from clay,
silt, organic matter and other deleterious substances and shall
comply with the following requirements:~

LAA Max 35
ACV Max 28
SSS Max l2
FI Max 25

The Crushing Ratio shall not be less than 100%.

Fine aggregate (passing a 6.3 mm sieve) shall be free from clay,

silt, organic and other deleterious matter. Unless otherwise
specified in the Special Specification it shall consist either
of entirely crushed rock produced from stone having a Los
Angeles abrasion of not more than 40. The Sand Equivalent of
the fine aggregate shall be not less than 40 and the SSS not
more than l2.

Mineral filler

Mineral filler shall consist of finely ground particles of

limestone, hydrated lime, ordinary Portland cement or other
non-plastic mineral matter as specified in the Special
Specification» It shall be thoroughly dry and free from lumps.
At least ?5% (by weight) shall pass a 0.075mm sieve and 100%
shall pass a D.425mm sieve, It shall have a bulk density in
toluene measured in accordance with BS 812 between 0.5 and 0.9
g/ml;
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
F."
4: '.

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES Page 16.16

1603C GRADING REQUIREMENTS FOR DENSE BITUMEN MACADAM

‘ B
'
ER
The grading of the mixture of coarse and fine aggregate shall be 1:
within and approximately parallel to one of the following grading 3
envelopes, as specified in the Special Specification:—
Re

Sieve % by weight passing

:

Size (mm) 0/40 0/30 &f

50 100 - E
37.5 95-100 100 4
28 70-94 90-100 ;
20 - 71-95 Efi
14 56-76 58-82
6.3 44-60
E
44-60 ‘g
2 25-40 26-40 gg
1 20-33 20-33 R“
0.300 7-21 7-21
0.150 4-15 - ‘
3
0.075 2-8 2-8 at

1604c REQUIREMENTS FOR DENSE BITUMEN MACADAM §_

The mixture shall comply with the appropriate requirements given in
Table 160-1 as stated in the Special Specification.

The proportion, by weight of total mix, of bitumen shall be stated in

the Special Specification. This shall be termed. the nominal binder 3'
content. The binder content of the working mix will be instructed by ag
the Engineer following laboratory and site trials.

TABLE i6C~l: REQUIREMNTS FOR DENSE BITUMEN MACADAM '2'.‘-‘

-'

.-3:.-'. '.

0/40 0/30 a".(';—'._,—‘'.—'.-'“_.

Marshall Stability (50b1ows)N min 5000 min 5000 §,'

Flow Value (mm) 2 ~ 5 2 ~ 4
Voids in total mix {a} f 4 - 10 4 - 10
Loss of Stability after soaking {ASTM 1075}
as % of unsoaked value max 35% max 35%
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES Page 16.17

l605C MIXING AND LAYING DENSEIBITUMEN MACADAM

The temperature of the freshly mixed dense bitumen macadam shall be

‘
between 130°C and 150°C. The minimum temperature at laying and
commencement of compaction shall be 120°C and at completion of
compaction shall be not less than 90°C.

The requirements regarding laying specified in Clause 1609A shall be

modified as follows:

Laying plant capable of spreading the mixture over the full

carriageway width shall be used as much as possible, otherwise the
longitudinal joint shall be compacted before the temperature of the
existing lane has dropped to 70°C where 80/100 bitumen is used and to
80°C where 60/70 bitumen is used. This temperature limitation
requires the use of at least two mechanical pavers working in echelon.

The minimum thickness of the compacted layer shall be 60mm. when 0/30
aggregate is used and 75mm when 0/40mm is used. No compacted layer
shall exceed 100mm thickness when 0/30mm aggregate is used and 125mm
when 0/40mm is used.

1606C COMPACTION

Rolling shall be continued until the voids measured in the completed

layer are within the appropriate specified range given in Table l6C—l.

1607C SEALING OF DBNSE BITUMEN MACADAM BASE

Bitumen macadam base course shall be sealed by applying the wearing

course or surface dressing specified within two weeks of completing
any section of base course. If the Contractor is unable to comply
with this clause he shall apply a temporary single seal surface
dressing at his own expense within the two weeks.

1608C MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

(a) Item : Dense bitumen macadam »

Unit : m3 of each type, binder and nominal size for each

layer

Dense bitumen macadam shall be measured by the cubic metre

compacted on the road calculated as the product of the length
instructed to be laid and the compacted cross-sectional area
shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.

The rate for dense bitumen macadam shall include for the cost of
providing; transporting, laying and compacting the mix with the
nominal binder content and complying with the requirements of
Parts.A and C of Section 16 of this Specification.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER

COURSES AND WEARING COURSES. Page 16.18

(b) Item : Variation in binder content

E
Unit § 1 ( litre)
Measurement of variation of binder
content shall_be by the litre
calculated as the product of the fig
difference, corrected to T
,l5.60C, between the nominal binder
content and the binder
content instructed by the Engineer, ;
and the weight of compacted . g
mix to which the variation applies,
calculated from the volume
determined in
%
accordance with Clause l608C(a) of this g
Specification.
i
Adjustment of compensation to the Contractor shall be as
follows:~

(i) As a payment to the Contractor where

the binder content ‘“
is increased above nominal rate
specified, but only where
such increase has been instructed -
in writing by the ‘

Engineer.
Arr-rw fifiiwim
(ii) As a refund to the Employer where the binder content
is
reduced below the nominal rate
specified. The binder
content may only be reduced if the Engineer ' S?‘' '‘' . —$
‘ I
so instructs.
(c) Item : Mineral filler FA

.'__
Q:‘.;,:«‘+.-1,-. ,1;
Unit : tonne of each type

The rate per cubic metre for dense bitumen macadam .

shall include j
.'_
for providing any mineral filler
,‘.«=‘fa;'. «'-‘.5;Jv'-"
necessary to achieve the
specified gradings.

The Engineer may require the addition or substitution

of mineral
filler to modify a grading curve which already meets the
specified requirements and payment shall be made for the mineral F
filler so added or substituted. fin
tt
Measurement shall be by the
tonne of mineral filler added or
substituted at the Engineer's instruction. g
3'
The rate for additional or substituted
mineral filler shall
include for the cost of the following:— g
g
’.§-£2‘
(i) Provision, haulage and storage
of mineral filler.

{ii} Batching and mixing of mineral filler,

§
, I
,iii)
1
Removal From the graded aggregates
of part or all of the
minus 75 micron fraction if required by
the Engineer“
 STANDARD SPECIHCATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES Page 16.19

(a) Item : Sand

Unit : tonne from each source

The rate per cubic metre for dense bitumen macadam shall include
for providing aggregates to the specified gradings.

The Engineer may instruct the alteration of_all or part of the

minus 6.3mm fraction by the addition or substitution of natural
-—o-.« _.
sand in which case measurement and payment shall be made for
'
sand so added or substituted.

-a—-x —.-u—
Measurement shall be by the tonne of sand added ox substituted
at the Engineer's instruction.

The rate for sand shall include for the cost of the following:—

(i) Provision, haulage and storage of sand:~

(ii) Batching and mixing of sand.

(iii) Removal from the graded aggregates of part or all of the

minus 6.3mm fraction if required by the Engineer.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES Page 16.20

PART D COLD ASPHALT FOR SURFACING, BASE, LEVELLING AND PATCHING

l60lD DEFINITION
fififfmm
Cold asphalt means a hot or cold-mixed, cold—laid plant mixture of
graded aggregate and bituminous_binder.
ggftmc
l602D MATERIALS FOR COLD ASPHALT

(a) Bituminous binder

For coldrasphalt to be used immediately, the bituminous binder

shall be a medium—curing cut—back MC 250, MC 800 or MC 3000 or
an anionic emulsion A2 or A3, or a cationic emulsion K2 or K3,
as specified in the Special Specification or as instructed by
the Engineer.
’!;+:'3:

For cold—asphalt to be stockpiled, the bituminous binder shall

be- a medium~curing cut—back MC 250 or MC 800 or a slow-curing
out-back SC 250 or SC 800 or a slow~setting emulsion A3 or K3,
as specified in the Special Specification or as instructed by ."4.'Jm

the Engineer.

(b) Aggregates F§f;_'_.«'_-:‘»'~:'. vJ'~

Coarse aggregate (retained on a 6.3 mm sieve) shall consist of

crushed stone produced from rock or boulders the minimum size of
F;-«IA-JA7_4(_r_a:.=". -'5
which are at least 4 times the maximum size of the final crushed
stone. The coarse aggregate "shall be free from clay, silt,
organic matter and other deleterious substances. The aggregate
class will be specified in the Special Specification and shall
comply with the following requirements as appropriate:-

-
[»:4.'-, '9.’-"E"a7Z'.L<‘ tj

-Coarse Aggregate (greater than 6.3 mm)

Aggregate Class a b C

LAA Max 30 35 40
ACV Max 25 28 30
SSS Max 12 12 12
Max 20 35 25
‘ Fl _
E E
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD ANDBRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES Page 16.21

The fine aggregate (passing a 6.3mm sieve) shall be free from

clay, silt, organic and other deleterious matter. Unless
otherwise specified in the Special Specification it shall
consist of entirely crushed rock produced from stone having a
Los Angeles Abrasion of not more than 40. The Sand Equivalent
of the fine aggregate shall he not less than 40 and the SSS not
more than l2.

(C) Mineral filler

The mineral filler shall consist of finely‘ ground particles of

limestone, hydrated lime, Ordinary Portland cement or other
nonnplastic mineral matter as Specified in the Special
_Specification. It shall be thoroughly dry and free from lumps.
At least 75% (by weight) shall pass a 0.075mm sieve and 100%
shall pass a 0.425mm sieve. It shall have a bulk density in
toluene measured in accordance with BS 812 between 0.5 and 0.9
g/ml.

l603D GRADING REQUIREMENTS FOR COLD ASPHALT

The mixture of aggregates shall be within and approximately parallel

to the‘ grading envelope specified in the Special Specification or as
instructed by the Engineer.

l604D REQUIREMENTS FOR COLD ASPHALT

The density and stability of the cold asphalt shall be as specified

in the Special Specification or as instructed by the Engineer.

The proportion, by weight of total mix, of bitumen shall be stated in

the Special Specification. This shall be termed the nominal binder
content. The binder content of the working mix will be instructed by
the Engineer following laboratory and site trials.

l605D MIXING AND LAYING COLD ASPHALT

When bitumen emulsion is used as the binder, heating and drying of

aggregates are not required. Heating of the binder shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The moisture
content of the mixture _shall be adjusted. in the mixing plant to
permit optimum compaction. The aggregate shall have a moisture
content in the range 3% — 5% at the time the emulsion is added.

when cutwback bitumen is used as the hinder the requirements of

Clause 1607A shall apply but with the following temperature
limitationszm

ficut back Mixing Heating (Max)

E
E ac and ac 250 55-—8D°C l00°C

l%O°C
 STANDARD SPECFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTiON

‘BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES Page 16.22

The aggregates shall ‘be dried and heated so that they are mixed' at
the following temperatures.

60 — 90°C when MC or SC 250 is used

75 — 115°C when MC or SC 800 is used
90 ~ 130°C when MC 3000 is used.

Cold asphalt may be placed at ambient temperature and may be laid by

grader, provided the Contractor can demonstrate in the site trials
that he can achieve the geometric tolerances for ,the base with this
method.

l606D COMPACTION

The average density of the 100mm cores out from the cold asphalt
should not be less than 98% of the average density obtained from
Marshall specimens (50 blows) made during laboratory trials on the m_
mixture used for site trials. No individual density shall be below 5
95% of the average of the laboratory specimens.

l6U7D MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

(a) Item : Cold Asphalt

?_\‘.\

Unit : m3 of each type, binder and nominal size for each

layer

Cold asphalt shall be measured by the cubic metre compacted on §

the road calculated as the product of the length instructed to 5
be laid and the compacted cross~sectional area shown on the
Drawings or instructed by the Engineer. f“
E
Ehe rate for cold asphalt shall include for the cost of
grovidingg transporting, laying and compacting the mix with the fa
nominal binder content and complying with the requirements of §
Parts A and D of Section 16 of this Specification.

Item : Variation in hinder content 3

Unit : l(litre)

Measurement of the variation of binder content shall be by the

litre calculated as the product of the difference, corrected to
l5.6°C, between the nominal binder content and the binder
content instructed by the Engineer, and the weight of compacted .

mix to which the variation applies, calculated from the volume

determined in accordance with Clause l60?D (a) of this
Specification,

Adjustment of compensation to the Contractor shall be as

fcllowszw

(i) As a payment to the Contractor where the binder content

is increased above the nominal ate snecified lit only
where such increase has been instructed in writing by the
Engineer;
 BITUMINOUS MIX BASES, BINDER COURSES AND WEARING COURSES Page 16.23

(ii) As a refund to the Employer where the binder content is

reduced below the nominal rate specified. The binder
content may only be reduced if the Engineer so instructs.

(c) Item : Mineral filler

Unit : tonne of each type

'
III The rate per cubic metre for cold asphalt includes for providing
any mineral filler necessary to achieve the specified grading.

§I? The Engineer may require the addition or substitution of mineral

‘II
filler to modify a grading curve which already meets the
. specified requirements and in this case measurement and payment
fl‘ shall.be made for the mineral filler so added or substituted.

Measurement shall be by the tonne of mineral filler added or

substituted at the Engineer's instructions.

The rate for additional or substituted mineral filler shall

y’ _ include for the cost of the following:—

(i) Provision, haulage and storage of mineral filler.

(ii) Batching and mixing of mineral filler.

(iii) Removal from the graded aggregates of part or all of the

minus 75 micron fraction if required by the Engineer.

(d) Item. : Sand

Unit : tonne from each source

The rate per cubic metre for cold asphalt shall include for
providing aggregates to the specified gradings.

The Engineer may instruct the alteration of all or part of the

~ minus 6.3mm fraction by the addition or substitution of natural
sand in which case the measurement and payment shall be made for
sand so added or substituted»

Measurement shall he by the tonne of sand added or substituted

at the Engineer's instruction.

§ The rate for sand shall include for the cost of the the
fOllDWing:~

I
ii) Provision, haulage and stor ge of sand, Ll

(ii) Batching and mixing of sands

{iii} Removal from the graded aggregates of part or all of the

minus 6u3mm fraction if required by the Engineera
 SECTION 17
CQNCRHE WORKS
 STANDARD SPECIHCATION FORROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

concnmzr WORKS Page 17.1

1701 SCOPE OF SECTION

This section covers the materials,‘ design of mixes, mixing,

transport, placing, compaction and curing of concrete and mortar
required in the Works. It also covers formwork and reinforcement for
concrete.

1702 DEFINITIONS

Structural concrete is any class of concrete which is used in

reinforced, prestressed or unreinforced concrete construction, which
is subject to stress.

Non-structural concrete is composed of materials complying with the

Specification but for which no strength‘ requirements are specified
and which is used only for filling voids, blinding foundations and
similar purposes where it is not subjected to significant stress.

A formed surface is a face which has been cast against formwork.

An unformed surface is a horizontal or nearly horizontal surface

produced by screeding or trowelling to the level and finish required.

A pour refers to the operation of placing concrete into any mould,

bay or formwork, etc, and also to the volume which has to be filled.
Pours in vertical succession are referred to as lifts.

1703 MATERIALS FOR.CONCRETE

(a) General

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details of all

materials which heproposes to use for making concrete. No
concrete shall be placed in the works until the Engineer has
approved" the materials pf which it is composed. Approved
materials shall not thereafter be altered or substituted by
other materials without the consent of the Engineer.
‘1:

(b) Cement

Cement shall comply with the following Kenya Standardszw

KSO2—2l for ordinary Portland cement

KS02—2l for rapid hardening Portland cement

plus all special conditions to its
use stipulated by the manufacturer

nt shall be free flowing and free of lumps. It shall be supplied

in the manufacturer’s sealed unbroken bags or in bulk. Bagged cement
shall be transported in vehicles provided with effective means of
ensuring that it is protected from the weather.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION‘ FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE wonrs Page 17 . 2

Bulk Cement shall be transported in vehicles or in" containers built

and equipped for the purpose. '

Cement in bags shall be stored in a suitable weatherproof structure

of which the interior shall be dry and well Ventilated at all times.
The floor shall be raised above the surrounding ground level and
shall be so constructed that no moisture rises through it.

Each delivery of cement in bags shall be stacked together in one

place. The bags shall be closely stacked so as to reduce air
circulation but shall not be stacked against an outside wall. If
pallets are used, they shall be constructed so that bags are not
damaged during handling and stacking. No stack of cement “bags shall‘
exceed 3 m in height. Different types of cement in bags shall be
clearly distinguished by visible markings and shall be stored in
separate stacks.

Cement from broken bags shall not be used in the Works.

Cement in bags shall be used in the order in which it is delivered.

Bulk cement shall be stored in weatherproof silos which shall bear a

clear indication of the type of cement contained in them. Different
types of cement shall not be mixed in the same silo.
EL
The Contractor shall provide sufficient storage capacity on Site to §l'
ensure that his anticipated programme or work is not interrupted due
to lack of cement.

Cement which has become hardened or lumpy or fails to comply with the
Specification in any way shall be removed from the Site.

All cement for any one structure shall be from the same source.

All cement used in the Works shall be tested by the manufacturer or

the Contractor in a laboratory acceptable to the Engineer. The tests
to be performed shall be those set out in Section 2 of this
Specification and the Contractor shall supply two copies of each
I
certificate to the'Engineer.

Each set of tests carried out by the manufacturer or Contractor shall

relate to not more than one day's output of’ each cement_ plant, and
shall be made on samples taken from cement which is subsequently
delivered to the Site. Alternatively, subject to the agreement of
the Engineer, the frequency of testing shall be one set of tests for
every 200 tonnes of cement delivered to Site from each cement plant.

Cement which is stored on Site for longer than one month shall b (I)
retested in the laboratory of the Materials Branch of the Ministry or
Transport and Communications or at the Kenya Bureau of Standards at
the rate of one set of tests as shown in Section 2 of this
Specification for every 200 tonnes, and at monthly intervals
thereafter.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONFOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CON'STFiUCTlON

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17.3

gi

Cement which does not comply with the Specification shall not be used
in Works and it shall be disposed of by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall keep full records of all data relevant to the
manufacture, delivery, testing and use of all cement used in the
Works and shall provide the Engineer with two copies thereof.

(C) Fine aggregate

Fine aggregate shall be clean hard and durable and shall be

natural sand, crushed gravel sand or crushed rock sand complying
with BS 882. All the material shall pass through a 5 mm BS
sieve and the grading shall be in accordance with Zones 1, 2 or
3 of BS 882. In order to achieve an acceptable grading, it may _
be necessary to blend materials from more than one sourceo Fine
aggregate for mortar only shall comply with BS 1200.

The fine aggregate shall not contain iron pyrites or iron

oxides. It shall not contain mica, shale, coal or other
laminar, soft or porous materials or organic matter unless the
Contractor_can show by comparative tests, on finished concrete
as set out in ES 1881, that the presence of such materials does
not adversely affect the properties of the concrete.

Other properties shall be as set out below:

Content passing a 75 micron BS sieve shall not exceed 3 per cent

for natural or crushed gravel sand or 15 per cent for crushed
rock sand.

Chlorides soluble in a 10 per cent solution by weight of nitric

acid shall not exceed 0.05 per cent by weight expressed as
8l2, subject also to
chloride ion when tested as set out in B5
the further restriction given in the note on total chloride
content in Sub—Clause 1703 (d).

sulphates" soluble in a lo per cent solution by weight of

hydrochloric acid shall not exceed 0.4 per cent by weight
expressed as 503, when tested as set out in B5 1377, subject
also to the further restriction given in the note on total
sulphate content in Subwclause 1703 (d).

Soundness: After five cycles of the test in AASHTO T104 the

aggregate shall not show a weight loss of more than 10 per cent.

Organic impurities: If the test described in Section 2 of this

Standard Specification shows that more than a trace of organic
impurities is present, the fine aggregate shall not be used in
the Works unless the Contractor can show by tests on finished
concrete as s't out in B3 1381 that the presence of organic
does not adversely affect the properties of the
impurities
concrete.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE woars Page 17 . 4

(d) Coarse aggregate

Coarse aggregate shall be clean hard and durable crushed rock,

crushed gravel or natural gravel complying with the requirements
of BS 882. The material shall not contain.any iron pyrites,
iron oxides; hlaky or laminated material, hollow shells, coal or
other soft or porous material, or organic matter unless the
Contractor can show by comparative tests on finished concrete as
set out in ES 1881 that the presence of such materials does not
adversely affect the properties of the concrete. The pieces
shall be angular rounded or irregular as defined in B8 812 Part ;

Coarse aggregate shall be supplied in the nominal sizes called

for in the Contract and shall be graded in accordance with BS
882 for each nominal size. 9%‘.-'f«v'a*. +'4'z3§

other properties shall be as set out below:—

ewes
The proportion of clay, silt and other impurities passing a 75
micron BS sieve shall be not more than one per cent by weight.

The content of hollow and flat shells shall not be such as will
adversely affect the concrete quality when tested as set out in
BS l88l. The total shell content of aggregate shall not be more
than the following: -fi:~',d‘;.'»\.-'7a'§-Efi

40 mm nominal size and above 2% of dry weight

20 mm nominal size 5% of dry weight
l0 mm nominal size 15% of dry weight

Chlorides soluble in a 10 per cent solution by weight of nitric

acid shall not exceed 0.03 per cent by weight, expressed as fiwma
chloride ion when tested as set out in ES 812 but subject also
to the further restriction under the note on total chloride
content hereunder. Sulphates soluble in a 10 per cent solution n~*
by weight ofv hydrochloric acid shall not exceed 0.4 per cent by
weight expressed as $03 when tested as set out in B8 l377 5.". .1

subject also to the further restriction given in the note on

I?7:*.- ‘!5"r1": -V
total sulphate content hereunder.

soundness: After 5 cycles of the test in AASHTO T104, the J,«.'; _-:.':,
1-,
aggregate shall not show a weight loss of more than 12 per cent”

€.
When tested in accordance with test C289 of the American Society eT
""
for Testing and Materials, the aggregate shall be nonwreactive.

Flakiness Index when tested in accordance with ‘BS 8.L‘.2 shall be

as set out hereunderzw

For 40 mm stone and above, not more than 40

For 20 mm stone and below, not more than 35
 V.
.;
._.

‘STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17.5

If the Flakiness Index of the coarse aggregate varies by more

than five units from the average value oi the aggregate used in
the approved trial mix, then a new set of trial mixes shall be
carried out if the workability of the mixes has been adversely
affected by such variation.

Impact value: Not more than 45 per cent when tested in

accordance with BS 812.

Ten per cent fines value: Not less than 50kN when tested in
accordance with BS 812.

Shrinkage: When mixed with other ingredients in the approved

proportions for concrete and tested as set out in BS 1881, the
shrinkage factor shall not exceed 0.05 per cent.

Organic impurities: If the test described in Section 2 of this

Specification shows that more than a trace of organic impurities
is present, the aggregate shall not be used in the Works unless
the Contractor can show by tests on finished concrete as set out
in BS 1881 that the presence of organic impurities does not
adversely affect the properties of the concrete.

Water absorption: The aggregate shall not have a water

absorption of more than 2.5 per cent when tested as set out in
ES 812.
I

Aggregate Crushing Value (ACV): Not more than 35%.

.‘
-— w.« ._, _ ,
Los Angeles Abrasion (LAA): Not more than 50%.
I

NOTE: Total chloride and_sulphate content:#

.
‘~«-;=—w—-. '. .

The total chloride content, expressed as chloride ion, arising

ingredients in a mix including cement, water and
from all
admixtures shall not exceed the following limits, expressed as a
'“-*'_'«*~: -

percentage of the weight of cement in the mixze

For prestressed concrete, steam cured

concrete or concrete containing sulphate
resisting or supersulphated cement: 0.05 per cent.

For any other reinforced concrete: 0.3 per cent

in 95 per cent of all test results provided no
result is more than 0.5 per cent.

‘The total sulphate content expressed as 303 of all the

ngredients in a mix in luding cement, water and adixtures
all
:3 not exceed 0.4 pe cent by weight of the aggregate or 4&0
the mix, whichever is the
per cent of the weight of cement in
lesser.
STANDARD SPECIHCATIQN FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCWON

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17.6

(e) Testing aggregates

(i) Acceptance testing

the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer samples

fi
3‘

containing not less than 50 kg of any aggregate which he

proposes to use in the Works and shall supply such further
samples as the Engineer may require. Each sample shall be
clearly labelled to show its origin and shall be
accompanied by all the information called for in ES 882.

Tests to determine compliance of the aggregates with the

requirements of Subwclause 1703 (c) and (d) shall_ be
carried out by the Contractor in a laboratory acceptable to
the Engineer. If the tested materials fail to comply with
the Specification, further tests shall be made in the
presence of the Contractor and the Engineer and acceptance
of the material shall be based on such tests.

A material shall be accepted if not less than three

consecutive sets of test results show compliance with the
Specification.

(ii) Compliance testing

The Contractor shall carry out routine testing of

aggregates for compliance with the Specification during the
period that concrete is being produced for the Works. The
tests set out below shall be performed on aggregates from
each separate source on the basis of one set of tests for
each day on which aggregates are delivered to Site provided
that no set of tests shall represent more than 250 tonnes
of fine aggregate nor more than 500 tonnes of coarse
aggregate, and provided also that the aggregates are of
uniform quality. If the aggregate from any source is
variable, the frequency of testing shall be increased as
instructed by the Engineer. ‘\-

Grading - BS 812
Silt and clay contents BS 8l2
Moisture content BS 812
Check on organic impurities Section 2 of this
Specification

In addition to the above routine tests, the Contractor

shall carry out the following tests at the frequencies
stated:
'
.2?

Moisture content; As frequently as may be .

required in order to control the water content
of the concrete as required by the Specification.
.“-c

,-§;_,;g.'-
 ‘ '*
;
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FORIIROAD ANDBRIDGE CONSTRUCTION‘

CONCRETE womcs Page 17 . 7

Chloride content: as frequently as may be required to

ensure that the proportion of
chlorides in the aggregates does not exceed the limit
'
stated in the Specification.

-$3
The Contractor shall take account of the fact that when the
chloride content is variable it may be necessary to test
every load in order to prevent excessive amounts of
L5
ii _ chloride contaminating the concrete. For this purpose the
Contractor shall use the rapid field test described in
Section 2 of this Specification (the Quantab test). V In the '
event of disagreement regarding the results of the field
test, the chloride content of the aggregate shall be
' the laoratory as described.in BS 812 (the
Pg determined in
Volhard test).~

(f) Delivery and storage of aggregates

Aggregates shall be delivered to Site in clean and suitable

vehicles. Different types or sizes of aggregate shall not be
if; » delivered in one vehicle.

Each type or size of aggregate shall be stored in a separate bin

or compartment having a base such that contamination of the
aggregate is prevented. Dividing walls between bins shall be
substantial and continuous so that no mixing of types or sizes
OCCUIS .

The storage of aggregates shall be arranged so that as far as

possible rapid drying out _in hot weather is prevented in order
to avoid sudden fluctuations in water content. Storage of fine
I"
aggregates shall be arranged so that they can drain sufficiently
before use in order to prevent fluctuations in water content of
the concrete.

(g) Water for concrete and mortar

seawater or brackish water econtaining more than 1000 ppm

chloride ion'or 2000 ppm sulphate ion shall not be used for
mixing or curing concrete.

Water shall be clean and free from harmful matter and shall
comply with the requirements of BS 3l48.

with BS 3l48
The Contractor shall carry out tests in accordance
to establish compliance with the Specification.

{ ":1 } £l_d:I1i;:ture S

(i) General

-'F""t<;.:of the admixtures in concrete may be required under

...;..\\..-
1 -

the Contract to promote special properties in the finished

 i
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17.8

concrete or may be proposed by the Contractor to assist him

in compliance with the Specification.

In all cases the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer

full details of the admixture he proposes to use and the
manner in which he proposes to add it to the mix. The
information provided shall include:~

(a) The typical dosage, the method of dosing and

the detrimental effects of an excess or deficiency in
'
the dosage.

(b) The chemical names of the main active ingredients in

‘
the admixture.

(c) Whether or not the admixture contains chlorides, and

if so the chloride ion content expressed as a
percentage by weight of admixture.
%i3'&flfi,
(d) Whether the admixture leads to the entrainment of air
when used at the manufacturer's recommended dosage,
and if so, the extent to which it does so.
mug
(e) Details of preuious uses of the admixture in Kenya.

The chloride ion content of any admixture shall not exceed fimmg
2 per cent by weight of the admixture nor 0.03 per cent by
weight of the cement in the mix.
smwe
Admixtures shall not be mixed together without the consent
of the Engineer.

Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride mews

shall not be used in prestressed concrete.

(ii) Workability agents swag

Workability agents shall comply with BS 5075 and shall not

have any.adverse affect on the properties of the concrete.
wwfifi

1704 THE DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES

(a) Classes of concrete kwwe

The classes of structural concrete to be used in the Works shall

be those shown on the Drawings and designated in Table l7~l, in fiwfim
which the class designation includes two figures” The first
figure is the nominal strength at 28 days expressed in N/mm“ and
the second figure is the maximum nominal size of aggrecate in
the mix expressed in millimetres.

£1}.-
 fiwA Mm D A an nu xx fig mw H nu An W mu mm rw nfi an nu %% WWnu DDmm nu «E Pu O N cuT R m T: mN

C M M m WE 8. Page 17.9

Whfi t

m
fwya .

man
mwnsu
N CHHDHOU
mmnso no w
Anvv
EE\ mfi m wan
mo Z m.ma o.om o.om o.o~ m.»~ m.nm m.nm m.mm m.mm m.mm m.mm m.nm m.n¢ m.n¢
ummv
wona
mmwnmbm
msonm
W. mayo?
. wHd.womNm
mmsmaov
N
wco
Manwm ES
v m.m
@350 \Z w.ma m.~H m.mH o.na o.nH o.na m.Hm m.Hm m.Hn m.mm m.m~ m.mm o.¢m o.wm
hum

p
w#mAm.wE#mu.nH

mam.
. nmmz N
mnfimnwuuw . MQNHE
nnouwona EE
\.Z m.mH m.Hm m.am m.Hm m.Hm m.Hm m.Hm m.wm m.mm m.mm m.H¢ m.Q. m.H¢ m.am m.Hm .m. .§
mam
Qfimawnum
HwHHB ummHmB
mvmuwwofi
mmdmmov flame
op.
mmmmmau

m Hmpmm
mm.o om.o om.o om.o mw.o wq.o mw.o mw.o mw.o o¢.o m¢.o 35 mw.o m¢.o mw.o
\nwum3 OH#MH mmfiammm
m M802
wumnonou
m wmm
ucmfimu om.o om.o om,o wm.o mm.o mm.o om.o mm.o om.o mw.o om.o 35 nw.o mq.o m¢.o
Efifiwxmfi 55.30
Hlha
Erin
_ mqmmfi mufl w . .oH#mH
. .wHfimomNw
E8 mm mm ow ow om ea ow om ad ow em ca om ea
wpnmonmmm om;
Efififlfiflfl
.\L. .f.
HMfiHEOZ mo whmbwm
..- -

cu.
N ufimEwu\. nmum3
ES
om ma ma om om om mm mm mm om om om av ow
;mH:
HMCHEOZ numcwnwm Hmwsb mwwanmmm

mo

mmxow mmxma awxmfl omxma owxom omxom oaxom owxmm omxmm oaxmm oqxom 2&2 oaxom omxow oaxow
mmmao mumuocou
".,m_H. OZ
STANDARD SRECIFICATIONAFOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17.10

(b) Design of proposed mixes

The shall design all the concrete mixes called for on

contractor
the Drawings, making use of the ingredients which have been
approved by the Engineer for use in the Works and in compliance
with the following requirements:~

(i) The aggregate portion shall be well graded from» the nominal
maximum size of stone down to the 150 micron size.

(ii) The cement content shall be such" as to achieve the

strengths called for in Table 17-1 but in any case not less
than the minimum necessary for impermeability and
durability shown in Table l7~2.

(iii) The workability shall be consistent with ease of placing

and proper compaction having regard to the presence of
reinforcement and other obstructions.

(iv) The water/cement ratio shall be the minimum consistent with

adequate workability but in any case not greater than that
shown in 17-1
Table taking due account of any water
contained in the aggregates. The Contractor shall take
into account that this requirement may in certain cases
require the inclusion of a workability agent in the mix.

(V) The drying shrinkage determined in accordance with BS 1881

shall not be greater than 0.05 per cent.

Table l7—2 Minimum Cement Content

Minimum Cement Content - Kg/m3 of 5%?

Compacted concrete

Moderate Intermediate Severe

Class of Concrete Exposure Exposure Exposure

ifilflinéiif-B,
10/75; 15/75 200 220 270
15/40, 20/40, 25/40, 30/40 240 270 290
15/20,, 20/20, 25/20,, 30/20 260 300 330
40/20 300 320 330 fiwmw ‘TC.

20/10, 25/10, 30/10 300 340 390

40/10 310 340 390

.
xv»
,—.
NOTE; the minimum cement contents shown in the above ._.

table are required in order to achieve

impermeability and durabilitya In order to meet
the strength requirements in the Specification
higher contents may be required.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS Page l7.ll

The categories applicable to the Works are based broadly on the

factors listed hereunder: .

Moderate exposure Surface sheltered from.severe

rain;
buried concrete,
concrete continuously under water

‘
Intermediate Surface exposed to driving rain;
exposure alternate wetting and drying;
traffic; corrosive fumes;
heavy condensation

Severe exposure Surface exposed to sea water,

moorland water having a pH
of 4.5 or less, groundwater
containing sulphates.

(0) Trial mixes

At' least six weeks before commencing placement of concrete in

the Permanent Works trial mixes shall be prepared for each class
of concrete specified.
c’.

For each mix of concrete for which the Contractor has proposed a
design, he shall prepare three separate batches of concrete
using the materials which have been approved for use in the
Works and the mixing plant which he proposes to use for the
Works. The volume of each batch shall be the capacity of the
concrete mixer proposed for full production.

Samples shall be taken from each batch and the following action
taken, all in accordance with BS 1881:-

(i) The slump of the concrete shall be determined.

(ii) Six test cubes shall be cast from each batch. In the case
of concrete having a‘maximum aggregate size of 40 mm or
less, I50 mm cubes shall be used. In the case of concrete
containing 75 mm or larger aggregate, 200 mm cubes _shall be
used and in addition any pieces of aggregate retained on a
53 mm BS sieve shall be removed from the mixed concrete
before casting the cubes.

(iii) Three cubes gfrom each batch shall be tested for compressive
strength at seven days and the remaining three at 28 days.

. 3

{iv} The densitv of all the cubes shall be determined before the
ts "e carried out
r
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS Page l7.l2

Subject to the agreement of the Engineer, the compacting factor

apparatus may be used in place of a slump cone. In this case
the correlation between slump and. compacting factor shall be
established during preparation of the trail mixes.

The average strength of the nine cubes tested at 28 days shall

be not less than the target mean strength shown in Table 17-1.

The Contractor shall also carry out tests to determine the

drying shrinkage of the concrete unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer.

Based on the results of the tests on the trial mixes, the

Contractor shall submit full details of his proposals for mix
design to the Engineer, including the type and source of each
ingredient, the proposed proportions of each mix and the results
of the tests on the trial mixes.

If the Engineer does not agree to a proposed concrete mix for

any reason, the Contractor shall amend his proposals and carry
out further trial mixes. No mix shall be used in the Works
without the written consent of the Engineer.

(5) Quality control of concrete production

(i) Sampling

For each class of concrete in production at each plant for

use in the Works, samples of concrete shall be taken at the as
point of mixing or of deposition as instructed by the
Engineer, all in accordance with the sampling procedures
2\m‘J‘u"J
described in ES 1881 and with the further requirements set
$73
out below.

Six 150 mm or 200 mm cubes as appropriate shall be made

from each sample and shall be cured and tested all in
accordance with BS 1881, two at seven days and the other
four at 28 days.
Pr.-_.-':. u~'=’F:,4_,

Each sample shall be taken from. one batch selected at

random and at intervals such that each sample represents
not more than 2Om3 of concrete unless the Engineer agrees
to sampling at less frequent intervals.

Until compliance with the Specification has been

'_‘;"fJ'
established the frequency of sampling shall be three times .1"v:

that stated above or such lower frequency as may be

0 . Q , 1 . __
instructed or ane engineer.

Ej_w:—'.
 STAN DARE) SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD "AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17.13

' (ii) Testing

I
$3
;r”’ (a) shall
The slump or compacting factor of the ‘concrete
be determined for each batch from which samples are
:33
£3 taken and in addition for other batches at the
I“y frequency instructed by the Engineer.

The slump‘ of the concrete in any batch shall not

differ from-the value established by the trial mixes
by more than 25 mm or one third of the value,
whichever is the greater.

The variation in value of the compacting factor, if

used in place of a slump value, shall be within the
:95 following limits:
'
For value of 0.9 or more :_Q.U3

For value of between 0.8 and 0.9 + 0.04

——

For values of 0.8 or less i_0.05

..$‘ (b) The water/cement ratio as estimated from the results

of (a) above, determined by samples from any batch
% shall not vary by more than five per cent from the
3’?
VI value established during the trial mixes.

{*- (c) The air content of air entrained concrete in any batch
3; shall be within 1.5 units of the required value and
in the average value of four consecutive measurements

3' expressed as a percentage of the volume of freshly

mixed concrete.

if’ (d) fintil such time as sufficient test results are

9, available to apply the method of control described in
(e) below, the compressive strength of the concrete at
28 days shall be such that no single result is less
. than. the value shown in Table 17-1 under the heading
:“' early works test cubes‘ and also that the average
value of any four consecutive results is not less than-
the value shown in Table l7*l under the same heading.

The 7-day cube result may be used as an -early strength

indicator, at the discretion of the Engineer.

{e} When test cube results are available for at least 20

consecutive batches of any class of concrete mixed in
any one plant, the average of any four consecutive
results at 28 days shall exceed the nominal strength
by not less than half the current margin (see below)"
,5 and each inéividual result shall not be less than 85
gfla per cent of the nominal strength.
 —}
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS
Page 17.14

The current margin shall be defined

standard as l.64 times the
deviation of cube tests on at least 20
separate consecutive batches produced from
one plant
over a period exceeding five days but
not exceeding
six months ‘or on at least 50 separate consecutive
batches produced from one plant over
a period not
exceeding 12 months. If both figures are available,
the smaller shall be taken.

The current margin shall in any case not be less than

the figure given below:-

Minimum Current Margin for

l0N/mm’: ism/mm-'3 ZON/mm2
and above

After 20 batches 3.3 5 7.5

After 50 batches 1.7 2.5 3.8

(e) Failure to comply with requirements 1=3%

>1
If any one test cube result in a group of four consecutive
results is less than 85 per cent of the
nominal strength but the
average of the group of which it is
part satisfies the strength
requirement, then only the batch from which
the failed cube was
taken shall be deemed not to comply with
the Specification. Wm
If more than one cube result in a group of four consecutive fiewe
results is less than 85 per cent of the
nominal strength or if
the average strength
of the group fails to satisfy the strength
requirement then all thebatches between those represented by @§“"am wm.
the first and last cubes in the group shall
be deemed not to
comply uith the Specification, and the Contractor shall
immediately adjust the mix design subject to the agreement of -"M
the Engineer to restore
nemwmm
compliance with the Specification.
After adjustment of N
the mix design the Contractbr will again be
required to comply with sub—C1auses
l704 (b) and 1704 (c) of
this Section of this Specification. sew“as
The Contractor shall take necessary action
to remedy concrete
which does not comply with this Specification.
include but is not necessarily confined
Such action may tweeea
to the following:-

(i) Increasing the frequency of sampling until control is again

,.', ;o%.
established.

Cutting test cores from the testing in

accordance with BS l88l¢
 STAF\iDAF{D‘SPEC|FICATIQN FOR F{OAD=AND BFHDGE CONSTRUCWON

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17.15

or other remedial work to the

A (iii) Carrying out strengthening
concrete where possible or appropriate.
' testing such as load tests on
vi (iv) Carrying out non—destructive
#3
1 3|
.q
beams I.

(V) Removing the concrete.

1705 _MIXING CONCRETE-

Before any plant for batching, mixing, transporting, placing,

compacting and finishing concrete is ordered or delivered to Site,
the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details including
drawings of all the plant which he proposes to use and the
arrangements he proposes to make.

" Concrete for the Works shall be batched and mixed in one or more
central _plants unless_ the Engineer agrees to some other arrangement.
If the Contractor -proposes to use ready mixed concrete he shall
submit to the Engineer for his approval full details and test results
of the concrete mixes. The Engineer may approve the use of ready
mixed concrete provided that:

(a) the proposed mixes, the material to be used and the method
of storage and mixing comply with the requirements of the
Specification; and

(b) adequate control is exercised during mixing.

Approval to the use of ready mixed concrete may be withdrawn if the"

Engineer is not satisfied with the control of the materials being
used and control during mixing.

Batching and mixing plants shall be modern efficient equipment

complying with the requirements of BS 1305 and capable of" producing a
uniform distribution of ’the ingredients throughout the mass. Truck
mixes shall-comply with the requirements of BS 4251 and shall only be
used with. the .prior agreement of the Engineer. If the plant proposed .
by the Contractor-does not fall within the scope of BS 1305, it shall
have been tested in accordance with BS 3963 and shall have a mixing
performance within the limits of Table 6 of BS 1305.

All mixing operations shall be under the control of an experienced

supervisor.-

The aggregate storage bins shall be provided with drainage facilities

arranged so that drainage water is not "discharged to the weigh
hoppers. Each bin shali be drawn down at least once per week and any
accumulations of mud or silt removed.

Cement and aggregates shall be batched by weight. Water may be

measured by weight or volume.
STANDARD S.f5EiCIF|CAT!©i\‘i FOR}ROAD"A'N‘D BFHDGE CONSTRUCTION
CONCRETE WORKS Page l7.l6

The weighing and water dispensing mechanisms shall be maintained in

good order. Their accuracy shall be maintained within the tolerances
described in ES 1305 and checked against accurate weights and volumes
when required by the Engineer.

The weights of cement and of each size of aggregate as indicated by

the mechanisms employed shall be within a tolerance of plus or minus
two per cent of the respective weights per batch agreed by the
'
Engineer.

The Contractor shall provide standard test weights at least

equivalent to the maximum working load used on the most heavily
loaded scale and other auxiliary equipment required for checking the
satisfactory operation of each scale or other measuring device.
Tests shall be made by the Contractor at least once a week or at
intervals to be determined by the Engineer and shall be carried out
in his presence. For the purpose of carrying out these tests, there
shall be- easy. access for personnel to the weigh_ hoppers. :The
Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with copies of the complete
results of all check tests and shall make any adjustments, repairs
or replacements necessary to ensure satisfactory performance. *

The nominal drum or pan capacity of the mixer shall not be exceeded.
The turning speed and the mixing time shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer, but in addition, when water is the last ingredient to
be added, mixing shall continue for at least one minute after all the
water has been added to the drum or pan.

The blades of pan mixers shall be maintained within the tolerances

specified by the manufacturer of the mixer and the blades shall be
replaced when it is no longer possible to maintain the tolerances .by
adjustment.

Mixers shall_ be fitted with an automatic recorder registering the

number of batches discharged.

The water to be added to,the mix shall be reduced by the amount of

free water contained in the coarse and fine aggregates. This amount
shall be determined by the Contractor by a method agreed by the
Engineer. immediately before mixing begins each day and thereafter at
least once per hour during concreting and for each delivery of
aggregates during concreting.’ When the Correct quantity of water,
determined as set out in the Specification, has been added to the
mix, no further water shall be added, either during mixing or
subsequently.

Af er mixing for the required

«L.
L- time, each batch shall be discharged
completely from thetmixer before any materials for the succeeding
batch are introduced“

Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be
thoroughly cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed and thereafter
the first batch of concrete through the mixers shall contain only
 STANDARDSPECIFICATIQN FOR ROAD AND "BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION.

CONCRETE woars Page 17 - 1‘?

half the normal quantity of coarse aggregate. This batch shall be

mixed for one minute longer than the time applicable to a normal
"
batch a

Mixers shall be cleaned out before changing to another type of cement.

:,‘
:5".
1706 HAND MIXED CONCEETE

Concrete for structural purposes shall not be mixed by hand. Where

non—structural concrete is required, hand mixing may be carried out
subject to the agreement of the Engineer.

The mixing shall vbe done _on a hard impermeablel surface. The
materials shall be turned" over not less than three times dry, water
-shall then be sprayed on and the materials again turned over not less
than three times in a wet condition and worked together until a
mixture of uniform consistency is obtained.

For hand mixed concrete the specified quantities of cement shall be

increased by 10% and not more than 0.5 cubic metre shall be mixed at
one time. ‘During windy weather efficient precautions shall be taken
to present cement from being blown away during the process of gauging
and mixing.

1707 TRANSPORT OF CONCRETE

The concrete shall be discharged from the mixer and transported to

the Works. by means which shall prevent adulteration, segregation or
loss of ingredients, and which shall ensure that the concrete is of
the required workability at the point and time of placing. The loss
of slump between discharge from the mixer and olacing shall not
‘
exceed 25 mm.

The time elapsing between mixing and placing a batch of concrete

shall be as short as practicable and in any case not longer than will
permit completion of placing and compaction before the onset of
initial set. If the placing of any batch of concrete is delayed
beyond this period, the concrete shall not be placed in the Works.
L; - V .
$5 1708 PLACING OF CONCRETE

{a) Consent for placing

Concrete shall not be placed in any part of theiworks until the

Engineer's consent has been given in writing, and gthe Contractor
shall give the .Engineer at least 1 full working days notice of his
intention to place concrete.

If concrete glacing is not commenced within 24 hours of the

Engineer's consent the Contractor shall again request consent as
specified above.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION .

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17.18

.«

(b) Preparation of surface to receive concrete

Excavated surfaces on which concrete is to be deposited shall be

prepared as set out in Section 7_of this Specification.

Existing concrete surfaces" shall be prepared as set out in

Clause 1717. Before deposition of further concrete they shall
be clean, hard and sound and shall be wet but without any
freestanding water.

Any flow of water into an excavation shall_ be diverted through

proper side drains to a sump, or be removed by other suitable
methods which will prevent washing away the freshly deposited
concrete or any of its" constituents. Any underdrains
constructed for this purpose shall be.comp1etely grouted up when
they are no longer required by a method agreed by the Engineer.

Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer surfaces against

which concrete is to be placed shall receive a prior coating or
mortar mixed in the proportions similar to those of the fines
portion in_the concrete to be placed. The mortar shall be kept
ahead of the concrete. The mortar shall be well worked into all
parts of the excavated surface and shall be not less than 5 mm
thick.

If any fissures have been cleaned out as described in Section 7

of this Specification they shall be filled with mortar or with
concrete as instructed by the Engineer.

The amount of mortar placed at any one time shall be limited so

that it does not dry out or set before being
covered with concrete.

(C) .Placing procedures

The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its

final position. It shall be placed so as to avoid segregation
of the concrete and displacement oi, the reinforcement, other
embedded» items, or formwork. It shall be brought up in layers
approximately parallel to the construction joint planes and not
exceeding 500 mm in compacted thickness unless otherwise
permitted or directed by the Engineer, but the layers shall not
be thinner than four times the maximum nominal size of aggregate.

Layers shall not be placed so that they form feather edges nor
shall they be placed on a previous layer which has taken its
initial set, in order to comply with this requirement, a layer
may be started before completion of the preceding layer.

£,I
fi-' 7*%'r».«'-“fiv

.-
i.
 - STANDARD SPECIFICATIQN FOR ROADAND, BFHDGE CONSTRUCTION.

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17919

All the concrete-in a single bay or pour shall be placed as a_

continuous operation, It shall be carefully worked round all
obstructions, irregularities in the foundations and the like so
that all parts are completely full of compacted concrete with no
segregation or honeycombing._ It shall also be carefully worked
round and7 between waterstops, reinforcement, embedded steelwork
and similar items which protrude above the surface of the
completed pour.

All work shall be completed on each batch of concrete before its

fig initial set commences and thereafter the concrete shall not be
ég disturbed before it has set hard. No concrete that» has
.l' partially hardened during transit shall be used in the Works and
the transport of concrete from the_mixer to the point of placing
shall be such that this requirement can be complied with.

Concrete shall not be placed during rain which is sufficiently

heavy or prolonged to wash mortar from coarse aggregate on the
exposed faces of fresh concrete. Means shall be provided to
remove any water accumulating on the surface of the placed
concrete. Concrete shall not be deposited into such
accumulations of water.

be provided for all fresh -

In drying weather, covers shall
concrete surfaces which are not being worked on. Water shall
not be added to concrete for any reason.

When concrete is discharged above its place of final deposition,

segregation shall be prevented by the use of chutes, downpipes,
trunking, baffles or other appropriate devicese

Forms for walls, columns and other thin sections of significant

height shall be provided with openings or other devices that
will permit the concrete to be placed in a manner that will
prevent segregation and accumulations of hardened concrete on
the formwork or reinforcement above the level. of the placed
concrete;
\a

when "dit is- necessary to place concrete under water the

Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposals_ for the
method and equipment to be employed. .The concrete ghall be
deposited either by bottom~discharging watertight containers or
through funnel-shaped tremies which are kept continously full
with concrete up to a level above the water and which shall have
the discharging bottom fitted _with a trapdoor and immersed in
the concrete in order to reduce to a minimum the contact of the
concrete with the water; Special care shall be taken to avoid
gfi segregation”

It the level of concrete in a tremie pipe is allowed to fall to

__ such an extent that water enters the pipe, the latter shall be
ij removed from the pour and filled with concrete before being
33 again lowered into the placing position. During and after
STANDARD SPECIFICATICN "FOR RC}/%\D‘AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE woaxs Page 17.20

concreting under water, pumping or de~watering in the immediate

vicinity shall be suspended if there is any danger that such
work_will disturb the freshly placed concrete.

(51) Interruptions to placing

If concrete placing is interrupted for any reason and the

duration of the interruption cannot be forecast or is likely to
be prolonged, the Contractor shall immediately take the
necessary action to form a construction joint so as to eliminate
as far as possible feather edges and sloping top surfaces and
shall thoroughly compact the concrete already placed in
accordance with Clause 1709. All work on the concrete shall be
completed. while it is still plastic and it shall not thereafter
be disturbed until it is hard enough to resist damage. Plant
and materials to comply with this requirement shall be readily
available at all times during concrete placing. "

Before concreting is resumed after such an interruption‘ the

Contractor ‘shall cut out and remove all damaged or uncompacted
concrete, feather edges or. any other undesirable features and
shall leave a clean sound surface against which the fresh
concrete may be placed. ~

If it becomes possible‘ to resume concrete placing without

contravening the Specification and the Engineer consents to a
resumption, the new concrete shall be thoroughly worked in and
compacted against the existing concrete so as to eliminate any
cold joints.

Dimensions of pours

Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, pours shall not be more

than two-metres high and shall as far as possible have a uniform
thickness over the plan area of the pour. Concrete shall be
placed to the full planned height of all pours except in the
circumstances described in Sub~clause 1708 (d). \.

The Contractor shall plan

the dimensions and sequence of pours K:-.1

in such a way that cracking of the concrete does not take place
due to thermal or shrinkage stresses.

Placing sequence

The Contractor shall arrange that as far as possible the

E
intervals between placing successive lifts of concrete in one Saw

sec ti o;a of ‘the fiorrs are of equal duration, This duration shall
normally be not less than three or more than seven days under
temperate weather conditions unless otherwise agreed by the
Engineer.

Where required by the Engineer to limit the opening of

construction joints due to shrinkage, concrete shall not be
olaced against adjacent concrete which is less than 21 days Olda -.
«.»
4

5$\v;~. 4—- 1
~"" '~"».r _u
r

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION:

CONCRETE wonrs Page 17.21

When the Drawings call for contraction gaps in concrete, these

shall be of the widths and in the locations shown on the
Drawings and they shall not be filled until the full time
‘
interval shown on the Drawings has elapsed.
.—
1709 COMPACTION OF CONCRETE

The concrete shall be fully compacted throughout the full extent of

.-—- —. I_. _, the placed layer. It shall be thoroughly worked against the formwork
and around any reinforcement and other embedded items, without
displacing them. Particular care shall be taken at arrises and other
confined spaces. Successive layers of the same pour shall be
thoroughly worked together.

Concrete shall be compacted with the assistance of mechanical

imersion vibrators, unless the Engineer agrees another method.

Immersion vibrators shall operate at a frequency of between 7000 and

l0 000 cycles per minute. The Contractor shall ensure that vibrators
are operated at pressures and voltages not less than those
recommended by the manufacturer in order that the compactive effort
is not reduced.

A sufficient number of vibrators shall be operated to enable the

entire quantity of concrete being placed to be vibrated for the
necessary period and, in addition, stand~by vibrators shall be
available for instant use at each place where concrete is being
placed.

Where the concrete contains aggregate with a nominal size of 75 mm or

more, Vibrators with a diameter of 100 mm or more shall be used.

Vibration shall be continued at each point until the concrete ceases

to contract, a thin layer of mortar has appeared on the surface and
air bubbles have ceased to appear. Vibrators shall-not be used to
move concrete laterally and shall be withdrawn slowly to prevent the
formation of voids.

Vibration shall not be applied by way of reinforcement nor shall

vibrators be allowed to touch reinforcement or other ehbedded items.
The vibrators shall be inserted vertically into the concrete to
penetrate the layer underneath at regular spacing which shall not
exceed the distance from the vibrator over which vibration is visibly
effective.

l7l0 CURING OF CONCRETE

{a} General

Concrete shall be protected during the first stage of hardening

from loss of moisture and from the development of temperature
differentials within the concrete sufficient to cause cracking.
The methods used for curing shall not cause damage of any kind.
to the concrete.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR‘ ROAD AND. BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17.22 E

Curing shall be continued for as long as may be necessary to

achieve the above objectives but in any case for at least seven t
fix
days or until the concrete is covered by later construction
whichever is the shorter period.
.-
The above objectives are dealt with in sub—clauses l7lG (b) and z1@5'r3’.«'~r-.:3:5 !’-‘~
(c) but nothing shall prevent both objectives being achieved by 1
a single method where circumstances permit.
gj
The curing process shall commence as soon as the concrete is Vi
hard enough to resist damage from the process, and in the case
of large areas or continuous pours, shall commence on the
completed section of the pour before the rest of the pour is §{
‘“_
finished. ' E
‘3.
Details of the Contractor's proposals for curing concrete shall i;
be submitted to the Engineer before the placing of concrete
‘;
commences in the Works.

(b) Loss of moisture

Exposed concrete surfaces shall be closely covered with

impermeable sheeting, properly secured.to prevent its removal by L<'%j.f,rjg4

wind and the development of air spaces beneath it. Joints in

the sheeting shall be lapped by at least 300 mm.
”:.~;,.‘:>z’,»3

If for some reason it is not possible to use impermeable

sheeting, the Contractor shall keep the exposed surfaces g
continuously wet by means of a water spray or by covering with a
water absorbent material which is kept wet, unless this method
conflicts with sub—clause 1710 (c).

Water used for curing shall be of the same quality as that used
for mixing as stated in sub-clause 1703 (g).

Formed surfaces may be cured by retaining the formwork in place’ ,i

for the required curing period.
‘I.

If the use .of the foregoing methods is inappropriate, surfaces

which will not have further concrete bonded to them and which
are not to receive an application of a finish may be cured by ,2:
the application of a curing compound having an efficiency index § 5
of at least 90 per cent. Curing compounds shall contain a at
fugitive dye to enable the extent of the Spread to be seen
easily. fl

Curing compound used on surfaces exposed to the sky shall

contain sufficient finely divided flake almninium in suspension
to produce a complete coverage of the Surface with a metallic
finish when applied at the rate recommended by the manufacturer”
 STANDARDSPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17.23

Curing compounds shall become .stable and impervious to the

evaporation of water from the concrete surface within 60 minutes
of application. The material shall not react chemically with
the concrete and shall not crack, peel or disintegrate within
three weeks after application.

If instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall, in addition

to the curing provisions set out above provide a suitable form
of shading to prevent the direct rays of the sun reaching the
concrete surfaces for at least the first four days of the curing
period.

(c) Limitation of temperature differentials

The Contractor ishall limit the development of temperature

differentials in concrete after placing by any means appropriate
to the circumstances including the following:

(i) limiting concrete temperatures at placing as set out in

sub-clause 1712 (b);

(ii) use of low heat cement, subject to the agreement of the

Engineer;

(iii) insulation of exposed concrete surfaces by insulating

blankets. Such blankets shall have an insulation value at
least equivalent to 50 mm of dry mineral wool;

(iv) leaving formwork in place during the curing period. Steel

forms shall be suitably insulated on the outside;

(V) preventing rapid dissipation of heat from surfaces by

shielding from wind:

(vi) avoiding the use of water sprays when such use would cause
rapid cooling of the surface.

- \
1711 PROTECTION OF FRESH CONCRETE

Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from rainfall and from

water running over the surface until it is sufficiently hard to
resist damage from these causes.

No traffic shall be allowed on any concrete surface until such time

as it is hard enough to resist damage by such traffic.

Concrete placed in the Works shall not be subjected to any loading

until it has attained at least its nominal strength as defined in
Clause i?O4.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
§~.,_~ *
it ‘-I.‘
K}

CONCRETE WORKS Page.l7.24

If the Contractor desires to impose loads on newly—placed concrete,

he shall make at least three test cubes and cure them in the same
conditions as the concrete they represent. These cubes shall be
tested singly at suitable intervals in order to estimate the time at
which the nominal strength is reached.

1712 CONCRETING IN HOT WEATHER

(a) General

The Contractor shall prevent damage to concrete arising from

exposure to extreme temperatures, and shall maintain in good
working order all plant and equipment required for this purpose.

In the event that conditions become such that even with the use 5'3.)

of the equipment the requirements cannot be met, concrete Ii;-J;~,': -<=

placing shall immediately cease until such time as the
requirements can again be met.

g€,;r.c"_"r.':-I
(b) Concrete placing in hot weather

During hot weather the Contractor shall take all measures

necessary to ensure that the temperature of concrete at the time
of placing in the Works does not exceed 30°C and that the
concrete does not lose any moisture during transporting and
placing.

Such measures may include but are not necessarily limited to the
following:-

(i) Shielding aggregates from direct sunshine.

(ii) Use of a mist water spray on aggregates.

(iii) Sun shields on mixing plants and transporting equipment. -'3:

5.1:

'.~_ -
‘.'.._.
(iv) Cooling the mixing water. If ice is used for this purpose
it should preferably be in flake form. Lump ice shall not
be allowed to enter the tank supplying the mixer drum.

(V) Covering skips closely with polythene sheet so that the

latter is in Contact with the concrete.

Areas in which concrete is to be placed shall be shielded from

direct sunshine and rock or concrete surfaces shall be
thoroughly wetted to reduce absorption of water from the
concrete placed on or against them.

After concrete in any part of an area has been placed, che

selected curing process shall be commenced as soon as possiblea
If any interval occurs between completion of placing and start
of curing, the concrete shall be closely covered during the
interval with polythene sheet to prevent loss of moisture“
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17.25

l7l3 FINISHES ON UNFORMED SURFACES.

Horizontal or nearly horizontal surfaces which are not cast against

formwork shall be finished to the class shown on the Drawings and
defined hereunder.

UF 1 finish

All surfaces on which no higher class of finish is called for on the

Drawings or instructed by the Engineer shall be given a UP 1 finish.

The concrete shall be levelled and screeded to produce a uniform

plain or ridged surface, surplus concrete being struck off by a
straight edge immediately after compaction.

UF 2 finish

This is a floated finish for roof or floor slabs and other surfaces
where a hard trowelled surface is not required.

The surface shall first be treated as a Class UF I finish and after

the concrete has hardened sufficiently, it shall be floated by hand
or machine sufficient only to produce a uniform surface free from
screed marks.

UF 3 finish

This is a hard trowelled surface for use where weather resistance or

appearance is important, or which is subject to high velocity water
flow.

The surface shall be floated as for a UF 2 finish but to the

tolerance stated below. when the moisture film has disappeared and
the Concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent laitance from being
worked to the surface, it shall be steelwtrowelled under firm
pressure to produce a dense, smooth uniform surface free from trowel
marks.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE woars Page 17.26

Table.l7—3 Surface Tolerances

Class of Tolerance in mm. See notes

Finish

A B C

UF l Not applicable 10 + 20 or - 10
UF 2 Nil 10 + 20 or - 10 I
UF 3 Nil 5 + 12.5 or — 7.5

Notes:

1. Col A is the maximum allowable value of any sudden change of

level in the surface.

2. Col B is the maximum allowable value of any gradual irregularity

of the surface, as indicated by the gap between the surface and
a three metre long straight edge or correctly shaped template
placed on the surface.

3. Col C is the maximum allowable value of the difference in level

or position between a three metre long straight edge or -r—-—-.

correctly shaped template placed on the surface and the -v__,«. r

specified level or position of that surface.

Where dimensional tolerances are given on the Drawings or in this

Special Specification they shall take precedence over those given in
Table 17-3.

1714 MORTAR

This clause covers mortar for use ahead of concrete placing, and
other uses not covered elsewhere in the Specification.

Mortar shall be composed of fine aggregate complying with subvclause

1703 (c) and ordinary Portland cement complying with KS02—2l. The
mix proportions shall be as stated on the Drawings or elsewhere in
this Specification or if not stated shall be one part of cement to
two parts of fine aggregate by weight.

Small quantit es of mo‘tar may be hand mixed but for amounts over 0.5
m3 a mechanics mixer shall be used»

The water content of the mortar shall be as low as possible

consistent with the use for which it is required but in any case the
water/cement ratio shall not be more than 0,5.
 STANDARD SPEClFlCATlON- FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17.27

Mortar which is specified as ‘dry pack‘ shall be mixed with

sufficient water for the mix to become cohesive but not plastic when
squeezed in the hand. Dry pack mortar shall be rammed into the
cavity it is required to fill, using a hand rammer with sufficient
force to ensure full compaction.

1715 CONCRETE FOR.SECONDARY PURPOSES

(a) Non—structural concrete (Ns concrete) shall be used only for

non—structural purposes where shown on the Drawings.

NS concrete shall be composed of ordinary Portland cement

complying with KSO2~2l and aggregates complying with BS‘ 882
including all-in aggregate within the grading "limits of Table
' 3
of as 882.

The weight of cement mixed with 0.3 m3 metres of combined or

allmin aggregate shall not be less than 50 kg. The mix shall be
proportioned by weight or by Volume. The maximum aggregate size
shall be 40 mm nominal.

The Concrete shall be mixed by machine or by hand to a uniform

Colour and consistency before placing. The quantity of water
used shall not exceed that required to produce a concrete with
sufficient workability to be placed and compacted where required.

”Thés concrete shall be compacted by hand or by mechanical

vibration.

g¢g§nifiés§ concrete (NF concrete) is intended for use share a

_ grape concrete is required and shall only be used {where ‘shown
' ‘
ionlth gDrawings or instructed by the Engineer.

d shall consist of ordinary Portland cement comply

fand aggregate complying with BS 882. The agg
be; d0.0 mm to l0.0 mm only. The weight of
y3!m3 metre of aggregate shall not be less
°ahtity of water shall nottexceed that requ
recement paste which will coat evenly the =

Ed n[ia form agreed by the Engineer, shal

"
I'M or of the details of every
ontrac pour of concrete
‘Ah se records shall include class of concre_”
pl ambient temperature and concrete
:1_.,E g,_glacing, moisture contents of aggregates, det_ zikéég-
batch numbers, cement batch number, results of all tests: undertaken;
~ iicéétlon of test cube sample points and details of any.cores5takensP

The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer four copies of these

records each week covering work carried out the preceding weeks In
addition he shall supply to the Engineer monthly histograms of all 28
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17028

day cube strengths together with accummulative and monthly standard

deviations and any other information which the Engineer may require
concerning the concrete placed in the Works.

1717 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ;..

_.-.
Pfi,|'.;r,'m-1-*.5 1j'-.'

Whenever concrete is to be bonded to other concrete which has

hardened, the surface of Contact between the sections shall be deemed
a construction joint. -4-an.»_~,\!_-’

Where construction joints are shown on the Drawings, the Contractor

shall form such joints in those positions. The location of joints
which the Contractor requires to make for the purpose of construction
shall be subject to the agreement of the Engineer. Construction
joints shall be in vertical or horizontal planes except in sloping
slabs where they shall be normal to the exposed surface or elsewhere
where the Drawings require a different arrangement.

Construction joints shall he so arranged as to reduce to a minimum

the effects of shrinkage in the concrete after placing, and shall be
placed in the most advantageous positions with regard to stresses in
the structures and the desirability of staggering joints.

Feather edges of concrete at joints shall be avoided and any feather

edges which may have formed where reinforcing bars project through a
joint shall be cut back until sound concrete has been reached.

The intersections of horizontal or near horizontal joints and exposed

faces of concrete shall appear as straight lines produced.by use of a
guide strip fixed to the formwork at the top of the concrete lift, or
by other means acceptable to the Engineer.

Construction joints formed as free surfaces shall not exceed a slope

of 20 per cent from the horizontal.
_._.

The surface of the fresh concrete in horizontal or near horizontal ‘. .H-1....

‘.' _,_

joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened by means of high‘

pressure water and air jets when the concrete is hard enough to
withstand the treatment without the leaching of cement. The surface
of vertical or near vertical joints shall be similarly treated if
circumstances permit the removal of formwork at a suitable time.
-

: e.:=.~.=-. 7.‘
Where concrete has become too hard for the above treatment to be
successful, the surface whether formed or free is to be thoroughly
scabbled by mechanical means or wet sand blasted and then washed with
clean water. The indentations produced by scabbling shall be not
less than 10 mm A and shall not extend closer than 40 mm to a
deep
finished face.
If instructed by the Engineer the surface of the concrete shall be
thoroughly brushed with a thin layer of mortar composed of one part
of cement to two parts of sand by 'weight- and complying with Clause
i714. all as set out in Subwdlause l?O8 {b} immediately prior to the
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
I
.CONC_.'RETE wonrs Page 17 is

deposition of fresh concrete. The mortar shall be kept just ahead of

the fresh concrete being placed and the fresh layer of concrete shall
be thoroughly and systematically vibrated to full depth to ensure
complete bond with the adjacent layer.

No mortar or concrete may be placed in position on or against a

construction joint until the joint as been inspected and .passed by
the Engineer.

l7l8 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS

Expansion and contraction joints" are discontinuities in concrete

designed to allow for thermal or other movements in the concrete.

Expansion joints are formed with a gap between the concrete faces to
permit subsequent expansion of the concrete. Contraction joints are
formed to permit initial contraction of the concrete and may include
provision for subsequent filling.

Expansion and contraction joints shall be formed in the positions and

in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings or elsewhere in
the Specifications.

1719 WATERSTOPS

All references to waterstops include groutstops.

Waterstops shall be of the material and form shown on the Drawings.

No waterstop material shall be brought onto site until the Contractor
has submitted full details of the materials he proposes to use,
including samples, and these have been approved by the Engineer. All
samples shall be of adequate length for testing.

Waterstops shall be made of material which are resistant to

chlorides, sulphates, or other deleterious substances which_may be
present in the environment of the Works. *

Rubber waterstops may be of natural of synthetic rubber and? shall

have an elongation at breaking stress of at least 500 per cent at
25°C and shall allow a joint movement of at least 50 mm.

Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) waterstops shall be extruded frdh an

unfilled. plasticised PVC polymer or copolymer which does not dbntain
any reclaimed or scrap PVC. PVC waterstops shall have an eloޤation
at breaking stress of at least 225 per cent at 25°C and shall allow a
' I V 5 -
joint movement of at least 10 mm.

Low modulus waterstops shall be of rubber or PVC as described*Tabove

but shall have an elongation of at least 200 per cent at'25°C under a
tensile stress of 6 N/mm2 and shall allow a joint movement of at
least 50 mm.

Waterstops shall be supplied in lengths as long as possible

consistent with ease of handling and construction requirements,
 STAN DARE) SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION rm»

.1
:'¢
'5

CONCRETE WORKS .Page 17.30

In rubber or plastic materials joints other than butt joints shall be

supplied ready made by the manufacturer.~ Butt joints shall be made
on site in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and with
equipment supplied for the purpose by the manufacturer. '

Waterstop material shall be stored carefully %n Site to avoid damage E3

and contamination with oil, grease, or other pollutants. Rubber and
plastic waterstops shall be ,stored in cool well ventilated places
away from direct sunlight.

Rubber and.plastic waterstops which are embedded in one side of a

joint more than one month before the scheduled date of placing
concrete on the other side, shall be protected.from the sun.

Waterstops shall be firmly fixed in the formwork so that they cannot

be displaced during concrete placing and shall be completely free of
all dirt, grease, oil, etc before placing concrete. Where eyelets
are provided these shall be fully wired to the reinforcement and be
the only means whereby the waterstop is fixed, In no circumstances
shall a waterstop be punctured with nails etc as a means of fixing.

Concrete. shall be placed carefully round waterstops so as to avoid

distortion or displacement and shall be "fully compacted. Where
waterstops lie in a horizontal or nearly horizontal plane the
- Contractor shall ensure that no voids are left on the underside of
the waterstop.

Formwork round waterstops- shall be carefully removed to avoid

damage. If waterstops suffer any damage which cannot be properly
repaired in situ the Engineer may require a section of concrete to be
removed and the waterstop replaced.

1720 GROUTING OF POCKETS AND HOLES AND UNDERPINNING OF BASEPLATES

Pockets and holding-down bolt holes shall bet_ho_roughly cleaned out

"using compressed air and water jet. "Holes drilled; by a diamond bit.
shall be roughened. The pockets and holes shall bg filled with grout
..' consisting of cement and clean fresh water mi3ediifi Uproportionplof7 two .
‘I_ parts by weight _of cement to one part "byfiaweight of mater.'_The
pouring of liquid grout shall cease as soon .asffeaCh"holeo is _filled'
and any excess grout on the surface of theiconcrete foundation shall
‘be completely removed and the surface dried lofififibeforeg tbs “next
~ _
’oPeration Proceeds. :~*:*>m*%w#v va v-rt -*

The space .between the top surface of :foundation Concrete and the
underside of baseplates shall be filled with a special mortar made up
in the following proportionszw

Portland cement ..,...,.l.,....l,.9l,.,ll.,,.,,,,.,.,..... 50 kg

Fine aggregate ................ll...,....l,.............l. 50 kg
An additive acceptable to the Engineer to counteract shrinkage
in proportions recommended by the manufacturer.
 STANDARD f3PEClFICATiON FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONVSTRUCTEON

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17.31

The special mortar-shall be mixed with the lowest water~cement ratio

which will result in a consistency of mix of sufficient workability
'
to enable maximum compaction to be achieved.

The special mortar shall then be well rammed in horizontally below

the baseplate and. from one edge only until it is extruded from the
other three sides. The mortar which has extruded shall then be
rammed back to ensure complete support without voids.

1721 FORMWORK FOR CONCRETE

Definitions

Formwork means the surface against which concrete is placed to form a

face, together with all the immediate supports to retain it in
position while concrete is placed.

Falsework means the structural elements supporting both the formwork

and the concrete until the concrete becomes self supporting.

A formed face is one which has been cast against formwork.

An exposed face is one which will remain visible when construction

has been completed.

1722 CONSTRUCTION OF FORMWORK AND FALSEWORK

Before construction begins, the Contractor shall submit to the

Engineer drawings showing details of the proposed formwork and
falsework.

Formwork and falsework shall be so constructed that they will support

‘the loads imposed on them by the fresh concrete together with
additional stresses imposed by vibrating equipment and by
construction traffic, so that after the concrete has hardened the
-formed faces shall be in the positions shown on the Drawings within
the tolerances set out in Clause 1726.

Ground supports shall be properly founded on footings designed to

prevent settlement.

Joints in ‘formwork ‘for exposed faces shall, unless otherwise

specified, be evenly spaced and horizontal or vertical and shall be
continuous or form a regular pattern.

All joints in formwork including formwork for construction joints

shall be tight against the escape of cement and fines. Where
reinforcement projects through formwork, the form shall fit closely
round the bars.

Formwork shall be so designed that it may be easily removed from the

work without damage to the faces of the concrete. It shall also
incorporate provisions for making minor adjustments in position, if
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17.32

required, to ensure the correct location of concrete faces. Due

allowance shall be made in the position of all formwork for~movement
and settlement under the weight of fresh concrete.

Where overhangs in formwork occur, means shall be provided to permit

the escape of air and to ensure that the space is filled completely
with fully compacted concrete.

Formwork shall be provided for concrete surfaces at slopes of 30° to

the horizontal or steeper. Surfaces at slopes less than 20° may be
formed by screeding. Surfaces at slopes between 20° and 30° shall
generally be formed unless the Contractor can demonstrate to the
satisfaction of the Engineer that such slopes can be screeded with.
the use of special screed boards to hold the concrete in place during
vibration.

Horizontal or inclined formwork to the upper surface of concrete

shall be adequately secured against uplift due to the pressure of E
fresh concrete. Formwork to voids within the body of the concrete E
shall also be tied down or otherwise secured against floating.

The internal and external angles on concrete surfaces shall be formed

with fillets and chamfers bf the sizes shown on the Drawings unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer.

Supports for formwork may be bolted to previously placed concrete

provided the type of bolt used is acceptable to the Engineer. If
metal ties through the concrete are used in conjunction with bolts,
the metal left in shall not be closer than 50 mm to the face of the
concrete.

Formwork shall not be re—used after it has suffered damage which is

sufficient to impair the finished surfaces of the concrete.

Where circumstances prevent easy access within the form for cleaning
and inspection, temporary openings for this purpose shall be provided
through the formwork.

Shear keys shall be provided in all construction joints of the size

and shape indicated on the Drawings.

Where precast concrete elements are specified for use as permanent

formwork, or proposed by the Contractor and agreed by the Engineer,
they shall comply with the requirements of the Specification. guch
elements shall be set true to line and level within the tolerances
prescribed for the appropriate class of finish in Clause l726 and
fixed so that they cannot move when concrete is placed against them.

PREPARATION OF FORMWORK

Before any reinforcement is placed into position within formwork, the

latter shall be thoroughly cleaned and then dressed with a release
agent. The agent shall be either a suitable oil incorporating a
wetting agent. an emulsion of water suspended in oil or a low
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE wosx-s Page 17.33

viscosity oil containing chemical agents. The Contractor shall not

use an emulsion of oil suspended in water nor any release agent which
causes staining or discolouration of the concrete, air holes on the
concrete surface, or retards the set of the concrete.

In order to avoid colour differences on adjacent concrete surfaces,

“ only one type of release agent shall be used in any one section of
the Works.

In cases where it is necessary to fix reinforcement before placing

formwork, all surface preparation of formwork shall be carried out
before it is placed into position.‘ The Contractor shall not allow
reinforcement or prestressing tendons to be contaminated with
formwork release agent.

Before placing concrete‘ all dirt, construction debris and other

foreign matter shall be removed completely from within the placing
area.

Before concrete placing commences, all wedges and other adjusting

devices shall be secured against movement during concrete placing and
the Contractor. shall maintain a watch on the formwork during placing
to ensure that no movement occurs.

1724 REMOVAL OF FORMWORK

Formwork shall be carefully removed without shock or disturbance to

the concrete. No formwork shall be removed until the concrete has
gained sufficient strength to withstand safely any stresses to which
it may thereby be subjected.

The minimum periods which shall elapse between completion of placing

concrete and removal of forms are given in Table 17-4 and apply to
ambient temperatures higher than 10°C. At lower temperatures or if
cement other than ordinary Portland are involved, the Engineer may
instruct longer periods.

Alternatively, formwork may be removed when the concrete has attained,

the strength set out in Table l7~4, provided that the attained
strength is determined by making test cubes and curing them under the
same conditions as the concrete to which they refer.

Compliance with these requirements shall not relieve the Contractor

of his obligation to delay removal of formwork until the removal can
be completed without damage to the concrete.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
. -‘.:'_:_Z)S‘}. ._.
K
CONCRETE.WORKS ‘E
Page 17.34

Table 17-4 Minimum Periods for

Formwork Removal

Position of Formwork
Minimum Period Strength to
for Temps over be Attained
10°C

Vertical or near vertical faces

of
mass concrete
24 hours 0.2 C
Vertical or near vertical faces
of
reinforced walls, beams and colunms 48 hours 0.3 C
Underside of arches beams and slabs
(formwork only)
4 days 0.5 C
Supports to underside of arches,
beams and slabs
14 days C
Arched linings in tunnels and under-
I
ground works
24 hours 4 N/m2

NOTE: C is the nominal strength for the class

of concrete used.
fi,'; . _‘.-‘3'£a‘w'2'2
If the Contractor wishes to strip formwork from the underside of
arches beams and slabs before the expiry of the period for supports
set out above, it shall be designed so v-‘Y1

that it can be removed without

disturbing "the supports. The Contractor shall not remove supports
temporarily for the purpose of stripping
formwork subsequently
replace them.

As soon as the formwork has been

removed, bolt holes in concrete
faces other than construction joints which are required for
subsequent operations shall be Completely filled with mortar
sufficiently dry to prevent any slumping at the face. The mortar
shall be mixed in the same proportions as the fine aggregate and
cement in the surrounding concrete and
with the same materials and
shall be finished flush with
the face of the concrete.-

1725 SURFACE FINISHES .-3'

,.

‘.3:-.
TH .-
519.3:
Classes of finish

The surface finish to be achieved on formed concrete surfaces

shell
be as shown on the Drawings and defined
hereunderzw

{a} Class Fl finish

This finish is for surfaces against which baokfill or further

concrete will be placed. Formwork may be sewn boards, 53ueet
 _:. a

" "”F.H
"

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE‘ CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17.35

metal or any other suitable material which will prevent the loss
of fine material from the concrete being placed.

(b) Class F2 finish

This finish is for surfaces which are permanently exposed to

View but where the highest standard of finish is not required.
Forms to provide a Class F2 finish shall be faced with wrought
thicknessed tongued and grooved boards with square edges
arranged in a uniform pattern and close jointed or with_suitable.
sheet material. The thickness of boards or sheets shall be such
that there shall be no visible deflection under the pressure
exerted by the concrete placed against them. Joints between
boards or panels shall be horizontal and vertical’ unless
otherwise directed. This finish shall be such as to require no
general filling of surface pitting, but fins, surface
discolouration and other minor defects shall be remedied by
‘ I
methods agreed by the Engineer.

(C) Class F3 finish

This finish is for surfaces which will be in contact with water

flowing at high velocity, and for surfaces prominently exposed
to View where good appearance is of special importance. To
achieve this finish, which shall be free of board marks, the
formwork shall be faced with plywood complying with BS 1088 or
equivalent material in large sheets. The sheets shall be
arranged in an approved uniform pattern. Wherever possible,
joints between sheets shall be arranged to coincide with
architectural features or changes in direction of the surface.

All joints between panels shall be vertical and horizontal

unless otherwise directed. Suitable joints shall be provided
between sheets to maintain accurate alignment in the plane of
the sheets. Unfaced wrought boarding or standard steel panels
will not be permitted for Class F3 finish. The Contractor shall
ensure that the surface is protected from rust marks, spillages
and stains of all kinds. m

(d) Curved surfaces

For curved surfaces where F2 or F3 finishes are cafiled for, the

formwork face shall be built up of splines cut do make a tight
surface which shall then be dressed to produceԤthe required
finish.

Ir‘ lt {CI "i ‘J

*1 I11 «F-"
.. 1 <2‘.{'0 ],...| M U1 ;.z.. 3 e curvature surfaces may fie faced with
.“{j'
i‘-' a U: t iv*~ (3 or plvwood nings attached to the backing with adhesive
or E
wiwh
H’ escutcheon pins driven flush. Linings shall not bulge,
wrinkl—(‘Cr or otherwise deform when subjected to temperature and
moisture changes.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
r/-no-—

concern: worms Page 17 . 35

1726 TOLERANCES
‘ - Ff
r
All parts of formed concrete surfaces shall be in the positions shown
on the Drawings within the tolerances set out in Table 17«5.

In cases where the Drawings call for tolerances other than those V‘? ?-_ -. _.- ~.- .
given in Table 17-5 the Drawings shall rule.

Where precast units have been set to a specified tolerance, further

adjustments shall be made as necessary to produce a satisfactory
straight or curved line. When the Engineer has approved the
alignment, the Contractor shall fix the units. so that there is no
possibility of further movement. ,;4;_:.1.r1.vJn
E9

Table 17-5 Tolerances 3

Tolerances in mm (See Note)

Class of finish A B C

$3
Fl 10 10 + 25 to - 10
f
F2 5 10 + or - 15
F3 2 5 + or — 10

Note: The tolerances A, B and C given in the table are defined as

follows:
_n'

A is an abrupt irregularity in the surface due to

misaligned formwork or defects in the face of the formwork.

B is a gradual deviation from a plane surface as indicated

by a straight edge 3 m long. In the case of curved
surfaces the straight edge shall be replaced by a correctly fl
shaped template. E

C is the amount by which the whole or part of a concrete

face is displaced from the correct position shown on the
Drawings. £,:f'_5/',-._~;. _-
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE woaxs Page 17.37

1727 REMEDIAL WORK TO DEFECTIVE SURFACES

If on stripping any formwork the concrete surface is found to be

defective in any way, the Contractor shall make no attempt to remedy
such defects prior to the Engineer's inspection and the receipt
' of
‘
any instructions which the Engineer may give.

Defective surfaces shall not be_made good by plastering.

Areas of honeycombing which the Engineer agrees may be repaired shall

be cut back to sound concrete or to 75 mm whichever is the greater
distance. In the case of reinforced concrete the area shall be cut
back to at least 25 mm clear distance behind the reinforcement or to
75 m, whichever is the greater distance. The cavity shall have
sides at right angles to the face of the concrete. After cleaning
out with water and compressed air, a thin layer of cement grout shall
be brushed on to the concrete surfaces in the cavity and it shall
then be filled immediately with concrete of the same class as the
main body but with aggregate larger than 20 mm nominal size removed.
A form shall be used against the cavity, provided with a lip to
enable concrete to be placed. The form shall be filled to a point
above the top edge of the cavity.

After seven days the lip of concrete shall be broken off and the
surface ground smooth.

Surface irregularities which are outside the limits of tolerance set

out in Clause 1726 shall be ground down in the manner and to the
extent instructed by the Engineer.

Defects other than those mentioned above shall be dealt with as

” ‘
instructed by the Engineer.

1728 REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE

Reinforcement which shall comply with the following British

Standards, covers plain and deformed bar reinforcement and steel
fabric to be cast into concrete in any part of the Works but does
not include prestressing tendons or any other embedded steel.

BS 4449 for hot rolled plain bar and high yield deformed bar
BS 4482 for hard drawn-mild steel wire
-BS 4461 for cold worked steel bar
BS 4483 for steel mesh fabric

All reinforcement shall be from an approved manufacturer and, if

required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit a test
certificate from the manufacturer.

All reinforcement for use in the Works shall be tested for compliance
with the appropriate British Standard in a laboratory acceptable to
the Engineer and two copies of each test certificate shall be
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS‘ Page 17.38

supplied to the Engineer. The frequency of testing shall be as set

out in the British Standard. ‘

In addition to the testing requirements described above, the

Contractor shall carry out additional tests as instructed by the
Engineer.

Any reinforcement which does not comply with the Specification shall
be removed from Site.

1729 STORAGE OF REINFORCEMENT

All reinforcement _shall be delivered to Site either in straight

lengths or cut and bent. No reinforcement shall be accepted in long
lengths which have been transported bent over double.

Any reinforcement which is likely to remain in storage for a long

period shall be protected from the weather so as to avoid corrosion
d
and pitting. All reinforcement which has become corroded or pitted
I
to an extent which, in the opinion of the Engineer, will affect its
properties shall either be removed from Site or may be tested for
compliance with the appropriate British Standard in accordance with
Clause 1728 of this Specification at the Contactor's expense. wnmwrr

1730 BENDING REINFORCEMENT

f;“*_.'_«'.-_«' :‘-':.‘-,'«.'
Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, bending and Cutting shall
comply with E8 4466.
-.'‘,‘-'\ _-'.,a
:53
3
The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the accuracy of any bar
bending schedules supplied and shall be responsible for cutting,
bending, and fixing the reinforcement in accordance with the Drawings.

Bars shall be bent cold by the application of slow steady pressure.

At temperatures below 5°C the rate of bending shall be reduced if
necessary to prevent fracture of the steel.

After bending, bars shall‘be securely tied together in bundles or

groups and legibly labelled as set out in ES 4466.

Reinforcement shall be thoroughly cleaned and all dirt, scale, loose

rust, oil and other contaminants removed before it is placed in the
Works.

1731 FIXING REINFORCEMENT

Reinforcement shall be securely fixed in position within a

dimensional tolerance of 20 mm din any direct ion parallel to a
concrete face and within a tolerance of 5 mm at r ight angles to a
face, provided that the cover is not thereby decreased below the
minimum shown on the Drawings, or if not shown shall be not less than
25mm or the diameter of the bar, whichever is the greater, Cover on
distribution steel shall not be less than 15mm or the diameter of the
bar whichever is the greatera
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

'
concnsrs womés Page 17.39

Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, all intersecting bars shall

,_. _. _,. .HI
either be tied together with 1.6 mm diameter soft annealed iron wire
and the ends of the wire turned into the body of the concrete, OI‘

shall be secured with a wire clip of a type agreed by the Engineer.

Spacer blocks shall be used for ensuring that the correct cover is
maintained on the reinforcement. Blocks shall be as small as
practicable and of a shape agreed by the Engineer. They shall be
made of mortar mixed in the proportions of one part of cement to two
parts of sand. Wires cast into the block for tying in to the
reinforcement shall be l.6 mm diameter soft annealed iron.

Alternatively another type of spacer block may be used subject to the

- .
Engineer's agreement.

Reinforcement shall be rigidly fixed so that no movement can occur

during concrete placing. Any fixings made to the formwork shall not
be within the space to be occupied by the concrete being currently
placed.

No splices shall be made in the reinforcement except where shown on

the Drawings or agreed by the Engineer. Splice lengths shall be ES
shown on the Drawings.

Reinforcement shall not be welded except where required by t}1e

Contract or agreed by the Engineer. If welding is employed, the
procedures shall be as set out in B5 2640 for gas welding or B5 5135
for metal arc welding. Full strength butt welds shall only be used
for steel complying with BS 4449, and if used on high yield deformed
bars complying with E5 4449 the permissible stresses in the vicinity
of the weld shall be reduced to those applicable to plain bars
Complying with that specification. »

Mechanical splices shall not be used unless the Engineer agrees

otherwise.

The Contractor shall ensure that reinforcement left exposed in the

Works shall not suffer distortion, displacement or other damage.
when it is necessary to bend; protruding reinforcement aside
temporarily, the radius of the bend shall not be less than four times
the bar diameter for mild steel bars or six times the bar diameter
for high yield bars. Such bends shall be carefully straightened
before concrete placing continues,-without leaving residual kinks D11’

damaging the concrete round them. In no circumstances will heating

and bending of high yield_bars be permitted.

Bars complying with BS 4461 or other high tensile bars shall not be

bent after nlacing in the Works.

Before concrete is placed in any section of the Works which includes

reinforcement, the reinforcement shall be completely clean and free
from all contamination including concrete which may have been
deposited on it from previous operations.
 STANDARD SPECIFICAWON FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

concern: wonrs Page 17 . 4 0

i732 PRECAST CONCRETE

Precast concrete covers all precast units for use in the works,
whether instructed under the Contract or proposed by the Contractor,
and includes prestressed units where applicable. Additional gs
requirements for prestressed units are set out in Section 18 of .this
Specification.

1733 FORMWORK FOR PRECAST UNITS

Moulds for precast "units shall comply with the general requirements
of Clauses 1721 to 1729. '

Moulds shall be so constructed that they do not suffer distortion or

dimensional_ changes during use and are tight against loss of cement
grout or fines from the concrete.

Moulds shall be set up on firm foundations _so that no settlement

"
7°
occurs under the weight of the fresh concrete. 7*er .
3?:K‘-,_;
*\-J-.

Moulds ‘shall be constructed so that units may be removed from them

without sustaining any damage. - , ,. i

gs
Release agents used for demoulding shall not stain the concrete or
affect its properties in any way.

1734 REINFORCEMENT FOR PRECAST UNITS

Reinforcement in precast units shall comply with the requirement of

gm
Clauses 1728 to 1731. when preformed cages are used the cages shall
be made up on jigs to ensure dimensional accuracy and shall be
v.-. -.
carefully supported within the mould in such a way that they cannot _'4,,'I;.
_._.

move when concrete is placed. Reinforcement complying with BS 4449 **_4;- ,J_._
-

may be tack welded where bars cross to provide rigidity in the cage
r
but reinforcement complying with BS 4461 shall not be welded. »

r~
'J"a?§;'.‘_'H:r' '1

Cover to main reinforcement shall be as shown on the Drawings,&or if

not shown shall be not less than 25 mm or the diameter of the bar, .:'r.

whichever is the greater» Cover on distribution steel shall not be

less than 15 mm or the diameter of the bar whichever is the greater. ._r.'.<:£'!"

:'.-1
Bars shall be spaced so that the minimum clear distance between them
is the maximum nominal aggregate size plus five millimeters but in {—',¢,7.-'?:.'v',:

any case not less than the diamter of the bars.

Bars may be placed in pairs provided that there are no laps in the
paired lengthen

1735 CASTING OF UNITS

Concrete for s.orecast units shall comply with Clauses 1703 to 1?09
using the class of concrete specified on the Drawings.
 STANDARD SPECIFIC/1\TiON FOR ROAD AND BFHDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17.41

they shall comply with BS

If lightweight aggregates are specified,
3797.

The area in which, units are cast shall be adequately protected from
the weather so that the process is not affected by" rain, sun or
drying winds.

1736 CURING PRECAST UNITS

Requirements for curing shall be generally as set out in Clause 1710.

The Contractor shall ensure that units do not suffer any loss of
days
moisture or sudden changes ofv temperature for at least four
after casting. If a water spray is used for curing, the water shall
be at a temperature within 5°C of the temperature of the unit being
cured.

the
If the Contractor proposes curing at elevated temperatures,
shall
method shall be subject to the agreement of the Engineer and
evenly
include means whereby units are heated and subsequently cooled
without-sudden changes of temperature.

1737 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES OF PRECAST UNITS

shown on the
Units shall be accurately formed to the dimensions
unless closer
Drawings and within the tolerances set out in BSCP 110
on the
tolerances are called for in the Special Specification or
Drawings

1738 SURFACE FINISH OF PRECAST UNITS

to Class F3 .as
The formed faces of precast units shall be finished
on
set out in Clause 1725 unless another class of finish is specified
the Drawings.W

Class UF2 unless another class of

Free faces shall be finished to
finish is specified on the Drawings.

In cases where _a special finish is requried a trial panel shall be

after approval by the Engineer
constructed by the Contractor which
of casting and
shall be kept available for inspection at the place
production units shall thereafter match the approved pattern.

other units or to
Those parts of the unit which are to be joined to
in situ concrete shall be brushed with a stiff brush before the
Alternatively, if the concrete has been
concrete has fully hardened.
allowed to harden, the surfaces shall be roughened by sand blasting
or the use of a needle gun»

71739 HANDL;NG AND STORAGE OF PRECAST UNITS

handled in a manner which will not cause

Precast units shall he
damage of any kind and shall be stored on a hard impermeable base;
 it
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

concnms wears Page 17.42

its
Prestressed.units and large precast normally reinforced units shall I
be handled and stored so that no stresses shall be induced in excess 3
,£,a:_~,_.

of those which they will incur in their final positions in the works
unless they have been designed to resist such stresses. fig
'
use-1
Units shall be provided with adequate lifting holes or loops, placed Em
in the locations shown on the Drawings or agreed by the Engineer and
they shall be lifted only by such holes or loops. Where it is not E§
%f
possible to provide holes or loops, suitable sling positions shall be *3
_indicated in paint on the units. 3

Units shall be marked indelibly with the reference number and date of §§
casting and shall be stacked on suitable, packers which will not
damage the concrete or stain the surfaces. Not more than two packers g
shall be placed under each unit and these shall be located either at g-
the positions of the permanent support points or in positions such “"
that the induced stresses in the unit will be a minimum.
g
R
1740 TESTING PRECAST UNITS

. Precast units shall be capable of safely sustaining the loads which

they have been designed to carry. The Contractor shall subject units
,-.
Selected by the Engineer to load tests simulating the working
conditions. Details of such tests shall be agreed between the
Engineer and the Contractor.

In the case of units subject to bending loads the test piece shall be
supported at full span and a loading equivalent to 1.25 times the sum z__
of the live and dead loads which were assumed in the design shall be Qt
maintained for one hour without the appearance of any signs of
distress. The recovery one hour after the removal of load shall be
not less than 75 per Cent of the full load deflection.

If the unit fails to meet the above requirements, further tests shall
be carried out on two more units. If either of these fail the whole
batch of units will be rejected.

If the Engineer so requires, a test to destruction shall also be

carried out which on units subject to bending shall be as follows:~

The units shall be supported at full span and a load applied in &
increments instructed by the Engineer up to 95 per cent of the §‘
T
designed ultimate load. This load shall be held for 15 minutes
without failure of the unit. The deflection at the and of this
period shall be not more than 1/40th of the span. The load shall
then be further increased until failure occursg

If the unit fails to sustain the required load fo the prescribed

period or if the deflection exceeds the specified amount, the
Engineer may order two further tests, and if either of these fail,
the batch of units which they represent may be rejecteda
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS Page 17.43

1741 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

(a) Item : Concrete

Unit : m3 of each class

Concrete shall be measured by the cubic metre of each class

calculated from the dimensions given. on the Drawings or
instructed by the Engineer; No deduction shall be made in the
measurement for:

(i) bolt holes, pockets, box outs and cast in components

provided that the volume of each is less than 0.15 cubic
metres;

(ii) mortar beds, fillets, drips, rebates, _recesses, grooves,

chamfers and the like of'lO0 mm total width or less;

(iii) reinforcement

The rate for concrete shall include for the cost of:—

(i) Provison and transport of cement aggregates and water.

(ii) admixtures and workability agents including submission vof

details unless specified.

(iii) batching, mixing, transporting, placing, compacting and

curing.

(iv) class UFI finish.

.J

(V) laying ‘to sloping surfaces not exceeding 150 from the
horizontal and to falls.

(vi) formwork to blinding concrete.

(vii) placing and compacting against excavatedg surfaces where

required including any additional concrete to fill
overbreak or working space.

(viii) complying with the requirements of Clauses 1701 to 1718

'
inclusive and Clause 1727 of this Specificatlon.

(b) Item : Blinding concrete

Unit 2 m3

Blinding concrete shall be measured by the cubic metre

calculated as the yroduct of the plan area of the foundation as
shown on the Drawings and the instructed thickness. No
deduction shall be made for openings provided that the area of
each is less than Ogé square metres. Blinding concrete 0ve“""
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

hard material shall be measured as the volume used provided that

E
the maximum thickness of 150mm allowed for ~overbreak is not
exceeded.
§§
M

The rate for blinding concrete shall include all costs

for E
itemised in Clause 1741(a} of this Specification.
fifi
(C) Item : No fines concrete,
‘ E
Unit : m3

No fines concrete shall be be measured by the cubic metre if

calculated "from the dimensions given on the Drawings or gfi
instructed by the Engineer. ‘
E
The rate for no fines concrete shall include all
for costs g
stated in Clause l74l(a) of this Specification.
_
(d) Item : Unformed surface finishes 1'
gg
Unit _: m2 of each class of finish
.;
11
2 i
Unformed surface finishes shall be measured by the square
metre $5
from the dimensions given on the Drawings or instructed
by the
Engineer.
3

The rate for concrete in Clause 1741 ah

(a), (b) and (c) shall
include for class UPI finish.

The rate for unformed surface finishes shall include a;

for the
cost of complying with Clause 1713 of this Specification.

(e) Item : Formwork for formed surface finishes

§%

Unit : m2‘of formwork for each class of finish for each range
of inclinations. g
§
a
Except as stated below, formwork shall be measured by the square
metre of formkwork actually in Contact with the finished fl
face of
the concrete" No deduction shall be made in the measurement for is
openings, pipes, ducts and the like, provided that
the area of
each is less than 0.50 square metres. Unless otherwise stated,.
if the volume or area of concrete has not been 5
deducted when §_5
measuring the concrete in accordance with Clauses 1741
(a), (b)
and (C), formwork to form or box out the void shall not be
measured.

Formwork less than 300 mm high to edges of slabs shall be

measured by the linear metre in accordance with Clause l741{f}
of this Specification.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS. Page 17.45

Inclined formwork shall be measured in accordance with the

following classification:

(i) Horizontal; 85 to 90° inclination from vertical

(ii) sloping; 10 to 85° inclination from vertical

(iii) Battered; O to 10° inclination from vertical

(iv) Vertical; 0°

C?) Slopingl upper surfaces inclined at more than 15° from the
horizontal.

Formwork required for blinding concrete, to form -construction

joints and shear keys for future concrete and other construction
surfaces shall not be measured and the vcosts shall Ibe included
‘
in the rates for other work.

Formwork to contraction and expansion joints shall be measured

by the square metre on one face only. The rates shall include
for the costs stated below and for forming recesses for sealant
and channels for grout.

The rates for formwork shall inlude for the cost of submission

of details, providing and transporting all materials for

formwork and falsework, erection -including provision of
supports, fillets and chamfers 75 mm and less in width, bolts,
ties, fixings, cutting to waste, drilling or notching the
formwork for reinforcement where required, working around pipes,
conduits and waterstops, temporary openings, cleaning,
ducts,
dressing, stripping, filling bolt holes and any remdial work
1710, 1717,1718, 1719 and
and for complying with Clauses l708,
1721 to 1727 inclusive of this Specificaiton.

Item : Formwork to edges of slabs

Unit : m of each class of finish

Formwork less‘ than 300 mm high to edges of slabs shall be

measured by the linear metre.

stated in Clause 1741 (c)

The rate shall include for the costs
of this Specification.

(g) Item 2 Waterstogs

Unit : m of each type

Waterstops shall be measured by the metre run of each type,

The rate for waterstops shall include for the provision

jointing, any sealants required at the face of the
installation,

. _-—. v—-._ .
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE WORKS
?agE 17-:46

concrete and for placing and compacting concrete around the

water stop.

(h) Item : Mortar

Unit : m2

Mortar used for bedding baseplates and

the like shall be
measured by the square metre as the area
of the base plate at
the specified nominal thickness of bedding.

Mortar used in filling bolts pockets and the like shall not
be
measured separately and-the costs
shall be included in the rates
for the bolts._

The rates for mortar shall include for the cost

of providing and
placing the mortar and of complying
with the requirements of
Clauses 1714 and 1720 of this Specification.

_(i) Item Admixtures, workability and hardening agents

Unit : as specified in the Special Specification

Where required by the Special Specification admixtures,

workability and hardening agents will be
measured and paid for
in accordance with the special Specification.

(j) Item : Reinforcement

Unit : tonne of each type for each range of diameters.

Reinforcement shall be measured Separately for each of the

following ranges.

(i) of diameter equal to or less than 16 mm.

(ii) of diameter greater than 16 mm.

Steel fabric reinforcement shall be measured in accordance with

Clause l?dl (R) of this Specification.

Steel plain and deformed bar reinforcement

shall be measured by
the tonne and shall be the calculated weight of the steel
required including splice lengths shown
on the Drawings. No
allowance shall be made in the measurement
for rolling margin or
cutting waste. The densisty of steel shall be taken as 7850
Kllogrammes per cubic metre.

The rates for reinforcement shall include for the

cost of
providing, cutting to length, splice lengths additional to
those
shown on the Drawings, laps, bending, hooking,
waste incurred by
cutting, cleaning, spacer blocks, provision and fixing of chairs
or other types of supports, welding, fixing the reinforcement in

[,. ». .- .-
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

CONCRETE womcs Page 17.47

position including the provision of wire or other material for

supporting and tying the reinforcement in place, bending
reinforcement aside temporarily and straightening, placiné and
compacting concrete around reinforcement and‘ for complying with
the requirements of Clause 1728 to 1731 inclusive of ‘this
Specification.

(k) ‘Item : Fabric reinforcement

Unit : m2 of each type

Steel fabric reinforcement shall be measured by the square metre

and shall be the calculated area excluding any allowance for
‘laps.

The rate for steel fabric reinforcement shall included for the
"costs stated in Clause 1741 (j) of this Specification.-.

(1) Item : Precast Units

Unit : no. of each type

Precat units shall be measured by the number of each type

instructed unless otherwise specified in the Special
Specification.

The rate for precast units shall include for the cost of all the
materials, forming, and placing units, complying with the
requirements of Clauses 1732 to 1740 inclusive and with the
relevant Clauses of the Special Specification.

No separate measurement or payment will- he made for formwork

reinforcement or prestressing tendons to precast units.
 SECTEQN 18
PRESERESSED CGNCRETE WORKS
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

PRESTRESSED CONCRETE WORKS Page l8.l

1801 SCOPE OF SECTION

This section covers the materials, equipment and methods required for
carrying out prestressing operations on in—situ and precast
concrete. The production of in—situ concrete and precast concrete
units is covered by Section 17 of this Specification.

1802 GENERAL

Prestressed concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with the

recommendations of BSCP 110, ‘The Structural Use of Concrete, Part I,
Design, Materials and workmanship‘, except that where the
requirements of the Code differ from this Specification, this
Specification shall take precedence.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details of the plant
he proposes to use for the installation of prestressing tendons, the
materials he proposes to use and the arrangements he proposes to
make. He shall also submit evidence of his competence to undertake
the installation.

1803 DUCTING

All ducting shall be sufficiently strong to withstand without damage

the stresses to which it may be subjected during’ handling and after
being fixed in position. The ducting shall completely protect the
wires or cables from Contact with concrete and the Contractor shall
ensure that the wires or cables are completely free in the duct
before tensioning. Any ducting which has been damaged during
transportation to the Site or which in the opinion of the Engineer is
inadequate for its purpose shall not be used in the Works. Ducting
shall be free from loose material, oil coatings, or other
contaminants which may affect the bond with the concrete.

The stools, saddles or supports for the ducts shall be of rigid

construction and of such form that they remain securely in position
and maintain the correct profile of the cables until the concrete
placed round them has hardened.

Vents shall be incorporated into each duct at high and low points, at
each end and at intermediate points not more than five metres apart.
Blocking of vents during concreting operations shall be prevented.

1804 ANCHORAGES

Anchorages shall be the correct type for the prestressing system used
and shall be rigidly fixed true to alignment in the formwork so that
they cannot move during concreting operations. The anchorages shall
he_prcvided with means for injecting grout into the ducts,
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

PRESTRESSED CONCRETE WORKS Page 18.2

"T
mews“
fl
If the anchorage is fixed after the main body of the concrete has
been placed, it shall be carefully bedded so that it is bearing W Rw;_
evenly and is in intimate contact with the concrete.

1805 PRESTRESSING TENDONS

Tendons used in prestressed concrete shall comply with the British

Standards indicated on the Drawings. The Standards include the
following:

BS 5896 for high tensile steel wire

BS 4486 for high tensile alloy steel bars

BS 5896 for 7 wire steel strand

BS 4757 for 19 wire steel strand

Tendons shall be stored on site under cover and protected from the
weather. The storage area shall have a hard impermeable floor.
Tendons shall be stored either straight or in the coils in which they
left the factory.

Tendons shall not be allowed to become affected by excessive rusting

or by pitting of the surface by corrosion. If pitting is present the
Contractor shall replace the affected tendons by new ones.

l806 INSTALLATION OF PRESTRESSING TENDONS

Prestressing steel shall be cut by rotating disc or blade cutters or

by such method as is recommended by the manufacturer.

Before being installed, prestressing tendons shall be thoroughly

cleaned of mill scale, mortar, oil, paint, dust, grease, or any other
deleterious matter whatsoever.

The prestressing steel (or where the tendons are accommodated in

ducts, the sheaths, ducting or formers) shall be accurately placed in
the positions shown on the Drawings and shall be firmly secured in
position. Wooden supports shall not be used nor shall the sheaths,
ducting or formers be placed on_previous layers of fresh concrete or
be adjusted during the placing of concrete.

The prestressing steel, sheaths, ducting or formers shall be so

placed and secured that twisting, kinking or excessive deformation
during and subsequent to concreting is eliminated and the
prestressing tendons when finally stressed shall conform accurately
to the_profiies shown on the Drawings. Ducts and formers Shall not
be placed with small radius bends which would induce excessive
frictional restraint on the wires or strands.

Where many individual wires or strands are placed in a duct, adequate

11 he made to keep the wires separated by means of
suitable seat. sf approved design, construction and Spacing"
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

PRESTRESSED -CONCRETE WORKS Page 18.3

l807 JACKS FOR PRESTRESSING

Jacks for tensioning tendons shall be hydraulically operated and

capable of providing a slow uniform increase of load. Each jack
shall be equipped with an appropriate pressure gauge capable of
indicating the hydraulic fluid. pressure at all times during the
stressing operation. A certified calibration chart showing the
relationship between gauge readings and force on the ram for both
ascending and descending ram movements shall be made available on the
Site by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall maintain tensioning jacks in good working order

and shall ensure true and accurate readings by regular testing,
calibration and servicing.

1808 TENSIONING OPERATIONS

Prestressing force, whether Partial or full, shall not be transferred

to the concrete until cube crushing tests have indicated that the
concrete has attained the strength specified on the Drawings.

Stressing of the tendons shall be carried out with due care by

experienced.workmen under competent supervision and adequate steps
shall be taken to safeguard against injury.

Full and accurate shall be kept of all stressing operations

records
and two copies of the records, which shall include wedging—device
slip measurements during anchoring, loads and extensions, shall be
submitted to the Engineer on the day following each stressing
operation. The accuracy of the measurement of cable extensions,
shall be plus or minus two per centu The Engineer may order the
Contractor to cease any or all stressing operations where proper
records are not being kept or where the operations are not being
properly or‘ safely carried out and the Contractor shall take
immediate steps to ensure that the work is carried .out to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

Where the required tensions or extensions are not obtained the

tendons shall be re-tensioned as directed by the Engineer. If on
re~stressing, the extensions are not achieved, the Engineer may at
his discretion reject the tendons involveda i

1809 POST—TENSIONING

When a post—tensioning system is employed, all cable ducts, excluding

extractable formers shall be thoroughly flushed -with water
immediately after concreting and before the concrete has hardened“

Ducts produced by extractable formers shall be flushed out as soon as

the concrete h a s hardened»
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

PRESTRESSED CONCRETE WORKS Page 18.4

Where anchorage of ~the prestressing tendons is by friction grips or

wedges and where no other slipping limitation is specified, the slip
of each individual prestressing steel element, both during tensioning
and after anchoring shall not exceed seven millimetres. Tendons
failing to satisfy this limitation shall be re—stressed.
'5.‘?"'“
The sequence of stressing shall be as shown on the Drawings and shall
be such that lateral eccentricity of stress on any member is reduced
to a minimum.
gm.
After stressing and anchoring, no tendon shall be cut, bent or in any
way deformed until the bonding grout or concrete is at least seven
days old. ‘r7'Q2":
?Fl4'7\"l3Wn

Where tendons are cut back, the exposed ends of the tendons and . u:.

anchorages shall be heavily coated with an approved bituminous ,-‘,.';v. _.,

compound or epoxy resin to prevent corrosion of the prestressing

steel.

%m_~.- u.-.2.
1810 PRE—TENSIONING

Pre—tensioning tendons shall be either crimped or indented wire, -um.

F
ribbed or deformed alloy bar or strand complying with the ftp»-as

requirements of Clause 1805 of this Specification.

-"-_'\{Jw

The tendons shall be anchored in such a manner that during concreting gr?-v:.=

they will not suffer any loss of tension whatsoever due to anchorage
yield or deficiency or due to yielding of the prestressing_ beds. No
variation in the tension of the tendons shall be made subsequent to
the commencement of concreting until transfer of prestressing force
to the concrete is authorised.

At the appropriate the prestressing force shall be transferred

time
to the concrete uniformly by means of slow de—tensioning. The
tendons shall not be de—tensioned individually and the de~tensioning
operation shall be applied to all the tendons simultaneously. Where
a set of tendons passes through several units, the units shall be
free to move longitudinally during de~tensioning.

The prestressing steel shall be cut off flush with the end of the
member and the exposed ends of the prestressing steel and anchorages
shall be heavily coated with an approved bituminous compound.or with
an epoxy resin to prevent corrosion of the prestressing steel.

BONDING AND GROUTING

Postwtensioned tendons shall after stressing and anchoring be

intimately bonded to the adjacent concrete by means of concrete or,
in the case of internal cables, by colloidal cement grout.

The properties of grout, the equipment and the grouting procedure

shall be as_follows:~
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

PRESTRESSED CONCRETE WORKS Page l8..5

(a) The grout shall be a colloidal mix of water and ordinary

Portland cement in the ratio of between U.§U to 1.00 and 0.45 to
1.00 by weight.

(b) Admixtures of an approved type may be authorised by the Engineer

for incorporation in the grout if tests have shown that their
use improves the properties of the grout, for example by
increasing the workability, by reducing
' bleeding, by entraining
air or by expanding grout.

Admixtures shall not contain chlorides or nitrates. when an

expanding agent is used the total unrestrained expansion shall
not exceed 10 per cent.

(c) The mixing equipment shall be of a type capable of producing

grout of uniform consistency with fully dispersed cement
particles and shall incorporate suitable sieves for retaining
lumps or other solid ingredients. After water has been added to
the mixer, the cement shall be added. Admixtures if used, shall
be added during the latter half of the mixing time. High speed
mixing shall be carried out continuously for between two and
four minutes in a close clearance high speed centrifugal mixer.

Subsequent to mixing and prior to injection .the grout shall be

continuously agitated by slow machine mixing. Any grout that
has been left standing for more than 30 minutes shall be
discarded and the container thoroughly washed before further
mixing is carried out.

(d) A positive displacement pump shall be used for injecting the

capable of developing a pressure of at least one N/mmz.
grout,
The pump shall be fitted with a pressure gauge and an effective
against build—up of excessive pressure. The pump
control
suction intake shall be kept below the surface level of the
grout at all times during grouting operations.

shall be grouted in their ducts as soon as

(e) All tendons
practicable after the stressing operation. Each duct shall be
flushing with clean
cleaned by blowing through compressed air,
water and surplus water shall be removed by compressed air or
other approved means. Openings at the anchorages other than
grout injection nozzle openings shall be plugged with mortar or
other suitable material. Subsequent to the hardening of the
be
plugging material the nozzle of the injection pipe shall
be
firmly connected to the duct in such a way that air cannot
sucked in. Injection shall be commenced from one end only and
its progress monitored by the appearance of grout at successive
vent holes. When the consistency of the grout emerging from a
vent is equal to that of the grout being injected, that went
shall be plugged.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

PRESTRESSED _CONCRETE WORKS Page 18.6

Injection shall continue until grout of a consistency equal to

that being injected appears at ‘the far end of the duct. The
injection nozzle shall then be withdrawn and all holes
and vents
plugged to prevent loss of grout.

As far as possible all ducts in any one member shall be grouted

in immediate succession commencing with the lowest duct.

Grouting shall not be carried out when the air temperature is

2°C or lower.

The temperature of newly grouted cable ducts shall be prevented

from falling below 2°C for a minimum period of seven days.

l8l2 CAMBER OF PRESTRESSED PRECAST BEAMS

Where the predicted camber due to stressing precast beams is

indicated on the Drawings, the actual camber shall not exceed the
stated figure'by more than 50 per cent.
a
Emmi
Where a number of similar units are to be placed side by side, the
Variation in camber between adjacent units shall not be more than 6.0
mm for units up to 4.5 metres in length, or more than 9.0 mm win
%
for
longer units.

1813 REJECTION OF PRESTRESSED WORK

fiwimw

Any structural element in which the prestressing tendons, the "751

anchorages, or any part whatsoever of the prestressed element has -.'r.-.

been damaged, or in which excessive loss of prestress has occurred or J,vJ;=-,~,-

in which the grouting has not been satisfactorily carried out, or

which is deficient in any other manner, will be rejected and the
Contractor shall rectify the deficiency to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, failing which the element shall be replaced by the
Contractor.

l8l4 TRANSPORT AND STORAGE OF PRESTRESSED UNITS

\.

Unless otherwise .agreed, prestressed concrete_ units shall be

transported in the same attitudes and under the -same support
conditions as they will have in the final structure.

All handling, transporting and storing of prestressed units shall be

to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and the Contractor shall ensure
that all methods of handling, transporting and storing prestressed
units shall be such as to prevent over-stressing or any other damage.

i815 JOINTING PRECAST UNZTS

Where a load bearing structure is to be formed by tensioning together

a string of precast units, the joints between the units shall be
formed as shown on the Drawings by one of the methods set out below
so as to achieve a unitorm transfer of stress across the joint,
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FORROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

PRESTRESSED ‘CONCRETE WORKS Page 18.7

(a) Joints shall be set between 20 and 30 mm wide and shall be

packed solid with mortar mixed in the proportion of one part of
cement to 1.5 parts of sand with water sufficient only to allow
the mix to cohere when squeezed in the hand. The mortar shall
be rammed thoroughly into the joint, using formwork to retain it
where necessary.

(b). Where joints are shown _on the Drawings as 75 mm or wider, they
shall be filled with concrete of a class similar to that used in
the units or as shown on the Drawings. The concrete shall be
compacted by vibration and retained by formwork.

(c) Procedure when using resin adhesives for jointing will depend on
the configuration .of the joint and the type of adhesive to be
used and will be subject to the Engineer's agreement.

Irrespective of the method of joint filling employed, the joint shall

be completely filled with material having a uniform consistency. The
joint faces shall be flat without any high spots which might cause
local stress concentrations.

Ducts for tendons shall be truly aligned between units and the duct
joints in the gap between units shall be carefully formed and
impervious to the entry of grout from the joint filling operation.

1816 TESTING PRESTRESSED WORK

If instructed by the Engineer, load testing of Structures containing

prestressed units shall be Carried out generally as set out in BSCP
110.

Precast units shall be tested in accordance with Section l7' of this

Specification and in addition, where a test of the prestressing is
required, the unit shall be subjected for a period of five minutes to
a load which is calculated to result in a bending tensile stress in
the bottom surface equal to one tenth of the nominal strength of the
concrete. The prestressing shall be deemed to be effective if no
cracking is observed during the test. g .

Details of all testing procedures shall be agreed between the

Engineer and the Contractor before testing is commenced;

1817 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Prestressed concrete shall be measured in accordance with Clause l74l

of this Specification and tendons for prestressing shall be measured
under this Section.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION I

PRESTRESSED' CONCRETE WORKS Page 3.8.8

I
(a) Item : Prestressing tendons if

Unit : no. of each type for each length i

Prestressing tendons in in-situ concrete shall be measured by

s
E
the number required of each type for each length. No separate
measurement or payment will be made for V
prestressing tendons in I
precast concrete. - 1
EI
The rates for tendons shall include for the cost of complying
with the requirements of Section 18 of this Specification.
H”
(b) Item : Load test a

Unit : no. for each type of unit

Load tests on prestressed units shall be by the number

instructed to be carried out.
firs,-.; .~:-.r 4

The rates for load tests on prestressed units shall include for
the cost of provision of the unit, testing and complying with
the requirements of Clause l8l6 of this Specification. If any §|I,: -('-', ‘.ufl'4
units fails to meet the requirements of the Specification the
unit and the load test shall not be measured or paid for. '
5

15.‘
\l‘»_‘.

fi
 SECTJON 19
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK Page 19.1

1901 GENERAL

The fabrication and erection of all structural steelwork shall be

under the constant supervision of competent and experienced
personnel. All workmanship shall be in accordance with the best
modern workshop practice and only skilled workers trained and
experienced in steel fabrication and erection shall be employed.

1902 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

The supply, fabrication and erection of structural steelwork shall be

in accordance with the provisions of the relevant clauses of the
following British Standards:—

BS 4 Structural steel sections.

BS 4848 Hot rolled structural steel sections.

BS 153 Steel girder bridges, Part 1 ~ Materials and workmanship

and Part 2 — Weighing, shipping and erection.
'
es‘ 4360 Weldable structural steels.‘
BS 4395 High strength friction grip bolts and associated
Parts 1&2 nuts and washers for structural engineering (metric
series).

BS 4604 The use of high strength friction grip bolts in structural

steelwork.

BS 2708 Unified black square and hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
(UNC and UNF threads).

BS 4190 ISO metric black hexagon bolts screws and

nuts.

BS 3692 I.S.O. metric precision hexagon bolt screws and nuts.

W BS 4320 Metal washers for general engineering purposes.

BS 5135: Metal arc welding of carbon and manganese steels.

BS 638 Arc welding plant, equipment and accessories.%

BS 639 Covered electrodes for the manual metal—arc welding of

mild steel and medium tensile steel.

BS 4870 Approval testing of welding procedures, Part 1

Fusion welding of steel.

BS 4873 Approval testing of welders working to approved welding

procedures, Part l-Fusion welding of steel;

BS 5493 Protective coating of iron and steel structures against

corrosion.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK ‘ Page 19.2

1903 MATERIALS 9
All_ structural steel shall be to the Grade as defined on the Drawings
and shall comply with the requirements of BS 4360 in every respect.

Mill certificates shall be supplied to the Engineer in duplicate to ‘Q

confirm the mechanical and chemical properties.

Steel for headed stud shear connectors shall have a minimum yield §§
stress of 385 N/mmz and a minimum tensile strength of 495 N/mm2. ’

1904 sroaasa or MATERIALS

Structural steelwork whether‘ plain or fabricated shall be stored
above ground on platforms, skids or other supports and in such a way
as to prevent pools of water forming on the ground. It shall be kept
free from dirt, grease and other deleterious material and shall be
protected as far as is practicable from corrosion. The time limits
for outside storage of unpainted or primed steelwork shall be as g;
detailed in the Special Specification.

1905 FABRICATION

Fabrication shall generally be in accordance with the requirements of

BS l53 Part 1, workmanship. Rolled material, before being processed,
must be straight or flat. Straightening or flattening, where r.
required and where permitted by the Engineer, shall be accomplished
by a process not harmful to the material.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval two sets
of shop drawings with calculations as appropriate and the Contractor
shall not commence fabrication until written approval has been given
by the Engineer. The Engineer will give comment or approval within
28 days after receipt of the shop drawings and calculations. Such
approval shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his
responsibilities under the Contract.

Following approval of the shop drawings the Contractor shall supply

to the Engineer a further four copies of each drawing for the use of p
i
the Engineer and the Employer.

The components of various members of the structure shall be placed in

jigs of approved design and all welding shall be carried out in
accordance with Clause 1907. Every precaution shall be taken to
prevent distortion.

1906 PREPARATION OF EDGES AND ENDS OF PLATES

Edges and ends shall be either:

(a) left as rolled, sawn, machine cut, machine flame cut;

(b) hand flame out and ground to a smooth profile; or i

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

STRUCTURAL STEELWORI Page l9.3

(C) for stiffeners and gussets not exceeding l2 mm thick, sheared

and subsequently ground to a smooth profile.

Where ends of stiffeners are required to be fitted, they shall be

ground to be in contact with the flanges over 80% of the area of
stiffener.

After shearing or flame cutting of plates, one of the following

—-iv—~. m_ requirements shall be satisfied:
-.

(a) the hardness of the cut edge shall not exceed 350 HV 30 of BS
427;

(b) the out edge is incorporated in a weld:

(c) the material from the edge is removed by machining or grinding

to demonstrate that the hardness of the edge is less than 350 HV
30 of BS 427;

(d) the edge is softened by an approved heat treatment and is shown

to be free from cracks by crack detection procedures; or

(e) the material is Grade 43 steel and is not greater than 40 mm

thick and the edge preparation is by machine flame cutting.

1907 WELDING

Welding will be permitted only where shown on the Drawings, and the
agreed shop drawings.

All welding operations shall comply with the requirements of BS 5135.

The details of all welds shall be arranged to achieve the most

satisfactory welding procedure. The details of the welding procedure
shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval and no welding
may commence without the prior approval of the Engineer. No
departure from an approved procedure may be made without the prior
approval of the Engineeri Welding procedure details to be submitted
to the Engineer shall include the following:~

Welding position.
Fusion face preparation.
Pre~heating.
Electrode make, type and size and mechanical properties.
Number and arrangement of runs.
Welding current.
Arc energy,
Method of back gouging and sealing”
"Proposed methods of quality control and testing of welds. L.
V‘,-

I
sm___I
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION . g

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK Page 19.4

Welding shall be carried out under the supervision of an experienced E

:
and competent supervisor in accordance with the requirements of BS
5135. The welders shall be tested in accordance with the
requirements of BS 4871 prior to the commencement of the work.

The Contractor shall carry out trials of the welding procedure in

accordance with the requirements of BS 4870.

Welding plant and accessories shall comply with the requirements of an

BS 638 and shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. The welding plant shall be capable of maintaining at
1'-(Inn
the weld the current and voltage specified by the manufacturer and in
F‘;-I.-av.»
accordance with the welding procedure.

The electrodes shall be selected with regard to the quality of the a

material to be welded and the optimum performance with the welding
procedures and shall comply with the requirements of BS 639. All
electrodes shall be stored in their original packets in a dry and g
preferably heated place adequately protected from the weather and L,
shall be handled with care and in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions. Electrodes and fluxes that show signs of moisture,
damage or deterioration shall not be used.

Welds shall be subject to non—destructive examination and testing as Q“

specified in the Special Specification.

Welded fabrications and .weld quality shall comply with the

requirements of the American Welding Society Specification ANSI/AWS El
DI.l.8l., Section 9, PART D

Stud shear connectors shall be subjected to the following tests:— 5

(a) The fixing of studs after being welded in position "shall be

tested by striking the side of the head of the stud with a 2 kg
hammer and shall pass such test if no part of the weld shows
fracture or is dislodged thereby.

(b) Any stud selected by the Engineer shall be capable of being bent f
by striking the side of the head of the stud with a 6 kg hammer *
until its head is displaced laterally a distance of
approximately 0.25_ times the height of the stud from its ,
original position.’ The stud weld shall not show any signs of E
cracking or lack of fusion. Satisfactory studs shall not be 3
bent back again.

Studs whose welds have failed the tests given in (a) and/or (b)
above shall be replaced according to a _procedure to be agreed
-, »:.:."-1 3.‘-. _. “:3-... .:.,,D.:,-...
'N’_L.=...{.L 2,118 r.4i£g_i.i.ie.L...'..o
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK Page 19.5

l908 BOLTING

(a) Black Bolts

All mild steel bolts, washers and nuts shall be of the grade as
specified on the Drawings and shall comply with the requirements
of BS 4190, BS 2708 or BS 3692 as appropriate.

‘All holes shall be drilled or drilled small and reamed and shall
be clean out without torn or ragged edges. The holes shall be
perpendicular to the member and not more than 2mm larger than
the nominal diameter of the bolt.

In all cases where the full bearing area of the bolt is to be

developed the bolt shall be provided with a steel washer under
the nut to avoid any threaded portion of the bolt being within
the parts bolted together. Tapered washers of the correct angle
of taper shall be provided under all bolt heads and nuts bearing
on bevelled surfaces.

High Strength Friction Grip (HSFG) Bolts

HSFG boltsshall comply with the requirements of BS 4395 Parts l

and 2 and shall be used in accordance with the provisions of BS
4604 Parts 1 and 2.

HSFG bolts, nuts and washers shall be supplied cadmium plated to

BS 3382 to a thickness of 5 microns and shall be stamped or
otherwise marked with a suitable and permanent mark and the
Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Engineer to
the proposed marks before commencement of the work.

Each HSFG bolt shall be supplied complete with its nut screwed
on. Washers may be supplied on the bolt or separately and bolts
and washers shall be packed in the manufacturers works and
delivered to site in waterproof containers and stored under
cover in these containers until required for use.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK Page 19 . 6

The method of. tightening HSFG bolts shall be either the part
turn method, the~torque control method or with the use of load
indicating washers in accordance with the following:—

HSFG bolts complying with Permissible methods of 2

standard tightening. §
‘ %

BS 4604 Part 1 and 2 1) Part turn for bolts M16

and above. .

|.=; .;-h.-:w:«:
':'.
L

2) Torque control.

3) Load indicating washers. 3}

BS 4604 Part 2 1) Torque control. gi

Higher Grade (Parallel Shank) 2) Load indicating washers

Whatever method of tightening is adopted, the Contractor shall

supply to the Engineer full details of the procedures to be
adopted which shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS
4604, together with details of the tools and equipment he will
be using at Site and the tests to be carried out to determine
the load/torque/shank tension characteristics of the tools,
bolts and the load indicating washers. No bolting shall
commence until the Contractor has carried out sufficient site
tests to confirm the load/torque/shank tension characteristics
of the tools and bolts.

In the case of torque control tightening methods, calibration of 5

the equipment shall be carried out daily before commencing
bolting operations in accordance with the requirements of BS
4604.

Where load indicating washers are used they shall be of a type

approved by the Engineer and used in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. The general requirements of BS
4604 shall apply to the assembly and use of HSFG bolts with load
indicating washers including check testing to confirm the
minimum shank tension is being achieved.

HSFG bolts that have been slackened off after final tightening
by any method shall be removed, discarded and replaced“
* -mp”-“

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK Page l9.7

1909 TRANSPORTATION HANDLING AND ERECTION

Erection shall be in accordance with. BS 153 Part 2, Weighing,

Shipping and Erection. Structural steel shall be handled with due
care at all times and in such a manner as not to cause damage to the
steelwork or its protective coatings.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval two sets
of drawings and calculations and details showing his proposed methods
for transport, handling and erection of structural steelwork
including all plant, temporary supports and _bracings required to
ensure stability and safety during erection. The Contractor shall
erect the steelwork, remove the temporary supports and do all the
work required to complete the Works in accordance with the Drawings
and this Specification. The work shall be carried out in such a
manner as will not injure, overstress or disfigure any part of the
structure or the foundations and any part injured, overstressed or
disfigured shall be removed and replaced or rectified to comply with
the requirements of this Specification.

The steelwork shall be temporarily erected at the fabrication works

and be subject to inspection by the Engineer before being dispatched
to Site.

Drift pins will be allowed only for bringing together the several
parts of the structure, and shall not be used in such a way as to
distort the work or enlarge the bolt holes.

Bolts in site connections shall not be finally tightened until

sufficient of the structure is properly plumbed, aligned and levelled
and no subsequent straining into position will be allowed. Finally
all bolts and connections shall be systematically checked and
tightened.

1910 SURFACE PREPARATION OF STEELWORK

Surface preparation of steelwork shall be by blast cleaning in

accordance with the requirements of BS 4232, Second Quality. The
maximum amplitude of the blast cleaned surface shall not exceed 0.1mm.

Manual cleaning of structural steelwork including mechanical wire

brushing, chipping hammers, vibratory needle guns and the like shall
not be permitted except for small parts and then only with the prior
written permission of the Engineer.

Surfaces shall be painted with the specified primer paint within four
hours of having been blast cleaned.

As soon as the first underocat has dried, a further strlpe coat of

paint shall be applied by brush 3 all edges, corners, crevices,
exposed parts of bolts, rivet h ads and weldso The stripe coat
should have the same specification as the undercoat but be a
contras ing shade,
 _.—-1nr47l?f'.6?)>.:

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK Page 19.8

Painted surfaces shall be cleaned of dust immediately prior to the

application of further paint. All loose paint, dirt and grit shall
be removed and areas contaminated with oil and grease shall be seem
cleaned with emulsion cleaners followed by washing and rinsing with
clean fresh water and allowed to dry thoroughly before paint is
applied. sees

In the case of painted steelwork where the interfaces of HSFG bolts

are bare steel, the primer coat shall be taken between 10mm and 20mm
fiawm
inside the perimeter of the joint area.

Where paints are to be applied to parent surfaces before making of a

joint they shall be stepped back at 30mm intervals commencing at 80mm fifififi
from welded joints and 10m from the perimeter of all other joints.

All bolted joints shall be sealed against the ingress of water. Gaps fleas
at joints shall be plugged with an approved filler and the perimeter
of all joints shall be sealed with subsequent coats of paint.

All joints, welds and surfaces affected by welding shall receive the
peas
same protective system as applied to the parent surfaces.

Within l4 days of a joint being made and accepted by the Engineer,

the parent material, exposed parts of bolts, nuts and washers, weld
,
and affected areas shall be prepared and painted. 4.:
av:-.
-—
r-5.0;.- .-_. -,.
l9ll PAINTING

All paint used in the Works shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.

All paint shall be supplied from the store to the painters ready for
application. Any addition of thinners must be made in the store
under the supervision of the Engineer and only as permitted by the
manufacturer’s data sheet. All the requirements of the
manufacturer's data sheet shall be strictly complied with.
a
Paint shall be applied dhly to surfaces which have been prepared and
cleaned in accordance with the requirements of Clause l9lO.

The use of rollers shall not be permitted for the application of

‘
paint.

Paint shall not be applied under any of the following conditions:—

(a) when the_ambient temperature is less than 4°C.

{b} when the relative humidity is greater than 90%.

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

STRUCTURAL‘ STEELWORK Page 19.9

(c) During fog, rain or mist.

(d) When any moisture is present or likely to condense on the‘steel.

Each coat of paint shall be free from surface defects.

Successive coats of paint shall have different shades for

identification.

The Contractor shall ensure that the proposed application rates shall
enable the specified minimum dry film thickness to be achieved. If
the total dry film thickness is less than the specified minimum, an
extra finishing coat or coats shall be applied until the specified
dry film thickness is obtained.

1912 PAINT SYSTEMS

The paintsystem to be used on structural steel work shall be as

specified in the Special Specification.

1913 DAMAGED SURFACES

Any areas of paint which have been damaged following application

shall be cleaned down to bare metal and the full specified painting
system shall be re~app1ied. The new paint shall overlap the existing
paint by at least 50mm all round the affected area.

Galvanised surfaces damaged shall be repaired either by the use of

low melting point zinc alloy repair rods or powders made specifically
for this purpose or by the use of at least two coats of a good
quality zinc rich paint to BS 4652.

l9l4 MEASUREMNT AND PAYMNT

fa) Item Structural Steelwork

Unit : tonne

-Structural steelwork shall be measured bytthe tonhe and shall be

the weight. calculated from the approved shop drawings excluding
bolts, welds, washers and all other fixingsi-required. No
deduction shall be made in the measurement Ifor splay cuts,
notches and holes providing that the area of each is less than
0.1 square metres. No allowances shall be made in the
measurement for rolling margin or cutting to waste. The density
of steel shall be taken as 7850 kilogrammes per cubic metre.

The rate for structural steelwork shall include for the cost of
the following:—

(i) Design, submission of orders, fabrication drawings,

details, calculations and certificates»
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK Page 19.10

(ii) Provision of all structural steelwork, materials, bolts,

nuts, washers, welding rods, and all other fixings:
fabrication, including drilling, machining and welding;
testing of welds and welders.

(iii) Temporary erection at the fabrication work for inspection

by the Engineer. A

(iv) surface preparation, painting with specified

paint system.

(v) Inspection, and submission of test reports

and certificates.

(vi) Marking, handling, packing, transporting and

storage.
(vii) Erection, bolting, welding, including 3;
temporary bracings,
guys, and craneage.
g.f,=_ ':,-.';-',

(viii) Complying with all the requirements of Section 19 of this E?

I',i'
Specification. ~.x:-
.39]
N :_ .
t-2;:
 SECHGN 20
WW FURNETURE
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

ROAD FURNITURE Page 20.1

. _,

,—. _. .

2001 ROAD RESERVE BOUNDARY POSTS

Where road reserve boundary posts are instructed by the Engineer,

they shall be erected as early as possible after, the commencement of
the Contract, on the boundary of the Road Reserve at intervals of
250m or as otherwise instructed by the Engineer or shown on the
Drawings, but not closer than 5 m to any reference point or peg.

Where required by the Special Specification, the Contractor shall

immediately establish a reference point on top of each post
cowordinated to an accuracy of idmm. A schedule of the road reserve
boundary posts together with their chainage, offset and co—ordinates
shall be submitted to the Engineer before construction on adjacent
sections of the Works, begins.

Road reserve boundary posts shall be constructed of concrete Class

20/20 reinforced with 10 mm diameter high yield deformed bars as
shown on the Drawings. The top 0.7 m of the posts shall be painted
with two coats of white lead paint and the location and offset of the
post shall be painted onto the front face in black.

The Contractor shall excavate for the posts in any material, embed
the posts in concrete Class 15/20 all round and under the butt and
backfill the remaining excavation, all as shown on the Drawings.

The posts shall be maintained in position and kept in a clean and

legible state until the issue of the Certificate of Completion.

2002 FENCING AND GATES

Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer the

Contractor shall provide and erect fences and gates including
excavation and backfilling and complying with the details shown on
the Drawings.

All timber for fencing and gates shall be well seasoned hardwood to
the approval of the Engineer. After all cutting and drilling is
complete the timber shall be impregnated by the vacuum/pressure
process with an approved preservative such as 'Tanalith‘ in
accordance with BS 4072 or as specified in the Special Specification
to achieve an anticipated average dry salt retention of 12kg/m3.
Prior to delivery of materials to Site samples are to be submitted by
the Contractor to the Engineer for testing to ensure that the correct
treatment has been applied.

2003 EDGE MARKER POSTS

Edge marker posts shall be constructed and erected in accordance with

the Drawingsi They shall be set out at the outer edge of the
shoulder with their tops at a constant height above the edge of the
carriageway at such locations as the Engineer instructs. The
Contractor shall excavate in any material, provide and place edge
marker posts, backfill and remove surplus material to Spmilo
 _

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

,_,.,,_n,,‘,
A.‘

' Page 20.2

ROAD FURNITURE

. g;. ;.,;.-_\_. , ,.,?

Markers shall be erected and painted with two coats of an approved

white paint before the road is opened to traffic and shall be kept
/c.‘-'.'¢:_=r.1p:nfi

clean until the issue of the Certificate of Completion.

2004 PERMANENT ROAD SIGNS

-’~I:\v_'-I!F£:1'.I'a1

All permanent road signs shall comply with the requirements of the
"Manual for Traffic Signs in Kenya", Part II.
,-g".r:pfi.'.Q!w

.Road signs shall be obtained from a manufacturer approved by the

Engineer and before placing any order for the manufacture of the road
signs, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer two copies of the
11'.FZ’j«‘w-2.3?
following information:-

(a) Name of the firm from which he proposes to obtain the signs
together with place of manufacture or fabrication.

'.'
(b) A description of the items to be supplied with manufacturer's
specification ‘together with a description of quality, grade, r :-' .-=:r.;-

weight and strength.

.
§_-.-

(C) Manufacturer's ‘type’ test certificates, or recent test results 3*

I‘.
\.I.‘
carried out on similar items.

(d) A sample sign, post and fittings which sample shall be stored on
site for the Engineer. -

All colours on the permanent road signs, with the exception of black
and grey, shall be reflectorized, unless otherwise specified or
instructed by the Engineer. The reflective sheeting shall comply
with the requirements given in Section 2 of this Specification, and
shall be applied by mechanical vacuum~heat application method to the
approval of the Engineer. The sign plate shall be covered by clear
lacquer of a‘ make recommended by the manufacturer of the reflective
material.

Permanent road signs shall comply with the requirements of BS 873

Parts ,2, 6 and 7 in respect of quality including the premtreatment,
preparation and protective coatings for the frame, posts and
fittings. Unless directed otherwise posts, frames, fittings and the
backs of signs shall be painted with a finish coat of grey. Bolts
and nuts shall be spot welded after erection to prevent theft, and a
grey epoxy paint shall be applied to all areas so treated.

Finished sign plates (with sign face attached) shall be clearly and
durably marked on the back, with the following information:~

(al The number of the British Standard to which they have been
manufactured.

{b} The name, trade mark or other means of identification of the

manufacturer or vendor.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FORIROA-D AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

ROAD FURNITURE Page 20.3

(c) The classification of any retro—reflective material used in the

manufacture of the sign face.

(d) The month and year of assembly.

These markings shall be in characters legible at a normal reading

distance such that the total area of the marking does not exceed 30
cm2 and shall be sufficiently durable to last the expected life of
the sign plate to which it is applied.

The manufacturer or Vendor shall make available the following

information:~

(a) Instructions on the assembly and erection of the sign.

(b) Details of any limitations in location or usage.

(c) _Instructions on the operation and maintenance of the sign.

The Contractor shall excavate in any material for the foundation of

the road-signs, provide and place concrete Class 15/20, embeded all
round and under the posts and backfill the remaining excavation all
as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. Foundations
for signs of areas over 5m2 shall not be covered up until they have
been approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall cut back trees and vegetation to permit

visibility and shall not permit material to be dumped so as to
obscure the signs.

All signs shall be maintained in a clear and legible condition and

shall be washed down when necessary.

2005 ROAD MARKING

(a) General

Road marking shall comply with the requirements of the "Manual

for Traffic Signs in Kenya", Part I. Markings shall be white or
yellow as instructed by the Engineer.

Paint and hot applied thermoplastic material shall comply with

Section 2 of this Specification.

Ballotini beads shall be mixed with the paint before application

or applied to the painted areas immediately after painting, as
instructed by the Engineer.

Lines and letters shall be painted on the road as shown on the

flrawings or as instructed by the Engineer. The setting out of
lines shall be made by the Contractor. Words and symbols shall
be set out by the Contractor, by means of stencils and shall be
in accordance with drawings provided.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
,=r.‘\"

ROAD FURNITURE Page 20.4

(b) Application

a.v*_ _,.g5u~s-.zmn .'-_'-_-'7',-".‘3

Prior to application of paints, the road‘ surface to be marked
shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material and shall be
completely dry. Where instructed by the Engineer a tack coat
shall be used to increase adhesion.

The application of paint shall preferably be done by a

purpose-made machine, but the Engineer may accept brushing. All
application instructions issued by the paint manufacturer shall
be strictly adhered to. The application of hot-applied
thermoplastic material shall be carried out by a purpose-made
machine.

The spraying rate for cold paint will vary with the roughness of
the surface, but shall be such as to give continuous coverage
and a minimum dry film thickness of 0.125 mm. If specified in
the Special Specification, reflectorized paint as detailed in
Section 2 of this Specification shall be used.

Hot—applied thermoplastic materials shall have a minimum

thickness of 3 mm and a maximum of 6 mm. Application shall be
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

(c) Traffic control

Warning signs shall be erected when painting is in progress and

traffic shall not be allowed to pass over wet paint. Any
painting disfigured by traffic, or any painting not complying
with the Specification shall be effaced and repainted.

2006 GUARDRAILS

Dimensions and erection details for guardrails are shown on the

Drawings.

(a) Materials

'(i) Beams

Beams for guardrails shall be Class A with a Type 1 finish

in accordance .with AASHTO M180 and shall be obtained from a
manufacturer approved by the Engineer.

(ii) Posts

Posts shall be constructed of concrete Class 20/15

ieinforced with 16 mm diameter mild Ste.el bars all as shown
on the Drawings“
STANDARD SPEClFlCAllON FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

ROAD FURNITURE Page 20 . 5

(iii) Blocks

Blocks shall be made from well seasoned red cedar free from
loose knots and shakes other than surface splits not
exceeding 3 mm depth.

(b) Erection

~Guardrail shall be erected in accordance with the manufacturer's

published instructions and the Drawings. Where there is any.
conflict the Drawings shall take precedence;

Approximate locations for guardrail are shown on the Drawings

but precise details will be issued to the Contractor by the
Engineer as construction proceeds but generally not before the
completion of the earthworks in the particular section.

The Contractor shall excavate for the posts in any material and
provide the guardrail with all posts, blocks, nuts, washers and
shall repair galvanising, backfill around the posts and remove
surplus material to spoil.

When erection is complete and the section has been approved by

the Engineer the nuts shall be spot welded to the guardrail or
to the bolt to stop their removal.

Galvanised coating damaged by spot welding or cutting shall be

renovated either by the use of low melting point zinc alloy
repair rods or powders made specifically for this purpose, or by
the use of_at least two coats of good quality zincwrich paint to
BS 4652.

(c) Tolerances

Guardrail shall be erected at the instructed or detailed offsets

and levels from the pavement centreline and shall be correct
within a tolerance of + 20 mm in line and level. _In addition
adjacent plates shall‘ not vary in line or grade by more than
5 mm measured from a line extended from one plate to jthe end of
the adjacent_ plate; where the guardrail is on a hprizontal or
vertical curve the calculated deflection shall be added to this
—
tolerance.

(d) Additional guardrail

Where specified or instructed by Engineer the Contractor shall

arrange for an additional length of guardrail including all
posts, blocks, nuts, washers and bolts, to be stored at the
Contractor’s camp. This material shall become the property of
the Employer who shall remove it from the Contractor’s camp
before the end of the Period of Maintenance.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
.¥.-g1‘ar--E..ras

ROAD FURNITURE Page 20.6 i

2007 KERBS

Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer the

Contractor shall excavate in any material, provide and place concrete
for the haunch, backfill, remove surplus material to spoil, provide,
lay and joint precast concrete kerbs, edgings and quadrants .

Precast concrete kerbs, edgings and quadrants shall comply with "the
requirements of BS 340, and shall be laid in accordance with the game
Drawings.

The concrete for the haunch shall be concrete Class 15/40 which shall
fieee
comply with the requirements of Section 17 of this Specification.

For radii of 12 m or less, kerbs of appropriate radius shall be used.

Any 1.0 m length of kerb, edging or quadrant deviating more than 3 mm

from line and level at either end shall be made good at the g H
Contractor's expense by lifting and re—laying. -§,§

KILOMETRE MARKER POSTS

the QT
Where shown on the Drawings or directed. by the Engineer
Contractor shall excavate in any material, provide and place concrete W
embeded all round and under the posts, backfill, remove surplus §
material to spoil, provide and.place kilometre marker posts. ‘dc

’ The sign on kilometre marker posts shall be painted black with white
lettering and the posts shall be painted white and be constructed in gg.
"'1-"0?-2w
accordance with the Drawings.

Concrete for backfill to kilometre marker posts shall be Class 15/20

complying with the requirements of Section 17 of this Specification.

2009 RUMBLE series

Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the h Engineer the
Contractor shall provide, place, trim, shape and compact to line and
level rumble strips to the inside of bends of radius less than 1000 m
and at junctions or where directed by the Engineer.

Rumble strips shall be constructed in asphaltic concrete or Concrete

Class 20/10 to the dimensions shown on the Drawings or directed by 3~'
the Engineer.

2010 TREES

Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer the

Contractor shall excavate for, backfill with topsoil, provide, plant,
water and protect trees within the Road Reserve, around borrow pits
and quarries and elsewhere as directed by the Engineer;

The excavation for each tree shall be 003 m deep and 0a3 m diameter
backfilled with topsoil provided by the Contractor»
 STANDARD SPECIFECATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

ROAD FURNITURE Page 20. 7

The tree seedlings shall be obtained by the Contractor from the

District Forest Officer of the Forest Department of the Ministry of
Environment and Natural Resources closest to the Works or, if not
available, from an alternative source approved by the Engineer.

The tree seedlings shall be of indigenous varieties recommended by

the District Forest Officer and the method of transportation,
' each tree seedling shall be as
handling, planting and caring. for
directed by the District Forest Officer.

The Contractor shall water daily each tree seedling for the first
four weeks after planting. For a further 12 weeks the Contractor
shall water each tree seedling as necessary to ensure that each
becomes firmly established.

Should any tree uprooted or die during the first 16

be damaged,
weeks after planting the Contractor shall immediately replace the
tree with a new tree seedling and shall water and care for it as
prescribed in this Clause 2010. Should the replacement tree be
damaged, uprooted or die within the first 16 weeks after planting the
same conditions shall apply and the Contractor shall continue to
replace trees and water and care for them.until the end of the Period
of Maintenance.
'-

_. ,_, Any protection works that the Contractor ‘deems necessary to protect
.,

trees from damage, uprooting or death shall be provided at the

Contractor's expense.

All trees instructed by the Engineer shall be planted by the

Contractor prior to the issuing of a Completion Certificate for the
whole Works or any part thereof.

2011 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Posts

The rates for road reserve boundary posts, fence posts, gates, edge
marker‘ posts and kilometre marker posts shall include for the costs
of providing all materials and fittings, fabrication, transportation,
excavation in‘ any material, concrete foundations where specified,
provision of transport, and compaction of selected backfill, disposal
of surplus material, and complying with the requirements of Clauses
2001, 2002, 2003 and 2008 of this Specification as appropriate.

(a) Item : Road reserve boundary posts

Unit 2 no.

Road reserve boundary shall be measured by the number

'1 ‘A.-..

instructed.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION I=OR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
ROAD FURNITURE Page 20.8

(b) Item : Fencing - _ ' fie;

. ;.E
I ‘lac
Unit : m

Fences shall be measured by the metre calculated.as the length

Ainstructed to be erected. ‘

(c) Item : Gates I

E
Unit : no.

Gates shall be measured by the number instructed. O

(d) Item : Edge marker posts

Unit : no. ' %

Edge marker posts shall be measured by the number instructed. I §”§

. A
3
¢
(e) Item : Kilometre marker posts

Unit. : no. ffii

‘E
Kilometre marker posts shall be measured by the number fi
instructed.
§fl
Permanent Road Signs

The rates for permanent road signs shall include for the costs of g
providing all materials including posts and :5
fittings, fabrication,
transportation, excavation in any material, installation, concrete 3. E
foundations, selected backfill and disposal of surplus material and
for complying with Clause 2004 of this Specification.

(i) Item : Warning signs

Unit : no. of each size

'4.

Warning signs. shall be measured by the number of each size

instructed.

(g) Item : Priority, orohibitory and mandatory signs ii

i!;
Unit : no. of each size

Priority, prohibitory and.mandatory signs shall be measured by § i

the number of each size instructed.

(hi Item : Standard informatory signs

Unit : no. of each size

Standard informatory signs shall be measured by the number of , -3

instructed.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
.;- ». ,_u-. I

ROAD FURNITURE Page 20.9

-_—=. ._ ,. n._

(i) Item : Non—standard informatory signs

Unit : no. of each range of sizes.

Non~standard informatory signs shall be measured by the number

of each size in each of the following ranges:-

(i) Less than lmz.

(ii)_Equal or more than lmz but less than 2m2.

(iii) Equal or more than 2m2 but less than Smzi

(iv) Equal or more than 5m2.

(j) Item : Road marking in yellow or white paint

Unit : m2

Road markings in yellow or white paint shall be measured in

square metres calculated as the plan area instructed to be
painted.

The rate for road marking in yellow or white paint shall include
for the cost of setting out, providing paint and painting to any
symbol or line of any width and of complying with the
requirements of Clause 2005 of this Specification.

(k) Item : Guardrail

Unit : m

Guardrail shall be measured by the metre as the length of

guardrail instructed.

The rate for guardrail shall include for the cost of provision
and transport of all materials, excavation, concrete posts,
erection, backfilling and complying with the requirements of
Clause 2006 of this Specification.

(1) item : Provide additional guardrail

Unit : m

Provide additional guardrail shall be measured by the metre as

the length of guardrail instructed to be provided and stored by
the Engineer for the use of the Employer.

The rate for provide additional guardrail shall include for the
cost of provision transport and storage of all materials and
complying with the requirements
I of Clause 2006 of this
Specification.
 $

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

ROAD FURNITURE Page 20.10

(m) Item Kerbs to radii equal to or more than 1.0 m

Emma
Unit : m of each range of radius

Kerbs shall be measured separately for each of the following T-919'-G

ranges of radii:~ we

(i) Straight. _
(ii) Radius 12m ~ 6m.
(iii) Radius Sm - lm.

The rate for kerbs shall include for the cost of provision of
all materials, excavation in any material, laying and jointing
kerbs, concrete bedding and haunching, backfill, removal of
surplus material and complying with the requirements of Clause
2007 of this Specification.

(n) Item Quadrants of radius less than 1.0 m

fi:f:".".’:r"'. S-',“Jj
Unit : no.

Quadrants of less than 1.0 m radius shall be measured by the

;I,§I_,.'4«;'.:7."“.r ¢.*»r"=:!.
number instructed.

The rate for quadrants shall include for the cost of provision
of all materials, excavation in any material, laying and
jointing quadrants, concrete bedding and haunching, backfill,
removal of surplus material and complying with the requirements
of Clause 2007 of this Specification.

(0) Item Rumble strips

Unit : m

Rumble strips shall be measured by the metre of rumble strip

instructed.

The rate for rumble strips shall include for the cost of
provision and transport of all materials and complying with the
requirements of Clause 2009 of this Specification.

(P) Item : Trees

Unit : no»

Trees shall be measured by the number instructed,

The rate for trees shall include for the cost of the provision
and transport of seedling, excavation, provision and backfill
with topsoil, watering and replacement of seedlings as
necessary, and complying with the requirements of Clause 2010 of
this Specificationa
 SECTEON 21
MBCELLANEOUS BRIDGEWORKS
 . ,-. -.

-—r>._.».=

STANDARD SPECIHCATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCT|ON

MISCELLANEOUS BRIDGE WORKS Page 21.1

2101 WATERPROOFING TO STRUCTURES

Waterproofing shall be applied to all structural concrete surfaces in

Contact with fill material or cut soil surfaces and wherever detailed
on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.

Prior to application the surface shall be clean and completely free

from damp, moisture, dust, membrane curing compounds, projecting
tying wire, nails and the like.

Waterproofing materials shall consist of either bitumen emulsion or

cut~back bitumen or bitumen/rubber latex emulsion.

Bitumen emulsion shall comply with the requirements of BS 434, Type

A160. Two coats shall be applied, the first coat at a minimum rate
of 0.55 litres per square metre. The first coat shall be allowed to
dry before the second coat is applied.

Cut~back bitumen_ shall be type MCBO as described in Section 2 of this

Specification. Two coats shall be applied, the application rates
being as described for bitumen emulsion. The first coat shall be
allowed to dry before the second is applied.

Bitumen/rubber latex emulsion shall contain a minimum of 10% rubber.

Two coats shall be applied, the application rates being as described
for bitumen emulsion. The second coat shall be applied when the
first coat is touch dry. Bitumen/rubber latex emulsion shall not be
applied during wet weather and should rain occur and cause damage
before the rubber has dried the membrane shall be repaired or
replaced as approved by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.

Where concrete is _cast against existing ground the waterproofing

membrane shall be single layer polythene sheet 0.jSmm thick laid with
minimum laps between sheets of 150 mm.

2102 BRIDGE BEARINGS

Bearings shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with the

details shown on the Drawings or as described in the Special
Specification.

The levels shown on the Drawings are the soffit levels of the beams
or deck at the bearing locations. Bearings shall be accurately set
in their correct positions and shall be maintained in position during
beam installation and deck construction. Bearing surfaces of
bearings shall be kept free from contamination and after the deck has
been completed, each bearing and the area around it shall be left
clean»

All bearings shall be indelibly marked with the appropriate Type

Numbers and.shall be supplied complete with dowels and dowel caps,
nuts, bolts, adhesives, mortars and the like as required.
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUé'_.;-?"IOE"-_
,?
. MISCELLANEOUS‘ BRIDGE WORKS J Page’ 21.2

Should the Contractor Qish to use an alternative system to that shaan

on the Drawings he shall provide the Engineer with full details aid
I
-'
3'
.53‘:-f'4
c:3'n'?%

technical specifications of the alternative system and shall sati fy

the Engineer with regard to the suitability of the alternat-ve e
'1.

system. The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of «he as

\l n.‘

Engineer for any alternative or amended type of hearing or bear lg

‘
system.

Bearings shall not be despatched to the site until the te ts

described in the Special Specification have ,been satisfactor ly
completed and the certified results of such tests approvgd by .he
Engineer.

2103 MOVEMENT JOINTS AND SEALANTS

(a) General

The term "movement joint" includes all types of permanent‘ joint

or hinge throat which allow expansion, contraction, shrinkage or
angular rotation to take place.

Movement joints shall be constructed in accordance wiuh the

Drawings and manufacturer's instructions.

The size of the gap shall be compatible with the mean s‘ zture
temperature at the time of installation. This temperate: hall
be determined in accordance with arrangements agreed w- ' the
Engineer after which the Engineer will instruct the size the
gap.

The position of all bolts cast into concrete and holes _led
in plates shall be accurately determined from templates.

(b) Prevention of damage

During the placing and hardening of concrete or mort»= der

expansion joint components, relative movement shall be p ,ted
between them and the supports to which they are being fixe:

When one half of the joint is being set, the other half si xe
completely free from longitudinal restraint. In par ‘:w 1r
where strongbacks or templates are used to locate the two :s
- ,
of a joint, they shall not be fixed simultaneously to both

shall be cl ean and free from rust. as

shall he provided and maintained to protect all expansion
from vehicular loading“ Vehicles shall cross the joints
means of the ramps until the Engi; permits their removal
'-‘l~.'€JK|u.-r

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

MISCELLANEOUS BRIDGE WORKS Page 21.3

(c) Epoxy mortar nosings

Epoxy mortar nosings shall be formed under the direction of a

competent supervisor experienced in the use of the material.
The work shall be carried out preferably in warm dry weather.
The air temperature around the joints shall be not less than
l0°C which shall be achieved artificially if necessary.

Concrete surfaces to which the nosings are applied shall be dry,

sound and free from laitance. Before application of the priming
coat, loose material and dust shall be removed by" an air jet
tested to ensure that no oil is carried over from the compressor.

Unless otherwise described in the Contract, surfacing shall be

carried across the joint and then cut back to accommodate the
nosing. The cutting shall be done with a diamond saw to give a
clean edge throughout the depth of the material to be removed.
Masking material provided to prevent surfacing materials
adhering to the deck where nosings are to be formed shall be
adequately located to prevent displacement by the paving machine.

A priming coat of unfilled epoxy resin composition shall be well

worked in by brush to all surfaces with which the nosings will
be permanently in contact at a uniform rate of not less than 300
g/m2. The mortar shall then be applied as quickly as possible
while the priming coat is still tacky.

The epoxy mortar shall be acceptable to the Materials Branch of

the Ministry of Transport and Communications. Aggregate shall
be either silica sand, calcined bauxite or other approved
synthetic or natural aggregate of suitable grading. The
particle size distribution shall be that which produces a mortar
with adequate workability and minimum void volume. Aggregate
shall be clean and completely dry.

Whichever type of aggregate is used, the epoxy mortar components

shall be thoroughly mixed in a suitable mechanical mixer. The
sequence, duration and temperature of mixing shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

The mortar shall _be placed in position within the time

recommended by the manufacturer: it shall be well worked against
the primed surfaces and trowelled flush with the adjacent road
surface to form a dense mortar to the profiles described in the
Drawings.

Epoxy mortar shall generally be compacted in courses of

'
thickness not exceeding 50 mm. Where an under ying c
more than 1 hour old it shall, unless otherwise agreed by the
Engineer, be primed with an unfilled epoxy resin pr
before placing the next course.
 :

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

swag

MISCELLANEOUS" BRIDGE WORKS Page 21.4

.v

fin-A

Traffic shall not be permitted to run on the mortar until the

‘
Engineer's agreement has been obtained.

(d) Sealing

5‘3-'.-3:-I
The sealant shall be as specified in the Special Specification
or shown on the Drawings.
'3 ».

A poured sealant shall only be placed when the mean bridge &*,_e‘§"rT'c-°’rsv.»'

temperature is between 100C and 16°C, unless

’
otherwise agreed in
writing by the Engineer.
:.=1’r:i+.-",¢:«5%
VJoints shall be clean and dry before sealing.
=
2104 PIPE HANDRAIL TO BRIDGES
:3-'. -' .-v'.*«‘

Pipe handrails shall be 50 mm galvanised steel piping supported on

galvanised steel posts all made from material complying with and
fabricated to, the requirements of Section 19 of this Specification :7‘-‘.7:
and the Drawings.

The Contractor shall drill or form all holes, provide and fix bolts,
galvanise posts and pipe rails, cut and bend railing at bridge ends,
grout in bolts and pack under base plates with 25 mm cement/sand
mortar and finish off, all in accordance with the Drawings.

2105 GUARDRAILS TO BRIDGES

Guardrails shall be Class A with a Type 1 finish in accordance with

AASHTO M180 and shall be obtained from a manufacturer approved by the
Engineer, and shall be attached to the same post as the handrail in
accordance with the Drawings and the Contractor shall drill all holes
and provide and fix bolts.

Guardrails shall be erected in accordance with the Drawings.

2l06 SURFACING TO BRIDGES L

Surfacing to bridges shall be in accordance with the Special

Specification.

2107 Weepholes

Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer the

Contractor shall cast weepholes into concrete walls. The Contractor
shall orovide and place plastic pipe of the diameter shown on the
Drawings to form weepholes which shall be firmly held in position
during the placing of the concrete and shall be cut flush with the
face of the concrete. A 500mm x 500mm square of 'Terram’ (of weight
280 g/mg) or similar approved fabric shall be placed, central on the
weephole between the concrete wall and the backfill material.
 r9'|-‘ mr¢G.«\'¢<I

STANOARD SPECIHCATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

.—~‘».a¢-ma-.~

MISCELLANEOUS BRIDGE WORKS Page 21.5

"' "',. -. L_" 'ZI.' ‘]_'. . ‘

2108 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

._ Ca) Item : Waterproofing to structures

Unit It m2

Waterproofing to structures shall be measured by the square

metre computed as the area of the structural surface covered by
one or more layers of waterproofing and no deduction shall be
made in the measurement for the area occupied by gratings, or
other openings, provided that the area of each is less than 1
square metre in extent.

The rate for waterproofing to structures shall include ‘for the

cost of providing and placing waterproofing materials and
complying with the requirements of Clause 2l0l of this
Specification.

(13) Item : Bridge bearings

Unit : no. of each type

The rate for bridge bearings shall include for the cost of
providing and installing the bridge bearing and complying with
the requirements of Clause 2l02 of this Specification.

(C) Item : Movement joints and sealants

Unit : as specified in the Special Specification

The rate for movement joints shall include for the cost of
providing and installing the joints and sealant and all costs of
complying with the requirements of the Special Specification.

(d) Item : ‘Pipe handrail and guardrail to bridges

Unit : m

Handrail and. guardrail to bridges shall be measured by the metre

as the instructed length of handrail and guardrail to be erected.

The rate for handrail and guardrail to bridges shall include for
the cost of providing and erecting handrail and guardrail, posts
and fittings and complying with the requirements of Clause 2104
and Clause 2105 of this Specification.

2--. 5'13 \.4 Item : Surfacing to bridges

Unit : as specified in the Special Specification

The rate for surfacing to bridges shall include for the costs of
complying with the requirements of the Special Specification.
 1

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

fifi
MISCELLANEOUS BRIDGE WORKS Page 21.6
V

(f) Item Weephcles

$9?‘
Unit : no. of each diameter
-;
’. E
Weepholes shall be measured by the number instructed by the 69':
"I

Engineer to be placed. we

The rate for weepholes shall include for the cost of providing
and casting the plastic pipe into the concrete, providing and
placing the 'Terram' filter fabric and complying with the
requirements of Clause 2107 of this Specification.
,-.~¢.- ,.—.-

_-»+-—.—_._-. ?

SECHGN 2'5’
MYWGP
 STANJD/\FiI'._) S’PEC§F%CATiON FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE. CONSTRUCTION

DAYWORKS '
Page 2 2., 1

2201 GENERAL

In accordance with Clause 52(4) of the Conditions_ of Contract the

Engineer may instruct that additional or-substituted work be executed
on a daywork basis.

Provisional items are included in the daywork section of the

Bills of
Quantities to cover the payment of plant,_labour and materials for
work executed in accordance with the Engineer's instructions on a
daywork basis by the Contractor or by his sub—contractors.

2202 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

(a) Plant

Payment shall only be made’ for the time each item of plant is
actually working on Daywork instructed by the Engineer. Idle
time, where due soley to the nature of the Daywork or authorised
method of procedure, shall be lpaid for at one half of the
tendered rate. Idle time due to breakdowns, inefficiency or
incompleteness of the plant shall not be paid.

The rates for plant shall include for the costs of the
following:~

(i) Supervision and transport of supervisory staff.

(ii) Transporting or travelling of each item of plant to and

from the place of Dayworkn

(iii) Operators, drivers and turnboys including overtime.

(iv) Electric power, water, fuel, oil, grease and other

consumables and equipment.

(V) Power cables, delivery or suction pipes and fittings, steam

or air hoses and tackle, and all other appurtenances of
whatever nature required for the safe and efficient
operation of the plant.

(vi) Maintenance, spare parts, drill bits and chisel _points and
all costs of repairs.

(vii) Depreciation, insurance, overheads, profits, and any other

'
costs or allowances.

(b) Labour

Payment shall only be made for the time each class of labour is
actually working on Daywork instructed by the Engineer,
STAN DARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

Page 22.2
DAYWORKS

shall include for the cost of the

The rates for labour
following:~

staff.
(i) Supervision and transport of supervisory

allowance to such labour in respect of

(ii) Any special
overtime, bonuses, feeding,- housing, holidays,
subsistence,
to and from the place of Daywork, overhead
transport
camp administration and
charges in respect of recruitment,
welfare and insurances.
'f:"-“*«‘§"“ FE;-f:T"'~“ -em'£?37=:;-r<~—«-.'i%=?EZ1{3.,—-v. ‘r*_we{.:;n_

about the Site, use, maintenance and

(iii) Supply, transport
of small tools used on Daywork, such as picks,
renewal
trowels, hand saws, buckets, trestles, O-'3a':£T‘” "' " '" '
shovels, barrows,
hammers, chisels and all items of a like nature and not
items for constructional
specifically referred to in the
Plant, and protective clothing.

All other costs which the Contractor may incur in the

(iv)
employment of labour including overheads, profit and any
-other costs or allowances.
v-rnu-gm-n .~

(CT Materials

Payment shall only be made for materials instructed by the .vu— -—ay

Dayworks. The net weights, volumes and

Engineer for use on . .-n

accordance with
areas as appropriate verified by the Engineer in
his instructions shall be measured.

the cost of purchase

The rates for materials shall include for
or provision of the material, transport to Site and place of x‘>

insurance, handling, placing, supervision,

Daywork, storage,
overheads, profit and any other costs or allowances.